those under the seventh which is subject to the Moon passeth through Germany the Low Countries and England which said Planets have their Operations or Influences on the Inhabitants dwelling under each of the said Climes So that although the glorious and eternal Luminaries of Heaven have an efficacious operation yet notwithstanding the Disposition of the Earth hath a far greater prevalency seeing that through the various scituation of Hills and Vallies we experimentally find more great and different effects of the Celestial Rays which are also contemporated by the Rivers and Lakes This can be denied by no man that Nature is admirable in her Works sometimes as it were on set purpose deluding the curiosity of Humane wisdom by receding from the ordinary Laws of Causes Who can render a sufficient reason of that which is testified by Mariners concerning the Region of Maliapur in which is seated Calicut an exceeding high Mountains topping the Clouds dividing this Province throughout and ending in a Promontory which is now called Comorium which although it hath the same Altitude of the Pole yet when the Winter rageth and the Waters swell on the one side on the other side the Fields and Towns are schorched with excessive heat and the Sea calm Wherefore this diversity which is discovered in the Climates the scituation of Provinces Contemporation of the Air and Elements do variously discriminate the Constitutions of Men and those Constitutions their Natures for the manners of the Mind follow the temperament and disposition of the Body The Septentrional or Northern People being remote from the Sun and by consequence inhabiting in cold Countries are Sanguine Robust full of Valour and Animosity hence they have alwaies been Victorious and predominant over the Meridional or Southern Nations as the ASSYRIANS over the CHALDEANS the MEDES over the ASSYRIANS the PARTHIANS over the GRECIANS the TVRKS over the ARABIANS the GOTHS over the GERMANS the ROMANS over the AFRICANS and the ENGLISH over the FRENCH They love Freedom and Liberty as those also do which are Mountaineers as the Helvetians Grissons and Cantabrians The Nations proximate to the Sun have their Blood wholly exsiccated by immoderate Heat hence the Inhabitants of those Places are melancholy and profound in the penetrating of the secrets of Nature For all the Northern Nations receive the Mysteries of the Sciences from the AEGYPTIANS and ARABIANS The Provinces which are immediately between both Torrid Zones enjoy a a Benign Heaven so that they Florish in Religion Justice and Prudence The Mutations of Governments the Transmigration and Emission of Colonies Converse Matrimony War and Peace also the Motions of the Celestial Spheres which drive from the Poles and the Zodiack of the Primum Mobile the Heavenly Images on these Inferiour Bodies do change and alter the Habits Manners and also Nature it self If we have recourse unto History we shall find the GERMANS noted of old for lofty Minds and the ITALIANS on the contrary too abject and low which difference now cannot be discerned Nations have Swayed and been Predominate by turns and as long as the Monarchy hath had duration amongst them Vertue hath flourished Arts and Arms have gone hand in hand which afterwards with the Ruine of the Empire hath been smother'd in its Ashes and received Vivification in another place yet notwithstanding these Obstacles every Nation hath certain Propensions and fixed Affections appropriate to every one which will adhere to Forrainers if that they long remain amongst them The Intelligent Reader who desireth a Knowledge in these and other Particulars with a throughout Prospect of the Vtility of COSMOGRAPHY and GEOGRAPHY may consult the Work it self RICHARD BLOME The Contents of the SECTIONS and CHAPTERS GENERAL GEOGRAPHY which may be divided into III. Parts 1. The Absolute Part divided into Five Sections The first Section of things to be foreknown Chap. 1. Of the Precognita's Pag. 1 Ch. 2. Things necessary to Geometry and Trigonometry p. 6 The Second Section explaineth the Affections of the whole Earth Chap. 3. Of the Figure of the Earth p. 11 Chap. 4. Of the Dimension and Magnitude of the same 15 Chap. 5. Of the Motion of the same p. 23 Chap. 6. Of its Place in the System of the World p. 27 Chap. 7. Of its Substance and Constitution p. 30 The Third Section in which the Constitution and Parts of the Earth are explained Chap. 8. Of the division of the Earth by Waters p. 35 Chap. 9. Of Mountains in general p. 40 Chap. 10. Of the difference of Mountains p. 46 Chap. 11. Of Woods Deserts and Mines p. 54 The Fourth Section of Hydrography in which the Waters and their Properties are explained Chap. 12. Of the division of the Ocean throughout the Earth p. 57 Chap. 13. Of the Ocean and its Parts p. 65 Chap. 14. Of the Motions of the Sea especially of the flux and reflux p. 83 Chap. 15. Of Lakes Pools and Marishes p. 102 Chap. 16. Of Rivers p. 108 Chap. 17. Of Mineral Waters Baths Spaws c. p. 130 Chap. 18. Of the mutation of Dry places into Watery and the contrary p. 142 The fifth Section of the Atmosphere and Wind Chap. 19. Of the Atmosphere and Air p. 154 Chap. 20. Of the Winds in general p. 179 Chap. 21. Of the differences of Winds and of them in particular p. 187 2. The Respective Part â—xplaining the Celestial Affections Chap. 22. Of the Celestial Affections in general p. 2â—3 Ch. 23. Of the Latitude of a Place and the Elevation of the Pole p. 207 Chap. 24. Of the division of the Earth into Zones p. 213 Chap. 25. Of the Longitude of the Days and division of the Earth into Climates p. 220 Chap. 26. Of the Light Heat Cold Rains with other Properties of the Zones according to the Season of the Year p. 231 Chap. 27. Of Shadows and the division of the Inhabitants in respect of the Shadow p. 259 Chap. 28. Of the Comparation of the Celestial Affections in divers places where is treated concerning the Antoeci Perioeci and Antipodes p. 269 Chap. 29. Of the diversity of Time in divers Places p. 275 Chap. 30. Of the divers Rising of the Sun and Moon and of the other Appearances p. 280 3. The Comparative Part considering the Affections which do arise from the comparing of one place to another Chap. 31. Of the Longitude of Places p. 291 Chap. 32. Of the Scituation of Places one to another p. 309 Chap. 33. Of the mutual distances of Places p. 335 Chap. 34. Of the visible Horizon p. 342 Chap. 35. Of the Art of Navigation in general and of the Building of Ships p. 344 Chap. 36. Of the Lading or Ballacing of Ships p. 345 Chap. 37. Of the Directory of the Nautick Art in the first part the knowâ—edge of the Distance p. 347 Chap. 38. Thâ—â—â—â—ond part the knowledge of the Quarters p. 348 Chap. 39. The third part of Histiodromia or the Course of a Ship p. 353 Chap. 40. The fourth part of the
place of a Ship in a Voyage p. 361 Lib. 1. c. 2. A Half English foot A Half Dutch and also an old Roman half foot A Half foot of Paris in French And also a half Greek foot A Half foot of Antwerp in Handers A Half Aegyptian foot from Alexandria A Half Babylonian foot mentioned by Historians A Half foot of Venice A Half foot of Toledo in Spaine A Half foot of Vienna in Austria The Proportion of diverse Miles according to theire compaired Length Lib. 1. c. 2. An Indian Mile A Russian Mile A Mile of Cambaja An English Mile A French Mile And allmost an old Arabian League A Holland Mile A Spanish League A German Mile A Swedish Mile THE ABSOLUTE OR COMPLEAT PART OF General Geography BOOK I. SECT I. CHAP. I. Concerning the Precognita's or things known before the handling of the Art it self as the Definition Division Object Properties Principles Order Method Original Excellency and other affections of GEOGRAPHY to be spoken of by way of Preface A Preface to an Art very necessary THE Custom or fashion hath for a long time prevailed that they who compleatly treat of and handle any Art or Science do in the first place declare some things touching the Conditions Method Constitution and other properties of their Doctrine Neither do I think that this is done by them without reason so that it be performed without any Sophistical encroachment seeing that by such like fore-had Instruction the Readers Understanding may before-hand conceive a certain Idea or Platform of the whole Art or Science to be afterwards handled or at least may understand the Argument or Contents thereof and withal may gather thereby how he ought to order himself in the studying the same I therefore shall in this Chapter deliver some few passages concerning the same The Definition of Geography GEOGRAPHY is called a mixt Mathematical Science which teacheth the affections or qualities of the Earth and the parts thereof depending of quantity that is to say the figure place magnitude and other like properties Geography by some but too strictly is taken for the only description and plâ—cing the Countrys of the Earth And on the contrary by others it is extended but too largely to the political description of every Country But these Men are easily excused seeing they do it to retain and stir up the Readers affections who otherwise by a bare account and naked description of those Countrys would be made drowsie and heedless The Division of Geography We will divide Geography into General and Special or Universal and Particular General or Vniversal Geography is that which doth generally consider the Earth and declare its properties without any respect of particular Countrys Special or Particular Geography is that which teacheth the constitution and placing of all single Countrys or every Country by it self And this particular Geography is twofold Particular Geography twofold Chorographical and Topographical General Geography and its parts to wit Chorography and Topography Chorography proposeth the description of any Country having at least a mean magnitude Topography describeth any little tract of Land or place In this Book we will present you with a General Geography which we have distributed into Three parts to wit the Absolute part the Respective part and the Comparative part In the Absolute part we will consider the very Body of the Earth with its parts and proper affections and qualities as figure magnitude motion Lands Seas Rivers c. In the Respective part we will contemplate those properties and accidents which from Celestial causes happen to the Earth And lastly the Comparative part shall contain an explication of those properties which arise from the comparing of divers places of the Earth The Object of Geography The Object of Geography or Subject about which it is employed is the Earth but principally its Superficies and parts The Properties of Geography Those things which deserve to be considered in every Country seem to be of a triple kind to wit Celestial Terrestrial and Human and therefore may be declared in the particular Geography for every Country with the profit of Learners and Readers The Celestial properties of Geography I call those Celestial properties which depend on the apparent motion of the Sun Stars and other Planets and seem to be Eight 1. The elevation of the Pole the distance of the place from the Equator and from the Pole 2. The obliquity or wriness of the daily motion of the Stars above the Horizon of that place 3. The Quantity of the longest and shortest day 4. The Climate and Zone 5. Heat and Cold and the Seasons of the year also Rain Snow Winds and other Meteors for although these things may be referred to Terrestrial properties yet because they have a great affinity with the four Seasons of the Year and motions of the Sun therefore we have marshalled them in the order and rank of Celestials 6. The rising of the Stars their appearance and continuance above the Horizon 7. The Stars passing through the Vertical point of the place 8. The quantity or swiftness of the Motion wherewith according to Copernicus his Hypothesis each one is very hour wheeled about According to Astrologers a Ninth property may be added because they do appoint one of the Twelve Signs of the Zodiack and the peculiar Planet of that Sign to rule and govern every Country But this Doctrine hath ever seemed to me frivolous neither can I perceive any ground for it nevertheless at the end of our Special or Particular Geography we will reckon up this their distribution These may suffice for the Celestial affections or properties I call those Terrestrial properties which are considered in the place of every Country it self of which I shall note Ten. 1. The bounds and circumference of the Country 2 It s Figure 3 It s Magnitude 4 Its Mountains 5 Its Waters as Rivers Springs Bays of the Sea 6 The Woods and Deserts 7 The Fruitfulness and Barrenness as also the kinds of Fruits 8 The Minerals or things dig'd out of the Earth 9 The living Creatures 10 The Longitude of the Place which ought to be added to the first Terrestrial property to wit the Circumference The Humane properties of Geography I make the third kind of Properties which are to be considered in every Country to be Humane which do depend of the Men or Natives and Inhabitants of the Countries of which Humane properties about Ten also may be made 1. The stature of the Natives as to their shape colour length of life Original Meat Drink c. 2 Their Trafficks and Arts in which the Inhabitants are employed 3 Their vertues Vices Learning Wit c. 4 Their Customs in Marriages Christnings Burials c. 5 Their Speech and Language 6 Their State-Government 7 Their Religion and Church-Government 8 Their Cities and most renowned Places 9 Their memorable Histories And10 Their famous Men Artifices and Inventions of the Natives of all Countries
these are most noted which may be divided into four kinds viâ—â— Sandy Ericose Stony and Marish or Boggy Desarts Those that are Ericose have for the most part here and there in many places Woods and Forests are the more useful and easier to be cultivated 1. All the Desarts of Africa are almost Sandy neither is any part of the Earth more pestered with Desarts the greatest are found in Lybia they also encompass all Egypt 2. The Desarts of Arabia are partly Sandy and partly Stony but the most famous is that Sandy Desart in Arabia termed vulgarly the Sandy Sea 3. The Desarts of Tartaria about the Mountain Imaus Also the Desart Belgian about the Moguls where hitherto it hath been though falsly believed that the rich Kingdom of Cathaie is seated 4. The Desarts of Camboia 5. The Desarts of Nova Zembla which are rocky 6. The Desarts of Norway Lapland Sweden and Finmarch 7. All the Desarts of Germany are Ericose they term them Een Heide whence they call the Desart in the Dutchy of Luneburgh 8. The Desarts of America and the like OF Absolute Geography SECT IV. Containing the Hydrography or the description of the Water explained in Six Chapters CHAP. XII Of the division of the Ocean throughout the Earth The division of the Ocean BY reason that we have treated in the precedent Chapters of the division of the parts of the Earth order requireth that we contemplate the division and scituation of the Waters which compose the other part of the Earth and also take a survey of their Properties which do appertain unto Geography In Chapter VII Proposition II. we distributed the Waters into four sorts which are 1. The Ocean 2. Rivers and Fountains of Fresh-waters 3. Lakes and Marishes and 4. Mineral Waters In this Chapter we shall treat of the division of the Ocean Proposition I. The Ocean in a continued tract encompasseth the whole Earth and the Terrestrial parts neither is the Superficies of the same any where altogether interrupted by the Lands interposed but the more large continuity and free congress is only impeded The truth of the Proposition can only be proved by Experience especially from the Circumnavigation of the Earth which hath now for a long while been so often attempted and hapily performed first by the Spaniards under the conduct of Magellan who first found out the Streights then by the English twice viz. under Drake and Cavendish and lastly five times by the Hollanders The opinion of the Ancients concerning the Old World The Ancients nothing doubting of this continuity by reason that they accounted the Old World only for the extant Earth and thought it on every side to be encompassed by the Ocean yea some supposed it to float But when that America was detected which is extended from North to South in a very long tract and impedeth the continuity of the Ocean and moreover the Polary Land North and South then not undeservedly was it doubted concerning it For many supposed and that not without probability that America and the South Continent were conjoyned as many Geographers now think that the Northern America is contiguous to Greenland which two if both true the Ocean could not encompass the whole Earth But in truth Magellan removed the doubt when in the Year 1520 he found out the Streights between America and the South Continent by which it was manifest that the Pacifick Ocean was joyned with the Atlantick What therefore the Ancients imagined from a false Opinion that they knew that we know from infallible Experience The like hapned with Africa for then also the Ancients without any hesitation placed the Ocean without or beyond it and thought Africa to be extended beyond the Equator in a far less space than in truth it is but when the Portugals had sailed the Coast of Africa and had found vast Lands in a long tract beyond the Equator and then also it was questioned whether Africa could be sailed about that they might sail into India that is whether it were encompassed with the Ocean This doubt was removed by Vasques Gamma under whose conduct in Anno 1497. Africa was first sailed about the Promontory of Good Hope being found to be the ultimate bound of the same towards the South which appellation it received from the King of Portugal in Anno 1494 when that Diaz which first related concerning although he passed it not Victuals failing him and the Tempests forcing his Return the storm and raging Ocean of this Promontory and spake much more to the King Proposition II. The difference in the parts of the Ocean which ariseth from the Earth is threefold or the Water of the Ocean may be divided into three kinds which are 1. The particular Ocean or Seas 2. The Bays of the Sea or Ocean and 3. The Streights The Water in the Ocean may be divided into three kinds The word Ocean is taken in a twofold acceptation Sometimes for the whole Ocean or Water which encompasseth the Earth sometimes and that frequently for any part of the large Ocean which adhereth to another part by a large tract and that from on both sides So we say the Atlantick Ocean the German the Ethiopick the Indian and the Chinesan Oceans In this latter signification by use of Speech we sometimes use the word although we sometimes call a part of the entire Ocean the Sea but by reason of the homonymie of the word Mare or Sea which shall be explained by and by the word Ocean is usually used in that sense A Bay A Sinus or Bay of the Sea is said to be a part of the Sea or Water which runneth between two Lands from the Sea or some other Bay until it stop at some Land It is also commonly termed a Sea A Streight A Fretum or Streight is a part of the Ocean or part of a Bay of the Ocean or Sea running between two Lands in a narrow tract and conjoyning of two Seas or conjoyned with the Sea from both extremities by which they Sail from one Sea into another Proposition III. We reckon four principal Oceans Four principal Oceans or great parts of the whole Ocean or Seas in respect of the scituation of the four Continents or Quarters of the Earth Atlantick Ocean 1. The Atlantick Ocean is that part of the Ocean which is scituated between the Occidental Coast of the Old World and the Oriental of the New It is vulgarly termed Mare del Nort or the North Sea but improperly seeing that it extendeth it self beyond the Equator towards the South It is more aptly divided into two parts one from the Equator towards the North the other stretcheth towards the South It hath therefore on the Eastern quarter the Occidental Coast of the Old World and on the Western the Oriental Coast of America Towards the North it conjoyneth with the Hyperboreal or Northern Ocean and towards the South with the Southern Ocean Pacifick Ocean Hyperboreal Ocean
by reason that the Sea water containeth a fixed salt which is a far more weighty body than fresh water And we have shewed that in divers parts of the Sea there is a divers quantity of salt Yet doth it not follow that water is more heavy by how much it is the more salt which doth not augment the gravity but lesseneth it and yet rendreth the water very salt Proposition XIII Salt water doth not so easily freez as fresh or a greater dègree of cold is required to the congelation of Sea water than of fresh Salt water doth not so soon freez as fresh Experience sufficiently sheweth this against the Aristotelians who defend that water is so much the lesser obnoxious to congelation by how much it is the more pure and therefore should more easily congeal as receding more from the elementary water which is false Now the cause is that in the salt it self their is a certain spirit which resisteth congelation and being seperated from the salt admitteth of no congelation from the hardest frost as those that are skilful in Chymistry know For the spirit of salt is a medicament sufficiently known and of frequent use Proposition XIV Why the Ocean is not bigger seeing that it receiveth so many Rivers The cause is 1. That the water returneth to the Sea through subterraneous passages unto the fountains of the Rivers as shall be explicated in the following Chapter 2. Because that many vapours are elevated from the Ocean whereof many being resolved into rain fall into the Ocean and part on the land Proposition XV. Certain parts of the Ocean differ in colour The water in the Ocean in all places not of one and the same colour Experience testifieth that in the Northern places the Sea seemeth of a more black colour in the Torrid Zone of a duskish colour in other places of a blew About certain shoars of new Guinee the Ocean is found of a white colour in some other place of a yellow In Streights the water appeareth to incline to white at the Shoars of Congi not far from Bay a D'Alvaro Gonzales a Rivulet or an Arm is disburthened into the Sea of somewhat a Redish colour taken from a mine of red earth through which it floweth But the Arabian Gulph called therefore the Red Sea by reason of the property of the colour some will have the denomination taken from King Erythreus others from the splendour which the Raies of the Sun repercussed doth effect But the more probable opinion and that which is confirmed from experience is that the redness doth arise from the sand of a red colour which is found in the bottom of this Sea and on the Shoars and is frequently admixed with the water The water in the Red Sea only red by reason of the red sâ—â—â—â— in it The cause of this admixture which seemeth contrary to the ponderousness of sand is the vehemency of the flux and reflux of the water or its swiftness and agitation in this Sea by which it cometh to pass that the sand or gravel is agitated and moved up and down and so hindred by the continual motion of the Sea that it cannot rest Mariners affirm that the water of this Sea sometimes appeareth as red as blood but if taken up in a vessel the sand will sink down and then the water appeareth otherwise It often happens that storms from the Red Sea rushing into Arabia or Africa carry with them so great an abundance of sand and cast it on the earth that it covereth whole troops of men and beasts whence proceedeth the true Mummie Whether from the same or another cause the Sea between California and America be termed red Vermejo I have not as yet found it observed by Writers Proposition XVI Certain peculiar things are found in certain parts of the Ocean Of things in the Ocean peculiar to certain places The Sea termed Di Sargasso by the Portugals which beginneth not far from Cape Verd in Africa about the Isles of Salt and extendeth it self from the 20th degree of Northern Latitude unto the 34th of South Latitude The colour of this Sea seemeth to be green which is not the colour of the Sea it self but of a certain small leaved herb in the bottom of it called by the Portugals Sargasso The leaves of this weed mutually complicated one into another swim on the face of this Ocean in so continued a tract that the water can hardly be seen so that the Seamen afar off discovering this Ocean take it for an Island and green Land neither can they pass through this knot of weeds except that they be helped by a moderate wind at least the herb beareth a small berry whence it ariseth is not yet known Seeing that this Sea is not so near any land that it should have its original from them neither is it probable that it should come from the bottom of the Sea by reason that the profundity of this Sea is such that in many places it exceedeth the length of any line or cord In the Ocean not far from the Promontory of Good Hope are many floating red-like shrubs of a great thickness discovered unto which the herb Sargasso is implicated Seamen take it for a certain that if they see them thereabouts that they are near to the Promontory of Good Hope or else have just past it Corral found on the Shoar of Madagascar On the Shoar of the Isle of Madagascar the Ocean casteth up red and white Coral which augment like shrubs under the water and although that they be soft in some places yet between Madagascar and Africa there are reported to be Rocks of hard Coral In the Baltick Ocean nigh to the Shoar of Borussia the Shoar casteth forth most excellent succinum which the Inhabitants are taught when certain winds do blow to draw up with certain Iron hooks Amber only in the Ocean in the Torrid Zone The Ocean casteth up Amber only in the Torrid Zone viz. at the Shoar of Brazile where a peece of 500 l. weight was taken up by a Dutch Soldier and presented unto Count Nassaw at the Isle of Madagascar at Cape Verd at the Isle of Maurice at the Isle of Sumatra and other Indian Isles Garcias relateth that a piece of 200 l. weight was found yea that some Islands consist wholly of Amber but he doth not name them In the Aethiopick Ocean at Guinea Congo and Angola this is peculiarly observed that at the sides of the Keil of the Ship whilst that they remain there green Cockles like unto grass do stick which hindreth the sailing of the Ships and eateth the wood On the Coast of Languedock in France Birds unshaped first of all then by degrees they receive form and fixing of their bill in the wood when they begin to move by degrees they are pulled off and swim on the water like Geese The excrement of the Ocean termed the Scum of the Sea is found floating in
the Air and a pressure towards the Earth therefore the Air being forced to the Sea endeavoureth to drive it from its place and by reason of the Sea is fluid and not able to resist the forcing Air therefore it is moved from its place towards the place of the opposite quarter and forceth another water and this another and so on Now seeing that there is always some wind in the Air sometimes in this place and sometimes in that and sometimes diverse in divers places at one and the same time thence it followeth that there are certain contingent motions always in the Sea which are more discernable in the parts nearer the Wind and therefore the rather by reason that the Sea doth most easily receive an impression because it is fluid Proposition VII The general motion of the Sea is twofold one continually from the East to the West the other composed of two contrary Motions which is termed the Flux and Reflux of the Sea in which the Sea at certain hours floweth to the shoar and in certain others floweth back again We shall first treat of the first The motion of the Sea twofold That the Sea moveth from the East to the West continually is chiefly proved from the motion of that Sea which lieth in the Torrid Zone between the Tropicks For because the motion is more strong hence it is less hindred by other motions This Motion of the Sea is manifestly found by those that sail from India to Madagascar and Africa also in the Pacifick Ocean between New Spain China and the Moluccoes also in the Ocean between Africa and Brasil So through the Streights of Magellan the Sea is carried from the East to the West with a vehement motion So through the Streights Manillan through Channels between the Isles Maldives the motion of the Sea carrieth Ships from the East The Sea glideth impetuously between Cuba and Jucatan into the Gulph of Mexico and floweth out into Cuba and Florida At the Gulph of Paria there is a violent influx so that that Gulph is termed Os Draconis the Dragons Mouth Famous also is the flux at the Land of Canada From the Tartarian Ocean the Sea moveth through the Streights of Nova Zembla and Waigats Streights which is proved both from the very motion it self and also from the abundance of Ice which the Tartarian Ocean casteth up at the Streights of Zembla And at the Northern shoar of America in the Pacifick Ocean the motion is towards the Streight Anian also from Japan the Sea is moved towards China So in the Streight Manillan the motion is from East to West so also in the Streight Java And when the Atlantick Ocean is moved towards the Coast of America the contrary is found in the Pacifick Ocean For this is moved from the shoars which is the most conspicuous at Cabo dez Correntes between Panama and Lima. Proposition VIII The winds oftentimes change the general motion of the Sea especially those fixed winds which we shall shew to be termed Motions in the XXI Chap. The motion of the Sea oft-times changed by the winds For because that most of these do blow from the South and North or from the Collateral quarters of these thence it cometh to pass that the Sea by reason of its general motion tendeth towards the West it moveth towards the Collateral quarters of the West viz. North-west or South-west yea the general wind when that it seldom bloweth from the East but most commonly from the Collateral quarters of the East changeth this general motion of the Sea Much more do the North winds in the Northern Sea where the general motion is little discernable in the parts of the Ocean Proposition IX The cause of this general motion of the Sea from the East to the West is uncertain The Opinion of Aristotle and Copernicus concerning the general motion of the Sea from East to West The Aristotelians suppose although it were unknown unto Aristotle and his followers and indeed to all the European Philosophers before the Navigation of the Portugals through the Ocean of the Torrid Zone that it is caused by the prime motion of the Heaven which is not only common to all the Stars but also to the Air in part and to the Ocean by which all are carried from the East to the West But some that follow Copernicus as Kepler although they also acknowledge the Moon also the cause of this motion yet they determine that the motion of the Earth doth not a little contribute unto this motion viz. they suppose that the water seeing that it is not continuous but only contiguous unto the Earth cannot follow the circumrotation of the Earth and resist it towards the West whilst the Earth withdraweth it self towards the East and therefore that the Sea moveth not from one part of the Earth unto another but that the Earth leaveth part of the waters one after another Othersome who are not pleased neither with the solution of Aristotle nor Copernicus having recourse unto the Moon will have her to be Empress of the waters and that she leadeth about with her and draweth the Ocean from the East to the West If it is demanded how they reply there is an occult faculty influence sympathy vicinity to the Earth and such like indeed it is very probable that the Moon is the causer of this motion by reason that in the new and full Moons this motion is more violent than in the quarters where the motion for the most part is very little The most acute Cartesius hath explained a Mathematical mode by which the Moon causeth both this motion of the water and Air for he supposeth according to his general Hypothesis that an infinite number of Atoms do move round about the Earth by which the space even unto the Moon is filled without any Vacuum which space he calleth the vortex of the Earth viz. Let the Earth be FEGH The water 2143 the Air 6587. the vortex of the Earth B A D C the Moon B. Therefore saith he if that there were no Moon in the vortex B A D C the particles of its vortex would be turned round about the Center T but because that the Moon is in it therefore the space through which the Celestial matter floweth between B and T is rendred more Angust and thence it followeth that the Celestial matter floweth there more quick between B and T and therefore more presseth the superficies of the Air in 6 and also the superficies of the water in 2. than if the Moon were not in the Diameter of the vortex B D and seeing that both the bodies of the Air and water are fluid and easily plyant to this pression it must not be so high above the part of the Earth F as if the Moon were without the Diameter B D. and on the contrary must be more high towards E. But whilst that the Earth is carried from E through F towards G or from the
place may make the motion of the Sea fixed in another place The flux of the Sea in divers places at certain times So between the Isle Celebes and Madera when that the motion is West viz. in December January and February the Sea floweth to the South East or a more near Collateral wind than the East So at Java in the Streight Gallappa when the motion is West viz. in May the Sea floweth towards the East contrary to his general Motion At the Isle of Ceilan from the middle of March to October the Sea floweth towards the South on the rest of the Months towards the North viz. because that in those Months the North winds are frequent in others the South winds Between Cochin and Mallacca the Sea floweth with a Westernly motion from April to August contrary to the general motion towards the East then the rest of the time towards the West the winds assisting the general motion the Sea floweth here with so great a noise that those who know not the same suppose Rocks to be there against which the waters beat so for some months after the 15 of February the Sea is moved from the Maldivian Isles towards the East and India contrary to the general motion At the Coast of China and Camboja in October November and December the Sea is moved towards the North-West but in January towards the South-West with a very swift course to the Sands de Champa so that they seem to exceed the celerity of a stone that is slinged At Pulo Cato even unto Varella on the coast of Camboja when motions or winds do not blow the swift motion of the Sea is towards the South but the motions or winds move towards another quarter On the Coast of the Gulph of Bengala from Patana to the Promontory of Malacca in November and December a swift course of the Sea is observed towards the South In a motion or wind from China to Malacca in June July and August there is a vehement motion of the Sea from Pulo Cato to Pulo Cambir on the Coast of Camboja Many more Examples but less accurately consigned are to be read in the Journals of the Mariners At the Coast of Aguada de san Bras not far from the Promontory of Good Hope this is peculiarly observed that the Sea is always moved from the East to the West towards the land so much the more vehemently by how much the Occidental wind opposite unto it is more violent Questionless some adjacent Coast higher than it is the cause of it Proposition XXXI The circular motions of the Sea are threefold The cirçular motions of the Sea termed Whirlpools and Vortices are threefold For some only move the water in a round othersome suck in the water and in certain hours let it forth again and others suck it in but cast it not forth Although without doubt there be a fourth sort in the Channel of the Sea which casteth out and sucketh not in the waters Yet I do not remember that I have read in any Author such a Vortex to be found in the Sea but many are found on the land The Chalcidican Euripus or Vortex is famous in Greece especially by reason of the Fable concerning the death of Aristotle it receiveth water at certain hours and casteth them out in others The Vortex at Norway is the most noted and greatest of all for it is related to be 13 miles in circuit in the middle of it is a Rock called Mouske This Vorago in six hours sucketh in all that approacheth near it as Water Whales laden Ships and in so many hours vomiteth them all out again with a great violence noise and circumgyration of water The cause is unknown Between Normandy and England is a Vorago or Whirlpool unto which Ships are carried with a great swiftness and being near the Whirlpool are repelled back again Proposition XXXII The motion of the Sea which we call a Concussion or Trembling cometh from a spiration or wind which moveth the Earth or Water it self and causeth it to rise Of the concâ—ssion of the Sea and its cause On the Coast of Biscay is a place which the Inhabitants call Capbreton there sometimes the Sea swelleth without any winds so that it seemeth to overflow the shore it self and on a sudden falleth low The like intumescency is found in a Lake of Scotland called Loumond moved by a subterranean wind The Portugals in Anno 1523 in the Sea of Cambaja discovered a trembling of the water for in a great calm as Maffeus writeth all winds being still the Sea on a sudden swelled from the bottom thence the Ships began to roul and to fall foul of one another to their great astonishment Now in this great confusion and disturbance some cast the lead some pumped others more wise bethought themselves of escaping and got barrels on which they might swim but on an instant it was found to be an Earthquake which thus also disturbed the Ships on the Sea as well as the Land Proposition XXXIII Why the Pacifick Ocean is more calm and without great floods or waves and why it is easily moved or rough with a wind The cause without doubt is because its motions towards the West are not hindred by the intercourse of shoars as the Atlantick Ocean is CHAP. XV. Of Lakes Pools or standing Waters and Marishes Proposition I. Definitions Of Lakes A Lake is a quantity of Water in any cavity of a Mediterranean place of a notable amplitude and tract on all sides encompassed with the Land and at the least having a moderate profundity But more properly that is termed a Lake which receiveth in and letteth forth Rivers A Pool is a small Lake Pools which doth never receive or send forth Rivers A Marish is water in a Mediterranean place Marishes here and there having the lands extant and about it or mixed with the Earth Proposition II. Lakes are fourfold Lakes are Fourfold 1. Some neither send forth or receive Rivers and such Lakes if small are termed Pools but if large they are called Lakes 2. Some send forth Rivers but receive none 3. Others receive Rivers and send forth none And 4. some both receive and send forth Rivers and some of those send forth greater than they receive some equal and some lesser Also some send forth a River almost in the same line with that which they received others in another line or to another quarter also some receive more than they send forth some more few and some equal Proposition III. To declare the generation and conservation of those Lakes which neither send forth nor receive Rivers Those Lakes are either great moderate or small Some of the moderate and small perpetually remain so in the Summer and when it hath not rained for a long space are dried up and both these are termed Pools Now it is easy to declare the generation of those that are dried up viz. the plenty of
do grow and where that all Wells are salt In the City of Suez at the Termination of the Red Sea all Wells are salt or brackish and the water two miles distant is somewhat salt So in many Islands in the Sea no Wells of fresh water are found though not so salt as the Sea water it self as in the Isle of St. Vincent and others In Peru in the low Region the Lakes are salt by reason of the vicinity of the Sea Yea in the Oriental Maritimate places the Nuts called Coco Nuts are found somewhat salt Also in the Mediterranean places themselves Fountains of salt water are found as in Lorrain Lunenburgh and the like 3. Because that it is manifest that the Sea emitteth its water through subterraneous passages from the salt Fountains of Lunenburgh where beneath the Earth those Aqueducts full of salt or sea-Sea-water are found 4. Because that digging to a great depth as also in Mines much water is found of which neither the Rain nor the Air can be made the efficient cause How water cometh from the Sea to the places of Fountains so as to become sweet we have now shewed viz. the bottom of the Sea is not every where Rocky or Stony but in many places Sandy Muddy Gravelly Spungy drinking the water of the Sea and by a continuation of the Earth brings it by degrees to a long distance from the Sea where at length the Guttulae unite especially in a narrow space such as are Mountains and make a Fountain in the given place or Cavity but if so be that Cavity be hidden from the Earth then the water so collected either followeth another way wheresoever it be made and so a Fountain seemeth to break forth in another place which yet is not in than place but is a River derived from the former place by a subterraneous passage Or if that the water of that Cavity findeth no way about it self neither by violence can break through the Earth that covereth it then that water is not augmented but what water flowed unto it to have been its encrease that is averted to another place For that is the property of all humid bodies that all their parts and particles are moved towards that place where the deflux is made So if you fill a Vessel with water that the swelling or tumour may be above the brim of the Vessel then all the parts of the extant water have an equal inclination and power of deflux in the vicine part of the brim But yet by reason of the mutual coherence of the particles whose cause is declared in Natural Philosophy if that the deflux be made in one part of the brim all the other parts leave the vicine brim and draw to that part of the brim or they follow where the deflux is made So if you immerge a long crust of Bread into water you shall see the water born upwards and and the part of the Bread that is not immerged to be humid The Sea goeth under the Earth through Caverns Moreover the Sea goeth under the Earth through Caverns from which after the same mode the water may glide or creep forth unless you had rather ascribe it to evaporations which are carried upwards and uniting the drops in a narrow place But because there are many things which may seem to render this opinion less probable these ought also to be considered that it may be evident that they weaken not this assertion laid down Things to be noted 1. The places of Fountains are more elevated than the Superficies of the Sea by reason that most of them are in Mountanous places therefore water cannot flow from the Sea to those places because the nature of water is to move to places more depressed or less elevated as it is manifest from Rivers and the Artifices of Drainers 2. Although the bottom of the Sea be gravelly muddy and sandy so that the water may penetrate it self through its particles yet the reason doth not appear evident enough but that it may more moisten the adjoyning Earth and that which is not so high than to glide upwards to the places of Fountains seeing especially that the Earth is Rocky and Stony as in the Mountains of the Island of St. Helena 3. There is no reason why the water so gliding from the Sea should not break forth in a middle way between the Sea and the Fountain 4. In the most profound Mines none or very little water is found as Thurnheuserus witnesseth 5. This water of the Fountains should be salt because that it doth proceed from the Sea These are the chief Arguments which may seem to weaken the opinion proposed For I pass by those slight ones alledged by others Other Arguments Answered viz. that they suppose that the Sea is not sufficient to supply so many Rivers then again that Rivers then should never be diminished if that were the true cause of Rivers that we have laid down But unto these two the answer is easy because that the Sea again receiveth the water again from the Rivers that it sent forth into the Fountains Then as for the other we have shewed before that the question is not neither do we determine that all the water of the Rivers is from the Sea but only concerning the water of Springs which is not the alone cause of Rivers as we have said already and we also assert that the water of Fountains is augmented from rains and Dew because that these moistening the Earth glide or are drawn towards the places of Fountains Four Other Arguments of great concernment where the efflux of the water is made which we have explained by other Examples We come now to those four Arguments alledged which may seem to carry some weight with them The first is esteemed very valid as being taken from multiplicit experience therefore many solutions are brought and alledged by Learned men First they the most easily discharge themselves who defend the Ocean to be more high than the Earth for so they deny the assertion and they say that this Altitude of the Ocean is the cause of Springs because that Springs are less high than the water in the middle of the Ocean See Olearius his Voyage into Persia Moreover Olearius in the Description of his Voyage into Persia relateth that he ascended the Mountain that adjoyneth to the Caspian Sea and with an Astrolabe or rather a Gaeodetical Instrument to observe the Elevation of this Mountain above the superficies of that Sea but found none but that the extream superficies of that Sea was seen in the Horizontal Line yea somewhat elevated above it so that the Tumour of this Sea was found a little more high than the vertex of the Mountain on which he made his observation But in truth this solution cannot be admitted of See Chap. 13. because we have shewed in the Thirteenth Chapter that the water of the Ocean is not higher than the Mountains
of which it is probable that the mutation of the height of the Sea availeth much sometimes in this and sometimes in that part by reason of the floods waves or tempest For the water being made higher more presseth the water and promoteth its ingress through the Earth to the Springs And seeing that every day the Altitude of the Sea is augmented and diminished in the parts of the Ocean not only by storms but also by the flux and reflux therefore such a pressure happeneth every day but I question whether this cause can effect much The third Argument answered Unto the third Argument I say that the reason is the disposition of the places and of the Earth it self and as I said that the humour is moved and glideth towards that part where the flux is made neither do I think it needeth any farther explication The fourth Argument Answered The fourth Argument taken from the saltness hath a more difficult solution because that it seemeth not possible that the saltness should be taken away only by transcolation for the saltness of the water consisteth in a double Salt which the Aristotelians never observed the one of which the Chymists aptly call fixed the other volatile Salt And the fixed Salt may indeed be separated from the marine water as well by continual transcolation as by coction and distillation of the water but the volatile Salt because it is spirituous is immediately advanced with the water neither can it be separated by frequent and often repeated distillation Therefore it is hard to give a mode by which this volatile salt spirit in its passage between the Sea and the Fountain may be separated from the Sea water Yet in the mean while these will suffice for the solution 1. Although we have not discovered the mode and artifice by which this volatile salsitude may be separated from the Sea water yet we must not deny but that it may be separated for by nature we find it separated viz. for fresh showers fall into the Ocean which yet were generated of the vapours taken up from the Sea 2. Those particles of Salt water penetrating the Earth before they flow to their Fountain are mixed here and there with other waters proceeding there from rain or vapours and so that small saltitude that they yet had is rendred altogether insensible 3. It is not true that the salsitude is altogether insensible in all Springs because that some Fountains are salt as we said before other-some brackish a little as those two miles from the City Suez and in places less remote from the Sea Therefore there is need of a long transcolation and gentle evaporation to separate the water from the volatile Salt and by this artifice we make Sea water less salt and such also is the generation of rain water which therefore is not salt or at least less salt For it is certain that sometimes saltish kinds of rain do fall into the Sea Therefore the waters of Fountains proceed partly from the Sea or subterranean waters partly from Rivers and Dew that moisten the Earth But the water of Rivers partly proceedeth from Springs and partly from Rain and Snow Proposition VI. Certain Rivers hide themselves in the midst of their passage under the Earth and in another place rise up again as if they were new Rivers Of Rivers which in the midst of their passage hide themselves under the Earth and rise again The most celebrated of them are 1. The River Niger which meeting the Mountains of Nubia is observed under them and cometh sorth again from the other Occidental quarter 2. Tigris having passed the Lake Arethusa meeting the Mountain Taurus is hidden in a Cave and floweth out on the other side Then when it hath passed the Lake Thospites it is again obscured in subterranean Caverns and then after it hath thus run the space of about six German miles it breaketh forth again 3. About Arcadia in Peloponnesus many such Riverets are to be found as Aristotle writeth in his first Book of Meteors Chapter Eleventh 4. Alpheus a River of Achaia is absorbed by the Earth The Grecians write that it keepeth its course under the Sea and beneath the Earth even unto Sicilia where they will have it to emerge on the Coast of Syracuse and to be that River that is called Arethusa in Sicilia Now this they especially collected from this viz. that Arethusa in Sicilia every fifth Summer cast up the dung of those Beasts at that time when the Olympian Games were celebrated and the dung and garbage of the slain Victims were cast into Alpheus Therefore being carried with a direct Current they were cast up in Sicilia 5. The River Guadiana between Portugal and Biscay in times past called Anas wholly obscureth it self at Medelina and about 8 German miles further discovereth it self again 6. Dan which flowing with the River Jor maketh Jordan breaketh forth some miles from its Fountain Phiala Straw or rushes being cast into the same are found and discovered in the Fountain or proruption of the River Dan. The Reasons why these Rivers hide themselves under the Earth and again emerge are 1. The obstacle of a more elevated place than the Channel of the River 2. Either perchance some cavity existing in the Earth or some inconstant matter which easily giveth place to the gliding River There are also other Rivers which hide themselves under the Earth but do not again emerge as we shall shew in the following Propositions Proposition VII Most of the great and indifferent Rivers as also a great part of the lesser do exonerate themselves into the Sea or a Lake and the place where this exoneration is made is termed the Mouth of the River Some Rivers have one some three and some more such Mouths Some of the Rivers of indifferent magnitude as also the lesser sort discharge themselves into greater Rivers the others either stagnate or are sucked up by the Earth Most Rivers both great and small lose themselves in the Sea or in Lakes Concerning the greater Rivers the thing is evident by the Example of the Rhine the Danube the Wolga and such like For the Danube is exonerated into the Euxine Sea by seven Mouths the Wolga hath at least seventy Outlets or Mouths the Nile hath seven and where it overfloweth more The cause why greater Rivers do exonerate themselves into the Sea is their abundance of water and vehement course Now why they have more outlets than one there is a twofold reason for the same 1. The abundance of water 2. The generation of Sands and ridges in the mouths which in progress of time was so augmented that they become either part of the Land or Island and so cause that the River gliding is divided into two branches And when many such ridges are generated the River is divided into many branches or one mouth into many but then for the most part the mouths are carried forwards and the Sea recedeth from
and Vitriol therefore they dissolve the particles of Iron and by degrees take away from it which whilst that they do the Copper particles of the water are reposed in the place of the Iron ones taken away or there adhere whilst that they glide with the runing water The reason of those that change wood into stone are these 1. Some do not change the wood it self into stone but earthy stony and saline particles contained in the water do apply themselves to the wood and so as it were cover the wood with a stony crust and do not really change it 2. Some do not change the wood into stone but cause a stony hardness to the wood which some mineral waters may possibly do 3. If that some waters have truly changed wood into stone I conceive it to be done after this manner that chief difference is found by sight between the wood and the stone that in the wood there are certain long Fibres or Veins unto which the particles do cohere and those are less thick but in stone the particles are like unto Atoms without any certain extension into long Fibres If that therefore any water dissolve and as it were grind the particles cohering in the wood according to a long line so that now they do no more cohere after this mode but yet are more condensed there will be no more any great difference between the wood and stone as may be observed by our Eyes yet it is probable that these mineral waters communicate some substance to the wood it self There are other waters whose faculty is reported to be able to change the colours in the hair of man or beast Proposition XIII To explain the cause of poisonous and death-causing waters and to reckon up the places where they are Of poisonous waters Such is the Lake Asphaltites by reason of its Arsenical Bitumen In times past famous was the Fountain of Terracina which was called Neptunicus in the Region of the Volsci of which those that drank were deprived of their lives therefore it was filled up with stones by the Inhabitants In Thessalia a Fountain springeth of which no Cattle drink nor no kind of Beast approacheth Famous or rather infamous is the water which in the Region of Arcadia called Nonacris the Ancients write to drop exceeding cold from stony Rocks therefore called the Infernal and Stygian water which no vessel either of silver brass or iron could be preserved in without breaking And by this water Historians report that Alexander the Great was killed by Jolla Son of Antipater and that not without the infamy of Aristotle At this day many mortiferous waters are found in the Places or Regions called the Alpes but most of them are stopped with stones which is the reason that so few death-causing Fountains are known Now the generation of such water is if the water glide or flow through Arsenical Mercurial or Antimonial Earths and are impregnated with their fumes For as the smoak or fume of Arsnick killeth living creatures so waters impregnated with such a fume do the same Proposition XIV To explain the generation of coloured waters and their differences and to enumerate the places of the Earth in which they are found At Chinen in France water floweth from a Cave of somewhat a yellowish colour Of coloured waters In the Kingdom of Congo a Riveret floweth of a red colour into the Sea In some places waters flow of a black of a green and such like colours but they are but few The cause of the colour of these waters is that they glide or run from lands before they come to the Fountain Proposition XV. To explain the generation of Salt-waters and to reckon up the places of the Earth in which they are found Of the generation of Salt-waters The generation is twofold 1. From the Ocean they come through Subterraneous passages and flow to the Superficies of the Earth 2. They are generated of a Salt contained in the Earth such as is found in many places through which whilst the water glideth it conceiveth Saline particles and spirits before that it arrive at the Spring Great is the plenty and that known to every one of Salt Fountains We have spoken in the preceding Chapter and this matter is easily known by reason of the abundance of Salt almost every where lying hidden in the Earth seeing that Salt it self is an Element Proposition XVI To explain the cause of Ebullient Fountains and those that break out with a great spirit and wind and to enumerate the places of the Earth wherein they are found The cause is partly a Sulphureous spirit and partly a Nitrous spirit commixed with water in the Earth Of ebullient Fountains if that it be a Sulphureous spirit the waters are hot if Nitrous cold For neither are all the waters which ebulliate like to those that are hot hot but many of them are cold as is evident from that near to Culma called a mad water of which we have spoken in the Twelfth Proposition The River Tamayus in Galaecia ariseth from a Lake in its rising for some months of the year it sendeth forth a mighty noise In Japan that wonderful hot Fountain of which we have spoken in the Eighth Proposition not above twice every day breaketh forth for the most part for one hour now when that the water beginneth to flow it is carried with so great a force and vehemency of wind that it moveth the vast stones incumbent on the Well and leapeth to the height of three or four Ells with so great a noise like unto the discharge of Cannon In Westphalia a Fountain breaketh forth tearmed Bolderborn from its noise Most of the Spaws and Baths break forth with an abundance of wind and ebulliate as if they boyled a Sulphureous spirit causeth this in the Baths and in the Spaws the Spirits of Vitriol Nitre and the like Proposition XVII To enumerate the kinds of waters which have other certain wonderful properties and to explain the causes of them Unto this Classis all others ought to be reduced which cannot conveniently be referred unto the former sorts Other kinds of waters of wonderful properties So there is a Fountain in Portugal tearmed Cadina devouring all that is cast into it Also in times past there was another near to it rejecting all things cast into it but this latter is obstructed In Andalusia not far from the City Guadiana Eusebius Nierenburgius relateth that there is a Lake which sheweth the Seasons or Tempest for when that this is approaching it maketh an horrible noise which is oftentimes heard for the space of 18 or 20 miles In Calice in France is a Well into which if that a stone is cast in a noise will be heard like Thunder in the cavities of the Well In the Alpes are Wells whose water being drank off contracteth swellings of a great bigness hanging from their necks In the Kingdom of Granada at the Town Antiquarius is
a Fountain of so great force that it dissolveth stones Near unto Tours in France are Caves to be seen tearmed commonly Les Caves Gouttieres from the roof of which the water which falleth is formed into divers shapes as Nuts Almonds and the like The hot Fountain of Japan burneth all things and devoureth cloth iron flesh c. The studious may collect divers other examples from other Authors and reduce them to this Classis if that they seem not possible to be reduced to any of the former The Causes must be sought from the peculiar situation and property of each place Proposition XVIII To enumerate those Fountains which break forth at a set time not continually to explain the cause and those which ebb and flow Of Fountains which break forth at a set time not continually This Proposition belongeth not to this Chapter but to the preceding yet because it belongeth to the wonder of waters and was neglected in the former Chapter here it shall be explained In a Fountain situated on the top of an high Hill in the Province of Canaugh in Ireland the water ebbeth and floweth every day with the flux and reflux of the Sea yet the water is fresh The same is observed in the Fountain Louzara which is in the mountainous places of Galaecia called Cabreti 20 miles from the Sea Also in Aquitain in the Village Marsacus is a Fountain which imitateth the swelling of the Sea and swelleth with the increase of Garumnae in Burdeaux Elsewhere there are said to be Fountains which augment and decrease contrary to the swelling of the Sea In Wales near the mouth of the River Severn is a Pool called Linliguna which swalloweth in the Marine floods whilst that they arise but it is by no means filled with the same and the flood of the Sea ceasing then it riseth with a great force and vomiteth out the water with which it covereth the Banks In Biscay there are the four Springs Tamarici whereof three every day are so dried twelve times as if that no water were in them as Pliny reporteth But I question whether they be to be found at this day In Savoy is a Fountain of noted magnitude callen Wonderful which sinketh low twice in an hour and twice floweth and before that it floweth and doth break forth with a great noise it floweth into the Lake Burgites In the Mountains of Foix in Languedoc riseth the River Lers which in the Months June July and August ebbeth and floweth 24 times in a day See Bertius In a Region of Westphalia called Paderborn is a Fountain which ebbeth and floweth twice every day although it sendeth forth so much water that not far from the Fountain the water driveth four Water-mills and it breaketh forth with a mighty noise In the Province of Wallis in Germany is a Fountain called the Fountain of St. Mary it ceaseth to flow in the Autumn at the day dedicated to St. Mary and returneth in May. The Pool or Lake Maron in Palestine is so dry in the Summer and bringeth forth Herbs and Shrubs so high that Lions Wolves and other wild Beasts do abide there In Spain two miles from Valindolid is a Fountain which ariseth in May and falleth in November All Baths flow without any cessation or change except those that are in Rhaetia and are called the Pepper Baths for they flow only in the Summer from the third of May to the fourteenth of September then they cease CHAP. XVIII Of the Mutation of the places of the Water and Land or of the Mutation of the watery superficies into the earthy and the contrary Proposition I. To know the Superficies of the Earth which the water possesseth how great it is and that which the Earth occupieth Of the Superficies of the earth which the water possesseth WE cannot accurately know this because we are ignorant whether the Sea or Land doth possess the Superficies of the North or South Polaryland Moreover because the Superficies of the water as also of the land is terminated on the Globe by an irregular bending of the lines therefore it would be a very difficult task to compute the quantity of the Superficies of the water and land but as far as we are able to collect in gross from the inspection of the Terrestrial Globe the Superficies of the water and land seem almost equal so that the Superficies of the water is half to the Superficies of the land and so also is the Superficies of the land Proposition II. The Superficies of the Water as also of the Land is not at all times of the same magnitude but sometimes greater and sometimes lesser and when the Superficies of the Water is augmented the Superficies of the Land is diminished For the Sea overfloweth sometimes here sometimes there or taketh away and carrieth with it so therefore his Superficies is augmented more or less as it hath overflowed a great or less tract of Land as in times past it did in Thessaly Yet this variety as far as it is yet known hath a very little proportion unto the whole Superficies of the water it may be made great as we shall shew in the eighteenth Proposition Proposition III. To compute what quantity of Water the Earth containeth and what quantity of Land Of the quantity of Land and Water which the Earth containeth For the finding out the accurate and true quantity of water and land first we ought to know both the whole Superficies of the water as also its depth in divers parts of the Sea also the subterraneous heaps of water ought to be examined All which seeing that we cannot find out by any method therefore we cannot find out the accurate quantity of the water or land but only from certain Hypotheses viz. we laid down the Superficies of the water to be half the Superficies of the earth the profundity to be quarter or half a mile neither do we reckon the waters in subterraneous Channels The quantity of water may be thus found out Take a quarter or half a mile from the Semidiameter of the earth and the solidity of the Sphere may be found whose Semidiameter is equal to the residue let this solidity be taken from the solidity of the earth the half of the residue is the quantity of the water the same half substracted from the solidity of the whole earth leaveth the quantity of the earth unto which must be added a fourth or fifth part of the bulk of water or of the former half But these are uncertainties from supposed uncertainties or at least nigh unto truth Proposition IV. The Water may leave the shoar and place of the Earth which it doth occupy for divers causes so that the Land may appear dry where the Water or Sea was before and so a new Land may seem to be generated A Sevenfold Tract of Waters There are a sevenfold Tract of waters viz. 1. the Ocean 2. Gulphs or Bays of the Ocean 3.
Indians Orancan It is often in the Oriental Sea especially in the Sea of Sian China and Japan between Malacca and Japan This violently breaking almost from the Western quarter and being whirled about the Horizon with a rapid course perfects its circumference by continual increase in the space of twenty hours raising those vast Seas with an horrid violence and swellings the Billows beating one another take away all hope of safety from the Mariners and so both by reason of these Typhons and also other Storms sailing from India to Japan is very dangerous so that it is accounted an happy Voyage if that one Ship of three keepeth its course At the Autumnal Season a most furious Typhon doth especially predominate and that often with so great violence that those that have not seen it can hardly believe it so that it is no wonder that some mighty Ships have been weakned by those great Waves you would think in this Storm that Heaven and Earth would meet Neither doth it only rage on the Sea but also on the Shoars and overwhelmeth many Houses and throweth up huge Trees by the roots and forceth great Ships from the Sea on the Land for about a quarter of a mile The Mariners term it a Wind that runneth round the Compass In the Indian Ocean it seldom continueth above six hours and maketh the Sea so level at the first as if that it were plained but on a sudden horrible Waves do follow So about the City Ardibil in Persia in June and July every day when that the Sun is at his Meridian height a Whirlwind ariseth for an hour by which a great dust is raised Questionless the cause of a Typhon is that a wind breaking forth with violence from some one quarter towards another findeth an obstruction in this and therefore is wreathed and turned into it self as we see that if water be suddenly moved if that an obstacle be put in its way it moveth in a round suddenly and with a force It may be that a Typhon may arise from opposite winds blowing together violently which render the superficies of the Sea so plain and comprehend the Ships in the middle If that it rush from above it is called Caetegis and then it maketh the Sea so plain as if that it had been plained but presently mighty Floods or Waves arise Proposition XIII Whether that some Winds break forth from the Earth or Water Of VVinds breaking forth from the Earth or VVater We easily apprehend that this may easily be seeing that Cavities are here and also Winds Sulphureous substances and Moisture Now nothing hinders but that a gust sufficiently vehement may be there generated viz. if that it be any thing hindred as it is procreated to go forth or if that it be presently generated in a great quantity as much as the winds require If that the Outlet be hindred an Earthquake is generated or a wind with a violent force maketh wey for it self and thrusts forwards the Earth So oftentimes a Smoak breaketh forth from the Earth in the Isles of Maarice so also from some Caves In Japan is a Fountain breaking forth at certain hours of the day with great noise Yet I do not remember that I have read of any Wind breaking forth out of the Sea Proposition XIV Whether that a certain Wind may arise from the flowing of the Sea and of the Rivers Of a VVind that floweth from the Sea and Rivers Experienced testifieth that in those places where the flux and reflux of the Sea is discovered if at any time the Air be free from other winds from the most part with the water flowing from the Sea a wind also bloweth from the Sea Therefore it seemeth probable that the Air by reason of the contiguity is carried with the water to the same quarter But this should be more diligently observed Whether when that the Air is still the same wind is discovered with the afflux of the Sea I think yet that another cause of this Wind may be given viz. that the Air is forced from the place by the flowing water Now the Air is much moved at a very little impression so they will have the Air moved with the Rivers that run swiftly Proposition XV. Why Ignes fatui Castor and Pollux and Helena are amongst Tempests The Portugals call them Corpo Santo the Spaniards St. Elmo Now not only one but many are oftentimes beheld in Ships at the Masts wandring with an uncertain motion as other Ignes fatui although that sometimes they may seem to fix on the Sails and Masts But sometimes leaping up and down they appear like a flame or a Candle burning obscurely If that four such vicine Lights be seen the Portugals term them Cora de Nostra Seneora the Crown of our Blessed Lady or Virgin Mary And these they account of as a most certain sign of the Tempests to cease The cause of those Fires is a Sulphureous part full of Bitumen forced downwards through that great motion of the Air and forced or fired into one by agitation or congregation So we see by agitation that the Butter of Milk is separated from this Phaenomenon is also collected that for the most part those violent Tempests proceed from a Sulphureous spirit rarefying and moving the Clouds Proposition XVI Why there is so frequent a Calm in the Sea near Guinee and under the Aequator in the Atlantick Ocean between America and Africa Frequent ' Calms in the Atlantick Ocean This is one of the Phaenomenons about Winds of no small difficulty That at Guinee which is two degrees from the Aequator and under the Aequator is almost a perpetual Calm especially in April May and June where no motions are found there when that no such thing is observed in other parts of the Ocean scituate under the Aequator Indeed an Ecnephias is sometimes sufficiently frequent there but this also is desired oftentimes by the Sea-men because that by the force of frequent Ecnephiae they endeavour to sail beyond the Aequator For it happeneth very often that Ships sailing from Europe to India are detained a whole Month at the Aequator before that they can pass it Now especially they avoid the Coasts of Guinee and the Calm there and therefore with some hindrance to their Voyage they sail towards Brazil yea some Ships are detained here for three Months before that they can depart from the Coasts into the Mid-Sea I have not yet found out the cause of the Phaenomenon unless perchance this be it that Snows are found intercepted in no Mountains of Africa between Guinee and Barbary which may generate the Winds Proposition XVII In some Regions the Tempests are Anniversary Of Tempests Anniversary in some Regions We have given some Examples of these in our former Propositions viz. 1. Concerning the mutation of Motions 2. Concerning our Ecnephias 3. Concerning a Typhon 4. At the Promontory of Good-hope in June and July 5. In the Isle
February in Congo Here therefore the Terrestrial Season is repugnant to the Celestial because that in January and February the Sun is not most remote from those places and therefore they should not have Rain but rather Siccity Without doubt the cause is either from another scituation of the Mountains another fixed Wind or the like 6. The Island of St. Thomas See the Description of St. Thomas and Anobon are very abundant in Sugar Grain Fruits and Meats and great plenty of Oranges c. 7. How the Seasons are in the other Regions of the Occidental Coasts of Africa from Lowango to the Tropick of Capricorn I have not yet found to be observed by any one 8. Therefore that shore being left and the Promontory of Good-hope being sayled about we return to the Tropick of Capricorn where the Oriental Coast of the Promontory or Tongue of Africa is discovered in which lyeth Zofala Mozambique Quiloa even to the Aequator which are illustrated by the Oriental Sun In these places the Winter is in the Months of September November December and January in the rest Siccity and Summer which time is contrary to that in which in Congo we have said that they have the Rain in Winter and yet these Regions lye from the Aequator but the ridge of Mountains which doubly divide this Prominent Tongue of Africa into the Eastern and Western Land questionless are the cause of this diversity The Land of these Regions are only of a moderate Fertility in many places Sandy Barren and scorched with the chalure of the Sun but the Rivers the adjacent Sea and general Easternly Wind much allay the heat 9. The other Regions of the Oriental Coasts of Africa lying from the Aequator towards the North at the mouth of the Arabian Gulph and hence to the Shore of the said Gulph even to the Tropick of Cancer these Regions I say what seasons they have and in what times of the year I have not yet found observed by any but that some write that this tract is barren sandy oppressed with such a violent heat and destitute of Rivers 10. As to the seasons in the Mediteranean part of Africa which is the Region of the Abyssines which is cut almost in the middle by the Aequator so that it hath some Provinces in the Southern Torrid Zone and very many in the Northern Torrid Zone 11. Now leaving Africa we enter the Regions of Asia lying under the Torrid Zone where first we meet with the Regions of Arabia adjacent to the Red Sea from Mecca to Aden 12 degrees from the Aequator towards the North which regard the West The Merchants at Aden negoriate their affairs in the Night season by reason of heat in the day on the East they have the Arabian Mountains These Regions are exceedingly infested with heat in March and April and more in the following Months whilst the Sun approacheth to their Vertex and about it it remaineth May June July and August the chalure is so great that the Inhabitants especially the better sort cause water to be poured on their Bodies all the day long or else lie in Vessels of Water to refresh them I suppose the cause to be the defect of watery Vapours because on the Oriental part the Region is Rocky and hath but few Rivers now the Oriental wind which is general although it be not there perceived repelleth the Vapours rising from the Red Sea Likewise the abundance of Sand which retaineth the heat received in the night and communicateth it to the Air. Therefore this time of the Summer and Winter agrees with the Celestial Course 12. The same is the case of all Arabia and its Eastern Coast 13. In Camboja in India lying under the Tropick of Cancer as also in the Regions of Malabar or the Eastern Coast of the Indies which regard the West and extend themselves from the North towards the South to the eighth degree of North Latitude I say these Regions the Winter or rainy Seasons possess the Months of June July August and September but especially from the middle of June to the middle of September Neither in all these places doth it rain in an equal time but more continually in the province of Goana and Cocina and less in Camboja where it only raineth three Months in the other eight months it seldome raineth in Camboja but in Goa in the Months of April and May it raineth but less vehement and beginning with Thunder and Storms so that to Autumn here may be ascribed half the Month of March also April and May to the 15th of June then from the 15th of June July and August to Winter likewise from the 15th of September to December the Spring the other Months from the 15th of December to the 15th of March to Summer The Winter is not so called from the cold as with us but from the Rains which then fall for in these Months is great drought because that the Water of the former Rains is extracted by the Sun from the Earth Yet the Inhabitants do not number four Seasons but only two Summer and Winter or rather a dry and a rainy Season Besides these Raines there are frequent Storms on the Coast and also Thunders in those rainy Months so that the Sea is supposed to be then shut up and many Rivers then overflow the Sea is open again in the Month of September and then Ships put forth to Sea from the Coast of Malabar into various parts of the world Neither are there any violent rains in these places in the Fields except some Storms by reason that it ceaseth for many hours of the day therefore it affordeth the Inhabitants a time of Planting and Sowing which they do in these watery Months The Air also is of a moderate heat at that time because the Sun is obstructed with Clouds so that the remote Inhabitants expatiate from the Shore to the Hills and Fields for recreation where the inundation is not great and incredible fertility is acquired to the Earth by this Rain But if these Raines fall not on the year as in Anno 1630. which seldom happens then all hope of Sowing and consequently Harvest is taken away thence cometh Scarcity of Corn a hot Sultery Air burning Feavours Pestilences and Deaths of Thousands of People In the said year 1630 A great Famine in Camboja in 1630. and the year following Mans Flesh was publickly sold in the Shambles in Camboja Sometimes the Shores do so rage that the Houses which are but slightly built fall by the inundation of the River They Sow in May and the beginning of June and Reap in November and December it is otherwise in Guiny This Summer and this Winter is contrary to the Celestial Course or Motion of the Sun for in the Months of July and August the Sun is vertical to those places or very near the Vertex therefore they must have heat and drought this is the great felicity of those places
Gueyes Timocoves c. who have in part taken and received the manners and barbarousness of the Tartars their Neighbours Its parts and chief places Cochin-china likewise is divided into Chiampaa and Cochin-china Chiampaa between Camboja and Cochin-china regards the Isles of Sonde towards the South the Philippines towards the East and touches on Tunquin to the North. It s principal City bears the same name according to most Authors but according to others Pulocacein It hath nothing which is not common to Cochin-china and therefore we shall say no more Cochin-china particularly taken is better known than all the neighbouring Countries because it is wholly upon the Sea having 150 Leagues of Coast and not above 40 or 50 in breadth between the Mountains of Kemois a barbarous People and the Sea Its Provinces are descending from North to South Sinuva Cacciam Quangiva Quingin or Pulacambis and Ranran The two first touch upon Tunquin the last touch on the Kingdom of Chiampaa The King makes his ordinary residence in the Province of Sinuva or at Cacciam Cities of the same name with their Provinces It s fertility commoditiâ— temperature and people All the Country is fertil abounding in Rice Fruits and Herbs breeding many Fowls and Beasts and the Sea excellent Fishes It produces Cinnamon Pepper Lignum Aquilae Calamba and Benjamin It s temperature is pleasant though under the Torrid Zone the Air healthful and the Soil so abundant in all things that the Inhabitants have no knowledge either of Contagion or Famine They have Gold Silver Silk Porcelain and divers other valuable Commodities All sorts of Nations frequent its Coast by reason of the goodness of its Ports and because its Inhabitants are Courteous Liberal kind to Strangers and faithful in their dealings They are couragious and more warlike than those of Tunquin or China handling all sorts of Arms with no small activity They are Idolaters Christianity was introduced in 1620 and began to flourish but their Kings have of date very much persecuted them Amongst the particularities and rarities of the Country we must place the Lutt an Inundation which in Autumn covers with its Waters almost all the Country it renews from 15 to 15 days remaining only 3 days at a time making the Earth so fruitful that it brings forth its increase twice or thrice a year Their Saroy-Boura Several Rarities here found or matter wherewith certain Swallows make their Nests which after those Birds leave dry and hardned they gather in great quantities which being steeped and moistned in Water serves for Sawce to all sorts of Meat and as formerly Manna communicating such a variety of taste that it seems to be composed of Cinnamon Cloves Pepper and other Spices Their Lignum Aquilae and Calamba come from the same Tree the first from the Trunk of a young Tree the last from the Trunk of an old Tree but this last is much more esteemed than the other both for its odour and vertue A pound of it on the place where it is beaten down is worth 5 Ducats being brought to the Port 15 or 16 and if transported to Japan 200. If some piece be found to make a whole Pillar it is worth 3 or 400 Ducats the pound The Lignum Aquilae amongst other things serves to burn the dead Bodies of their Kings Princes and Priests Wood as heavy as Iron and which consumes not except burnt Among the Wood they use for Buildings there are two sorts which they call uncorruptible whether in Water or Earth their Trees they call Thins the Wood of the one is near as black as Ebony the other near the colour of Yew Both the one and the other taken out of the Bark is smooth and glib so solid and weighty that it sinks to the bottom of the Water and serves also for Anchors for Ships They make Pillars on which they erect their Buildings and before the time of the Lutt they drive Joists and Planks between those Columns and with Canes and Reeds accommodate divers Apartments which they take away in the time of those Inundations that the Water may run the freer TVNQVIN THe Kingdom of TVNQVIN is part on the Sea and part on the Main Land The Kingdom of Tunquin its bounds extent and scituation it bounds on the Sea at the bottom of the Gulph of Cochin-china there where it divides China from Cochin-china and hath about 150 Leagues of Coast On the Land it extends it self from the seventeenth degree of Latitude on this side the Equator unto the twenty third which are likewise 150 Leagues from North to South Its breadth being only about 100 Leagues from East to West Its Parts This Kingdom contains Seven Provinces of which the three most Southernly are Bochin Gehan and Tinhoa the four most Northernly are Beramar Kedom Kenam and Kethay Bochin touches on Cochin-china and the two other advance along the Gulph towards the North amongst the four last Beramar and Kedun are towards China Kenan and Kethay towards the People Layes The King very powerful The King of Tunquin ordinarily entertains a Militia of 50000 Men taken from the three Southernly Provinces and paid by the four Northern because these last lately revolted and the other remained in obedience It s chief Places Kecchio is the chief City of the Kingdom where the King ordinarily resides It is not above twenty miles in circuit but hath a Million of Inhabitants Some Authors will have it called Tunquin that is the Court of the West and that the Kingdom took its name from it The Land hath beautiful Plains and watered with many great Rivers which with the Rains and melting of the Snow which descends from the Mountains that separates it from the Layes the Kingdom of Ciocangue China and Cochin-china make it fruitful by their Inundations rendring it better and more abundant than Cochin-china Yet hath it neither Corn Vines nor Olive Trees It s fertiliy and commodities but they gather Rice twice a year of which they make Bread they fetch in Wine and instead of Oil make use of the matter taken from Swallows Nests of which they have no less quantity than Cochin-china They have neither Asses nor Sheep but many Horses Elephants and Rhinocerotes whose Flesh Skins Bones Teeth Nails and Horns serve for Antidotes against Poyson they have so much Pullain Pigeons Turtles and other Fowl that they give them almost for nothing Amongst their Fruits they have fair Pomgranates which beyond the ordinary excellency of that Fruit hath here a particular and delightful Juice For Fish they make account that in the Seasons there daily goes 10000 Barks out of their Ports to Fish They embrace Christianity The Catholick Religion was so introduced here some years past that there was esteemed to be more than 200000 Christned Souls 200 great Churches and a great quantity of Chapels and Oratories there hath since happened divers changes In these Kingdoms the Portugals have several
about the Meridian because in this position they are nearer to the Earth almost by one semidiameter of the Earth The same Argument is valid as touching the Sun also for his Diameter is not found greater in the Meridian than when he is yet on the Horizon But the Diameter of the Moon is observed to be a little greater in the Meridian than when as yet she is on the Horizon Therefore in the Meridian it is somewhat nigher to us to wit almost one Semidiameter of the Earth CHAP. VII Concerning the substance and constitution of the Earth WE have in the foregoing Chapters considered the qualities or properties of the Earth no regard being taken of its substance or being But now these being declared it is fitting we consider this also that we may know what kind of body the Earth is and how its parts cohere together the which although it may rather rather seem natural yet because it is requisite for the perfect knowledge of the Earth we will here handle briefly leaving the accurate consideration thereof to the Natural Philosopher Proposition I. To declare of what simple and similar Bodies the Earth may consist or be compounded of Of the four Elements of the Earth There are divers opinions of Philosophers concerning this matter The Peripateticks number four Elements of the Earth and the whole sublunary World being now sufficiently known to the very Vulgar Fire Air Water and Earth Many of the Ancients as Democritus and Leucippus determined that the whole World consisted of very little solid pieces which differ only in their various figures shapes and magnitude and them many of the later Philosophers do follow and of late Cartesius endeavoured by such an hypothesis to declare all natural appearances The three Principles of the Earth by Chymists Chymists make three Principles Sal Sulphur and Mercury to whom some do rightly add Caput mortuum or the Dead head when as they three are fruitful But to me doubtful terms and words being laid aside and the things themselves well considered there seem to be five simple Bodies the first Principles of all things By Others Five simple bodies the first principles of all things to wit Water Oyl or Sulphur Salt Earth and a certain Spirit which the Chymists call Mercury For indeed all Bodies and the parts of the Earth are resolved into those five Elementary substances Notwithstanding I deny not that those differ not so much in essence as in the singular variety of their shapes and magnitudes Therefore the whole Earth consisteth of these simple Bodies which are divers ways commixed from whence ariseth so great variety of Bodies which do appear different from one another and similar or Bodies of like parts But the more exquisite declaration of these points belong to Natural Philosophy which I shall have occasion to treat of more at large in the first Volume of my Book of the Arts and Sciences now ready for the Press Proposition II. The Earth is divided into dry and moist parts or into Earth and Water to which some joyn the Atmosphere This is the vulgar division of Geographers and then the Water is taken in a large signification for all that is liquid or moist and fluid and running as the Land is taken for the whole dry and consistent part of the Earth Of the Land and its various bodies of Nature and thereby doth embrace and comprehend such various bodies of Nature to wit First Sand Loam Clay and Mineral Earths Chalk Cinnaber Ochre Terra sigiâ—lata or Saracens Earth Earth of Samos Bole-Armoniack with divers other kinds of Earth Secondly Stones of various sorts the chief among which are Diamonds Emeralds Rubies Saphirs c. Thirdly Mettals among which are Gold Silver Copper Tin Lead Mercury or Quicksilver Iron Steel c. Fourthly Brimstone Salts Niter Alom Bitumen Vitriol Antimony c. Fifthly Herbs Plants c. Of the Water and its parts To the Water are referred first the Seas secondly Rivers and sweet Waters thirdly Lakes and Fens or Marshes fourthly Mineral Waters as hot Baths sowr Waters c. Of the Atmosphere which encompasses the Earth The Atmosphere is that thin and subtile Body which girts and encompasses the Earth towards Heaven and contains the Air Clouds showers of Rain c. Therefore into these three Parts the Earth is fitly divided Proposition III. To expound how the Earth and Waters cleave or hold together and make the Land The Earth not bounded with one Superficies but hath hollow Cavities 1. The Land that is the dry part of the Earth is not bounded with one and that even superficies or surface but she hath many hollow Caves many parts lifted up aloft In her Cavities caves or hollows which are here and there found round about the whole Earth the Sea or Ocean is contained and therefore part of the Earthly superficies is covered with Waters Those hollows or cavities are not made of an even hollowness but have here and there Rocks and elevated parts and elsewhere they have Gulphs and swallows sunk very deep So the part of the Earth appearing out above the Waters hath certain as it were Navels in its middle and some parts are more or less raised up or sunk down than others So it cometh to pass that the Water environing the whole Earth is hindred that it overwhelms not the whole Earth but the higher parts and such as appear above the Waters are Islands of which some are great and some small Mouths holes Pipes other conveyances in the body of the Earth 2. Besides that continual Channel in the Earth in the outward superficies within also in the solid body of the Earth there are innumerable Mouths holes swallows windings conveyances deeps pipes and huge vast Receivers in some of which there is the Sea which by that secret conveyance are joyned to the Channel of the common Sea in some again there is Sweet Waters Rivers Streams In some spirits or else a sulphury and smoking substance Seneca saith rightly He gives too much way to his eye-sight who believeth not that there are in the hidden and secret bosom of the Earth Bays of a vast Sea Neither do I perceive what may hinder that there may not be some Sea-shore and the Sea received by hidden passages There is therefore no cause of doubting of there being many hollows in the very solid Earth For verily we conjecture at it by these means First by the Rivers which are found in many places where Earth is digged even to a notable depth which is frequent in Mines Secondly in some places the profundity of the Sea is beyond all sounding or measure Thirdly there are some Caves in the Earth In the Western part of Hispaniola is a Mountain of a great height being hollow within with many Caves in which Rivers of Waters are thrown down headlong with so great sound and rushing noise of streams that the very fall of those Waters may be heard
five miles distance Fourthly some Gulphs or Whirlpools are found in the Sea Fifthly Earthquakes do also prove the being of Cavities under the Earth Sixthly some Rivers bury themselves under the Earth as Niger Tigris c. Seventhly Salt-springs which without doubt for the greatest part spring and flow from the Sea are found in many places Eightly so in many places the grounds at the entrance of men walking tremble and shake as about the Abby of St. Omer in Flanders in the Province of Brabant die Peel Proposition IV. The Superficies or surface of the Lands is continual but that of the Waters is not so Indeed the Superficies of the Earth or Land appearing out above the Waters is continued or always the same to the superficies of the Channels of the Sea and this of the Sea again is continued to the other parts of the Land appearing above One continual superficies of the Ocean Bays and Rivers So there is one continual superficies of the Ocean the Baies and Rivers but not of all Waters because there are some Lakes which are not joyned with the Ocean in the superficies as the Lake Parime and the Caspian Sea Proposition V. It is certain how or in what manner the parts of the Earth which are removed from the surface that is from our habitation towards the Center Some men think that the Water is in the bottom about the Center of the Earth The body of the Earth within according to Gilbert an English man is a hard Loadstone but it is most likely true that the Earth occupies that place Gilbert an English man is of opinion that the body of the Earth within is nothing else but a most hard Loadstone but that those parts to which men have admittance by digging and in which Herbs grow and we also live are as it were the shell or crust of the Earth wherein continual generations and corruptions are made * See Fig. But Cartesius is of a different opinion See Scheme Cartesius his Opinion is not much different from this who thinketh that there are three Regions or Parts of divers substance in the body of the Earth The most inward Region of the Earth he deemeth to be about the Center thereof the second he judgeth to be thick and dusky of very small parts the third he thinketh wherein Men are employed to be made up of little parcels not well cleaving together But indeed touching this thing there can scarcely any certainty be affirmed It is manifest by the hot-Baths that in very many places under the Earth fire and fumes are lifted up from Sulphur Proposition VI. The consistency or standing and fast cleaving together of the Earth is from Salt In all kinds of Earths may be found a certain kind of Salt The Artificial resolving of the Parts of the Earth sheweth that in all Earths may be found a certain kind of Salt and so much the more as the harder the body is a few Oily ones being excepted as in Mettals Stones c. and that the concretion or hard growing together of all things is by reason of salt is manifest by stones which we may by Art make very hard with salt bur if you separate the salt from the earth she will no longer cleave or stick together but will be a powder neither can it be reduced to hardness without the admixtion of salt thereto Proposition VII The kinds of Earths are divers ways mixed together in the Earth Of Metals found in Mines Thus in Mines are found small pieces of Gold Silver Lead c. not heaped together and joyned apart from others but both mixed among themselves and also with unprofitable earth according to the least parts that Artificers not at the first sight but by divers signs do find out what may be contained in any Metalline earth In the same manner in the Fields sand is mixed with clay or loam lime salt c. Of the different sorts of Earths as did appear by the Well digged at Amsterdam When as on a certain time at Amsterdam for making a Well the earth was digged out even to the depth of 232 foot these sorts of earth were shewed to the beholders viz. of Garden-earth 7 foot of Black-earth fitting for fire which is called Peat 9 foot of Soft-clay 9 foot of Sand 8 foot of Earth 4 foot of Clay 10 foot of Earth 4 foot of Sand upon which the Houses of Amsterdam are wont to be rammed and paved 10 foot of Clay 2 foot of White-loam 4 foot of Dry-earth 5 foot of muddy 1 foot of Sand 14 foot of Sandy-clay 3 foot of Sand mixt with Clay 5 foot of Sand mixt with Sea-fish shells 4 foot then a bottom of Clay to the depth of 102 foot and lastly of loam 31 foot where the digging ceased and they came to Water The Figure of which see among the Schemes Proposition VIII The Cavities of the Earth and as well the outward disposition thereof and the position of its parts are not perpetually the same but are at divers times divers The water of the Seamaketh divers changes and ruins in the earth where likewise lye hid Spirits and Sulphureous Substances Indeed not only the Water of the Sea maketh divers changes and ruins in the parts of the earth whilst certain holes are stopt up some are made more broad but also Spirits and Sulphury Substances lying hid here and there in the earth when they begin to encrease and to be resolved into Vapours do impetuously shake and thrust forwards the parts of the earth as it is manifest by Earthquakes And it is likely that such like motions are made in the interiour parts and bowels of the earth the greatest part of which we feel not neither perceive But we will speak of the mutual changing of the water and earth in the Superficies of the earth in the eighteenth Chapter The Earth is divided into Land and Waters The Superficies of the Earth extant out of the Water by the Interflux of the Sea is distinguished into these four parts 1. Into great Continents or great Islands of which four are reckoned by us 1. The Old World whose parts are Asia Africa and Europe The bounds of this Continent are On the North the Frozen and Tartarian Ocean On the East the Pacifick and Indian Ocean On the South the Southern Ocean On the West the Atlantick Ocean 2. The New World or America whose parts are Meridionalis Septentrionalis The bounds of it are On the North Davis Streights On the East the Atlantick Ocean On the South the Pacifick Ocean On the West the Streights of Magellan 3. The Polary North-land or Greenland is every where encompassed by the Sea and Streights 4. The South-land and Land of Magellan yet undiscovered 2. Into Peninsulas or Chersonesus which are parts of those Continents Round whose Latitude and Longitude are equal about Africa it self Peloponesus the Chersonesus of Grecia Chersonesus Taurica or Tartaria
Precopensis Cambaja Long among which are The Chersonesus of Malacca adjoyning to India Cimbrica or Jutland adhering to Holsatia Borea adjoyning to Tartaria The North and South parts of America California Jucatan The Chersonesus of Thracia Nova Francia Ionia Cindensis Mindensis Of Affinity to Peninsulas Italy Greece Acaia Spain Norway Sweden Lapland Asia minor Arabia Beach a Region of Magellan and New Guiney Indostan Cochinchina New-England Monomotapa Camboia 3. Islands which may be considered in four sorts viz. Great as England Japan Island Canada Sumatra Madagascar Borneo Nova Zembla California Indifferent as Sicilia Ireland Hispaniola Cuba Java Major Celebes Creet Luconia Sardinia Friesland Terra Nova Mindanoa Ceilan Small as Gilolo Amboina Timor Corsica Majorca Cyprus Negropont Sealand Jamaica The very small ones in which we consider 1. The more famous Solitaria Rhodes Malta Lemnos Helena St. Thomas 2. A knot or heap of Isles together as The Canary Isles The Flandrian or Caribbe Isles The Hesperides Those of the Gulph of Mexico Of Maldives Of Japan About Madagascar The Moluccoes and Isles of Bauda The Philippine Isles The Isles of Theeves The Isles in the Aegean Sea The Isles about England The Isles of Solomon 4. The Isthmuses Between Egypt and Arabia or Africa and Asia That of Corinth between Peloponesus and Achaia The Isthmus of Panama or America the longest of all Between Jutland and Holsatia Between Malacca and India OF Absolute Geography SECT III. Wherein the constitution of the Land or the dry part of the Earth in four Chapters is declared CHAP. VIII Concerning the natural division of the parts of the Earth made from the Ocean flowing round about it THE things which in this Chapter we shall deliver concerning the division of the Earth and in the fifteenth Chapter we shall teach touching the division of the Sea will greatly facilitate the young Student in the understanding the distinction of the surface and parts of the Earth and to fix them the faster in the memory they are carefully and fully to be read and to be compared with the Terrestrial Artificial Globe and Maps Proposition I. A certain portion of Earth is covered with Water and a certain part stands out above the Surface of the Water Of parts of the Earth covered and of parts not covered with water but yet there are some parts which at some time are covered with Waters and some parts are free from them and conspicuous as many Islands by Norway Scotland and other Countries Add to these the beds or shelves of Sand and Seashores But seeing these parts are so small we take no account of them at present neither will we move that Question here Whether the Land takes up the greater part of the Superficies of the Earth or whether the Water We will treat of this briefly in the eighteenth Chapter Now we will confider the part standing up or extant above the Waters and we will call it Lands or Islands Proposition II. The Earth standing out above the waters not one but many Lands of which may be five sorts The Land or Earth standing out above the Waters is not one and continual but many Lands divided and disjoyned from one another by the Water flowing it between them We will make five differences of them to wit 1. The greatest Lands or Islands 2. The great ones 3. The mean ones 4. The little ones and 5. The least ones We will treat of the cause and original of these Lands extant or above the Waters or of the Islands in the eighteenth Chapter for there will be a more commodious place to treat of this Matter or Subject But all Lands extant above the Waters were to be called Islands seeing that an Island is no other thing then a Land begirt with Waters All Lands extant above the waters may be called Islands yet the common use of speaking hath taken away from the greatest Lands this name because that they are so great and of such a huge tract and continuance that the Circuit of the Water is thereby the less to be perceived Insomuch that they are usually called the firm Land and also great Continents And indeed by reason of their vast bulk and greatness unto which the magnitude of other Islands being compared is small they deserve this peculiar name therefore we will also call them firm Lands and great Continents Proposition III. The firm Lands four The greatest Lands Continents or Islands not contending with any about their name are four First the Old World Secondly the New World or America Thirdly the Polar Land Artick or Artick World and Fourthly the South-Land or Magellanick Land The old world most famous with its bounds c. The Old World the most famous of those four and only known of the Ancients which we inhabit is commonly divided by the Sea into two parts but joyned together by an Isthmus or narrow neck of Land one whereof is Africa and the other Asia and Europe It is invironed by the Ocean in this manner from the East by the Chinean Ocean and the Pacifick Sea from the South by the Indian Ocean and Aethiopick Sea from the West by the Atlantick Sea and from the North by the Frozen or North Sea the White Sea and Tartarian Ocean The division of this Continent of which we have spoken is made by the Mediterranean Sea and the Arabick Bay or Red-sea Africa divided from Asia and Europe For the distance of the Bays that is the Latitude or breadth of the intercedent Tract is not greater then about 30 miles if which were away Africa would make a peculiar firm Land and would increase the number The distance of the Old World towards the East is but a very little space from the New World or America The distance of the old world from the new about the Streight of Anian if only this be existent in the Universe of Nature And the distance of Europe from America is also very little between Norway and Newfoundland Also the Old World is but a very small distance from the Pole Artick-land about the Streight of Waigats from the South Polar or Magellan about New Guiney The New World or America is thus begirt by the Ocean On the East by the Atlantick Sea The new world with its bounds c. On the South by the Magellanick Streight On the West by the Pacifick Sea and on the North by a Sea unknown or uncertain except Davis Streight This World also wants but little but that it may be cut into two Islands to wit at Panama and Nombre de Dios where the confluence of the Pacifick and Atlantick Ocean is by a small Tract of earth intercepted It is distant from the Old World a very little space as before noted The Polar Artick and South Land with its bounds c. The Polar Artick and the South or Austral Land are begirt round with the Sea the first with the North Sea whose parts are
the Streights of Davis Waigats and Anian This South-land with the Pacifick-Sea Indian Ocean and Magellanick Streight The Polar Artick Land hath a very little distance at the Streight of Waigats from the Old World from America at the Streight of Davis But it is removed from the South-land by a huge space The Polar Austral or rather the South-land is very nigh to the Old World at the running out Tract of New Guiney as also to America at the Streight of Magellan But concerning the South-land only we have assuredly discovered that it is round about environed with the Sea and is separated from the rest Concerning the rest of the Lands to wit the Old World America and the Pole Artick World the matter and discovery is not yet certain whether they be round about begirt by the Sea and separated from one another but yet it is very likely they are so by reason of divers Bays and Entrances of starts running within the Earth The South-land only as yet is fully sailed about this could not be hitherto performed in the rest For the Old World as yet hath not been sailed round beyond Waigats Streight although the whole Western Southern Eastern shore hath been viewed and that but a little part of the North shore remaineth to be discovered America hath been sailed round only part of her Septentrional shore being excepted by reason of the uncertainty of the Streights or narrow Seas Thus have we declared the placing of the greatest Islands or Continents Proposition IV. Ten great Ilandâ— We reckon up ten great Islands on the Surface of the Land which are these following 1. Britain comprehending England and Scotland it is esteemed the greatest of all Islands which are commonly so called those being excluded which in The foregoing Proposition we have related at large 2. Japan which in Maps and Globes hath a lesser magnitude than it ought to have for they which have been there affirm that it is as great if not greater than Britain 3. Luconia one of the Philippine Isles which also from its Metropolitan Town is called Manilha 4. Madagascar or St. Laurence seated on the Eastern shore of Africa 5. Sumatra one of the Indian Isles 6. Borneo not far from Sumatra 7. Island not far from Norway 8. Newfoundland nigh unto Canada 9. Between Davis Streight and Hudsons Streight in the Northern Ocean lyeth a great Island about the Polar Land which according to Visher's Vniversal Tables is in form round 10. Nova Zembla nigh unto Russia To these is California to be also numbred if that be an Island which it is esteemed to be and not a part of America Proposition V. We number up ten mean Islands on the Surface of the Earth viz. 1. Java one of the Indian Isles 2. Cuba nigh unto Hispaniola 3. Hispaniola 4. Ireland nigh unto England 5. Crete or Candia not far from Greece 6. Sicily nigh unto Italy 7. Ceylan one of the Indian Isles 8. Mindanao one of the Philippine Isles 9. Sardinia seated in the Mediterranean Sea 10. Celebes in the Indian Ocean To these may be numbred Friezland an Isle not far from Island Proposition VI. Ten little Isles We will also number ten little Islands on the Surface of the Earth to wit 1. Gilolo one of the Indian Isles 2. Amboina not far from Gilolo 3. Timor one of the Indian Isles 4. Jamaica in the Bay of Mexico 5. Sealand in Denmark 6. Corsica seated in the Mediterranean Sea 7. Eubaea now Negropont seated in the Mediterranean Sea 8. Majorca nigh unto Spain 9. Cyprus 10. Isabella in the Pacifick Ocean There are more Islands which may be reduced to this rank but we shall refer them to the last order of them as more commodious Proposition VII The least Isles Of the least Islands there is almost an innumerable multitude on the Surface of the Earth among which these following deserve a peculiar consideration First the famous Solitary Islands Secondly those which are found in great numbers in some Tract of the Ocean and for their Neighbourhood are comprehended under one name We shall term them in general a body or fry of Islands because we are left destitute of a more fitting name The Tract of Sea wherein these Isles lye is called the Archipelago The notable Solitary Islands are in the Mediterranean Sea Rhodes Malta Ivisa Minorca Chios Cephalonia c. In the Atlantick Ocean between Africa and Brazile lieth the Island of St. Helen where also the Island of the Ascension the Isle of St. Thomas is placed in the very Equator The Island Madera over against the Gaditane Streight Zocotora seated before the mouth of the Arabian Bay Gothland in the Baltick Sea Among the notable Solitary Isles those are also worthy of remembrance which swim on the waters of which see Chapter eighteenth Proposition VIII There are fifteen fries or files of the least Islands numbred on the Surface of the Earth The lesser Isles to wit 1. The Canary Islands in the Atlantick Sea 2. The Isles of Azores in the Northern Sea 3. The Islands of Hesperides or the Green Islands over against Cape Verd. 4. The Islands of Maldives in Indian Ocean 5. The Lucar Islands between Florida and Cuba nigh unto America 6. The Princes Islands between Hispaniola and America to which I refer and reduce all the least Islands seated in the Bay of Mexico 7. The Camercan Isles lying before Hispaniola 8. The Mascarenian Islands between Madagascar and Africa 9. The Molucco Islands seated in the Indian Ocean 10. The Philippine Islands in the Pacifick Ocean 11. The Aegean Islands 12. The Japonian Isles 13. The Islands of Solomon in the Pacifick Sea 14. The Isles of Theeves in the Archipelago of St. Lazarus 15. The Isles of Banda nigh unto Java 16. The Islands scituate near England and Scotland as the Hebrides Orcades Sourlings Sporades c. 17. The Islands between the Magellanick Streight and the Streight Le Maire Other Isles may be reckoned Here I do not reckon to these those Islands which lye close on the shore of some Continents in great numbers as on the Coast of China Norway Brazile Davises Streight c. Unto this rank also the Islands in great Rivers are to be referred and marshalled as such as are found in the River Nile in the River of St. Laurence of Canada in the River Wolga and in some other Rivers as also those which are in certain Lakes as in the Lake Zembre a Lake in Africa in South America where the Islands of Lead are scituate in a Lake c. But all or most of these Isles especially these aforegoing together with several others I have largely treated of in the Geographical Description of the four Parts of the World in their fit places to which I refer the Reader Proposition IX The Parts of all Lands or Islands are not of the same shape or figure but are unlike The more famous differences of these are a Peninsula and an Isthmus
therefore determine to make demonstration à priori by which Archimedes proved concerning all Liquid Bodies that the superficies was spherical this supposed as a thing certain consisting in the Earth or in part of the Earth For Archimedes supposeth in his demonstration three things The demonstration of Archimedes 1. In the middle of it the Earth hath some kind of Center and therefore is of a spherical figure 2. That this is the nature of all liquid bodies that the parts of them lying equally or in an equal distance from the Center of the Earth and continuous amongst themselves the lesser pressed is expelled by the more pressed which he sheweth from experience 3. That every part of a liquid body is pressed by the liquid body above it to the Perpendicular in respect of the Center of the Earth if so be that this liquid body be descending or pressed by some other body Besides these three Suppositions Archimedes useth a certain Geometrical Proposition which is not found demonstrated in the Elements and therefore he demonstrateth the same which is this If any superficies be cut from whatsoever places passing through one point and every section be the periphery of the Circle having that point its Center this superficies is spherical whose Center shall be the point named Now this is very easie to shew For let the superficies of any body be cut through the point D in the plain I F K E P See Scheme and let the line of the section I F K E P be the periphery of the Circle having it for its Center and in every section made by D let the periphery of the Circle having the Center D be found We must shew that this superficies is spherical and D is its Center D its point that is all the points of this line are equally distant from the point D for we may conceive as many right lines as we will draw from the point D to the other points of the proposed superficies Therefore these must be demonstrated to be equal mutually one to the other let any one of those drawn from D to the superficies be taken and through that and through the right line D F let a plain be drawn this plain therefore cutting the superficies will make the periphery according to the Hypothesis wherefore that being drawn shall be equal to the right line D F and so we shall shew concerning all drawn from the point D that they are equal to D F it self by reason that they are all mutually equal one to another from whence we infer that this superficies is spherical having for a Center the point D for a spherical superficies is a crooked superficies within which is a certain point from whence all the right lines being drawn are equal at the superficies This premised the spherical superficies of every liquid body is demonstrated in this manner Let any consisting matter be E F G H let D be the Center of the Earth and let us conceive this liquor to be cut in a plain passage through D let the section made on the superficies of the liquor be the line E F G H but we must first shew that this line E F G H is crooked viz. the periphery or arch of the periphery of the Circle whose Center is D But if it may be brought to pass that there may be no such periphery the right lines drawn from D to that will be unequal let the unequal drawn lines be D E D G to wit D G will be greater than D E and let D G be the greatest of all which are drawn from D and let D E be the least let the other right line D F be drawn twice cutting the Angle G D E at EFGH so that this line D F shall be greater than D E but less than D G then let the periphery or arch of the Circle I F K H be described in the Center D the internal D E in this same plain the periphery of which will cut the right line D E protracted beyond the point E viz. in the point I but the right line D G on this side G viz. in the point K. Moreover in the Center D the interval D L which is lesser than D E let the periphery or arch L M N be described beneath or within the liquor in the plain I F K H therefore the parts of the liquor contained within D L N or about the periphery L M N by an equal distance are placed and are continuous from the Center D but those parts which are about M N are more pressed than those that are about L M because they are pressed by a greater weight viz. a greater quantity of water being above them than those at L M. Therefore the parts near L M being less pressed are expelled from the parts near M N and these shall possess their place neither shall the liquor consist but let the liquor be supposed to consist and be quiet there shall be then a liquor consisting and not consisting which will be absurd wherefore the right lines drawn from D to the line E F G H are not unequal but equal and therefore the line E F G H is the Arch of the Periphery of the Circle whose Center is D. The same is the demonstration concerning all places cutting the Superficies of the Liquors and passing through D viz. it will shew the Section of the Arch of the Periphery of the Circle of the Center D. Now by reason that the Superficies of Liquors is such that if it be cut by Planes in any sort passing by D the Section may always be the Periphery of the Circle Therefore it followeth from the aforesaid demonstrated Proposition that the Superficies of Liquors is Spherical having the Center the point D which is the Center of the Earth therefore the Superficies of the Ocean is Spherical having the same Center which is the Center of the Earth which will also be manifest from the confirmation of the following Proposition Proposition II. The Ocean is not of a greater height than the Shores of the Earth are and therefore the Earth and Water are almost of the same Altitude high Mountains excepted The truth of this Proposition is demonstrated from the former Proposition For if the Superficies of the Ocean be Spherical The Earth and Water are almost of the same Altitude and of the same Center with the Superficies of the Earth and the Sea be no higher about the Shores than the Earth therefore neither shall the middle of the Ocean be higher than the Earth but its Superficies with the Superficies of the other shall make one and the same Spherical Superficies But without the former Proposition we shall shew this Theorem à posteriori after this manner as the preceeding Proposition may be shewed from this if that they confide not in the former demonstration by reason of the assumed Hypothesis 1. Experience testifieth that Water being free and not
hindred doth flow from more high places to places more low If therefore the place about the Shore was not so high as in the middle of the Ocean part of the Sea would flow from the middle of the Ocean to the Shore and would neither consist or be calm which yet is not found in the tranquillity of the Air. 2. If that the Ocean far remote from the Shores were more high than the Sea at the Shore that Altitude would be discovered a far longer interval than a Spherical Superficies doth admit of yea it would be seen from the same distance from which the parts of the Ocean intercepted between that Altitude and the Shore are seen And experience testifieth that it cannot be beheld from a greater distance but that by degrees the more remote part is detected after the more near when we come to Mediterranean places to the Shore And by how much any part is more vicine to the shore by so much it is first or by a larger interval beheld from the shore Therefore the part of the Ocean removed from the shore is not higher than that part that is nigh unto it Wherefore the Ocean is of the same Altitude every where both in the middle and at the shore and not higher than the Earth 3. Mariners in the midst of the Ocean and deep Sea although they apply their Mathematical Instruments yet find it no higher there than in the parts near the shore which certainly could not be if that the Sea had any Altitude elevated as a Tower or Mountain For as by Instruments we find the Altitude of Towers or Mountains above the subjected parts of the Earth so also if that there were any Altitude of the middle Ocean above the vicine parts it could not be obstructed and avoid the subtilty of Instruments 4. Also here and there in the middle of the Ocean are found Islands and that in great number in some parts which are near to the Continents or great Islands Therefore the middle of the Ocean is not higher than the Earth because it is not higher than the Shores of those Islands 5. No cause can be shew'd why Water in the middle of the Ocean should be higher and not flow into the Chanels of Rivers if that their Waters be more depresâ—ed For by experience we find that Water any where scituated moveth to the vicine parts and these are less high which have been the cause of so many inundations From these I think we sufficiently collect that the Waters of the Ocean are not higher than the shoars of the Land Seeing therefore the Altitude of very few shoars is elevated little more than the vicine Mediterranean Land and in most lesser seeing that the Altitude of the Lands from the shoars to the Mediterranean places increaseth and riseth into Hills thence we conclude that the superficies of the Ocean is not higher than the superficies of the Land Now that the Altitude of the Land from the shoars to the Mediterranean places augmenteth or that the Mediterranean places are higher than the shoars is proved from the flux of Rivers most of which arise in Mediterranean places and flow to the Ocean So then at least the Mediterranean parts are somewhat more elevated than the shoars because the flux is from these unto them for Water floweth from the more high parts to places more inferiour Now that some are somewhat depressed lower than the Water we shall not go about to deny but they are either defended by the height of their shoars or by banks or other interposed earth Now these Banks are raised for the most part not because of the great Altitude of the Ocean being tranquillous and in its natural state but by reason of its impetuous motion caused by the Winds or from some other cause Corollary Corollary Therefore they are deceived who will have the Waters of the Ocean to be higher than the Earth and flie to a miraculous providence by which the inundation of the Ocean on the Land and drowning of the World is hindred and restrained For we have shewed that the superficies of the Water and Earth are one and almost the same to wit spherical and that many parts of the Earth at least the shoars have a greater Altitude than the middle of the Ocean and that this is the cause that the Ocean cannot overflow the Lands Which greater Altitude if it be elevated in some shoars the Banks being broken or the Water being augmented or forced to them in great abundance cause inundations Neither is it altogether impossible or contrary to nature that the whole Earth should be covered with Water as we shall shew in the end of the Chapter Proposition III. Why the Sea being beheld from the shoar seemeth to arise in a greater Altitude and tumor by how much it is more remote The middle of the Ocean by some said to be many miles higher than the Shoars It is a fallacy of the sight or of the estimating faculty which hath brought many into this errour so that they have endeavoured to defend that the middle of the Ocean is many miles higher than the Shoars But it is a wonder that none of them have taken notice of daily Experiments in the ordinary course of our life in which this fallacy is sufficiently manifest For if that we look on any Pavement or floor stretched at length or any row of Pillars the more remote parts of the Pavement will appear more high than the vicine parts so that from thence from our place to the most remote the Floor will seem by degrees more and more to elevate which yet notwithstanding it is every where of the same Altitude After the same mode it is with the Waters of the Ocean for if on the Shoar you use a Geodetical Instrument commodious to measure places withal you shall find no elevation of the remote part of the Ocean above the Shoar but rather a little depression so that the Waters sink beneath the Horizon of the Shoars Those that are versed in the Opticks declare the cause of the fallacy Let A be the Eye See Scheme and let it survey the pavement or superficies of the Water extended at length unto the long space a e. Let the Angle a A e be divided into equal parts or four Angles which are e A d d A c c A b b A a from the right drawn A b A c A d to wit the more remote shall be far more great as appeareth from the Diagram viz. e d is greater than d e and d e greater than b c and b c than a h. Although these parts are very unequal yet they will appear equal because they appear under the equal Angles a A b b A c c A d d A c and the Estimative faculty will judge them to be removed an equal distance from the Eye A in which there is a great deception and therefore will judge the lines A b A c A d
A c to be A f A g A h A k as they are equal a b f g g h h k whence the parts b c cd d e seem elevated as if they were f g g h h k. Or more briefly because the Eye is more elevated to behold Objects remote than it is depressed at things near therefore remote things are judged to be elevated and those nigh depressed or because we compare the elevation of our Eye to parts vicine therefore we judge them depressed but we cannot so compare the elevation of our Eye to parts remote wherefore they seem more elevated than in truth they are So therefore we see from this that the Ocean to one that beholdeth it from the Shoar seemeth higher by how much it is the more remote from thence I say it is no probation that it is more elevated Some render another Reason viz. that therefore a greater Altitude is to be attributed to the middle of the Ocean than to the Earth by reason that they suppose that otherwise it cannot come to pass that water should flow from the Ocean to Fountains of Rivers which Fountains are in Mediterranean planes seeing that no water floweth but from an higher place unto one more low depressed But I shall shew it to be performed by another way in the Chapter where I treat of the Original of Rivers or Fountains And so also any one may inferr that the Mountain of Teneriff is not so high as also other Mountains as to be beheld in the Ocean for so long an interval at four degrees except that the foot of the Mountain or the Ocean be higher than the Sea at the Shoar of Teneriff But what Answer is to be returned to this is manifest from the Eleventh Chapter See Chap. II. whee we have treated of the Original or heights of Mountains Proposition IV. To exhibit the cause and Original of Gulphs Bays and Streights of the Ocean The cause of Gulphs Bays and Streights in the Ocean These Bays in proper manner of Speech are the Sinus of the Land not of the Ocean but rather Arms branches and procurrent parts of the Ocean But more properly we may term those to be sinus or Bays of the Ocean where the Ocean receiveth into it self Peninsula's of the Earth as where it receiveth Jutland the Chersonesus of Malacca California and the like But the usual mode of Speech hath so obtained that contrary to the nature of things the word is so taken in the first signification and a Sinus or Bay of the Ocean is the same with a branch or procurrent part of the Ocean The cause of Bays The cause of these Sinus or Bays is by reason that the extant parts of the Earth are in some places mutually rent from one another and divaricated so that the part of the Earth interposed between the divaricated parts is more depressed than the superficies of the Ocean therefore the water always tending to the more depressed part floweth into the divaricated parts and runneth forward so far until it meeteth the elevation of the Earth for here it can go no farther and therefore it receiveth its end or bound The same is the cause of the Streights of the Ocean or Sea The cause of the separation or divarication of the parts of the Earth which is required to the existence of Bays and Streights is the violent motion of the Sea when it is forced by Winds or some other cause which seeing that it is done almost every day so that it beateth the Lands with its waves thence it cometh to pass that in progress of time in some parts of the Shoars the Land is so shaken that it falleth on the rushing in of the Ocean and maketh way for it and if the Land adjoyning to the shoar be depressed Bays do more easily arise viz when the Land of the shoar is broken through the water will overflow the adjacent Lands and so make a Bay if that the land be so depressed or consist of so much matter which may easily be removed by the violent waves And so it is manifest that Bays and Streights may be made and exist anew but thence we may not conclude that all Bays and Streights that are at this day were so generated for it may be that some existed with the Earth it self or Ocean and therefore coeval with the very Ocean For there is no record of the making of any new Bay of the Sea or Streight although the Ancient Grecians fabulously reported such concerning the generation of the Gaditan or Herculean Streights viz. they said that the Mountain Calpe on the Spanish Coast and the Mountain Abyla on the African Coast were one Mountain but separated by Hercules whence they called these Mountains Hercules Pillars and the Streights Hercules Streights The Streights between Sicily and Italy But as concerning the Streights between Sicily and Italy which the Ancients believed to be caused by an incursion of the Sea we ought less to doubt that such small Streights should be generated for we deny not but such like may be generated at this day Also Bays may be made of Streights and Streights may become Bays For Example If that either of the Mouths of Magellans Streights or of the Streights of Manilhas should be obstructed those Streights would become long Bays on the contrary if that the Isthmus between Asia and Africa should be taken away then the whole Red Sea would become a Streight through which a Ship might sail from the Indian Ocean into the Mediterranean Sea Proposition V. Whether the Ocean every where be of the same Altitude That all the parts of the Ocean are of the same Altitude being in its natural constitution and all impediments removed is manifest from the first Proposition by which we shewed that the superficies of the Ocean is spherical and that its Center is the Center of the Earth hence it plainly followeth that it must be of the same Altitude in all its parts But here is a doubt whether there be not some causes that may render some parts of the Ocean more high than other This is most worthy of consideration and is also of great moment when we consult concerning the digging through of Isthmusses and conjoyning parts of the Sea Many will have that the Ocean and Earth is higher about the North and lower about the Equator So Aristotle lib. 2. De Coelo Cap. 2. they alledge this Reason That the Ocean seemeth to flow from the North Regions as from a Fountain But we cannot conclude any thing certain from this for whether the Northern Lands especially the North Channels be more high or lower than the Channels of the Lands near the Equator is yet doubted neither is it sufficiently proved from the motion because this is not general or is not found in all the Northern Regions And if this motion of the Ocean from the North should be granted yet thence it would not follow that the Ocean was there
the Winds 4. From the ruin or subsidency of the Channels or Shoars also if that the bottom of the Channel be made higher in progress of time by the fall of the Sand or Mud. Proposition VII The Ocean hath no Fountains but is contained within the Cavities of the Earth yet it doth not remain always the same The Ocean hath no Fountains Experience testifieth that waters of Rivers proceed from Fountains or Springs and because that this hath been for so many Centuries of years it thence necessarily followeth that that water which continually floweth from the Springs to the Sea returneth through subterranean passages or some other ways to the same Fountain After the same manner there were Philosophers in Old time said that the Sea sprang from certain Fountains Neither could the magnitude and perpetuity of the Ocean withdraw them from this Opinion for they said that it returned unto the same Fountains by some hollowness of the Earth or by some other mode that so they might render a cause of the perpetual flux This Opinion may be answered after this manner If that the Ocean have Fountains they must either be in the extant part of the Earth or in that part which is covered by the Ocean that is in the very Channel or bosom of the Ocean but they are not in the extant part of the Earth for Men have no where found them Neither may you object That peradventure they are in the unknown Lands of the North or South for this would be a part of high confidence to require that to be granted which carrieth no weight of reason with it especially seeing that at not a few of the Northern lands the Sea is found frozen up with Ice and in most of those Regions hitherto discovered no Springs are found Therefore the Fountains of the Ocean are not in the extant part of the Earth It remaineth that we prove that they 〈◊〉 neither in the part of the Earth covered with waters that is in the bosome of the Sea If that they were in this there would be no more distance from the Center of the Earth than the waters of the Ocean it self and therefore there would be no flux from them but the water would rest in them whose nature it is not to be moved from places depressed to places more high For the Fountains of all Rivers are more elevated than the waters that they send forth But some may object That this is a violent motion because that the Channel of the Ocean and the Land is perforated within with many hollownesses and pits call them what you please which proceed for a long Tract under the Earth until they are let into some other place of the Channel of the Ocean So that there are two Orifices of these Channels which may have a sufficient great Latitude and Extension within the Earth going forth into the Channel of the Ocean therefore it may be that the water from the Ocean may flow into one of these two Orifices and some forth of the other as from a Fountain which may be illustrated by an easie Diagram And by that reason that nothing hindreth but that there may be many of these subterraneous passages and no absurdity thence followeth therefore it may seem probable to some that there are many of these Fountains in the very Channel of the Sea But this imagination is vain and not agreable to the properties of water for water having fallen into either of these Channels would not go forth by the other Orifice but would rest filled in it except moved by some violent cause For although water should be pressed and stirred by water forcing in on the Orifice yet it could not exonerate it self by the other Orifice because that water incumbeth on this Orifice also no less than the incumbing water at the former Orifice which may thus be proved by experience See Scheme Let there be in any Vessel water ABCD AB is the superficies of the water lying equally and spherically but let in a stick RPEF into the middle of the vessel which may perforate it by an oblique passage so that the part of the vessel A shall be higher than the whole of the part of the vessel B therefore the water as well on the part A as on the part B should for example flow through g h into this passage and fill it up and should not be effused through either of the Orifices not through g because this is higher nor through h because though it be more depressed than g yet the water flowing from the part B and perpendicularly tending to the bottom of the vessel would prohibit the influx From these it is manifest that the Ocean hath no Fountain but is perpetually contained within its own Channel But somewhat may be objected against this Objections which is worthy of consideration First That at some part or other of the Ocean there is always a violent external moving cause as Winds Fluxes Refluxes mutations of the Earth and the like Therefore these cause that sometimes in some one part of the Ocean and sometimes in another there is a greater Altitude and abundancy of water than in the other parts and therefore that higher water falling into the subterraneous passages is again poured forth into another part of the Channel of the Ocean where there is a lesser Altitude of water by reason of that external cause and where the incumbent water then less resisteth the eruption or efflux because it is moved another way by an external cause for although this may be yet it cannot be proved by experience neither can the contrary that is this be demonstrated to be so therefore at least the truth is uncertain and we must doubt concerning this Problem Now that there are such subterraneous pits or passages in the Channel of the Ocean cannot be denied and those places of the Ocean seem to shew them to wit where there is an immense profundity seeing there is no such in the vicine parts To this I answer although we should admit of those subterraneous passages yet therefore it doth not follow that we should grant that they proceed to another part of the Channel of the Ocean or go forth into it and if that this should be granted yet seeing that there are no such passages in all places and that these external causes sometimes are predominate in one part of the Ocean and sometimes in another there is no consequence from the objection that the Fountains of the Ocean are in any certain place but that it floweth sometimes from one part of the Channel and sometimes from another so that that flux continueth no longer than the external cause continueth 2. Some one may thus seem to argue The flux of the Ocean is perpetually discerned from the Northern Land or quarter toward the South between Europe and the Northern America also between Asia and the Northern America Yet notwithstanding no part of the Ocean or
many places but in some in greater quantity than in others Serpents on the Coast of Malabar On the Coast of Malabar and at Cambaja Serpents are discovered on the superficies of the water this is a sign to Sea-men that they are near to those Regions About four miles from New Spain many Roots Bulrushes and Leaves like unto Fig-leaves float on the water which they eat and are in tast like unto Coleworts In the description of the first Navigation of the Dutch unto the Streights of Magellan we read that on the 12th of January in Anno 1599. the water of the Ocean not far from the Silver-River or Rio de laplata in Brasil appeared of a red and bloody colour but being drawn up in a bucket or the like when that they had more throughly viewed it they found that an innumerable multitude of Worms of a red colour were contained in that water and being taken up in the hand they leaped like unto Fleas And these Seamen call Sea-fleas and they are supposed to come from an innumerable company of small Crabs which being found on the South Continent fill the Sea Here is no place to treat of the Animals of which there are various kinds in divers places of the Sea Proposition XVII Why the Sea in the Night season seemeth to glitter especially if that the Waves be raised the more vehemently by the Winds The Sea in the Night seemeth to glitter or shine This question requireth the knowledge of that difficulty concerning the causes of Colours Divers are the resolutions of Philosophers concerning them but as for the explication of the proposed phenomenon or Question that Opinion seemeth the most commodious which sheweth how Colours do exist or rather appear from a certain and various motion but we leave the accurate explication of the same to Naturalists Proposition XVIII The Ocean or rather all Water casteth out Terrestrial Bodies on the shoar especially in the Full Moon Terrestrial bodies are cast out of the Ocean on the Shore It is not difficult to render an account of this property which Experience sufficiently testifieth For Water is never without some motion which if it be swift and towards one quarter it carrieth Terrestrial bodies with it until it meeteth with the shoar where by reason of the ceasing vigour of the motion of the water those Terrestrial bodies are laid down but in the Ocean the Waves are carried hither and thither By these the Terrestrial bodies are carried after the same mode and because that all Waves tend to some coast of Land therefore all Terrestrial bodies are carried towards the shoar In the Full Moons is the greatest motion of the Ocean therefore vain is their Opinion who believed the Ocean to be an Animal and to have sense by which it purgeth it self from all dregs Terrestrial bodies but here the cause is sufficiently manifest CHAP. XIV Of the Motions of the Sea in general and in particular of the Flux and Reflux Proposition I. Water hath no natural Motion except one by which it moveth from a more higher place unto these that are more low but if the vicine place or body be equal or of a greater Altitude than the superficies of the Water then the Water naturally resteth that is it is not moved except that it be compelled by a violent cause Water hath no natural motion except one THe truth of this Proposition is manifest from Vulgar experience for if that a vessel containing water be moved the water so long fluctuateth in it until no part be higher than the other that is until they compose a Spherical figure or superficies as we have said in the Thirteenth Chapter For although this Motion hath a violent cause viz. the motion of the Air about the Earth yet because that there is a great question concerning this cause and it is so manifest in the water that it seemeth not to come unto it from an external cause so for to distinguish this motion of the water from other motions we term it Natural Now this motion is unto that quarter unto which the place more depressed is scituated Proposition II. When part of the Ocean is moved the whole Ocean is moved or all the other parts of it are also moved but by so much the more that every one is nearer the part moved For because that if part of the Ocean be moved it doth necessarily change place and therefore this place is more low than the place of the vicine water this nearer water shall be moved into this place and the vicine water of that into the place of that and so forward in the other parts But there is lesser motion in the places of the more remote parts Proposition III. To observe the quarter into which the Sea that is moved tendeth The quarter into which the Sea that is moved tendeth Chuse a time if you can when no violent Wind bloweth and cast into the Water a body almost of the same gravity with the water let the place be observed where it was cast in to wit let the Boat remain there immovable then when that this body is carried by the Sea a moderate space from the place where it was cast in then let another Boat be placed of that and let the quarter be observed into which the scituation of this second Boat vergeth from the former For this also shall be the quarter in which we say that the Sea at that time is moved Proposition IV. The Motion of the Sea is either direct or a Vortex or a Concussion I call that direct which tendeth unto some quarter a Vortex when the water moveth into a round and is in some part rejected a concussion when it trembleth But laying aside the two latter unto the end of the Chapter we shall treat of the direct motion and therefore we shall call this by a general term the Motion of the Sea Proposition V. Of the Motions which we find in the Sea some are general some proper and singular other some contingent General proper and singular motions of the Sea I call that General which is found almost in all the parts of the Ocean and that at all times I call those proper and special motions by which only some parts of the Ocean are moved and they are twofold perpetual and anniversary the former are those which persist without mutation or cessation the other which are found at certain months or days of the year in some certain Sea I call those motions of the Sea contingent which without any certain order sometimes do cease and other some begin such are infinite Proposition VI. Wind is the cause of the contingent motion of the Sea forcing the Sea to a quarter opposit to the Wind neither is the Sea ever free from such motions Wind is the cause of the motion of the Sea For seeing that the Air toucheth the Sea and the Wind is nothing else but a strong commotion of
flux or deflux yea those terms are not apt enough but it is better to call it an Intumescency and Detumescency so that by these peculiar appellations the quality of the flux or motion may be distinguished from the motion or flux it self For the Sea always floweth from the East to the West and only appeareth to re-flow by reason that when in one place there is a greater quantity of water and that it floweth with vehemency to a certain place afterwards in another time this impetus ceaseth But it is therefore termed a reflux because that the Sea seemeth in Bays and Shores to draw near and depart According to the extension of bays and shores which hapneth not by reason of the quality of the Motion it self but by reason of the scituation of Coasts and Channels viz. that the Water doth return back to a contrary quarter but that the Sea falleth down this proceedeth not from the scituation of the Coasts but from the condition of the place it self Neither ought or can the motion of the Sea be regarded from the appulse to the shore for whatsoever the motion of the Sea be or unto what quarter soever it be made the flux is always towards the shore which is by reason of the fluid nature of the water Now seeing that both the flux or reflux or in the intumescency and detumescency the Sea is moved towards the same quarter viz. from the East to the West and doth not re-flow again is collected from hence First that in the Ocean removed from the shores under the Torrid Zone no other motion is found than that by which it is carried from the East to the West Secondly In the Streights which directly extend from East to West and in which the parts of the Ocean are joyned as the Streights of Magellan Manillan Java and others amongst the Indian Isles In these Streights I say the Sea indeed swelleth and falleth in twelve hours but yet the Sea in the detumescency doth flow back from out the Streights from the West to the East therefore another orifice of the Streight into the West which is a manifest sign that this intumescency and detumescency is not a peculiar motion but a modification of the general motion neither doth the Sea flow back into the East Therefore Scaliger and all others are deceived which here introduce a double motion replicated into it self But yet this must be understood that when we say that this motion is made from the East to the West the Cardinal quarters are not only understood but also those quarters that are collateral viz. the Sea is moved also by this flux from the Collateral quarters of the East unto the Collateral quarters of the West yea unto the North and South but not by so forcible and valid motion Proposition XI To declare the cause of the intumescency and detumescency of the Sea or the flux and reflux vulgarly so termed The cause of the flux and reflux of the Sea There is almost no phaenomenon of Nature that hath more exercised the wits of Learned men and Philosophers and that hath deluded more endeavours Some have made the Sea and Earth to be an Animal which by its inspiration and expiration hath caused the flux and reflux Others make the cause to be a great Vortex near to Norway which for six hours sucketh up the water and for so many spueth them out again Scaliger and Others supposed the Coasts especially those of America to be the cause thereof by reason that they repel the appulse of the Sea which proceedeth from the general motion But many when that they discover the connexion of this intumescency and detumescency with the motion of the Moon determined that it only depended on that But how this should be is a more than ordinary task to discover seeing that they reply nothing else but that the Moon doth attract upwards humors by an occult quality and sympathy But these are only words which signifie nothing else but that the effect is caused by the Moon after some mode that we are ignorant of but this is the mode demanded Cartesius deduceth it from his general Hypothesis after this manner Let the Diagram of the Ninth Proposition be taken See Scheme in which let A B C D be that Vortex which hath the Earth for its Center which with it and with the Moon is carried in a greater Vortex about the Sun M the Center of the Vortex E F G H the Earth 1234 the superficies of the Sea from which for the greater perspicuity we do suppose the Earth to be encompassed on every side and 5678 the superficies of the Air encompassing of the Sea Now if that there were no Moon in this Vortex the point T which is the Center of the Earth ought to be in the point M which is the Center of the Vortex but the Moon being towards B this Center of the Earth T ought to be between M and D by reason that the Celestial matter of this Vortex is somewhat more quicker moved than the Moon or the Earth which it carrieth with it Except that the point T were a little more distant from B than from D the presence of the Moon would hinder that that should not so freely flow between B and T so seeing that the place of the Earth in this Vortex is not determinated excâ—â—â— from the equality of the strength of the Celestial matter flowing about it therefore it is evident that it ought somewhat to approach towards D. And after the same mode when the Moon shall be in C the Center of the Earth ought to be between M and A and so always the Earth departeth a little from the Moon Moreover because by this means from this that the Moon is towards B not only the space through which the Celestial matter floweth between B and T but also that space through which it floweth between T and D is rendred more angust thence it followeth that this Celestial matter there floweth more swiftly and therefore doth more press both the superficies of the Air in 6 and 8 and also the superficies of the Water in 2 and 4 than if that the Moon were not in the Diameter of the Vortex B D Now seeing that both the bodies of the Air and Water are fluid and easily obnoxious to this pression they ought not to be so high above the parts of the Earth F and H as if the Moon were without this Diameter B D and so also on the contrary they ought to be higher towards G and E so that the superficies of the Water 1 and 3 and of the Air 5 and 7 do there protuberate Now because that part of the Earth which is now in F on the opposite quarter of the point B where the Sea is very little high after six hours it will be in G on the opposite Region of the point C where it is most high and after other six hours in H on the Region of
apprehend it from his words neither do I see how it can follow from his Hypothesis It is probable that the Sun and general winds do very much contribute to this intumescency of the water and seeing that the Sun in the Aequinoctials doth incumb on the middle of the Sea of the Torrid Zone therefore either he or the winds cause that the Sea then swelleth more than at another time But as concerning the Solstices we must say in a contrary mode or that the same is the cause of the greater intumescency of the Sea in the time of the Aequinoctials either of the Spring or Autumn which is the cause of more frequent rains winds and inundadions in those seasons Proposition XIV In some parts of the Ocean Gulphs and Shoars great is the encrease and decrease of the water in the influx and deflux in other some it is very small in some not discernable and so there is no flux and reflux or intumescency and detumescency The increase and decrease of the water in several parts of the Ocean Those places receive great Augmentation and decrease 1. That are under the Torrid Zone between the Tropicks for then the Moon pressing for the most part is there carried round 2. In places that are directly extended from East to West or nigh the Collateral quarters 3. In those Gulphs that are long and less broad the Augmentation is the more sensible 4. In those places in which few Islands or procurrents adjoyn to the Earth The greatest flux and deflux in the Streight of Cambaja The greatest flux and deflux hitherto observed is that which is in the Streight of Cambaja in one of the inlets of the River Indus and it hath struck many with admiration for the water recedeth to an high distance and that very speedily Whence not without reason the River Indus or the Gulph of Cambaja is thought to be that unto which when that Alexander the Great came and endeavoured to pass his Army over as it is there related the water presently went back and left his Ships a ground hence he went no farther but judged that the Gods had here fixed the bounds of his Expedition with a prohibition of proceeding any farther The cause is the small or narrow and deep depression of the Channel but yet 't is probable there was some other cause Fluv and reflux at Damman At the City Damman in India not far from Surat the Altitude of the water by flux and reflux is varied at two and a half Orygas and the Sea departeth from the shoar the space of half a mile In the Gulph of Cambaja the flux augmenteth the Altitude five Orgyas others say seven which unusual augmentation hath been the cause of the loss of many Ships by unexperienced Mariners for the water falling they have been split on the Rocks red- No constant time of the flux and reflux in the Streights of Magellan The flux and reflux in the Red-sea In the Gulphs and shoars of the Streights of Magellan no constant time of the flux and reflux is observed for sometimes the water floweth and refloweth in three hours othersome in twelve hours which inconstancy is to be ascribed to the violent irruption of the Ocean into that Streight and from the various agitations of the wind About Malacca also at the Streight of Sunda a notable flux and deflux is observed In the Arabian Gulph or Red Sea some of the Ancients have written that there is so great a reflux as Scaliger writeth that Moses and the Israelites passed over without any Miracle But it is false because the reflux is not there so great as to leave the Channel dry On the Coasts of China the flux and reflux is very sensible as also at the Isles of Japan At Panama on the Coast of America lying at the Pacifick Ocean the Sea is very much exalted The Sea at the flux much exalted at Panama and by and by depressed again in the full Moons the flux is so much augmented that water entreth into the Houses of the City Yea in almost all the shoars of the South Sea the Altitude of the water is wonderfully augmented and diminished so that in the reflux the decrease is sensible for two miles In the Gulph of Bengala at the shoar of Sâ—am the flux augmenteth the Altitude ten foot The flux not perceivable in the Mediterranean Sea But in the Mediterranean Sea which floweth in through the Streights of Gibralter from the West to the East the flux is not perceivable because the scituation is contrary to the quarter into which the Sea is moved and therefore the water of it is little augmented by the flux so that it is not discernable unless in the Gulph of Venice which by reason of its long extension and small Latitude sheweth the flux and reflux when in the other part of the Mediterranean Sea by reason of its notable Latitude that little augmentation and decrease is not discovered Whence this flux and reflux was unknown to the Grecians as also to the Romans in the time of Scipio Africanus And the Grecians as well as the Romans accounted it as miraculous what sometimes they discovered in other places as is manifest from the Expedition of Alexander the Great and of Scipio in the expugnation of Carthage but in the time of Cicero it was known to the Romans Yet some observed it a little at Massilia also at certain Coasts of Barbary it is noted enough The flux and reflux in the Baltick Sea not yet found out In the Baltick Ocean as also in the whole Northern Sea beyond England towards Norway and Greenland the flux and reflux of the Sea is not yet found out as neither in the North Coast of the Pacifick Ocean But the cause is not yet sufficiently known unless you will say that those Seas are remote from the course of the Moon and also that they are extended from the West to the East and North moreover that many Isles and procurrencies of land do hinder These three must be conjoined to impede the flux of the Sea in these places Proposition XV. The flux and reflux of the Sea is a violent motion viz. an impulse but the reflux is a natural motion of the water For the flux is caused by the pression of the Moon or matter between the Moon and the Earth or also because that the Sea doth not remain in that scituation which is received in the flux this is a sign that it was a violent motion But in the reflux the Sea is moved from a more high place to a more depressed place which is the natural motion of water Lemma The place of the Moon being given in the Ecliptick and the Latitude and hour of the day from an Ephemerides or by Supputation or Astronomical observation to find on the Terrestrial Globe the place unto which the Moon at the hour given is vertical also to exhibit all those places of the Earth unto
number and almost all send forth springs Scaliger and others assert that this Caspian Sea is carried by a subterraneous passage into the Euxine Sea but he alledgeth no probation of it yet that may be a sign by reason that the Euxine Sea perpetually sendeth forth waters in great abundance through the Bosphorus which abundance of waters some think that it doth not receive from the Rivers but by a subterranean passage from the Caspian Sea But it seemeth not so to me to have any conjunction with the Sea and therefore I suppose it to be a Lake and so rather to be called than a Sea Now whence it was first generated is a greater difficulty Some say that great Mountains of Salts are found in its bottom and that thence it hath its saltness but the water they suppose to proceed from the multitude of Rivers that exonerate themselves into this Lake or Sea Yet although these waters make to the conservation of it yet I think it more probable that this Sea for some Ages since was conjoyned to the Ocean neither do I question but that the Euxine Sea will at length become a Lake for the same reason the Bosphorus being obstructed Proposition IX To make a Lake in a place if that it be possible Of making Lakes It may be done if that there be a River in the land adjoyning or that a Spring be found in the place and that the place be somewhat more depressed and low than in the adjacent places although small Lakes may be also made on the tops of Mountains therefore the place must be hallowed and the earth dug away unto so great a depth and amplitude as we require and its sides must be fenced with banks upheld by wood if need so require then an Inlett being made from the Channel of the river the water must be let in or if that a Fountain in that place affordeth a sufficient quantity of water there is no need of that inlett or aqueduct Proposition X. To take away or dry up a Lake Of drying up of Lakes That may be performed two ways 1. If the bottom of that Lake be higher or of almost an equal depression with the vicine place an Aqueduct being made the water will flow from the place or Lake and at length will render the bottom dry the heat of the Sun assisting and Earth being cast in 2. If that the bottom of the Lake be lower than the vicine place it must first be fenced with a trench in its whole circuit leaving only some Channels or open passages then making use of Water-mills the water must be expelled and drawn out and then the bottom must be covered with earth and dung and such seeds cast in which suddenly will take root as Mustard-seed Coleworts and the like By this mode the Dutch very well know how to drain Lakes and to make fruitful lands of them Proposition XI Marishes are of two sorts some are ouzey and consisting of a mixt substance as it were viz. of Water and Earth so that it will not suffer the footsteps of a man others have small standing Pools with small portions of dry land here and there Marishes are of two sorts Of the first sort are those that receive or send forth no Rivers such Marishes are in Holland Brabant where is the Marish de Peel and many in Westphalia to which some of the second sort are admixed But many of the second kind are found at the originals or springs of Rivers whence some are wont to call these Springs or Fountains Marishes as the Marishes of Tanais in Moscovia of the Nile c. Such Marishes also seem to be in Savolax a Province in Finland in a great tract of land also the Marishes of Enarack the Chelonides Marishes of Africa the Marishes of Chaldea through which the Euphrates doth pass These Marishes are frequently found in Woods and Desarts that are Ericose because that the rain which irrigateth those lanes and collecteth in its cavities is not attracted by the Sun by reason that the Leaves of Trees do repel its Rays Such kind of Marishes are found here and there in Germany and Moscovia Moreover these Marishes of the second sort are four-fold viz. some both receive and send forth Rivers some only receive some only send forth and some neither receive nor send forth The first sort are generated and conserved partly by occult springs and water effused before that it be brought to a certain Channel and also from a greater quantity of water than can possibly be brought through a Channel many of which sort are in Moscovia and Finland Marishes of the last kind probably are conserved and spring from rain and small springs Aristotle calleth the Palus Maeotis a Lake and that more rightly Proposition XII Marishes have a sulphurous bituminous and fat Earth This is discovered both from the black colour and from the Reeds which are generated from it Of the earth of Marishes and easily take fire as is found in Holland and other places The cause is by reason that such substances are contained in the raise of the earth where these Marishes do exist Yet all Marishes are not such but where the Earth is stony and hard there are no Marishes for where there is a soft earth there for a certain is a fat and sulphurous substance Proposition XIII To drain Marishes and Fens Of draining of Fens Although some Fens have an high profundity yet no more is required to drain them to such a depth which we may do if that we cause the water to flow away by some Channel or Aqueduct 2. If that after some weeks they have been dried by the Sun we cast in a great quantity of dry earth 3. If that we make a fire upon them and 4. If that we hinder water from flowing into them as rain and the like CHAP. XVI Of Rivers in General Proposition I. We comprehend in this Proposition the definitions necessary for this doctrine Of Rivers and their definition 1. A River is water flowing from a certain place of the Earth to another place in a long tract and within its Channel A Channel is that cavity in the Earth in which the water is contained which is more depressed and lower than the shore of that water 2. A Rivulet is a River that hath not the profundity and breadth as to admit of small laden Vessels 3. That is termed Amnis which admitteth of those Vessels but if they will bear moderate Vessels great ones laden then it is called by the general term of Fluvius and Flumen 4. That water is termed a Torrent which floweth from the Mountainous places with a violence 5. Where two Rivers meet that place is called a Confluence 6. A River or Rivulet which floweth from another is termed a Branch or Arm yet for the most part it is taken for such an arm which is lesser than the other part of the River Yet those are also frequently
dissolved Snow And this they take for a sign of it that Rain and dissolved Snow do much augment the Rivers that oftentimes they extend beyond their Channel and overflow Regions also that Rivers do much decrease and some lesser sort of them are altogether dried up when no Rain for a long while in the Summer season hath fallen because that their Channel is not very profound and therefore have collected little water but those that have a deep Channel are not dried up in the Summer by reason that they have gathered so much water from the Rains that fell and dissolved Snow so that all cannot be turned into vapours except by a daily and continual heat 2. Because that there are very few Rivers in those places where there is little rain as in the more inward part of Africa there are few Springs But these allegations resolve not the question because we are not to demand or seek the Original of Rivers but only the Original of the Water of Fountains Therefore those that speak thus have not well considered the sence of the question as we have taken notice before although also the experience that they alledge is not general because that there are Rivers found in places where there is little rain and no snow although it be true in the Region of Peru and Aegypt which they assert Moreover rain moistneth not the Earth above ten foot deep but Fountains spring from a far greater profundity The Opinion of Seneca 2. Others suppose that we should not demand whence the water of Fountains doth arise by reason that water is an Element as much as Earth Air and Fire concerning the Original of which we do not dispute thus Seneca discourseth But other Authours cut in twain this Gordian knot with the Sword of Alexander For it is not enquired after how that water hath a Being but how it cometh to the places of Fountains and not to other places Moreover the Earth doth not so flow forward as Rivers do But for the Air it is false that we should not seek concerning it as they determine 3. Aristotelians follow the opinion of their Master See Aristotle līo 1. Chap. 11. who in the whole Eleventh Chapter of his first Book of Meteors endeavoureth to prove that the water of Fountains is generated from Air contained in the bowels of the Earth He alledgeth these reasons 1. Waters are generated from Air above the Earth viz. Rain therefore seeing that Air is in the bowels of the Earth and that there is the same cause of condensation viz. Cold therefore he saith it is absurd for any one to think that water is not produced from Air there 2. Experience testifieth that more great drops that fall are made of small ones and therefore the Original of Rivers must be as it were certain Brooks of water that meet in one part of the Earth for therefore those that make Aqueducts are wont to bring the water down by trenches and small Channels 3. Because that many Springs and those of the greatest Rivers are found in mountanous places very few in Plains or Valleys which is an evidence that the water of Fountains proceedeth from a condensed Air or Vapour which Air and Vapour tend towards higher places and mountainous places are as it were spunges incumbing over lower places Those are the reasons of Aristotle The Opinion of Cardanus 4. Cardanus with others suppose that the water of Fountains proceeds from Rivulets which are generated of watery vapours condensed both within and without the Earth but that these Fountains alone scarce make up Rivers unless assisted by rain or dissolved Snow His Reasons are these 1. If betimes in the morning one view the Mountains they will appear moist 2. Rivers overflow in the morning and so much the more by how much the part of it is more near the Fountain But the perpetual and constant impetus of the water bubling and leaping from the Springs doth not seem to have its Original from so weak and inconstant a cause Neither doth this opinion of Cardanus much differ from that of Aristotle but that Aristotle placeth Air with the generation Cardanus vapours with the generation to be the cause of Springs and indeed small is the difference between Air and vapours 5. Some of the Antients supposed Rains to be coacervated within the Earth in Cavities and thence to break forth as from a mighty belly and that all Rivers sprang from one of them or from some other of them neither that there was any other water generated but what were collected in the winter months into those receptacles they supposed to evade into the multitude of these Rivers and therefore that they flowed more in the winter than in the Summer and that some were continual and some not They added the same cause that we have laid down in the first opinion But Aristotle receiveth this opinion because that more water in one year floweth out from the mouth of the River than the bulks of that whole part of Earth or Land 6. Of Modern Philosophers many as also of the Ancients determined that the Earth again received whatsoever waters flowed out from the mouth of the Rivers into the Sea For the water of the Sea by an hidden passage went under the Earth and is beaten in its passage through divers windings of the Earth and strained through Sand and Chalk which removeth its saltness and so passeth into pure water I also defend this opinion and suppose it true yet so as not to exclude the cause laid down in the first and third place the reasons are these 1. Because more than one thousand Rivers exonerate themselves into the Sea and the greater of them in such an abundancy that that water which they send forth into the Sea throughout the whole year exceedeth the whole Earth as the River Volga into the Caspian Sea and also other Rivers Therefore it cannot otherwise be but that water must be sent forth into many places of the Earth even to the Fountains of Rivers Now if that this were not so we could not possibly imagine how that the Sea should not be augmented unto an immensity or why Fountains should not cease to send forth water Neither may it be objected that so many vapours are elevated from the Sea that are equivalent to the water that the Sea hath received from the Rivers For first only Rain maketh those vapours then again it is most false that so great a quantity of vapours should be elevated from the Sea as are generated from the water which floweth from the Rivers into the Sea Fountains the nearer the Sea are salter than those farther distant 2. This opinion is proved from that to wit that the Fountains near the Sea are salt and brackish and by how much they are nigher to the Sea by so much they are the more salt as on the Coast of Africa especially on the Coasts of Choromaudel in India where no Vines
and shoars of the Earth and the frequent observations of Mathematicians made on Towers or shoars testifie it And as for the observation of Olearius that seemeth to cause no small difficulty here for that the Caspian Sea is no higher than the vicine Lands much less than the Mountains is collected from hence viz. that many Rivers do exonerate themselves into the Sea therefore we must say that refraction obstructed the observation of Olearius and caused the water of the Sea to appear higher than in truth it was and peradventure the waves of the Sea encreased the cause and the Mountain that he ascended was none of the highest Some discovering the weakness of this Argument bring this that the natural place of water is above the Earth and therefore that it must cover the whole Earth because that it is higher than the Earth Now by reason that it is impeded from its natural place by the Mountains above the Earth arising towards the Mediterranean places therefore that part of the Ocean which ought to be where the Mountains and Elevated parts of the Earth are seeing that it is not in its natural place doth press down the subjected water which indeed is in its natural place but yet is driven or pressed to the bottom by the Superiour water which is not in its natural place where when it findeth no way neither can give place it retireth towards the sides and passeth under the Roots of the Mountains where being collected as in a Cistern it is squeezed out by the water of the Ocean pressing towards the vertex of the Mountain No other than in a Vessel which hath on the side a Funnel touching the very bottom of the Vessel from whence we infuse water or other liquor into Glasses If I say we drop in a stone into such a Vessel full or half full of liquor the liquor flieth out through the Orifice of the Funnel This is the subtilty of Scaliger but in truth it is very thick For water is not expelled so from the bottom of Mountainous places towards the vortex because that experience testifieth the contrary in Trenches and if that were so all Spring waters should be salt moreover it is false that he assumeth that part of the water is not in its natural place and therefore presseth down the subjected part for this is taken up gratis and contrary to experience because that the water presseth not down the subjected part except when it is higher than the vicine water and therefore where the Superficies of the Ocean is Spherical it resteth but if that any motion were made from the pressure this would drive the water of the Sea to the Coast where the place is more broad not through the small Caverns of the Earth Now it is certain that water floweth in from the bottom of the Sea through the great Caverns but they make not the Fountain fresh because they take not away the saltness of the water I think not the solution of the Argument to be difficult if that we consider how water cometh to the Fountain viz. not from any Channel from the bottom of the Sea or foot of the Mountain for so it would retain its saltness but by or through a continual progression of the watery particles or a creeping in the Terrestial matter to the places adjacent to the Fountain where at length it is gathered into drops by reason of the cavity and continual succession of the water and so causeth a Spring Veins of water in the bowels of the earth For this we find in the Earth dug to a great depth that here and there drops of water do consist and are forced by those that are nigh so that a little Rivulet is made which are termed Veins of water Many such Rivulets if collected into one Cavity make a Fountain as those persons well known that are skilled in making of Fountains or Aquiducts or Wells For in Wells water is collected from many drops which meet together in the bottom of the well from the adjacent Earth And those that make Aquiducts bring the water by gutters and trenches into one place so that the drops may fall from the higher places into the Cavity But if that you object that many Fountains bubble up in the midst of stones by reason of which it is not probable that the watery particles should so creep forwards to that I Answer that this confirmeth our Opinion For those stones do not go through from the top to the foot of the Mountain at least in those Mountains where the Fountains are found but only occupy the Superficies of the Mountain and a certain small profundity within the Earth of the Mountain is more soft or less stony or at least such as may receive and attract water Therefore when by penetration it is come to the stony part because that it can penetrate no farther there it standeth and is collected into drops and maketh a springing Fountain between the stony parts to wit if that a passage be granted and that the Mountains and Rocks of the Isle of St. Helena and almost of all Islands are not within so rocky and hard is collected from hence that almost all those Mountains have sometimes burned or at the least smoaked which is discovered from the Ashes on the Earth and also the Brimstone or Sulphur found in those places add moreover what we observed before that the spring of the water is not alwaies there where it seemeh to be but floweth from some higher place through a subterraneous passage to the Fountain and so causeth the water to leap up with some force which I suppose to be done in many Fountains and the more if we consider that fire is moved also downwards by reason of the continuation of the matter when in truth if that the same be free it tendeth upwards So if you put the end of a long piece of Iron in the fire this will penetrate through the whole Iron untill it come to the other extream although this other extremity doth not tend upwards but downwards The second Argument answered So much for the first Argument unto the second I answer that a reason may be given why the Sea water should not penetrate so much into the Earth towards the Center as towards the Mountains viz. because the Earth is there more full of Mettals and hard as experience testifieth but where it is not so hard there the water penetrateth and therefore we deny not but that Rivers or at least sweet or salt Lakes may be found beneath the bottom of the Sea within the Earth towards the Center where any such Cavity is But because that there are few such Cavities and that every where the Earth is Metallous and hard beneath the bottom of the Sea therefore it cannot continually imbibe water but when it is full it ceaseth to imbibe any more neither doth it receive more Therefore then the water glideth towards higher places unto the motion
the Land Courses of water often made by the Industry of Men. The Ancients testifie that the Nile in times past let it self into the Sea by one mouth which was termed Canobus Unto these two former causes a third may be added viz. Human Industry for men oftentimes from some River derive courses of water and prepare a passage or Channel for them into the Sea partly to water their Fields and partly for the convenience of Navigation which Aqueduct in progress of time by the violence of the water becomes greater Therefore the Ancients write and that not without probability that all the mouths of the Nile except Canobus were made by men But of this we shall treat more fully in the following Proposition where also shall be declared how it cometh to pass that one River floweth into the Channel of another Wolchda in Moscovia not Wolga ariseth from a Lake and exonerateth it self into another Lake Rivers and Riverets which neither exonerate themselves into the Sea or into other Rivers are either Arms or Branches of other Rivers or else peculiar Rivers Those which are branches of other Rivers very probably do stagnate and go not under the Earth Now the cause why they tend not towards the Sea is twofold 1. Because the Channel is not so deep and therefore they have not much water 2. The more hard Earth hindereth the progress 3. Many of them are made to water the Fields and for the more easie use of water 4. The Mouth is obstructed the Sea departing and the Land augmenting or promoting towards the Sea or the banks or ridges generated in the Channel are so augmented that they admit of no water but repel it so that branch of the Rhine which formerly discharged it self into the Belgick Ocean near the Village of the Catti now stagnates in the mid-way between Leyden and that Village But those peculiar Rivers which neither exonerate themselves into the Sea nor into other Rivers but rising in the Earth seem to be absorbed by the Earth these Rivers are very small also few as also those that flow from the Mountainous places of Peru India and Africa are swallowed up either within the Sandy soil or are absconded in the Earth So at Meten a Village in Arabia near the Gulph is found a River with a glorious Channel Under these Reeds in the Summer season the streams hide themselves with such a silent course that there appeareth nothing of humidity on the top but if that no way be admitted to these Riverets under the Earth they make Marishes and small Lakes Notwithstanding some run with so slow a stream that almost so much is separated by exhalations as they receive by the Stream and so are stayed on the Earth and neither make Lakes nor are absorbed as the Riverets Conitra Salle Marefsa Jeleesa and others in Moscovia Proposition VIII Whether the passage or Channel through which the Rivers run be made by the Industry of men or by Nature Of the Channels of Rivers It is probable that the Channels of those Rivers which were not generated with the Earth were made by hands on those very accounts 1. Because that Experience testifieth that when new Fountains do flow the water so flowing out maketh not a certain Channel to it self but doth dilate it self through the adjacent Land And therefore if that it must flow there is need of the help of man to hollow a Channel 2. It is manifest that men have made many Channels So the Chineses made a Channel by which water runeth from the yellow River into another River 3. Because Lakes and Marishes do confirm the same such as are found about the Fountains of many Rivers that are on a plain such as are those Lakes or Marishes from which the Nile Tanais Wolga and others do flow Which Lakes we doubt not but to be generated and conserved from the effusion of water made round about by the Fountain and therefore men made a certain Channel to defend their Fields from such a water into which Channel the water might fall and drain the Lands The same must be understood of Rivers whose Springs are on the Mountains Of affinity to this Proposition is this other viz. Whether that Rivers which exonerate themselves into others or meet together made that passage by their motion or whether they were brought into them by men which made a Channel The latter seemeth more probable for the reasons before alledged The same must be observed concerning the branches of Rivers and Circumductions by which Islands are made in the Tanais Wolga c. Of Isles made in Rivers So one Arm of the Euphrates formerly passing through the Ghaldean Marishes was let out into the Sea afterwards it left its course many Aqueducts and Channels being made by the Natives to water their grounds neither doth it arrive to the Sea its mouth being obstructed and its water is partly taken up in the Aqueducts that are made and partly averted into the other Arm which exonerateth it self into the Tigris And so it seemeth to be the case of other Rivers which we now see do not go forwards into the Sea but to stagnate It is probable that in times past they did exonerate themselves into the Sea Proposition IX Why no salt Rivers are found seeing that Salt-springs are found in many places The reason why no Salt Rivers are found The reason is because that men have no need of Salt-water and therefore make no Channel by which the water of the salt Fountain may flow by reason that they can have Salt at an easier rate But if that a fit Channel were prepared from those salt Springs we should have salt Rivers such as are in Lunenburgh and other places under the Earth Neither do we question but that many Rivers of salt-Salt-water do flow from their Fountains under the Earth Proposition X. The Channels of Rivers by how much they are the more near their Fountains by so much they are the more high and by how much they are the more near the Mouths of Rivers and the Sea by so much for the most part they are the more depressed Furthermore of Channels of Rivers But in some Channels some parts more removed from the Spring are higher than that part more near to the Fountain either by reason of the Hills and Valleys as I may so say in their Channels or by reason of their Whirlpools yet no part of the Channel is higher than the Fountain The flowing of water The cause or reason of the Proposition is manifest because that water floweth not but from a place more high to a place more low and so every part of the Channel especially the mouth of the River is lower than the Spring for otherwise it would flow back again to the Fountain Now that the elevation of the Channel doth decrease even to the mouth of the River that at least is true concerning many parts of the Channel for because here
the great Mogul in whatsoever place he is causeth this water to be brought him of which he only drinketh Some will have the water of the Nile to be the most fruitful and the most wholsome Most heavy waters are impregnated with Iron or Mercury In great Rivers we must have respect to the Riverets of which they are compounded For the Rhine receiveth many Mineral Riverets so also doth the Danube of Gold Iron and Vitriol and hence have they their quality although many Fountains have little of them Proposition XX. Some Rivers every year at a set time are so augmented that they overflow their Channel and inundate the adjacent Lands Of the increase and overflowing of Rivers The most famous of those is the Nile that so encreaseth that it overspreadeth all Egypt except the Hills In Congo Angola Monomotapa Soffala Mosambique from those it is known that the Fountains of the Nile are the great Lake Zaire River Nile or in the Lake Zaire which is situate in the procurrent of Africa in a middle place between the Eastern and Western shoar under the tenth degree from the Equator towards the South as we have said in the former Chapter Near unto this Lake are many ridges of Mountains which are called the Mountains of the Moon so that the Lake lieth as in a Valley between Mountains Now because that these places lye from the Equator towards the South therefore the reason of the Solary motion requireth that they should have Winter when that we have Summer but by reason of their small distance from the Equator they feel no cold but instead of Snow they have almost continual Rains two hour before and after Noon in the Kingdom of Congo the Clouds hardly permitting the sight of the Sun with the same Clouds the tops of the Mountains appear as covered and in these Mountainous places rains and showers are almost continually which run down like Torrents and all flow together into the Lake Zaire and from thence into the Channel of the Nile Zaire Cuama and others that arise from the same Lake but yet do not abound with so great a quantity yet the Zaire doth overflow every year as the Nile because the Channel of them is more deep and after a short Tract they exonerate themselves into the Sea yet all of them encrease at the same time and disgorge themselves of a great quantity of water into the Sea River Niger The second River among those that overflow the adjacent Lands at a certain time is the Niger of no less Tract than the Nile though not so famous It overfloweth at the same time that the Nile doth The third River of the overflowing Rivers is the Zaire a River in Congo of which we have spoken River Zaire Add to this the lesser Rivers of Congo The fourth is Rio de la Plate a River in Brasil which overfloweth the adjacent Fields at the same time with the Nile Rio de la Plate as Maffaeus writeth Rivers Ganges and Indus The fifth of the overflowing Rivers is the Ganges The sixth is the River Indus these two Rivers in the Pluvial months of those Regions pour themselves forth upon the Lands without their Channels where then the Natives do gather the water into standing Pools that in the other months of the year when there is almost no Rain they may thence fetch water and this inundation causeth great fertility in the Fields The seventh comprehendeth many viz. four or five which flow from the Lake Chiamy in a moderate Channel and exonerate themselves into the Gulph of Bengala passing through the Kingdoms of Peru Sian and others That which passeth through the Country of Sian is called Menan And at the time of the inundation the Fields and Streets of the Cities are covered with water so that they are forced to make use of Boats to sail from one house to another And this inundation also causeth exceeding fertility River Macou The eighth is Macou a River in Camboja which overflows in the Summer months River Parana The ninth is the River Parana which overfloweth after the same manner as the Nile doth The tenth in Choromandel a part of India the Rivers overflow by reason of the plenty of waters that flow from the top of the Mountain Gatis in the Pluvial months River Euphrates The Eleventh is the Euphrates which at set-times of the year overfloweth Mesopotamia The Twelfth of these overflowing Rivers is Sus a River in Numidia River Sus. which overfloweth in the Winter I have not read of any other Rivers that I can remember that do overflow in an Anniversary time of the year although some may do it in most years to wit the River Obius and Flavius a River of China There are many Rivers that overflow without any order or in a set-time yea there is scarcely any River of noted magnitude which overfloweth not its Banks sometimes So it is evident concerning the Albis the Rhine and the like And but that the capacity of the Channel and the height of the Banks obstructed all great Rivers in an Anniversary time would inundate because that most of them are much augmented in the Spring season And it may so happen that a River that did use to overflow may begin to do it in an Anniversary time viz. if that any part of it by reason of ridges or sands or any other way become higher and the Coasts or shoars become more high but then men are accustomed to raise Banks The only cause of these Inundations is the abundancy of Water which in some Examples alledged may proceed peradventure from dissolved Snow but in most from frequent Rains Yet that is a wonder that the Indus and Ganges should overflow in other Months than the adjacent Rivers from the Lake Chiama but the cause of this diversity which is observed here in this Season must partly be taken from the Anniversary rains in the adjacent places partly from the Mountains and Rains about the places of the Fountains But we to avoid prolixity shall supersede to discuss every Example The River Bibara in France near to Paris sometimes without any Rains or at least with those that are usual so swelleth that it causeth desolation unto the Suburbs of St. Marcellus Now the reason why almost all these Inundations make the Lands fruitful is because that water that inundateth is either Rain or Snow-water which waters both by reason of their Spirituous lévity and also because of their Sulphureous substance which they have admixt in the Air. Above all other Minerals are very prevalent to fructifie and are also wholsom Now that there is such a Spirit and Sulphur in Rain-water is proved 1. From the Worms that are generated in it 2. From its easie putrefaction 3. From the very Chymical distillation Yet some Rivers by their Inundation do not make the Earth fertile but rather cause sterility as Ligeris in France when that Sequana maketh them
touched on it because that no Geographers have hitherto made mention of it as also of the River Jeniscea and Yrtiis The River Orellana 7. Orellana in America so called from Francis Orelli is accounted amongst the greatest Rivers of the Earth It s Fountain is in the Kingdom of Peru in the Province of Quito in the South latitude of 72 degrees but this is not altogether certain its Mouth is fifteen miles in Latitude two degrees Southerly It s tract is said to be 1500 Spanish miles by reason of its great number of bendings when that in truth it extendeth not 700. Others confound with it or make the River Maragnon to be a branch of it It is in some places four or five Leagues broad but it receiveth not its water so much from a Spring as from Rains falling on the Mountainous parts of Peru so that in the dry mouths of those Mountains it carrieth little water And indeed the Moderns do much detract from its magnitude Rio de la Plata 8. Rio de la Plata in Brasilia its Fountain is in the Mountains of Peru Its Mouth is in the South latitude of 37 degrees and that is said to be about twenty miles but when it overfloweth it hath many Outlets which some account for one at that time it carrieth not much water The Natives call it Paramaguasu that is a water like the Sea as some observe The River Omaranna 9. Omaranna also a River in Brasilia flowing from the Mountains of Peru in a long tract These three great Rivers in Brasilia viz. Orellana Rio de la Plata and Omoranna meet somewhere in some Lakes in the Mediterranean places of Brasilia and emorge again being disjoyned The River Canada 10. and lastly Canada or St. Laurence in America Septentrionalis its Spring is in the Lake called des Iroquis It s large Mouth is in the 50th degree of North latitude and its tract is no lesser than 600 German miles Proposition XXVIII Whirlpools are found in the Channels of some Rivers So in the River Sommona between Amiens and Abbeville in Picardy in France is a secret Whirlpool into which the waters rush with such violence that their found may be heard for some miles Proposition XXIX River-water is more light than sea-Sea-water sea-Sea-water more heavy than River-water The cause is easily known to wit sea-Sea-water carrieth much Salt in it Thence it hapneth that many things sink to the bottom in Rivers which float on the Sea which frequently is seen in Ships heavy laden that are raised up in the Sea higher than when in Rivers Now various is the proportion betwixt these waters because that the Sea-water is not every where of the same gravity nor the water of divers Rivers but yet the proportion is about 46 to 45 so that 46 ounces of River-water do equally ponderate 45 of Sea-water CHAP. XVII Of Mineral Waters Baths and Spaws Because that there are many kinds of liquid Bodies or Waters the peculiar properties of which men do admire at therefore Geographers are wont to treat of them But all of them hitherto except a bare recital of their Names and a reckoning up of some wonderful Fountains or Springs have added nothing to solid knowledge But we shall treat more clearly of them and that with a declaration of their causes Proposition I. No Water is pure and Elementary but containeth or hath admixed particles such as are found in Terrestrial Bodies These particles are not only Earth but also they are various as Oyls Spirits and the like That is termed Mineral-water which containeth so many or such particles of a different nature from the Water so that from them it gaineth or hath notable qualities which we discover by sense or the properties are notable by sense No Water is pure but hath admixed particles THe truth of the Proposition is manifest by Experience and is proved both from the differences of tasts and from distillation and all Naturalists agree that simple or pure water as the other Elements separated from others do not exist in nature The cause is the various and perpetual agitation of the particles but in Waters that I may say somewhat in particular concerning our matter in hand by the cause of admixtion of Heterogeneous they receive Spiritual particles The Rain and the Air it self touching the water consists of divers particles therefore all waters have admixed particles of another nature but there is not the like quantity in all of them Into the Rhine indeed the Danube and Albis and into all great Rivers other Riverets do flow in impregnated with innumerable particles and in such quantity that they are evident to the senses but because besides these many other Riverets do flow into them not impregnated with so great a quantity of Heterogeneous particles as are discoverable to the eyes and because that the greatest part of the water that they carry consists of Rain and Air therefore also in these greater Rivers those Heterogeneous particles are not easily discovered but must be separated from them by Art if that any one will have them discovered to the sense But we shall especially call them Mineral waters which have some notable property beyond the common waters that is that contains such an admixture of Heterogeous particles that thence possess a notable and sensible quality Proposition II. Mineral Waters are of three kinds Of Mineral waters Some are Corporeal we want an apter word others Spiritual otheâ—s both Corporeal and Spiritual I term those Corporeal Mineral waters which contain solid and fixed particles of Minerals so that these may be discovered and separated by the sight These Corporeal Bodies are twofold some carry those particles of Minerals of a very great magnitude that without any trouble or very little at the least they may be beheld in the water and to speak properly they are not commixed waters Such are those of which we have spoken in the former Chapter because that the grains of Gold Silver and the like are contained in their waters therefore they are termed Gold and Silver-bearing Rivers but these waters in property of Speech are not to be termed Mineral because that they have not these particles commixed with them but free neither do they recive any property or quality from them Yet because that men also admire such Rivers and the explication of them hath great affinity with the enodation of Mineral waters properly so termed therefore I comprehend them under the general â—ppellation of Mineral waters Bituminous Fountains and the like may be reduced under this Classis Corporeal Mineral waters But those are termed more properly Corporeal Mineral waters which contain indeed solid particles of Minerals but so little small and altogether commixed that they are not presently discovered by the sight but either by Art or a long tract of time subsiding and concreasing and are reduced into a sensible quantity as are saâ—â— Springs sulphureous Fountains and such
Streights 4. Rivers 5. Lakes 6. Pools and 7. Marishes 1. Marishes may be exsiccated or drained either by subduction of the water or by exsiccation of the earth as none can doubt for in many Regions the Soil is fruitful where there were Marishes some years since as in Westphalia Gelderland Brabant Holland Muscovia 2. The same is the account of Pools seeing that they differ not much from Marishes Proposition V. Rivers leave their Channel or Shoar that is part of their Channel and afford new Land Rivers quit their Shoar and afford new Land 1. If that they carry much Terrestrial matter Sand or Gravel with them which sinketh to the bottom in progress of they time so augment the Altitude of the Channel that it is no more depressed than that place from whence the water floweth from the vicine earth but if that that matter sinketh into one place in part of the Channel it will separate one part which then at length will be dried up 2. If that the River take another Channel whether it be done by Art or Nature and a violent cause as by Wind Inundation or the like 3. If the Springs of the Rivers be obstructed or cease to send forth water the earth being fallen in or condensated or a great quantity of Sand being driven by the winds into the Fountains or adjacent places Examples of Rivers whose Channels are exsiccated at this time either in whole or in part are every where obvious in Writers yet not of great Rivers but of small or of the parts of any great Rivers So a Channel of an Arm of the Rhine which flowing by Leyden flowed in times past into the German Ocean now for some Ages deserted by the water at this day is land the Rhine stagnating between Leyden and the Vicus Cattorum The Shoars are uncovered from the waters of Rivers and that some Rivers run in a more narrow Channel than they did formerly is manifest from many examples and from thence that some at this day are not Navigable which formerly were may easily be collected the Altitude of the water being diminished and none at all to be left in their Channel at some time or other as in the River Scaldis Therefore Governours of Commonwealths have a great care that the Mud and Sediments be drawn from out the Channels of Rivers that they may remain navigable as is seen in many places But great Rivers cannot be dried up or changed into land except in many ages because that many lesser Rivers flowing from divers parts make them of which though some may be dried up or change their course yet all do not suffer the same except in a long space of time and the Channel is deeper But one heap or ridge of Sand may cause the River to run through another Channel and the former to be dried up yet it taketh not away the River except the Fountains or Branches of it be obstructed Therefore it is true that neither the Nile Tanais Albis or the Rhine or other Rivers always flowed or shall perpetually flow but that there was earth before and shall be afterwards where they now flow Proposition VI. Lakes are dried up and changed into Land Lakes dried up and changed into Land 1. If that a Lake be constituted from Rivers that flow in that mutation is made by the abduction withdrawing or cessation of the River and also by evaporation 2. If that a Lake receiveth waters by a subterraneous passage from the Ocean or Sea there will be a mutation of that Lake after that those subterraneous passages are obstructed and so Lakes are first changed into standing Pools and Marishes then at length into dry Land It is evident saith Aristotle that because a force of waters hath brought in Mud or something of that sort he speaketh of Lakes made of Rivers therefore standing Pools are made and the earth is dry and that their water being left and standing in succession of time it is exsiccated and altogether vanisheth So the Lands that touch upon the Lake Maeotis by the Soil brought down by the Rivers are increased so much that Ships now far less then those about 60 years since for traffick sake enter into it There are many examples found of small Lakes changed into dry Land especially in Holland Proposition VII Streights are exsiccated and changed into Isthmusses or Continents That happeneth Streights when that by reason of the continual sinking of the Terrestrial matter made in a long time the channel of the Streight is become so high that it denieth a passage to the Sea So it is very probable that the Isthmus between Africa and Asia was a Streight by which the Mediterranean and Red-sea were conjoyned as we shall shew in the following Proposition In many Streights at this day the Altitude of the Sea and the Altitude of the Channel is found lesser than in former time which is a certain token that those Streights shall have no water in them in the time to come and shall be changed into a dry Isthmus So the Streight through which the Atlantick Ocean maketh a Gulph which the Hollanders called Snyder-zee and the Texell at this day receiveth no larger landing Ships and the depth of the Sea is every year found lesser and the Land higher therefore where the water is at the Texell there after some Ages will be dry Land Concerning the Vlier the same in time to come will also happen Proposition VIII The Bays or Gulphs which the Ocean maketh between the Mid-lands in course of time do become dry places Bays or Gulphs in time do become dry Land This is done by a double cause 1. If that the Streight by which the Bay is conjoyned to the Ocean becometh an Isthmus or else be stopped by Sand and Gravel which is done in progress of time as we have said in the preceding Proposition For by this cause the Bay of the Ocean and a part or member of it shall be cut off from the body and shall become a Lake and then a standing Pool and Marish and by exsiccation become earth and no water shall be seen there 2. If that the very Channel of the Bay become higher by reason of the Rivers flowing into it and carrying Sand along with it that it in time cannot receive the Sea so by degrees the Sea will recede from the shoars of that Bay Therefore the Mediterranean the Baltick the Red Persian and other Seas that are Bays of the Ocean will cease in time to be Seas and will be changed into Lands which shall be fully proved in the following Proposition Proposition IX The Ocean for saketh some Shoars or Coasts so that it becometh Land where the Ocean formerly was Where the Ocean formerly was is now Land by its forsaking the shoars That happeneth for these causes 1. If that the force of water be broken at the shoars by Rocks here and there on the Coasts or Clifts in the Sea for that
force being broken the Terrestrial parts of the water subside and sink and augment the Altitude of the banks of Sand whence it cometh to pass that the impetus of the Ocean is more and more broken and therefore more Terrestrial matter subsideth so that the ridges being augmented they exclude the Ocean or make the Channel more shallow 2. It conduceth much to the Augmentation of the shoars if that the shoars be sandy and stony that the Ocean runing by can separate or take away little with it so that when it can take away nothing it always leaveth some particles that in progress of time the shoars become more high and force or stop the Ocean from its accustomed place 3. If that another adjacent shoar hath less solid Earth that is light and full of Caverns for the Ocean carrieth the dissolved and broken parts of Earth to the vicine shoars 4. If that great Rivers discharge themselves by the shoar into that Sea for these Rivers carrying with them much Sand and Mud or Gravel when that they arrive to the mouth and shoar where they endeavour to exonerate themselves into the Sea they leave it partly because the Channel is there more broad and partly because that the Sea resisteth the flux of them and this is chiefly observed in Regions which Rivers overflow every year 5. If that frequent Winds blow from the Sea to the shoar and the shoar be rocky and firm not sandy 6. If that the flux of the Sea be swift and vehement and the reflux slow and gentle for the gentle reflux taketh not away the matter that the swift flux brought but suffereth it to sink If that the shoar descendeth obliquely into the Sea for a long space and bend not down directly and perpendicularly for so the violence of the Sea decreaseth and leaveth the matter behind The Land of Aegypt caused by the Nile There are many places of the Earth which it is evident were formerly taken up by the Ocean Where Aegypt is in time past was the Sea as is proved by the testimony of the Ancients and by Experience at this day For the Nile flowing from the remote Regions of Aethiopia and every year entring the Channel where it swelleth it expandeth it self through all Aegypt where when the force of the River ceaseth the Mud sinketh and also the Terrestrial matter which the swift course of the River brought in and so Aegypt becometh higher And before that so much matter was brought in by the Nile then the Sea covered the Land of Aegypt but now the Sea is not admitted by reason of the height Of this Aristotle and Others are Witnesses his words are these This place and the whole Region of Aegypt which was only made by the River seemeth always to become more dry and because that the Marishes by degrees drying up the adjacent places began to be inhabited the length of time obliterated the beginning of it therefore all the mouths of the Nile except that of Canopus seem to be made by the Industry of Man and not by the River Moreover all Aegypt anciently consisted of a City called Thebes as is very manifest which Homer also declareth who flourished as I have said after this Mutation For he maketh mention of that place as if that Memphis as yet had no Being or at least not so big Seneca here explaineth it more clearly All Aegypt saith he is made up of Mud for if that we may credit Homer Pharos was so far from the Continent as that a Ship with a full spread Sail could harldly measure or encompass it in an whole day but it is now adjoyned to the Continent for the Nile flowing muddy and troubled and drawing much Mud with it and so adding to it the former Lands hath made Aegypt larger by an Annual increase Hence the soil is muddy and fat neither hath it any Intervals in it but hath increased to a solidity The Rivers Ganges and Indus by their Inundations both cause also Land Ganges and Indus in India both famous Rivers have caused the same by their Inundations that the Nile hath also Rio de la Plata in Brazil And it is probable that China was generated or at least augmented after the same mode by reason that a violent River which they call the Yellow River flowing from Tartary into China often overflowing although not in an Anniversary time hath so much Sand and Gravel that it maketh the third part of its water These Examples demonstrate the cause laid down in the fourth place viz. why Rivers should cause the Sea to forsake the Shoar but the Sea it self is also oftentimes the cause of its departure in divers Regions viz. whilst that it carrieth and layeth down the matter by which the Channel and Shoar acquire the greater Altitude and admit not the approach of the Sea so Holland Zeland and Gelderland were made for that the Ocean in time past possessed these Countries is known both from Ancient Histories or Monuments as also from the quality of the Soil it self The shells of Fishes found on the Clifts or higher parts of Gelderland not far from Noviomagus do sufficiently testifie the same as also shrubs and ouzey matter found in the profundity of the soil Add that the Sea is higher than the Land of these Regions and hath overflowed it and would cover it again if that it were not obstructed by banks of Sands and Ramparts Yet there are some that say they suppose that Holland and Zeland were brought from the Rhine and the Mosa which is not improbable Proposition X. To shew the Generation of Sandy-banks in the Sea and elsewhere The generation of Sandy banks We term those banks of Sand that are elevated above the Channel of the River to that height that they hinder the passage of Ships Neither do they differ from Rocks but that their parts do cohere and are condensated but the Sand-banks do not consist of parts very coherent But these words are oftentimes confounded The Sand-banks do either lie in the Channels of Rivers as many are in the Wolga and the Albis or at the mouths of Rivers which is frequent as in the Wolga and the Albis or on the Sea-shoar or amidst Seas The mode of the generation is the same by which we have said in the foregoing Propositions that the Channels of Rivers are dried and the Sea forsaketh the shoar for so oftentimes it cometh to pass that the Ocean before that it leaveth part of the Earth altogether first generateth this ridge of Sand not far from the shoar and so by degrees retreateth back and these banks become parts of the Continent After the same mode it hapneth in the Channels of Rivers before that they are wholly dried and forsaken by the water The most frequent cause is when Rivers are augmented by rain or dissolved snow and so run violently for then where their motion is more vehement and Channel more narrow they eat off the mud
and sand from the shoars or some banks also the substance of the bottom is advanced and lifted up and is carried by the impetuosity of the River until it come to a more large and ample Channel and be removed from the Fountain or cause of abundancy of water for here the vehemency of the motion is remiss and then the Terrestrial parts subside and Sand-banks are generated of which many are found in places where there are broad Rivers but none almost in narrow Neither is there any mischief which taketh away more splendor from the most flourishing and rich Empories or places of trade without any hope of recovery or bringeth greater detriment to Ships That we may pass over those Ancient Cities now for many Ages buried in oblivion we have Examples before our eyes of Stavoren in Friezland Armuyen in Zeiland of Dort in Holland Antwerp in Brabant and Stade in the Bishoprick of Bremen Nothing took away the power of Traffick from these Cities which was the cause of all their splendor and riches but the banks of Sand arising in their Rivers or the Neighbouring Seas Neither is there almost any Empory that is Maritimate that is free from the fear of these Sand-banks Those that are in the Albis or the Elbe have destroyed many Hamburgian Ships that have escaped the grand storms of the Ocean The same is manifest in others to him that considereth especially in the Texel and Vlie of Amsterdam They are discovered in a great number on the Sea-coasts of Flanders and Friezland and the suff of the Sea going down many of them are discovered to be part of the Continent for the Channel interceding hath then little water and admitteth of no sailing The famous or rather infamous amongst Mariners by reason of Shipwrack are those that are found in a great number in one part or place of the Sea They are these 1. The Sand-banks of Brazil Abrolhos de Brasilia Het riff van Brasilian also de Droogte van Brasil They lie from the Coast of Brazil for the space of 70 miles which the Mariners that sail to the Indies ought to avoid with great diligence whilst that to shun the calm of Guinea they sail towards Brazil yet they come as near to those Sands as they may that they may have the greater Wind but they must be cautious that they be not carried between Brazil and the Sands 2. The Sands of St. Ann not far from Guinea six degrees at the elevation of the North Pole Ships being carried upon these come not off without great danger and labour and are detained for many daies when that Seamen suppose that they have passed beyond them For these Sands are not continual but they are disjoyned by broad and deep Whirlpits or Gulphs so that in a small distance here is a depth of about eight fathom by and by about two 3. The Sands between the Isle of Madagascar and Arabia called Baixos de India they are sharp Rocks of Coral of divers Colours 4. The Sands of China 5. The Sands of Flanders But more may be seen in Geographical Sea-charts We have declared one mode of the generation by which these Sands have an Original by sinking of the Sandy matter which the Sea carrieth with it The second mode to be adjoyned to this is by which such Sands can or may have a Being to wit if that the Sea overflow the Earth in which the hills and risings are sandy for then those hills are or shall be called Sand-hills they are discovered in a large tract but the Land it self is more low If therefore the Sea by an irruption should inundate and cover those Lands then those Hills would be Sand-banks so we must judge of others Therefore at the Mouths of Rivers Sand-banks are most frequent because the Channel is there broader and therefore the impetus of the efflux of Rivers is there diminished and therefore the matter sinketh which the violent Flood brought with it Also the waves of the Ocean repel the Waters flowing from the Mouths of the Rivers whence all the force ceaseth And it is worth our labour to distinguish and consider these two modes of the generation of Sand-banks Proposition XI To conjecture whether the Sand-hills which lye in the Sea not far from the Continent shall be part of this future Continent Of Sand-banks or Hills in the Sea not far from the Land We have said in the former Proposition that these Sand-banks are generated two manner of ways one truly by the subsidency or sinking of the Sand into the Sea the other by denomination viz. all Hill the water encompassing and overflowing the Earth If that they are generated by the former mode and are found to increase more and more it is a sign that they will joyn to the Continent of the Earth that is to say that the Channel of the Sea will be dried between these Sand-banks and the adjacent Land But if that the Sand-banks are generated after the second mode then we may conjecture that those Sand-banks will not so easily be conjoyned to the adjacent Earth but that the Sea rather will farther overspread the Land Proposition XII Islands are produced in the Sea and Rivers after the same mode that Sand-banks are yea Islands may proceed from Sand-banks yet they are also made after another mode Of the generation of Islands For if that in any part of the Sea so great a quantity of Sand Gravel Mud and Ouze be aggregated in progress of time that it becometh higher than the Sea it will become an Island which is the first Mode Then by the second mode If that the Sea breaking into the Land overfloweth only the lower parts but not the higher and the Hills those will be Islands And by this latter Mode it is probable that those Islands were generated or had original which arise to an huge Altitude as St. Helena Ascension and the like especially those which are rocky and stony Sicilia separated from Italy by the Sea Hitherto appertain Islands which the Sea hath cut off from the prominent Lands So Writers testifie and the Poets Verses are known that Sicilia was separated from Italy by the violence of the Sea By the first Mode viz. the subsidency and congregation of many Terrestrial particles the Islands of Zeland Denmark and Japan had their original The same seemeth to have been the original of the Molucco Isles for if that you dig on the Plain to a small depth you shall meet with an abundance of sand and shells Other Isles separated from the Continent by the Sea The Inhabitants of Ceiland relate that the Isle was separated from the procurrent of India and it is very probable so The Isle of Sumatra is supposed formerly to have been united to Malacca The Isles of the Maldives in times past was were said to adhere to India and were a continuous Continent yet at this day they are far in the Sea and divided into an innumerable many
Isles esteemed about 1100 neither ought we to doubt of it seeing that narrow Euripuses pass through every two of these Maldivian Isles so that in some places they exceed not four or five Ells but in progress of time many of them unite into one the Euripus being diminished and all of them at length will conjoyn in one oblong Island Yea all the Oriental Isles scituate between the Continent of Asia and the Land of Magellan in a great number seem to arise from the violence of the Ocean the Land being separated For the Pacifick Ocean in the Torrid Zone is moved by a perpetual motion and force from the West to the East that is from America to those Oriental Isles Moreover a perpetual Wind greatly augmenteth the violence of the Ocean towards that Oriental quarter Therefore it is not improbable seeing that all these Islands are in the Torrid Zone but that Asia formerly did adhere to the South-land or that of Magellan in a continual tract of Land then at length the violence of the Ocean eat off and separated sometimes here and sometimes there until that a way being made on every side it was conjoyned to the Indian Ocean and made so many Islands as that we stand amazed at this day in that quarter being distant a very small space Java Celebes Borneo Madera Amboina c. Concerning the Islands in the Gulph of Mexico as also in the Streights of Malacca we conjecture altogether the same The Isles of the Aegean Sea whether they had a Being from the divulsion made by or from the Sea the Sea flowing from the Euxine Sea and the Mediterranean raising up of contrary floods or after the former mode by a subsidency of the Terrestrial matter which the Propontis had carried from the Euxine Sea as yet I doubt It is more probable that a divulsion was made and peradventure that famous Inundation of Deucalion here also exercised its force It is certain that the Isle Euboea at this day called Negropont did formerly adhere to Greece as Authors of no mean Credit do relate for so small an Euripus interfloweth that it may be joyned by a Bridge We shall shew that Islands may be made of Sand-banks by many Examples So the Islands in the River Nile and in the River of St. Laurence were formerly Sand-banks Rivers make Islands after another manner when that they send forth a branch which they receive into themselves in another place as may be seen in the Wolga Tanais and other places That this was not done by Nature but by the Industry of Man we ought not to question the River Ob doth the same These two Rivers Rengo and Coanza made the Isle Loanda scituated on the Coast of Africa which exonerated themselves into the Sea in that place by reason that they bring great store of Mud and Rubbish with them they falling with an exceeding force from Mountainous places so that they lest this and as yet the same in their Inlets and so in course of time made the Island Landa first made a Sand-bank now most fertile and likewise populous And so we suppose that many Sand-banks formerly made the Islands scituated at the Coasts although that some were also caused by a divulsion made by the Sea as Norway And it is more probable that this is the mode of generation of Islands in stony and rocky Isles But in the Indian Sea Islands may have an original both by divulsion and subsidence or sinking of matter because that whilst it forceth away it also eateth between the middle of the Earth which at length it putteth in another place unto this many furious Winds which are very frequent in the Pluvial months from May to September do much conduce For by these the Sea is mightily troubled so that the Sand and gravel is separated from its bottom and from other Regions which matter is forced on the Coasts of India So the Mouths of the Port of Goa by the violence of the Winter-winds from May to September are so obstructed with congested heaps of Sand that they hardly afford a passage to smaller Vessels So these heaps of Sand shut up the Port of Cocin on those Months so that neither small nor great Vessels can pass For a continual Rain on the Mountain Gatis and a frequent Ecnephias or impetuous wind from a Cloud breaking forth with an abundance of water from the Clouds which are beheld to hang as it were on the top of Gatis send forth such an abundance of water and with that violence that it carrieth much Sand with it to the shoar where the Ocean resisteth which Sand when that the Winter endeth is taken away by the Ocean and the Ports are opened There are some Lands so nigh the shoar that the flux of the Sea doth make them Islands and in the reflux they are in appearance part of the Continent and if that the interposed Channel acquire a greater Altitude in progress of time at length the flux of water is excluded and the Islands become part of the Continent without reciprocal mutation And also the Nile overflowing Aegypt every year causeth the Cities and Hills of Aegypt then to seem Islands So the River Wolga doth so increase in the Months of May and June that it covereth the Sands and Islands and many of the Isles that adjoyn unto India become Sands in the Pluvial Months where that the Nile and the Ganges do overflow the Regions Proposition XIII There is yet another Mode besides the two already related by which Islands have a Being or Original viz. for the coherent Earth suddenly to be carried from the bottom of the Sea to the superficies Another Mode by which Islands have an Original Others suppose this Mode and that not undeservedly to have proceeded from the fabulous Grecians and Poets But Seneca a grave Author relateth that the Island Thracia in his time sprang up in the Aegean Sea whilst that the Mariners looked on Although therefore that very few Examples of such productions of Islands are to be found yet it ought not to be supposed impossible for it may be that a porous spongy sulphureous Earth doth exist as there is a various difference and mixture of sight Earths which even now hath increased to a notable altitude yet so as that it yet remaineth beneath the superficies of the water Now if that such a Sand or Earth adhere less firm at the bottom of the Sea it may be separated by the violence of the Sea because that it is little lighter than the water or almost of the same levity therefore it will ascend to the superficies of the water and suddenly an Island will seem to spring up or a Spirit or Wind included in the bowels of the Earth without any violence of the Sea and endeavouring to break forth may send forth such an Island above the Water for great is the force of Winds included in the Earth and requiring a larger space as is evident from
Earthquakes By which it is manifest that sometimes Mountains are sent forth of the Earth and sometimes swallowed up the same is manifest from Warlike Mines where the Wind breaketh up great Towers and Walls and carrieth them into the Air. If that therefore such an Island of a sudden springing in the Sea adhere to the bottom of the Sea we must necessarily say that it was forced upwards by the violence of some subterraneous Wind As some write that Mountains sometimes are thrust forth of the Earth but if that it no longer adhere to the bottom as well the Wind as the violence of the water may separate it from the bottom so that at length by its own levity it is carried upwards to the superficies Proposition XIV Whence another doubt doth arise viz. whether that there be certain Islands that swim on the Sea as Thales supposed the whole Earth to swim on the Ocean For the Opinion of Thales it is sufficiently refuted seeing that the Channel of the Sea is found continuous to the Land but reason perswades us that there may be swiming Islands if that the Land be light and sulphureous Seneca addeth Experience for he saith that he saw the Isle Catylias swiming which had Trees and brought forth Grass and Herbs that the water sustained it and that it was not only driven hither and thither by the wind but also by the Air and that it continued not in one station either by Day or by Night Moreover there was another Island in the Lake Vadimon another in the Lake Station So the Ancients relate that Delos and all the Cyclades formerly swam in the Sea Neither may you object why do not those Islands swim at this day For unto this the Answer is easie That such a swiming cannot continue long for seeing that those Islands almost touch at the bottom of the Sea whilst that they are moved hither and thither they are carried more or less elevated to the Sands or Channels especially if that they come in the midst between two Sands that motion is stopped and other collected Earths are united with this Sand-bank or Channel and so of swiming Islands they become firm In Fondura a Country in America at this day is a Lake in which are many Hills which are moved to and fro with the wind In the great Lake of Scotland called Loumond is an Isle that swimeth and is moved about although that it be apt for Pasturage as Boetius writeth Hitherto we have treated of the generation of the Lands or of the Acid part of the Earth that is extant on the superficies we shall now consider how the Ocean and Waters may change their places and possess new Proposition XV. Rivers possess certain tracts of Land which they possessed not before and that for divers reasons Certain tracts of Land which Rivers possess which they possessed not before 1. When that they first arise from their Fountains and receive a Channel either from Nature or by Art of which we have spoken in the fifteenth Chapter 2. If that a River maketh another Channel for it self or sendeth forth a branch from it self which is most commonly done by men viz. that they may bring part of the Rivers unto Cities or into another River Examples of which we have alledged in the forecited Chapter 3. If that Rivers more and more possess the banks in progress of time which hapneth 1. If that the Channel become higher from the sinking down of the Earth or Sand. 2. If that it eateth off the sides of the Bank by its swift course 3. If that it be augmented by another River and by an abundance of Rain or an Exhydria or impetuous wind accompanied with a mighty fall of water 4. If that they overflow the Earth which if not going back again but do more and more augment they become Lakes or if they return to their Ancient Channel the water being effused into the Fields becometh a Marsh if that there be great abundance of it Corollary It is probable therefore then that there was a time in which those tracts of Land which now the Rhine Elbe and the Nile possess as also other Rivers were dry and possessed by the Earth Proposition XVI Lakes Marishes and standing-Pools occupy parts of the Earth that before they possessed not Lakes Marishes and Pools possess parts of the Earth which formerly they did not 1. When that they first spring up and are augmented in progress of time of which we have spoken in the fifteenth Chapter 2. If that abundance of Rain fall 3. If that Rivers bring store of water with force into the Lakes 4. If that the Channel become more high 5. If that the Lakes being agitated by often and more vehement floods by degrees do more eat the banks and cover the land with water So the Lake of Harlem within thirty or forty years hath extended beyond its former Bank about the space of the twentieth part of a mile Corollary Therefore it is probable that there was a time when those tracts of land which now the Lake Zaire Lemanus Parina Harlem Maeotis or the Marishes of Westphalia and all others formerly possessed were dry Lands Proposition XVII The Ocean possesseth part of the Land which formerly it did not possess Land possessed by the Ocean which formerâ—y it did not possess This hapneth after various manners 1. When that breaking through the middle of the land it maketh Streights and Gulphs as the Mediterranean the Arabian that of Bengala Camboja and such like So the Streight between Sicily and Italy between Geilan and India between Greece and Euboeja between Manilla and Magellan and also the Danish c. Neither is it improbable but that the Atlantick Ocean was so generated and that America was so divided from the Old World or at least from Europe which some do the more easily embrace that they may thence only deduct the Original of the American Nations from Adam Indeed the Aegyptian Priests related unto Solon about six hundred years before Christ as you may see in the Dialogue of Plato termed Timons that there was formerly opposite to the Herculean Streight of Gibralter an Isle bigger than Asia and Europe together called Atlantis and that part of it afterwards by a great Earthquake and a great deluge of one day and one night was swallowed up in the Ocean From which Narration we may collect that in former times amongst the Aegyptians there was a fame especially amongst those that were Learned of the separation of America from our World made many Ages before But it is far more likely that the North part of America in which is New France New England Canada and the like did in former Ages adhere to Ireland The Ancients write that the Streights of Gibralter were dug through by Hercules 2. When with a violent Wind the Ocean is forced and overfloweth the land by breaking through or over the banks that are made by Nature and Art There are
or force in and therefore a general Wind is considered especially in the midst of the Sea most remote from the Land 2. Yet another wind may also blow in the midst of the Sea viz. if that in another a Cloud or other cause generating of a wind be very great From these two Causes it happeneth that a general wind is less or more constant or continual in divers placer Now the general winds are only found in the Sea of the torrid Zone or that which lieth between the Tropicks about the whole Earth yet in some places it extendeth it self without the Tropicks the space of 7 degrees and they are called Eastern that is the East-wind or collateral to the East as the South-East North-East viz. which blow from the East towards the West for the whole year But they do not consist with the like constancy in all the parts of that Sea but in some they are more hindred and in some less They are more constant in the Pacifick Ocean viz. in that part of it which lieth between the Tropicks so that Ships that loose from the Port of Aquapulco in New Spain in America towards the Philippin Isles that is such as steer their course from the East to the West oftentimes for 60 degrees Sail continually without any alteration or furling of the Sail with a constant East or North-East wind neither unto this day hath any Ship in that most long Voyage of 1650 miles been cast away Whence the Mariners say that they may sleep securely in this Voyage neither is there any need of guiding the Ship seeing that the general Wind bringeth the Ship to the wished Port for here other winds do impede the general Wind. The same constancy of this same Easterly wind is found in the Sea from the Cape or Promontory of Good-hope in the bounds of Africa or rather from that procurrent part of Africa which lieth in the Torrid Zone even to Brazil in the midst of which Voyage lieth the Isle of St. Helena unto which Mariners returning from India unto Europe are wont to direct their Course The Isle of St. Helena is distant from the Promontory of Good-hope 350 Miles and is oftentimes accomplished in sixteen days or also in twelve as the general wind is either vehement or slack for in this there is not a perpetual likeness the Sea-men using the same security when that they have first sailed to the Parallel of that Island for the Promontory of Good-hope lieth without the Tropicks which we have said that they use who Sail in the Pacifick Ocean from Aquapulco to the Philippins yea when that they have passed the Promontory of Good-hope they judge themselves to have escaped all danger and variation of the winds and sleep securely the wind constantly filling their Sails towards that Island and Brazil But yet this only is their great care that they may not Sail beyond the Island seeing that it is a very small one for if that they have passed it the eighth part of a mile they cannot regain it viz. an Easterly wind forcing them towards the West therefore then they are forced with great loss of their Voyage to make to the Coasts of Brazil or the other Isle called Ascension to water at If then you demand by what course they Sail when that the Ships make a contrary Voyage in this Sea viz. whilst that they steer from the Philippin Isles unto New Spain or from Brazil and the Isle of St. Helena unto the Promontory of Good-hope whilst that they Sail from India in these Voyages the Reader must know that Mariners use a threefold mode for either they navigate the Sea scituated without the Tropicks therefore they do not touch at the Isle of St. Helena whilst that they Sail from Europe into India or where necessarily they must pass by this they do not directly steer their course from the West to the East but obliquely from the North the Collateral quarter of it to the South or the Collateral quarter of it or lastly they choose such a time of Navigation in which they know that that general wind is impeded often by others But this latter because that it happeneth rarely therefore they rather make choice of the two former Modes of which we sâ—ll speak more in the Chapter of Navigation Therefore there are two Seas of the Torrid Zone in which that general Oriental wind with its Collaterals reigneth throughout the whole year viz. that which lieth between the procurrent of Africa and Brazil the other is that which is extended between New Spain or rather between America and the Oriental Islands of which the Philippins are a part The third part of this Sea under the Torrid Zone viz. between the Procurrent of Africa and the Philippins or Oriental Islands is not indeed destitute of this general wind but oftentimes it is hindred in this Sea by reason of the frequency of Islands which hindrance yet in some places is more frequent than in other some Between Mozambique and India the general wind is of most force in January February March April in other Months other winds do blow of which we shall speak in the following Proposition This general wind is more hindred in the Sea of the Indian Isles At the Isle of Banda in the Month of May the Oriental winds begin to be prevalent being very violent and accompanied with rain at Malacca in September and in other places otherwise as we shall shew in the following Proposition See Proposition 3. Yet this you must know that this general wind doth not equally extend it self in these Seas towards the Tropicks in all parts but that there is a great difference in this For the Tropicks are distant from the Aequator on both sides 23 ½ deg but the general wind may be discovered in one Meridian unto the Latitude of 20 degrees in another Meridian unto 15 in another unto 12. So in the Indian Ocean when in the Months of February and January the East wind or South or South-East bloweth it is not discovered until you come to the 15 degree of Latitude So unto those that Sail from Goa unto the Promontory of Good-hope here a general wind meeteth them at the 12 deg of South Latitude and at the 28 degree of the same Latitude accompanieth them So also Mariners have observed that no general wind bloweth between the 4. degree of Northern Latitude even unto the 10 or 11 deg between Africa and America for when they have Sailed by that wind from St. Helena towards the Aequator even unto the 4 deg of Northern Latitude then are they destitute of that wind even until they come unto the 10 degree of Latitude And from that degree even unto the 30 the North-East is again manifestly found continually to blow although that the 30 degrees be 7 degree from the Torrid Zone Yet notwithstanding in the 6 7 and 8. degree of Parallel Latitude it also bloweth in some places but in
value erected by the Senators which for their Grandure are fit to lodge and entertain any Prince in Christendom most of which are seated on the Grand Canal Also the Royal and proud Palace of the Duke deserves a particular description which for its largness beauty and riches as well in its fabrick without as in its Pictures and Statues within exceeds all others then the Tribunals or Courts of Justice the Senate-house or great Hall Its Arsenal or Magazine of War being about two miles in circuit encompassed with high Walls and the Sea having but one place or Gate for entrance and only one Channel for Ships to pass in and out at and here is kept always in readiness about two hundred Gallies with all things fit for a Voyage or fight also here are kept a thousand Coats of Plate garnished with Gold and covered with Velvet but above all its Church of St. Mark which for its exteriour and interiour beauty and richness of its Ornaments have deservedly made this City famous and in this Church according to report lyeth the body of St. Mark the Patron of this City which was brought hither from Alexandria In this City are seventeen rich Hospitals 56 Tribunals 67 Parish Churches 26 Monasteries of Nuns 54 Convents of Fryars 18 Chappels and six Free-Schools for the increase of Learning It s Piazza or broad place of St. Mark adorned with sumptuous Fabricks Statues c. is a place much frequented by the Gentry This City is the only place where Policy Warfare and Merchandize have embraced one another the Gentry are here held in such esteem that it is held for the greatest honour they can bestow upon the best deserver to make him a Gentleman of this City and from them the Sonatours are chosen and out of them the Duke who in a manner is only titular not having the Regal power his Salary which is paid him out of the Common Treasury is forty thousand Duccals yearly In this Estate are two Patriarchs and 34 Bishops Dukedom of Mantoua The Dukedom of MANTOVA seated Northwards of the Estates of Venice It s chief City is so called a place of good strength encompassed on the sides with Water about a quarter of a mile broad and on the other side with a Wall it is seated on a River which emptieth it self into the Po. In this City Virgil that famous Poet was born Dukedom of Modena The Dukedom of MODENA formerly joyned to that of Mantoua hath for its chief City Modena famous for the Battle between Anthony and Augustus where Hirtius and Pansa the two Consults were slain and Anthony lost the day This place is the residence of its Dukes as Mantoua is of hers Dukedoms of Parma and Placentia The Dukedom of PARMA and PLACENTIA Northwards of Mantoua hath for its chief place Parma seated in a fruitful Plain five miles from the Appenuines It is about four miles in circuit adorned with many rich and stately Structures is very populous and well inhabited by Gentry who are much addicted to Learning and Arms it hath a fair and spacious Campagnia which feeds abundance of Sheep and here the Duke hath his Palace which is a place of great delight and state This Country boasts of its Parmasan-Cheese so much esteemed by some The chief place of Placenza is so called it is seated on the Po comodious for Traffick and famous for its Fairs in Exchanges here quarterly kept which are much resorted unto it is about five miles in compass a place of good strength and beauty being adorned with many fair and rich Structures and Churches Bishoprick of Trent The Bishoprick of TRENT whose chief City bears its names it is seated in a Plain and surrounded with Mountains of an excessive height being always covered with Snow by reason of which it is more fit for Wines than Corn. The City is not large but indifferent strong its Houses are fair and stately its Streets large its Churches beautiful and richly adorned and its Royal Palace sumptuous and stately This City is famous for the general Council there held for the establishment of the Roman Catholick Religion ITALY particularly so called The second part of Italy according to our method will contain the Estates of the CHVRCH and TOSCANE which may again be subdivided into others which are taken notice of in the Geographical Tables of which in order Territory of Ferraresse The Territory of FERRARESSE about 160 miles in length and 50 in breadth had once Dukes of its own but now belongs to the Pope its chief place is Ferrara so called from the Iron-Mines about it it is seated on the Po which serves as a Rampire to defend it on the one side as doth a strong Wall well fortified with a spacious Mote on the other side it is about five miles in compass beautifully built and adorned with superb Edifices and is accounted one of the pleasantest Cities in Italy having in the midst thereof a spacious Green into which doth open about 20 Streets most of which are about half a mile in length and so even and uniform that from thence the utmost ends of each may be easily discovered It is well inhabited rich and dignified with an Vniversity Province of Bolognois The Province of BOLOGNOIS Eastwards of Modena hath for its chief place Bologna once the head of 12 Cities it is seated on the River Aposa and in a large and fertil Territory for Corn Wine Fruits and Olives it is about five miles in circuit and begirt with a Wall This City is adorned with many fair and proud Buildings in which they observe a uniformity amongst which is the Pope's Palace for his retirement which for grandure and statelyness is fit to give entertainment to any Prince in Christendom It is dignified with the chief Vniversity of Italy famous for the study of the Civil Law it is proudly built having spacious Courts Province of Romandiola ROMANDIOLA or ROMAGNE Eastwards of Bolognese hath for its chief places 1. Ravenna seated on the Adriatick and once a place of good account having one of the fairest Havens in the World which is now choaked up This City was the seat of the Emperour Honorius and his Successors then of the Gothish Kings and lastly of its Patriarch but now as its Haven is choaked up so is the Land covered with water which makes it become useless 2. Rimini seated on the mouth of the River Rubicon 3. Cervia seated on the Adriatick Sea a place where so great quantity of Salt is made that the Popes part is valued yearly at 60000 Crowns and 4. Faenza Dukedom of urbin The Dutchy or Dukedom of VRBIN not long since fallen to the Holy Seat it lying in the midst of his Territories It s chief places are 1. Vrbin seated at the bottom of the Appennine formed like a Miter 2. Belfort seated in the Midland 3. Fano a Sea-port Town to Vrbin where the English do
its Buildings especially in its Suburbs which is severed from the City by a Wall which gives entrance by six Gates As touching the Trade of this Kingdom I shall include it under this City as being the chief place of Traffick The Commodities exported are the product of the Country already treated of and those imported are all sorts of English Commodities especially Apparel Silks Stuffs c. also Wines Oils and several other Commodities Their Coins as being under the Jurisdiction of England have correspondency therewith and are here currant as also those of Spain and an Irish Pound which consisteth of 20 s. is but 15 s. sterling which makes their Shilling but 9 d. sterling And as to their Weights and Measures they are the same with those of England where see further Wickle seated on the Sea Wickle where over the narrow Haven there standeth a Rock enclosed with a strong Wall instead of a Castle and serveth for a place of defence New-Castle a Town which regardeth the Sea Newcastle where there are Shelves of Sand which they call the Grounds reaching a great length between which and the Shoar is said to be about seven Fathom water Houth seated on the River Liffy at its fall into the Sea Houth which almost encloseth it Malcheal also seated on the Sea Malcheal nigh unto which is a small Isle called Lambey County of East-Meath described EAST-MEATH a County watered with the noble River Boyn which cutteth the Country into two parts and after it hath received the Waters of Lough-Ranmore dischargeth it self into the Sea It is severed into twelve Baronies viz. Moyfenragh Dunboyne Ratoth Duleeke Kells Morgallon Skreen Navan Lune Slane Foore and Decce And hath for its chief place Trim seated on the River Boyne a Town of good account and Trade Trim. Aboy a well inhabited and frequented Town Aboy Navan Drodagh Slane Navan Drodagh and Slane which also hath a Barony County of West-Meath described WEST-MEATH so called as lying Westwards as the other is for lying Eastwards It is divided into twelve Baronies viz. Farbill Moyeashell Clunlonan Brawney Moygoish Delvin Corkery Demyfoore Maheredernon Rathconrath Kilkenny-west and Fartullagh And hath for its chief places Molingar the chief Shire-Town Molingar as being commodiously seated in the midst of the County Delvin seated on the Summit of a Hill a Town dignified with a Barony Delvin and Kelskery Kelskery County of Longford described LONGFORD a County almost encompassed with Lakes and Rivers amongst which is the Shannon the noblest River in the Kingdom It is severed into six Baronies viz. Ardagh Granard Moydow Longford Rathline and Abbyshrewle And hath for its chief places Longford which gives name to the County seated on the Lake Eske Longford or rather on the Shannon Ardragh another good Town Ardragh County of Kildare described KILDARE a rich and fertil County severed into ten Baronies viz. Salt Nass Ikeathy or Oughtereney Claine Connel Magna Carbury Ophaly Noragh and Rabane Kilkullen half Kilcah and Moon Whose chief places are Kildare a fair Inland Town being well frequented defended by a Castle Kildare and dignified with the See of a Bishop A place much celebrated in the Infancy of the Irish Church for its St. Brigid an holy Virgin who was the Disciple of St. Patrick Mainoth defended by a Castle and is a place of good account Mainoth and well frequented Naas Athie Naas and Athie seated on the River Barrow both Towns of some account Kings County described KINGS COVNTY so called in honour to Philip King of Spain Husband to Mary Queen of England It is divided into ten Baronies viz. Cooles-Town Philips-Town Marrius-Town Ballicowen Kilcoursey Balliboy Clonliske Garricastle Ballibritt and Fercale And hath for its chief places Philips-Town or Kings-Town Philips-Town Queens-Town described QVEENS COVNTY full of Boggs and Woods is divided into eight Baronies viz. Balliadams Vpper-Ossery Portnehinch Tenehinch Cullinagh Mary-burrough Slewmargigh and Stradbally And hath for its chief places Queens-Town a place of good account and is the chief in the County Queens-Town Rheban once a City but at present of small note Rheban County of Caterlough described CATERLOVGH a fertil County and well clothed with Wood. It is severed into five Baronies viz. Ravilly Caterlough Forth Idronye and St. Mullin in part And hath for its chief places Caterlough Caterlough seated on the River Barrow of good account and strength Leighlin Leighlin also seated on the Barrow once dignified with an Episcopal See Tullo Tullo seated on the River Slane Carickbrak Areklo Carickbrak and Areklo which two last are seated on the Sea County of Wexford described WEXFORD or WEISFORD washed by the Sea a County in former time according to Ptolomy possessed by the Menapians a sort of People which came out of Low-Germany It is divided into eight Baronies viz. Gory Scarwalsh Ballagheene Bantry Shellmaleere Forth Bargy and Sheelburne And hath for its chief places Wexford Wexford supposed to be the ancient City Menapa scituate at the Mouth of the River Slane where it hath a good Haven a fair Town and of note for being the first Town that imbraced a Colony of English as also for its Herring-fishing which makes it to be well inhabited and frequented Ross Ross seated on the River Barrow which after a small course falleth into a Bay or Arm of the Sea Ternes Ternes scituate on the Slane dignified with the See of a Bishop and was in former time fortified with a Castle Eniscort Eniscort a Borough and Town Corporate County of Kilkenny described KILKENNY a very fertil County well graced with Towns is divided into ten Baronies viz. Gowran Fassaghdining Kilkenny Cranagh Galmey Callen Iverke Sheelelogher Kells Knocktopher Ida-Igrin and Ibercon And hath for its chief places Kilkenny Kilkenny seated on the River Nur which traverseth the County a fair and wealthy Borough-Town far exceeding all other Mid-land Borough-Towns in the Kingdom It is divided into the English and the Irish Town that part belonging to the English being fenced on the West-side by a Wall and defended by a Castle and that part which belongeth to the Irish being as it were the Suburbs is of the greatest Antiquity having in it the Canicks Church and is honoured with the See of the Bishop of Ossery Thomas Town Thomas Town seated beneath the River Nur a small walled Town Callan Callan seated on a River so called a Borough and Town Corporate Religious Houses Amongst the places in this Province set apart for Divine Worship these following were of great note viz. the stately Abbey called Thomas Court at Dublin built by King Henry the Second in expiation of the Murther of Thomas Archbishop of Canterbury the Monasteries of St. Maries of Oustmanby and Tintern and the Abbey founded by William Marshall Earl
of Pembroke to the praise of God for his safe delivery out of a desperate Storm and Shipwrack which he was in ULSTER It s temperature of Soil THis Province is of a large Extent and of a different Soil some places being very fertil and others as barren which would be otherwise if it were well manured but generally it is inclined to fertility It hath many thick and shady Woods as also divers large Lakes in which are several small Isles Its Lakes and Rivers which said Lakes or Loughs as also the Rivers which water the Province plentifully furnish the Inhabitants with Salmons and other good Fish and for Flesh Fowl and Corn they have more than they can well spend This Province by the Welsh-Britains is called Vltw and by the Irish Cui Guilly It s Name Its Bounds It is bounded on the South with the Provinces of Leimster and Connaugh and on all other parts is washed with the Sea which receiveth the Waters of those many Loughs or Lakes many of which are of a large extent and have within them several small Isles the names of some are as followeth Lough-Neaugh Lough-Foylle Lough-Swillie Lough-Earne and Lough-Cone It s Extent It is of a large Extent reaching from Black-Abbey in the East to Calebegh-Point in the West about 130 miles and from Coldagh-Haven in the North to Kilmore in the South about 100 and in circumference about 420 miles This Province is divided into Ten Counties viz. Tir-conell or Dunagall Division Tyroen Colrane Antrim Downe Louth Armagh Monoghan Gavan and Fermanagh all which are again severed into divers Baronies And of these Counties in order County of Tir-conel described TIR-CONEL or DVNAGAL a Champain Country and well watered with Rivers and Loughs which discharge themselves into the Sea which washeth its Southern Western and Northern parts and affords to the Inhabitants great plenty of Fish and River-Fowl It is divided into five Baronies viz. Tirhugh Boylagh Kilmacreanan Raphoe and Enishowen And hath for its chief places Derry or London-Derry a Colony of the Citizens of London Derry a fair and well built Town where sometime stood a flourishing Monastery Dunegall which gives name to the County seated on a Bay of the Sea Dunegall where it hath a good Haven and between the Mouth of Lough-Earne and Balewilly-Bay Calebeck scituate on the Sea where it hath a commodious Haven Calebeck and Robogh Several Isles and Promontories along the Coast St. Patricks Purgatory Along the Coast of this County are seated several small Isles viz. Torr-Isle the Isles of Cladagh North-Aran c. also the Promontories of Fair-foreland Rams-head and St. Hellens-head And in this County is St. Patricks Purgatory a Vault or narrow Cave in the ground of which strange Fancies are believed by the simple sort of the Irish County of Tyroen described TYROEN a large rough and rugged yet fertil County which is divided by the Mountains of Sliew-Gallen into the Upper and the Lower in both which are three Baronies viz. Omagh Strabane and Dungannon And hath for its chief places Cloghar dignified with the See of a Bishop Cloghar Dungannon the ancient residence of the O-neals Dungannon Strebane Charlement Strebane and Charlemont In this County is â—â—e large Lake Neaugh well stored with Fish in which are several small Isles the chief amongst which are Enis-Garden and Sidney-Isle County of Colerane described COLERANE a small County seated in the most Northern part of the Province and washed with the Sea as also with the large Lake Foylle adjoyning to the Sea on its Western part and watered with the River Band on its Eastern which carrieth a proud stream into the Sea from the Lake Neaugh which breedeth great store of excellent Salmons The chief places in this County are Colerane Colerane which gives name to the County seated on the River Band. Banchor Kilrough Banchor and Kilrough County of Antrim described ANTRIM the nearest County to Scotland from which it is not far distant being almost encircled with Waters having on the West the River Band on the South the large Lough Neaugh and Knockvergus-Bay and on all other parts the Sea where along the Shoar are several very small Isles except it be one to wit the Raglins which is indifferent large This County is severed into eight Baronies viz. Toome Antrim Killconway Massereene Bellfast Dunluce Glenarne and Carie And hath for its chief places Knock-fergus Knock-fergus by the Irish Carick-vergus that is the Rock of Fergus seated on a large Bay so called where it hath a commodious Port. It is a place of good strength is well inhabited and better frequented than other places on this Coast and at the Mouth of this Bay lie several Isles Not far from this place once stood the famous Monastery of Magio so much commended by Bede Antrim Antrim seated on a small River at its influx into the Lake Neaugh Glastalagne Glastalagne scituate on the Band. County of Down described DOWNE a large and fertil County washed on the East with the Sea where it thrusteth it self forth with a large Creek or Arm into the Lough Cone which extendeth it self in length many miles and formeth two By-lands That Southwards called Lecall which is exceeding fertil and whose extream point is called St. Johns Foreland and That Northwards called Ardes It is severed into five Baronies viz. Kinalearty Lower Evagh Ards Vpper Evagh and Lecale And hath for its chief places Downe Downe of old Dunum seated in the part called Lecall near the Lough Cone a Town of good Antiquity and dignified with an Episcopal See as also with the Tombs of St. Patrick St. Bridget and St. Columbe Newry Newry seated on a River which falleth into Carlingford-haven Stranford Stranford seated on the large River Coyn or rather an Arm of the Sea where it hath a safe Harbour Arglas Arglas where as 't is said St. Patrick founded a Church Conner Conner or Conereth an Episcopal See Kilwarny Kilwarny much anoyed with Bogs and full of shady Woods County of Louth described LOVTH a County of a fertil Soil very grateful to the Husbandman and is washed on the East with the Sea It is divided into four Baronies viz. Lough Dundalke Ferrard and Atherdee And hath for its chief places Tredaugh Tredaugh or Droughdagh seated near the Mouth of the Boyne which divideth it but joyned together by a Bridge and by reason of its commodious Haven it is a good Town being well inhabited and frequented nigh unto which stood Mellifont Abbey founded by Donald a K. of Vriel Dundalke Dundalke seated on the Sea where it hath a commodious Haven and in former times was strengthned with a Castle which with the Town was burnt by Edward Brus Brother to the King of Scots who proclaimed himself King of Ireland but for this good act
another called St. Katharines-point also these Towns Trinity St. Johns St. Lawrence St. Brelade St. Peters St. Owen St. Maries and Greve de Leke not far from which on the North-shoar is seated the strong Castle of Groness The Isles of Garnsey described GARNSEY seated about 15 miles North-west from Jersey and on the same Coast an Isle not so large nor altogether so fertil as Jersey by reason the Inhabitants do not addict themselves so much to cultivating and manuring it as they do to Traffick for which this is more eminent yet doth it in a liberal manner answer the Husbandmans labour bringing forth good increase and breeding good store of Cattle This Isle is seated very high having many steep Rocks amongst which is found a hard and sharp Stone called Emerill which is used by Lapidaries for the cleansing cutting and burnishing their precious Stones as also by Glasiers for the cutting their Glafs And for many reasons this Isle may be preferred before Jersey as for its greater strength more commodious Havens which are better resorted unto by Merchants and for that it suffereth neither Toad Snake Adder or any other venemous Creature to live which the other doth It s Government The Government of this Isle as also the People as to their Language Customs c. are much the same as in Jersey Chief places In this Isle are numbred ten Parish Churches besides Villages the chief amongst which are St. Peters a Town not very large St. Peters but well inhabited and replenished with Merchants It is a place of good strength for the entry of the Haven which is Rocky is fortified on both sides with Castles as also by Block-houses of which that on the right hand called Cornet is seated on a high Rock which at every high-High-water is encompassed with the Sea and here resideth the Governour as also for the generality the Souldiers which are kept for the security of the Isle and is well provided with all sorts of Ammunition for War if occasion should so happen It s other places are Tortuville St. Saviours Other places St. Andrews Trinity St. Martins St. Maries St. Sampsons and St. Michaels On the West part of the Isle near the Sea is a Lake of about a mile and an half in compass which is well replenished with Fish especially Carps This Island as also that of Jersey with several other small ones on the Coast of Normandy and Britain are under the Diocess of Winchester amongst which Isies are those of Serke Serk-Isle encompassed with steep Rocks And Jethew which serveth as a Park for the Governour of Garnsey Jethew-Isle to feed Cattle to keep Deer Coneys and Phesants and was formerly a solitary place of Regular Canons and after for the Franciscan Friars Isle of Wight ISLE of WIGHT opposite to Hantshire of which it is a part already treated of in the description of the said County PORTLAND Portland-Isle a small Isle adjoyning to the County of Dorset of which it is also a part and already there treated of And besides these Isles there are divers others which may not so properly be ranged under these four heads aforesaid and such are those of Londay Londay-Isle seated over against Devonshire about two miles in length and as much in breadth very fertil and strong whose chief place beareth the same name Chaldey and Dennoy Isles Also Chaldey and Dennoy all in the Severn Sea Isles of Sheppey and Thanet Also the Isles of SHEPPY and THANET in and near Kent already taken notice of and lastly those of FARN COCKET and HOLY-ISLAND on the Coast of Northumberland likewise there treated of Thus having given a Description of EVROPE we shall in the next place take a View of ASIA ASIA as it is divided into Firm Land whereof the principal Paris are TURKEY in ASIA which comprehendeth the parts and chief places of Anatolia Smyrna Ephesus Lampsaco Bursa Scutari Tripoli Sourie Aleppo Tripoli Damascus Sayd Diarbeck Caraemit Achanchive Samosat Turcomanie Erzerum Cars Majaferequin GEORGIE which comprehendeth the parts and chief places of Mingrelie Fazze Savatopoli Gurgistan Cori. Zulrie Chipeche Stranu Little Turcomanie Derbent ARABIA with its parts and chief places of Arabia the Stony Busseret Moab Arabia the Desert Anna. Arabia the Happy Medina Mecca Aden PERSIA with its chief Provinces and places of Servan Tauris Gilan Gilan Gorgian Gorgian Churdistan Choy Ayrack Hispahan Casbin Chorazan Kayen Chusistan Souster Fars Chiraef Kherman Giroft Sablestan Zarani INDIA as it is divided into the Empire of the GREAT MO GOL wherein are comprehended divers Kingdoms the chief of which are Attock Attock Calul Cabul Lahor Lahor Delly Delly Agra Agra Malway Rantipore Guzurate or Cambaya Surat Cambava Bengala Bengala Decan Goa Peninsula of INDIA without the Ganges with its several Kingdoms c. the chief of which are Golconda Golconda Bisnagar Bisnagar Harsingue Malabar Calicut Peninsula of INDIA within the Ganges with its Kingdoms and chief places of Pegu Pegu Boldia Siam Banckock Malacca Malacca Cochinchina Pulocacein Tunquin Keccio CHINA with its chief Provinces and Cities of Pequin Pequin Nanquin Nanquin Scianton Xanton Quicheo Quicheo Canton Canton Chequian Chequian TARTARIA with its five Parts and chief places of Tartaria Deserta Cumbalich Usbeck Jarcham Turchestan Chialis Cathay Cambalu True Tartaria Tartan ISLES to wit In the Ocean as the Isles of JAPON as Niphon Meaco Xicoco Sanuqui Ximo Bungo PHILLIPPINE Isles as Luson Luson Mindanao Mindanao Isles of MOLUCCO'S as Molucques Gamma Celebes Celebes Gilolo Gilolo Isles of SONDE as Sumatra Achem Aru. Borneo Borneo Java Bantarâ— Jacatra Isles of LARRONS or THEVES Deserte Isles of CEVLAN Colombo Isles of the MALDIVES Tilla don Matis In the Mediterranean Sea as In the LEVANT Sea as Cvprus Famagouste Rhodes Rhodes Scarpanto Scarpanto In the ARCHIPELAGO as Scio Scio. Tenedo Metelin Samo Samo Nicaria Nicaria Lango Lango Stampalia Stampalia ASIA ASIA is one of the Tripartite division of our Continent and if we consider the advantages which the Author oâ— Nature hath given it if the Actions which have passed in it both before and after the Flood Asia the first place of Monarchies of all Religions c. that the first Monarchies and all Religions have here had their beginnings that the chief Mysteries both of the Old and New Law have there been laid open we may be induced to prefer in before all other parts either of the one or other Continent And as of the two Continents ours is much the greater the more noble and most considerable so is Asia among the three parts of our Continent the Greatest the most Oriental the most Temperate and the Richest It s Extent from West to East is from the 55th Meridian or degree of Longitude unto the 180 containing 125 degrees of Longitude which are about 2500 of our common Leagues It s length and breadth and from South to North from the Equator to the 72 Parallel or
in memory of his great Victory And 8. Issus seated on a large Bay famous for the Battel here fought between Alexander with an inconsiderable Army of Macedonians and Darius and his vast Army which consisted of about 600000 Assyrians whereof about 160000 of the Persians were slain and about 40000 taken Prisoners in which Battel the Wives and Daughters of Darius were taken Alexander not losing above 200 of his Men. On the Right-hand of Cilicia is Isauria which may bear the name of a Province It is fruitful in Vines and several sorts of Fruits having a rich Soil The chief Cities are 1. Claudiopolis into which Claudius the Emperour brought a Roman Colony And 2. Seleucia founded by Seleucus The Province of Caria bounded and its chief places described CARIA hath for its Southern bounds the Carpathian Sea It s chief places are 1. Miletus not far from the Hill Latmus the Birth-place of Thales one of the 7 Wise-men of Greece to this place St. Pauls called together the Bishops of Ephesus and other of the adjoyning Cities 2. Mindus which being but a small City and its Gates so big made Diogenes the Cynick to cry out to have them shut their Gates lest the City should run out at them 3. Milasa famous in old time for two Temples dedicated to Jupiter And 4. Borgylia where Diana also had a Temple In this Country is the Hill Latmus which was the retiring place of Endymion who by the study of Astronomy did there find out the Changes and Courses of the Moon by the Poets feigned to be her Favourite others there be who would have it that in a Cave under this Hill Jupiter hid him and casting him in a deep sleep descended sometimes to kiss him The Province of Ionia bounded with its chiefest places IONIA bounded on the West with the Aegean Sea Places of note in this Country are 1. Ephesus famous for many things as First for being the Burial-place of St. John the Evangelist who as some say went here alive into the Grave Secondly for the Temple of Diana which for its Greatness Furniture and stately Workmanship was accounted one of the Wonders of the World Thirdly for St. Pauls directing an Epistle to the Inhabitants thereof Fourthly for being the Episcopal See of Timothy the Evangelist first Bishop hereof And Fifthly for its Ecclesiastical Council here but now much ruined from its ancient beauty it being now reduced to a small Village 2. Smyrna which is now the only City of Trade in these parts famous for being one of the 7 Churches of Asia to which St. John dedicated his Revelation being one of those 7 Cities that strove for the Birth of Homer where in a Cave hard by he is said to have writ his Poems But now violated by the Mahometans her Beauty is turned into Deformity her Religion into Impiety and her knowledge into Barbarism This City is seated on the bottom of a Bay or Gulph called the Gulph of Smyrna where the English French and Venetians keep Consuls to protect their Merchants and keep up their Trade it being under the Jurisdiction of the Grand Signior 3. Colophon another of those Cities which strove for the Birth of Homer Here the People are so well skill'd in Horsemanship that whose side soever they took in War were sure to gain the Victory 4. Erythra the habitation of one of the Sibyls from whence called Sibylla Erythraea 5. Ipsus remarkable for the great Battel betwixt Antigonus and Seleucus two of Alexanders chief Commanders wherein Antigonns lost both the day and his life 6. Lebedus of note in ancient times for those Plays here yearly held in honour to Bacchus 7. Priene the Birth-place of Bias one of the 7 Wise-men of Greece And 8. Clazomene seated on a small Ilet near the shoar beautified with a Temple dedicated to Apollo The Province of Aeolis and its chief places AEOLIS North of Ionia hath for its chief places 1. Cuma the habitation of Sibylla Surnamed Cumana 2. Elaea on the Mouth of Caicus being the Port-Town to Pergamus 3. Myrina which in honour to Augustus is called Sebastopolis 4. Pitane not far from the Aegean Sea and here they had an art in making Bricks that would swim above water The Province of Lydia and its chief places LYDIA It s chief Cities are 1. Sardis in which was one of the 7 Churches in Asia being the Royal Seat of Croesus and the Kings of Lydia until it was subdued by the Persians and 2. Philadelphia on the Banks of the River Caystrus It s People are said to be the first Inventers of Dice Chess and other such Games as also the first Hucksters Pedlers and the first Coyners of Mony The Country by reason of the great plenty of gallant Rivers renders it very fruitful and pleasant being enriched with Mines of Gold and Silver as also precious Stones The Province of Phrygia Major bounded and its chief places PHRYGIA MAJOR bounded on the East with Galatia The chief places are 1. Gordion the Seat of Gordius which from the Plough-tail was taken and chosen King of this Kingdom who tied such a Knot called the Gordian-knot which Alexander the Great cut in pieces when he could not unty it 2. Midium the Seat of Midas Son to this Gordius who covetously petitioned Bacchus that whatsoever he touched should be turned into Gold which was granted but soon was forced to lose the benefit of it else he would have been starved his Victuals turning into Gold and falling into a second oversight in Judgment in preferring Pan's Pipe before Apollo's Harp he for his small Judgment in Musick was rewarded with a comly pair of Asses-ears 3. Colossi to whom St. Paul writ one of his Epistles 4. Pesinus where the goddess Cybele was worshipped being called Dea Pesinuncia This City is placed in the Borders of Galatia The Country is very rich pleasant and well watered with Rivers the People being anciently more Superstitious than in any other place of Asia as is manifest by the Rites used in their Sacrifices of Cybele and other of their goddesses being accounted such as use Divination They are a People which much delight in Effeminacy Here Reigned Tantalus who wanting wisdom to make use of his great Riches is by the Poets feigned to stand in Hell up to the chin in water under a Tree whose Fruit doth touch his Lips but yet cannot reach them The Province of Phrygia Minor bounded with its chief places PHRYGIA MINOR bounded on the South with the Aegean Sea Places of most note viz. 1. Dardanum or Dardania being the Town and Patrimony of Aeneas 2. Troy seated on the Banks of the River Scamander famous for having sustained a Ten years Siege against the Greeks in which time the Trojans lost 860000 Men and the Grecians 666000 Men being then so famous a City that it might be counted the glory of the East from whence all Nations desire to derive their beginning but now
and those Estates which we will comprehend under the name of Sian are to the North of Pegu. We may consider them in two principal parts of which one shall retain the name of Sian and the other that of Malacca This latter is a Peninsula which extends it self from the first degree of Latitude unto the 11 or 12 from whence the first advances it self into the Main Land unto the 19 or 20 degree on this side the Equator It s extent They reach then each 250 and together 4 or 500 Leagues from South to North. But the Peninsula of Malacca is very streight not being above 10 or 12 Leagues broad in the Isthmus which separates it from Sian in other places 20 30 40 and some times 80. Sian is almost of an equal length and breadth Under the name of Sian separated from the Peninsula of Malacca we comprehend the Kingdoms of Sian Martaban Jangoma and Camboya under the name of Malacca those of Tanacerin Juncalaon Singora Queda Pera Patane Pan Malacca Ihor and others as in the Geographical Table The chief places of the particular Sian The Kingdom of Sian especially so called hath several Cities of note viz. First Odiaa which some call Sian the Metropolis being a City of a large extent a place of so great strength that in 1567. they stoutly defended themselves against an Army of 1400000 fighting Men which the King of Pegu brought against them for twenty Months together By reason of which together with several other mutations that have since hapned amongst them the City hath been much eclipsed of its former beauty splendor and riches yet by reason of its commodious scituation on the River Menam is still a place of great Trade and Commerce is rich and populous The Houses are built very high by reason of the annual overflowing of this River about the Month of March So that it covereth the Earth for about 120 Miles in compass which renders these Countries very fruitful as the Nile doth Egypt During this Inundation Its Inhabitants retire to the upper Rooms of their Houses and to every House there is a Boat or other Vessel belonging by which means they negotiate their affairs until the River returns to her usual bounds Its Commodities and Trade The principal Commodities of this City or indeed of the Kingdom are Cotton-Linnens of several sorts Benjamin Lacque of which they make excellent Hard Wax Also that costly Wood which the Portugals call Palo Dangula and Calamba which is weighed against Silver and Gold for 〈◊〉 Perfumes and the Wood Sapon used by Dyers also Spices some Drugs Diamonds Gold Camphora Bezar-Stones Musk Porcelaine and lastly that excellent Wine or Distilled Liquod which they call Nipe which they make of Cocos or Indian Nuts being of great esteem over all India and elsewhere It s other places are Bankock noted for excellent Pepper Lugor seated on the Sea-shore and Socotay famous for having a Temple only made of Metal which is 80 Spans high and answerable in length and breadth being adorned with abundance of Idols built by one of their Kings at his coming to the Crown Martaban its commodities c. The Kingdom of MARTABAN towards the Gulph of Bengala is contiguous to Pegu to which it hath been subject at present is to Sian This Kingdom hath many Ports frequented for Trade for besides its Grains Fruits Oils and Medicinal Herbs it is rich in Mines of Gold Silver Iron Lead Steel and Copper It hath Rubies Lacques and Benjamin c. And they make Vessels of Earth which they call Martabanes of which some are so great that they hold a Bushel This is a kind of Porcelain varnished with black and wherein they keep Water Wine Oil and all sorts of Liquors and for this reason they are esteemed in all the East Jangoma and its commodities JANGOMA on the confines of Pegu Siam and Brama hath been subject or tributary sometimes to one and sometimes to another It hath Gold Silver Copper Musk Cotton of which they make Manufactures Pepper c. It s People are more addicted to Horse than Foot service CAMBOJA is the last and most Southerly part of the Peninsula Camboja which is between the Gulphs of Sian and Cochin-china The principal Cities are Ravecca and Camboja of which the Kingdom takes it name which is under the 10th or 11th degree of Latitude and on the principal and most Easternly branch of the River Menam which as it is believed comes from China but it should be said from some Regions formerly subject to or which were part of China It s People The People in their Manners and Customs resemble those of Sian whose Subjects they have been and whose Tributaries but lately they were MALACCA Peninsula of Malacca its parts commodities c. IN the Peninsula of Malacca are divers Kingdoms which are taken notice of in the Geographical Table which all except the City of Malacca are likewise tributary to that of Sian Tenasserin is a Country of Trade by reason of its Archipelago which contains several Islands and of its Isthmus which facilitates the transportation of Merchants from one Sea to another and of its Ports which are commodious It s other places are Juncalaon Zueda Pera and Malacca all which places afford Nipe of burning Wines Ihor its chief places and commodities IHOR is beyond Cape de Sincapura and on the utmost point of the Peninsula It s chief City was taken and ruined by the Portugals in 1603 who took from thence 1500 Brass Cannons The King of Ihor for revenge besieged Malacca in 1606 with 60000 Men but was constrained to raise his Siege there are some petty Kings which are his Tributaries Pahang hath Lignum Aquila and Calamba near to that of Cochin-china of Camphire like to that of Borneo Gold but of a lower alloy than ours Petra Porea of near as much vertue as the Bezoar against poyson Diamonds Nutmegs Mace c. Patane and its Trade PATANE within few years is grown famous the Kingdom being frequented by divers Nations particularly by the Chinois who bring thither Porcelaine divers Manufactures and Instruments of Husbandry instead of which they carry back Timber for Building Cordage made of Cocos Rice and divers Skins c. The Pepper is excellent but dearer than at Bantam Their Saroy-Boura that is the matter of Swallows Nests which we shall speak of in Cochin-china is much sought after The Soil is good producing Fruit every Month in the year Their Hens Ducks and Geese often lay Eggs twice a day Amongst an infinite number of Fowl they have white Herons and Turtles of various colours like Paroquetoes Patane Singora Brodelong and Ligor are on the same Gulph which may be called also by Patana and makes part of that of Sian Patane and Ligor towards the two ends Singora and Brodelong in the midst and at the bottom of this Gulph and these two last are head Cities of Provinces
West Abissina above and Zanguebar beyond the Nile and in the most Easternly part of Ethiopia Congo makes the most Western part of Ethiopia the Mono-Motapa and Cafres the most Southern This on the Coast the other within Land Nubia Abissina and Zanguebar together answer to the Ethiopia sub Egypto of Ptolomy Nubia to the most Northern part and nearest to Egypt Abissina more Southern Zanguebar to that which is on the Coasts and there where Ptolomy describes the Regions of Barbary Azania and Trogloditica which answer to the particular Zanguebar on the Coast of Ajan and the Coast of Abex which we esteem under the general name of Zanguebar In the Lower Ethiopia Congo answers to the Hesperii Aethiopes the Mono-Motapa to Agisymba Regio the Cafres to the Anthropophagi Aethiopes The Coast of Cafres reaches 1200 Leagues the Mono-Motapa is 4 5 or 600 long and broad Congo 6 or 700 long and 300 large Nubia 400 long and 200 broad Abissina 7 or 800 long and 4 or 500 broad The Coast of Zanguebar stretches 15 or 1600 Leagues with not above 100 of breadth like to that of Cafres It s chief Mountains viz. The Mountains of Africa are in great number and very remarkable both for their height extent the Metals wherewith they abound and other particulars The most famous are Atlas those of the Moon and Serre Lione Atlas was the most famous Mountain among the Ancients Atlas who believed it bounded the World on the South It s name was taken from Atlas King of Mauritania whom Perseus turned into a Mountain by making him see the Head of Medusa and because he had been an Astronomer the Poets feigned that he bore up the Heavens It is true this Mountain is so high that it seems to touch the Skies it extends it self from the Great Sea or Occidental Ocean to which it hath given the name of Atlantick even near to Egypt for the space of more than 1000 Leagues leaving Barbary on the one side and Billedulgerid on the other casting forth branches under divers names on both sides There is the Great and Little Atlas The Mountains of the Moon The Mountains of the Moon now of Beth are higher than any of Europe and are alwaies covered with Snow and Ice But these Mountains make divers branches towards the Cape of Good Hope they are called Picos Fragosos towards the East of Congo the Mountains of Chrystal above the Lakes of Zaire and Zafflan the Mountains of the Sun and of Salt-Peter and it may well be that the highest between Abissina the Mono-Motapa and Cafreria retain the name of the Mountains of the Moon The Mountains of Serre Lione The Mountains of Serre Lione by the Portugals Sierre Lioa are the Chariot of the Gods of the Ancients And this name was given because from their top they send forth continual Lightnings and Thunders as if the Gods could not march with less noise Their principal ridge is between the Country of the Negroes and Guinny where they make two Branches one advancing into the Farther Africa or Libya and the Higher Ethiopia the other between the Higher and Lower Ethiopia this seeking the Mountains of the Moon the other Atlas It s chief Rivers viz. The Nile The largest and most famous Rivers of Africa are the Nile and the Niger the Nile hath been known in all times Ancient and Modern Authors have been troubled to tell where its Head-spring is and more to give the reason of the Increase and Decrease of its Waters we will speak something of it in Egypt It s course is 1200 Leagues in a strait line and little less than 2000 in its turnings It descends from the Lake Zaire traverses the Higher Ethiopia Nubia and Egypt and falls with several Mouths into the Mediterranean about the middle of its course it embraces the Isle of Meroe or Gueguere And this Isle hath many Estates and Signories and may boast it self the greatest and fairest of all River Isles that we have knowledge of The Niger The Niger hath its Springs in the Kingdom of Damont above the Lake Niger and not far from the Nile when it is out of the Lake of Zaire This Niger doth in some part divide the Higher Ethiopia from the Lower approaches Nubia and the Countrey of the Negroes hitherto rolling its streams from South to North till losing it self in the Earth it rises again near the Lake Borno turns its course and continues it to the West traversing the whole Country of the Negroes 200 Leagues from the Sea it divides it self into many Branches which have divers names and falls into the Ocean between the 11th and 16th degrees of Latitude It s course is a little longer than that of the Nile its streams more violent and hath the same property of overflowing and fatning the Earth engenders the same Creatures but not so strong hath grains of Gold in its Sand But the Country which it traverses is neither so well habited rich nor known as that of the Nile Some believe the Nile and the Niger come from the same Springs and that they begin not to divide but between the Higher and Lower Ethiopia one continuing its course towards the North the other turning from East to West So the Arab of Nubia calls both Nile and to distinguish them adds Nile of Egypt and Nile of the Negroes The Zaire The other Rivers of Africa are not to compare with these Zaire in Congo may be considered for the quantity of Waters it streams down and for the greatness of its Mouth at the Sea and so some others but let us pass to the Promontories Its Promontories We have already touched a word or two on the principal ones to wit the Capes of Bona Hermea Promontorium Cape Verd Arsinarium Prom Gard a Fuy Aromata Prom this Name was given because of the Drugs and Spices of the East which passed before this Cape to descend by the Red Sea into Egypt and from Egypt into the Mediterranean and through all the West and of the Cape of Good Hope of which the Greeks and Latins have had no certain knowledge much less those before them nevertheless we find some Authors among the Ancients who would make it appear that the Barbarians that is the stranger Nations have made or caused to be made the Circum-navigation of Africa which could not be done without knowing of this Cape The Emperours and Kings which possess Africa The Kings Emperours or Princes which at present possess Africa are in very great number the most powerful and considerable are the Great Turk or Sultan of the Ottomans who holds all Egypt a great part of Barbary and almost all the Coast which touches the Red Sea The Negus of the Abissines who possesses the fairest and greatest part of the Higher Ethiopia the Xeriffs of Fez and Morocco which have held those two Kingdoms in Barbary and likewise Dara and Segelmesse in Billedulgerid The King of Tombutt among
The Countrey between Rotana and Realejo is so fruitful and pleasant that its like can scarce be found in the World such quantity it produces of Grains Wines Fruits Honey Wax Sugar Flax It s Fertility Silk c. And from hence they have their Vines which they carry to the West Indies the best of which grow on the Coast of Ramble There are certain Shrubs which yield a liquor like to Milk which after it is thickned makes an excellent Gum called Taybayba From the Dragon Tree cut towards the Root they draw a red liquor which they call Dragons Blood well known to Apothecaries It s chief places It s principal City Laguna so called because of the Lake near to it is 4 or 5 Leagues from the Sea contains two parishes and is the residence of the Governor of the Island The other Cities are Sancta Crux Rotana Rajalesa Carachico and Adeca When it was discovered its Kings to the number of seven dwelt in Caverns and the bodies of their dead were set up about Caves where they became as dry as Parchment among which the most honorable had a stick put in their hand and a vessel of Milk before them The Isle of Gomer described GOMER is 8 or 9 Leagues from Teneriff is 10 or 12 Leagues long It s chief City of the same name often receives the Indian Fleet and furnishes them with Corn Fruits Sugar and Wines as well as those of Teneriff and Canaria The Countrey is high plain bears many Dragon-trees feeds small Cattle Its Roads are deep and large The People of this Isle were formerly more barbarous than those of the other Canary Isles using many strange Customs not known elsewhere among which they held it for a great sign of Hospitality to let their Friends lie with their Wives and receive theirs in testimony or return of kindness Isle of Ferr described The Isle of FERR is the most West of all the Canaries distant from Palma 15 or 16 Leagues from Gomer only 5 or 6. This Isle in reason should be well known many persons having been there and many Authors treated very amply of it yet I will a little shew the diversity found touching the greatness and quality of the soyl as also the Water with which the Isle is served It s chief place is called Hierro seated on the Sea shore Here is found plenty of Hogs Goats and Sheep also of Beasts Fowl Fruits and quantity of Grains and Sugar Canes and hath much Cattle which yield abundance of Milk and Cheese A Tree whose Leaves destilâ—â— Water which serves the Isle there being no Rain or Rivers Here is said to be no fresh Water only in the middle of the Isle there grows a Tree whose Leaves are much like those of the Olive which being alwaies covered with Clouds drops from its Leaves into a Cistern which is underneath it very good Water and in such great abundance that it suffices all the Inhabitants as also all the Cattle and living Creatures in the Island One Jackson an Englishman who reports to have seen considered and measured this Tree in 1618 saith That the water falls into a Pond containing 20000 Tuns which in one night is filled and that from this Pond the water is by divers Channels conveyed into other Ponds or Cisterns through the whole Isle which is very well peopled some say it hath in it about 8000 people and above 100000 head of Cattle which for an Island but of six Leagues Circuit is very well for if the Tree be in the middle of the Isle it cannot be above a League distant from any extremity and moreover more than 20000 Tuns of water for 100000 months will be a Tun a day for every five months which is too much drink if they drink nothing but water These particulars are contradicted by others The Conquest of all these Isles saies many Trees not one alone otherwise it would be immortal Sanutus saith that the Cloud begins to rise about noon and in the evening quite covereth the Tree which at the same time destills water drop by drop along the trunk branches and leaves and that it continues so till day Others say that this water falls from Noon all night until a little after the Sun be risen But most will have the Cloud perpetually about the Tree and that it destills continually Suarez makes the Pond or Cistern of not above 20 Tuns The relations of 1602. say two reservers each 20 foot square but neither Suarez nor others makes any mention of other reservers in the Isle but will have this water in one place alone whither all go to fetch it But let us pass from the Ocean into the Mediterranean Sea and come to Malta which is one of the best but none of the least considerable pieces of Africa Nigh unto these 7 Islands called the Canary Isles are the Isles of Roco Sancta Clara Gratiosa Alegria and the two Savage Isles PALMA is distant from Gomer 12 or 15 Leagues to the North West It is round or oval and its Circuit about 25 Leagues Abounds in Corn Wine Sugars and all sorts of Fruits It is well stored with Cattle and therefore made the victualling place of the Spanish Fleet that pass to Peru and Brasil The City of the same name hath great confluence by reason of its Wines loaden for the West-Indies and other places It s best and like to Malvoisie is made about Brenia whence are taken more than 12000 Pipes yearly also St. Andre and Tassa Corde are on the Sea It hath little Corn which is brought from Teneriff Four Sugar Engines the Church of Palma and the Governors House are esteemed fair The Island of MALTA The Isle of Malta THe Isle of MALTA is in the middle of the Mediterranean Sea and almost at an equal distance from the main Land of Asia and Europe It is about 600 Leagues from the Coast of Souria and 500 from the Streight of Gibralter This Streight beginning the Mediterranean Sea towards the West and that Coast ending it towards the East Likewise from Malta to the nearest firm Land of Europe It s scituation which is Italy and to the nearest Coasts of the firm Land in Africa which are the Coasts of Tunis and Tripoly these bounding the Mediterranean Sea on the South that on the North is 80 90 and near 100 Leagues The Antients have esteemed it rather in Africa then in Europe and the opinion hath been followed by almost all modern Authors though it be nearest the Isle and Kingdom of Sicily which is in Europe and from which it likewise holds then to Africa and though it be in the hands of the Knights of Malta who are all Europeans the native tongue of the Country and most of their Customs have alwaies more resembled those of Africa than Europe This Isle at present is very famous The Isle famous for being the seat of the Knights of Malta not for its
These are the three sorts of Properties to be declared in Special Geography although those Terrestrial properties which make up the third rank are not so rightly referr'd to Geography But we must yield somewhat to Custom and the Profit of Learners We will besides these joyn many Chapters to Particular Geography concerning the practice of Geography But in General Geography which we will unfold in this Book first the absolute properties of the Earth and its constitution are considered Lastly in the Comparative part those things shall be proposed which are offered unto us in the comparing one place with another The Principles of Geography The Principles which Geography useth for the confirming the truth of her Propositions are threefold 1. Geometrical Arithmetical and Trigonometrical Propositions 2. Astronomical Precepts and Theorems although it may seem like a miracle for the knowledge of the Earth in which we dwell to use the Celestial Bodies which are so many thousand miles remote from us 3. Experience for indeed the greatest part of Geography especially that which is Particular is upheld by the only Experience and Observation of men who have described every Country The Order of Geography Concerning the Order which I esteem sitting to observe in this Art of Geography it hath been already spoken in the Division and Explication of the properties thereof yet here meets us a certain difficulty concerning the Order to be observed in the explication of these Properties Forsooth whether to all Countries their own Properties are to be attributed or whether the Countries themselves are to be ascribed to the Properties generally explicated Aristotle in the first Book of the History of Living Creatures as also in his first Book of the Parts of Living Creatures moveth the like doubt and disputes it at large whether according to the single â—orts of Living Creatures their Properties are singly to be reckoned up or else whether these Properties are generally to be declared and the Living Creatures in which the may be found are then to be subjoyned The like difficulty occurs also in other parts of Philosophy We in General Geography have generally unfolded some Properties which in Special Geography we will apply to the application of single Countries The Method of Geography As touching the method and manner of proving the truth of Geographical Tenents very many are proved in general Geography by Demonstrations properly so called especially Celestial Properties but in special Geography the Celestial Properties only excepted which may be demonstrated are in a manner declared without demonstration because experience and observation doth confirm them neither can they be proved by any other means Also very many Propositions are proved or rather demonstrated by the Terrestrial Artificial Globe and also by Geographical Maps and some of these Propositions which are thus explained upon the Globe c. may be confirmed by lawful demonstrations Again some Propositions can in no wise be so proved but are therefore received because we suppose that all places in the Globe and Maps are so disposed even as they lie on the Earth Yet in these things we will rather follow the Descriptions made by Authors of Geography The Globe and Maps serve for the clearing and more easie comprehension thereof The Original of Geography The Original of Geography is not New nor brought into the World at one birth neither came she to us from one Man but her Principles and Foundations were laid long ago yea many Ages since although ancient Geographers were employed only in describing Countries which is the part of Chorography and Topography The Romans were accustomed when any Country by them was subdued to shew in their Triumph the Chorography thereof lively pencilled and drawn on a Table and flourished with Pictures to the Beholders There were besides at Rome in Lucullus his Porch many Tables of Geography exposed to the view of all men The Senate of Rome about an hundred years before Christs Birth sent Surveyors and Geographers into divers parts of the World that they might measure out the Earth but they came far short thereof Neco King of the Egyptians many Ages before the Birth of Christ commanded that the whole outer-side of Africa should be discovered by the Phoenicians in three years space King Darius commanded that the Mouths of the River Indus and the Ethiopian Eastern-Sea should be searched out Alexander the Great in his Voyage to Asia took with him Diognetus and Beton as Pliny noteth two Surveyors and Describers of his Journies out of whose Annotations and Journals Geographers of succeeding Ages took many things Ancient Geography very imperfect But the Geography of the Ancients was very lame and imperfect for first they knew not America in the least 2. The Northern-Lands 3. The South-land and Magellan were utterly unknown to them 4. They knew not whether the Earth might be sailed about or the Main Ocean with a continual trace did encompass it but yet I deny not but that some of the Ancients were of that opinion yet I utterly deny they knew it certainly 5. They knew not whether the Torrid Zone were habitable 6. They were ignorant of the true dimensions of the Earth although they wrote many things in this business The Excellency of Geography First the study of Geography is commended to us by the great worthiness thereof because it most of all becometh Man being an Inhabitant of the Earth and endued with Reason above all Living Creatures Secondly It is also a pleasant thing and indeed an honest recreation to contemplate the Kingdoms and Properties of the Earth Thirdly The commodity and necessity of it is notable insomuch as neither Divines Physitians Lawyers Historians nor other Professors can want the knowledge thereof But the Excellency of Geography hath been sufficiently handled I place hereunder a Table which openeth the order in Special Geography to the observing the Explication of single Countries Special Geography considereth in every Region Ten Terrestrial 1. Limits and circumscription 2. Longitude of place and scituation 3. Figure 4. Magnitude 5. Mountains The Appellation Scituation and Altitude Their properties and things contained in them 6. Mines 7. Woods and Deserts 8. Waters The Sea Lakes Marshes Rivers Their Springs Inlets Tracts and Latitude The quantity of Water the celerity the quantity the Cataracts 9. Fertility Sterility and Fruits 10. The Animals Eight Celestial 1. The distance of place from the Aequator and Pole 2. The obliquity of Motion above the Horizon 3. The Quantity of Dayes 4. The Clime and Zone 5. The Heat the Seasons of the Year the Winds Rain and other Meteors 6. The rising and stay of the Stars above the Horizon 7. The Stars passing through the Vertex of the place 8. The celerity or quantity of their Motion according to the Hypothesis of Copernicus Ten Human Things 1. The Stature Life Meat and Drink and the Original of the Inhabitants 2. The Income Arts Merchandize or Traffick 3. Vertues and Vices the Genius and Erudition 4.
A Peninsula A Peninsula or Chersonese that is such a Tract of Land that is almost encompassed by the Sea except at one only narrow place where with a strait neck of Land called an Isthmus it is knit to the Main Land An Isthmus An Isthmus is that narrow or strait neck of Land that couples and joyns the Peninsula to the Continent or Main-land and that by which we pass out of one broad Land into another The Peninsula's Chersonesusses or Chersoneses that is running out Lands are these following to wit 1. Italy 2. Spain 3. Part of England Of Lands which are or may be termd Peninsula's 4. All Greece and Macedonia 5. Norway and Swedeland with Lapland 6. Asia minor 7. India 8. Camboia 9. New Guiney of the South-land 10. Beach a Country of the same Land 11. Part of Virginia and New-England 12. The Tongue of Africa c. Proposition X. Other Lands termed Peninsula's The Chersoneses of the Ancients We will number up further fourteen Peninsula's or Chersoneses and these we will divide into longish ones and somewhat round ones The longish ones are first the Golden Chersonese of the Ancients now called the Malaccan Chersonese and joyns to the Indies 2. The Cymbrick Chersonese now called Jutland adjoyning to Holsatia 3. California on the Western side of North America near the Sea Vermejo But late Observations report it to be an Island 4. New France on the Eastern side of North America 5. The Jucatan Chersonese in the Bay of Mexico 6. The Thracian Chersonese on the Hellespont 7. The Cassandrian Chersonese by the Bay of Thessalonica in the Grecian Sea There are also certain Peninsula's less celebrious of the lesser Asia to wit Ionia or the Smyrnensian Peninsule 2. The Cnidensian or the Countrey of Doris and 3. The Mindensian Peninsula's Concerning Corea it is doubtful whether it be a compleat Island or a Peninsula Some Maps joyn it to Tartary some again begirt it round with the Sea yet notwithstanding the latest Observations make it a Peninsule The somewhat round Peninsula's are 1. Africa her self a huge part of the Old World is such an one it is environed with the Mediterranean Sea the Atlantick Ocean the Aethiopick Indian and Red-sea It sticketh fast to Asia by a narrow Tract of Land at Egypt 2. Three parts of America to wit Mexican and Peru stick fast together at Panama by a narrow passage of the Earth 3. Peloponnesus now called the Morea being part of Greece 4. Taurick Chersonese or Peninsula in the Euxine Sea and the mouth of the Fen Maeotis now called the Precopensian Tartary 5. Cambaia in India Proposition XI Of the chief Peninsula's We reckon as many Isthmusses as Peninsula's the more famous are five in number 1. The Isthmus between Egypt and Asia whereby Africa joyneth to Asia 2. The Corinthian Isthmus between Peloponnesus and Greece 3. The Panamensian Isthmus between Mexico America and Peruvia 4. The Isthmus between the Chersonesus Aurea or Golden Chersonesus and the Indies 5. The Isthmus of the Taurick Chersonese CHAP. IX Of Mountains and Hills in General Of Mountains and Hills TOuching Mountains very many things worthy to be known in Geography will here occur and meet us partly because they seem to hinder the roundness of the Earth and partly because divers things amongst renowned Authors are here delivered concerning them Proposition I. But a Mountain or Hill is said to be a part of the Earth rising aloft which if it be lesser is called a Hillock or Clift Of Promontories and Rocks Also a Promontory is said to be a Hill or Mountain running out at length into the Sea Rocks are called parts jutting or appearing forth in the Sea or also arising up out of huge stony Bulks or Bodies But it must be generally known that the parts of the Earth which appear plain are not all of the same height but some are sunk lower especially at or near the Sea shores insomuch as the height encreaseth from Maritine places or such as abutt upon the Sea even to the Inland Regions This also is proved by the Fountains and flowing Streams of Rivers For seeing that that part of the Earth to which the water floweth is lower than that from which it floweth and that the Fountain-heads and Springs of Rivers are seldom in the Inland places and such as are far remote from the Sea It is clearly manifest thereby that the Inland places are more elevated than those adjoyning to the Sea Coasts Inland places higher than those near the Sea-coasts So Bohemia is higher then Holsatia which is perceived by the streaming course of the River Elbe which floweth from Bohemia to Holsatia In like manner we take apparent Signs and Arguments of the greater height of Inland places from the Rivers Danubius Visurgis Rhene Mosa c. The Swishers and Rhetians Countries are judged by some men to be the highest of all Europe because the Rivers Rhene Roan and the greater Danou do flow and stream down from thence Moreover look how great the declivity or bearing downwards of the Rivers are so great is the height of the Inland places above the Maritine places Proposition II. To finde out the height of a Mountain by Geodesie or Land-measuring commonly called Surveying This is performed in the same manner which we use in the searching out the height of Towers if so be the top of the Mountain or Hill is remarkable by some peculiar sign For the finding out the height of a Mountain by Geodesie Let A B be the Mountains height A the foot B the conspicuous head thereof We will take the line F C by a mean distance from it so that neither of the Angles A F C A C F may be made very acute but may in a manner be equal Then let the Angles A F C A C F be observed by a collimation or levelling with winking be made to B and these being subtracted to 180 degrees the remaining degrees shall shew forth the Angle C A F. After that the distance of the stations of F C is exquisitely to be measured See Scheme and let it be wrought As the sign of the Angle F A C to the sign of the Angle C F A or F C A if you would take F A so F C to A C the distance of the Mountain from C. Then the Instrument being hanged up or placed upright in C and levelling with the Eye to B let the Angle B C A be taken And because the Triangle C A B is strait angled to wit the Angle B A C is strait therefore also the Angle A B C of 90 degrees shall be given Let it therefore be wrought by the Triangle BAC As the whole sign 10000000 to the Tangent of the Angle B C A so the distance A C to the perpendicular height of the Mountain A B. The height of the Mountain Olympus measured by Xenagoras For Example Let us put it that
then followeth the Coast of Arabia here the Coasts of the Persian Gulph and towards the East the Coast of Persia Cambaja Indostan India Malacca Bengala Camboja China Tartary at Corea or the Streight of Anian whence by or through the Northern Coast of Tartary and Samojedia you return to Waigats Streights The Circumscription or Periplus of America is thus The Periplus of America We begin from the Shore of Davies Streights whence in a Gulph being made the Sea named from Hudson is received Here by a reflexion are the Coasts of Estotiland New-England New-France Virginia Florida Mexico the American Isthmus Castelle del Oro Guiana Caribana Brazilia Here the Coasts of the Streights of Magellan looking towards the South but extended from the East to the West hence from the South to the North runneth the Shore of Chili Peru the American Isthmus Mexico where at California the Sea of Vermejo is received in a Gulph hence the Coast of California New-England Quivira Anian where are the Coasts of the Streights of Anian which now they deny and follow unknown Shores which are extended to the Streights of Davies The Circumscription of the North Polary Land is thus From Davies Streights the Coasts of Groenland do begin which run a little towards the South and then return to the North and are termed the Coasts of Spitzbergh Then the Shore runneth from the Region of Nova Zembla and is opposite to the Tartarian Ocean where the other Coasts even to Davies Streights are unknown The Periplus of the Land of Magellan The Periplus of the Land of Magellan is thus The Coast beginneth from the Streights of Magellan or Le Maire and making divers wâ—ndings to the Region Beach where the Lantchilonium Sea is received in a Streight hence the Coasts of New-Guiney run forward to the North and then return to the South then they go strait on to the Streights of Magellan Thus the Periplus of the Land is finished Now let us take a prospect of the Circumscription of the Ocean We will make entrance between Davies Streights and Nova Zembla and here is the Hyperborean Sea the Frozen Sea the Caledonian or Sea of Groenland then it runneth between the Coast of Europe and America and is called the British Sea the Danish Sea where it maketh a Gulph the German French Spanish where it maketh the Mediterranean and Sea of Mexico the Atlantick in part here viz. where it runneth between the Coasts of Brasil and Africa by and by it is called Aethiopia and the Streights of Magellan on one side enter in from the other Eastern quarter is the Indian and South-sea where it is extended between Africa and the Land of Magellan then between Asia and the same Land of Magellan and cometh into the Pacifick Sea which is extended to the Streights of Waigats and Anian and to the South Streight of Magellan by the middle of which it is joyned to the Atlantick it directly tendeth to the Oriental Coast of America Chili Peru Mexico California New-England To these I should subjoyn two Tables whereof one containeth the division of the Parts of the Earth the other the division of the Parts of the Ocean but having made use of the former in the eighth Chapter I omit it here and only make use of the latter viz. the Parts of the Ocean The Earth is divided into Land and Waters The Water is divided into Rivers Lakes Marshes and the continued Ocean or Sea is distinguish'd through the Lands by these differences 1. The OCEAN whose chief parts are four 1. The Atlantick Mer del Nort following with the Ethiopick Sea between Europe and Africa on the one part and America on the other obtaineth divers Names according to the parts as the Ethiopick British French Ocean 2. The Pacifick Ocean Mer del Zur between the extream parts of Asia the Indian Isles and the Occidental Coast of America 3. The North Ocean about the North Continent the Tartarian Hyperborean Frozen Ocean 4. The South Ocean about the Land of Magellan part of which is the Indian Sea 2. BAYS or GULPHS Long whereof there are six to wit 1. The Mediterranean running between Africa and the Regions of Europe whose parts are The Iberian Sicilian Cretan Sea c. The secondary Gulphs which are many The Adriatick Gulph of Venice Euxine Sea The Bay of Corinth c. 2. The Baltick Ocean ' whence are these secondary Gulphs as that of Livonia Botnia Finmarke 3. The Gulph of Arabia between Africa and Arabia 4. The Persian Gulph between Arabia and Persia 5. The Gulph of California between California and New Granada 6. The Gulph of Corea between Corea and the utmost bounds of Tartaria and China Broad or Wide as 1. The Gulph of Mexico between the North and South America 2. The Gulph of Bengala between the Coasts of Indostan and Malacca 3. The Gulph between Malacca and Camboja 4. The White Sea from the North Ocean between Lapland and the utmost Coasts of Moscovia 5. The Lantchidol Sea between the Beach and New Guiny of the Land of Magellan 6. Hudsons Sea between New France and Canada arising from the Northern Ocean These want Streights 3. Streights as the Streights of 1. Magellan by which you come from the Atlantick or Ethiopick into the Pacifick and this is the longest Streight of all others 2. Le Maire near to that of Magellan and of the same use 3. Waigats by which you sail from the North Ocean into the Tartarian 4. Anian by which you sail from the Tartarian into the Pacifick Ocean which is now denied 5. Davis and Forbischers by which you sail from the Atlantick into the Tartarian or Pacifick 6. Nova Zembla by which a way might be granted from the Hyperborean and Frozen-Sea into the Tartarian but that the Ice doth hinder 7. Gibraltar by which a passage is from the Atlantick into the Mediterranean 8. Denmarke or the Sound by which you pass out of the Atlantick into the Baltick Sea 9. The Mouth of the Arabian Sea by which you arrive in the Arabian Gulph 10. The Mouth of the Persian Sea by which you come into the Persian Gulph 11. The Hellespont and Bosphorus by which you come from the Aegean Sea into the Sea of Pontus As concerning the Caspian Sea whether that it be peculiar or whether that it belongeth to the broad Gulphs of the Ocean of which it is a subterranean passage is yet doubted CHAP. XIII Of some Properties of the Ocean and its Parts Proposition I. The Superficies of the Ocean and all Liquid Bodies is Rotund Spherical or else is part of a Spherical Superficies whose Center is the same with that of the whole Earth or Land The verity of this Theorem is manifest from those Arguments by which we proved in the third Chapter that the Superficies of the Earth is Spherical which is true concerning the Water as the Earth as I have there proved But because those probations only conclude à posteriori I here
higher for to avoid this excess of Altitude the Ocean floweth from those places towards the Equator Now the original of the Opinion concerning the greater Altitude of the North Land more than of others seemeth to spring hence because that the face being turned to the North we discover the Pole elevated above the Horizon and our place and therefore the Pole of the Earth and the vicine tracts of the Land in their supposition is higher than other Regions Some determine the Indian Ocean between Africa and India to be higher than the Atlantick Ocean which they endeavour to prove from the Bay viz. the Arabian and Mediterranean where also the doubt is to be considered Whether the Altitude of the Bay be the same with that of the Ocean or lesser especially in the extream parts of the Bay and chiefly in those Bays which are joyned by a narrower Streight of the Ocean The Indian and Atlantick Ocean higher than the Mediterranean But it is not improbable but that the Atlantick and Indian Ocean are higher than the Mediterranean Bay especially in the extreams parts of this at Asia Minor and Aegypt For the Atlantick Ocean floweth through the Streights of Gades into the Mediterranean Bay and it is probable that the Altitude of the Ocean is some what greater than that of the Streight because a free Influx is impeded in these Here indeed will be a small difference but then proceeding forwards in so long and large a tract between Europe and Africa the depression of this Bay will seem to be made greater than that of the Ocean especially when it meeteth many Rocks Islands and procurrent Lands which repel the current Water and therefore either diminish or beat back the Influx Yea if that be true which is reported by credible Authors concerning Sesostris King of Egypt Darius and other Egyptian Kings we ought no longer to doubt of this inequality of Altitude For those Kings attempted to draw a Trench or Channel from the Red-sea into the Nile so that by this passage a Navigation might be performed from the Indian and Red-sea through Egypt and hence through the mouths of the Nile into the Mediterranean Sea which would have offered great profit and conveniency to many Regions of the Mediterranean Bay But they were forced to leave their enterprise when it was discovered by those that were skilful that the Red-sea was much higher than the interiour Egypt Now if the Red-sea be higher than the Land of Egypt it will also be higher than the Water of the Nile and by consequence than the mouths of the Nile and then the Mediterranean Sea it self for that the water of the Nile is not of a lesser Altitude than the Mediterranean is hence manifest that it floweth into it wherefore the red-Red-sea and therefore also the Indian Sea is higher than the Mediterrean at least at the extream parts of it about Egypt Syria Thrace and in the Aegean Sea The Isthmus which conjoyneth Asia and Africa endeavoured to be cut by the Egyprian Sultans Moreover other Egyptian Kings in times past and of late the Egyptian Sultans and Turkish Emperors have consulted how to digg through the Isthmus which conjoyning Africa and Asia disjoyneth the Mediterranean and Red-seas but the reason why they proceeded not is reported to have been the Altitude of the Indian and Red-sea above the Mediterranean and the Coasts adjacent to it and therefore they feared least that the water flowing from the red-Red-sea should overflow and drown the Regions of those Coasts especially Egypt concerning whose low scituation all Writers do consent If therefore the Isthmus between the Red-sea and the Mediterranean should be cut or dugg through then by an open passage the Indian Ocean would immit much water into the Mediterranean Bay but whether it could let in so great a quantity that there should be any danger of an inundation of the Regions adjacent to the Mediterranean sea I doubt For peradventure it may be thus if that the Indian Ocean should let in somewhat overmuch then the Atlantick Ocean would let in less through the Streights of Gades from whose Altitude somewhat would be detracted if that the motion were made from the Indian Sea into the Mediterranean But although I deny not but that this may be Reasons why the Egyptian Sultans and Turks did not digg a passage through the Isthmus yet I suppose that the Egyptian Sultans and the Turks were moved by other reasons and Political Causes for the omitting the digging through of this Isthmus As 1. The vast expence it being forty German miles and the Earth rocky also banks must have been made by the advice of skilful Artists which they wanted 2. They supposed that the Inhabitants of the Christian part of the World as the English French Dutch Italians c. would have reaped more benefit by that means than they themselves For then through that Streight they might have sailed into Persia and India whereas now they fetch a vast circuit compassing all Africa and have laden themselves with their rich Commodities which they are now contented to have at Aleppo See Massius in his third Book of his Indian History being thither brought on Camels through the Turks Territories and in many places receive customs for the same which is no small benefit unto them 3. That the Sultans and Turks knew that the Christians excelled in the abundance of warlike Ships which they were deficient in and therefore feared least they should be invaded by a strong Navy which might land a powerful Army and so over-run their Country These were necessary to be explained concerning the Altitude of the Mediterranean Sea compared with the Red-sea the Atlantick and Indian Ocean by reason that some thence take occasion to maintain that the Altitude of the parts of the Ocean is divers But we may confirm them also by another example if that we may compare small matters with great The German Ocean which is part of the Atlantick flowing between Friesland and Holland into a Bay which although it be small in respect of the more noted Bays of the Sea yet it is also called a Sea and watereth the Empory Amsterdam Not far from thence is the Lake Harlame which is also termed the Sea of Harlame whose Altitude is no less than the Altitude of that Belgick Bay which we have spoken of and sendeth a branch into the City of Leyden where it divaricateth into many Trenches Now seeing that neither this Lake nor that of the Belgick Sea do cause the inundation of the adjacent Lands it is thence manifest that they are not higher than the Lands of Holland But the Inhabitants of Leyden have experimentally found the German Ocean to be higher than these Lands when they undertook to make a Trench or Channel from this City to the Coasts of the German Ocean near the Town of the Catti it is the space of two miles that they might sail through this Channel the Sea
vicine place is to be found whereby it may come unto those Northern Regions Seeing that therefore this flux is perpetual neither doth the water come by a manifest way unto those Regions whence the flux is made therefore it seemeth necessary to conclude that the waters come through subterraneous passages unto those Northern Regions and so there to be effused from the holes of the Channel as from a spring and that the water moveth hence towards the South There falleth in another cause taken from the former For the water of the Ocean in the Torrid Zone is more heavy than that in the Northern places by reason of the great abundance of Salt as we have proved in the Eighth and Twelfth Proposition Therefore the water or Ocean in the Torrid Zone doth more press through the Orifices of the Subterranean passages than in the Northern places and therefore in these places the water less resisting suffereth the water to flow from the Orifices of the Channels Unto this I answer That that flux of the Ocean is not only from the North as the Objection seemeth to inferr and as some especially the Ancients conceived of it who would have the water to flow in four Channels from the very Pole as also some Geographical Maps do exhibit it neither is it continual but is observed by reason of the frequency of Northern Winds moreover the great and perpetual abundance of Snow and Rain in those places augmenteth the water and causeth it to flow towards the South Add likewise that in other parts another motion of the Ocean is found concerning which see the following Chapter 3. It seemeth not absurd but rather most true that all the Fountains of Rivers taken together disburthening themselves into the Ocean are the very Fountains of the Ocean For seeing that in perpetual progress of time so great an abundance of water floweth from them into the Ocean questionless the water cometh from the Ocean to the very Springs and Channels of the Rivers partly through the Subterranean passages and partly by Rains 4. It may seem to prove that the Fountains of the Ocean may be in the very Channel because that in the bottom of the Ocean in some parts sweet or fresh water is found which could not be but by some Fountains flowing in the bottom Linschaten relateth that in Ormus fresh water is drawn by divers in the Ocean at the depth of four or five Orgya and the like Fountains are found in other parts of the Ocean and Bays Unto this I answer That few such Springs have yet been found which suffice not the vast Ocean Neither do we dispute concerning these Fountains as we have said before Hence it is manifest that in some sort it is true and we may well say that the Ocean hath Springs but not in that sense that we are wont to speak concerning the Springs of Rivers and in which we would have our Proposition to be taken Hence also it is manifest what we ought to think concerning that Question viz. Whether the Sea is always one and the same and perpetually so remaineth or whether it be another thing whose parts are perpetually consumed and generated again Proposition VIII The saltness of the Waters proceedeth from the particles of Salt which are mixed with it but whence they may exist or are so augmented is the doubt Of the Saltness of the Sea-water Experlence proveth the first member of the Proposition by which it is commonly known that Salt is made of Sea-water by decoction of the water or by the heat of the Sun or the fervour of the Fire In Germany and other places the water is separated by the help of the Fire In France the greater heat of the Sun performeth the same the Ocean being let into certain Trenches made in which in the space of some Months the water being exhaled by the force of the Sun Of Salt and of what made concreted and hard Salt is found On the shoars of many Regions as of England and other parts plenty of Bay-Salt is found the Sea-water continually overflowing those shoars leaveth daily some particles or humors from which the water exhaleth and concrete Salt is left whose blackness is taken away by boyling although it be washed away and dissolved from many Coasts by the violence of the Ocean which is the cause that it is not found on all Coasts Seeing therefore that this Experiment is common Aristotle had small reason to alledge a false Experiment concerning a waxen Vessel let down into the Sea Hence it is manifest that the proximate cause of the Saltness of the sea-Sea-water or the true subject of this saltness is the Saline particles which are contained in that water Therefore the Aristotelians with their Master spake improperly and obscuredly without cause when they defend and say That the saltness of the Sea proceedeth from the adustion of the Sea caused by the Sun or from the adust particles But of this more anon The chief difficulty and controversie is concerning the other member of the Proposition Whence these Salt particles of the Ocean exist Aristotle supposeth that dry exhalations or fumes all which he saith are of an adust and Saline nature elevated from the Earth are mixed with humid vapours and when that these have met together in Rain they fall with these into the Sea and that thence proceedeth the saltness and Salt particles in the Sea See Aristotle lib. 2. chap. 7. and on this account he seemeth to defend this Opinion because that from thence he may render a reason why the Sea is always salt But other Peripateticks will have it and so do endeavour to draw Aristotle to their part that this saltness is in the Sea it self by reason that it is perpetually scorched by the heat of the Sun a sign of which is that the water is found by so much the less salt by how much it is more deep or remote from the superficies for in the superficies we discover it to be most salt Both these Opinions are obstructed with great difficulties and absurdities so that it seemeth wonderful that the minds of Philosophers and Learned men could acquiesce in them First the opinion of Aristotle is thus obstructed that Salt-rain should be found in the Ocean which never yet was found to be void of all tast of salt Secondly the Sea should be less salt when it raineth not for a long time the contrary of which yet is found The other Opinion hath these difficulties 1. It is false that the waters of the Ocean are found the less salt by how much they are nigh to the bottom for there are few places viz. in those bottoms where Springs of fresh water do flow 2. Experience testifieth that fresh water although long exposed to the Sun or heat of the Fire yet doth not become salt This Objection Scaliger endeavoureth to avoid by an over-nice subtilty for he saith that this hapneth in these Observations by reason of
the exiguity of the water which doth not grow thick but resolveth For although you take a great quantity of water and that you provoke with a light and gentle fire that the resolution may be impeded yet the water acquireth no salt tast 3. Lakes and Marshes though heated by the Sun yet wax not salt This Objection also Scaliger endeavoureth to avoid saying that this hapneth by the succession of fresh water And the same is found in those standing Pools and Lakes which only proceed from Rain or Snow dissolved where there is no place for that refuge of succession for those Lakes are rather dried when that it raineth not for a long space than turned into Salt or rendred salt Therefore rejecting those false Opinions concerning the cause and original of Salt in the Ocean let us lay hold of one of the most probable Opinions with little or no difficulty in it viz. 1. That these particles are Coeternal with the very Ocean and therefore we should no more dispute concerning their original than concerning the original of the Ocean it self the Earth yea and of the original and generation of the World 2. If that this Opinion be less complacent we may make choice of another viz. that these salt particles are here and there pulled from the Earth and so dissolved into water Now it is certain that there are many saline Mountains or Rocks in the bosom of the Sea Isle of Ormus a salt Rock The whole Isle of Ormus is nothing else but a white and hard Salt of which they make the Walls of their Houses and therefore no Fountain of fresh water is found in that Isle And none can be ignorant how that many mines of Salt are found on the Land and we have related concerning some in the Eleventh Chapter but we need not particulars Let us consider the whole Earth The greatest part of the Earth hath much Salt in it the greatest part of which is nothing else but a Salt for it hath its consistency from Salt for the Chymical Philosophers do rightly prove that the consistency and compaction of every thing proceedeth from Salt and Experience is answerable to the Assertion for if that you take an hard piece of Earth and burn it to ashes much Salt will be found in it Nothing can be alledged against this Opinion that is of any value and is not easily refuted for some say that it is impossible that those salt parts of the Earth should perpetually suffice and should not at some time or other be consumed by the water of the Ocean which continually taketh away some part of them Unto this I answer That the Salt of the Ocean is not consumed in so great abundance that it should stand in need of much instauration and if that any be consumed yet notwithstanding that is laid up in another place seeing that it is not removed out of the Earth Proposition IX Whether that Water be the fresher in the Ocean by how much it is nigher the bottom and why in some parts of the Ocean fresh Water is found in the bottom Of the freshness of Water in the Sea Unto the first I Answer That experience doth not testifie concerning that sweetness but in some places of which the other Question speaketh that in these places in the bottom of the Sea are Fountains of fresh water I have sufficiently said for it cannot naturally be that the more salt-Salt-water should exist above water less Salt seeing that that is more heavy Those places of the Sea where fresh water is found to spring at the bottom may be collected by those that are studious from the Writers of Geography Proposition X. The Water of the Ocean becometh less salt by how much it is nearer the Poles and on the contrary the more salt by how much it is more near the Aequator or Torrid Zone Although this may be understood of most parts of the Ocean yet the Proposition admitteth of some exceptions The cause of this inequality in saltness is sixfold The Causes of the inequality of the saltness of the Sea in different places 1. That the heat of the Sun in the Torrid Zone lifteth up more vapours from the Ocean into the Clouds than in the Northern places which are the vapours of fresh-water because that the particles of Salt by reason of their gravity are not so easily lifted up Seeing therefore that from the Water of the Ocean of the Torrid Zone or where the place is more near the Torrid Zone so much the vapours are separated by the heat of the Sun thence it cometh to pass that the water that is lest is found more salt there than in the Northern places where there is not so much fresh-water separated by reason of the weak heat of the Sun The 2d Cause 2. The second Cause is the heat or cold of the water for the same numerical water or salt meat as also pickled meat sauce and the like afford a more sensible saltness to the tast when they are eaten hot than when cold for the heat or particles of the fire do move and render the particles of the salt contained in such meat more acute and separates them from the admixtures whence they bite and prick the Tongue more sharply Now because the water of the Ocean is the more hot by how much it is nigher the Aequator or the parallels of the Sun at every day and contrariwise the more cold by how much it is more near the Pole thence it followeth that waters though they should contain the same quantity of salt yet they must seem and appear so much the salter to the tast by how much they are nearer to the Torrid Zone and by how much they are more near the Pole by so much they have less sensible Salt The 3d Cause 3. The third Cause is the more or less quantity of Salt in the diverse parts of the Channel of the Ocean for as we find in the parts of the Earth that there are not pits of Salt in them all neither where they are found is there the like quantity of Salt must be held concerning the part of the Earth that the Sea washeth or covereth that is the Channel or the Shoars where there is therefore most quantity of Salt or Mineral in the bottom or shoar of the Ocean there the water is more salt because that it is impregnated with a greater quantity of Salt So the Isle of Ormus consisteth all of Salt therefore the adjacent Ocean hath very Salt waters But whether there be greater plenty of Salt in the Channel and shoars of the Ocean in the Torrid Zone or more saline Mines than in the North is very doubtful by reason of the want of observation yet it seemeth probable unto some that there is greater quantity of Salt in those places by reason of the greater heat of the Sun by which the parts of the water are separated from the Terrestrial and
Salt but this is a deceitful sign The 4th Cause 4. The fourth Cause of the unequal saltness is the frequency or scarcity of Rains unto which we may add Snow and in the Northern places Snow and Rain is frequent in the places of the Torrid Zone they are less frequent in some parts of the year and in othersome they are almost continual And therefore in these places in the pluvial Months the water of the Ocean is not so salt on the shoar and hath less Salt in it than in the dry Months Yea in many Regions of the Coast of Malabar the Ocean is fresh in the pluvial Months by reason of the abundance of water that floweth from the top of the Mountain Gatis and falleth into the Sea for this very reason in divers Seasons of the year the same Ocean is of a various saltness yet because in the Northern places the Rains and Snows are continual throughout the whole year therefore this Sea is less salt than in the Torrid Zone The 5th Cause 5. The fifth Cause is the dissimilary solution or unequal faculty of the Water to dissolve this Salt and unite it to its self for hot water sooner uniteth Salt unto it self than cold Water although therefore in the Northern places of the Ocean the shoars and Channels of the same contain more or the like quantity of Salt that those places of the Torrid Zone do yet because the water is there more cold it is not so able to dissolve and unite the Salt to it self so subtily us the water in the Torrid Zone which is more hot The 6th Cause 6. The sixth cause is the exoneration of many and great Rivers into the Sea but this cause only taketh place in the parts of the Ocean that are vicine to the shoars but is not discovered in the remote parts So Mariners affirm that the Ocean on the Coast of Brasilia where the Silver-River disburtheneth it self loseth it saltness and affordeth fresh waters fifteen miles distant from the shoar The same is observed of the African Ocean on the Coasts of Congi where the River Zaire exonerateth it self and of many more Rivers Unto these add runing Fountains in some parts of the bottom of the Ocean These are the Causes which seem to concur to the variety and diversity of saltness in divers parts of the Ocean from which the saltness of every one of the Seas may be explained From whence also it is easy to give an account why the water of the German and Northern Ocean is less apt to separate Salt from it self by coction than the water of the Spanish Ocean the Canary Isles and that of Cape Verd whence the Dutch fetch Salt in great abundance and transport it into the Northern Regions viz. this Ocean is more near the Torrid Zone and receiveth water from the Ocean of the Torrid Zone the other is more remote from the Frigid Zone yet I cannot deny the constitution of the Channels themselves to be more or less saline The Sea-water at Guinee in the Ethiopick Ocean affordeth Salt at one coction as white as snow such as neither the Spanish Ocean nor any other in Europe do produce at one coction or boyling Proposition XI Why rain-Rain-water in the middle of the Ocean is found sweet but the water which we separate from the Marine or salt-Salt-water either by decoction or distillation is yet notwithstanding found salt when yet the rain-Rain-water proceedeth from the Vapours exhaled from the Sea Fresh-water abstracted from Salt-water The Learned Chymists or true Naturalists have hitherto laboured in vain that they might find out an Art by which they might distill and abstract fresh water from the water of the Ocean which would be of great advantage but as yet their Labours have proved fruitless for although as well in the decoction as distillation Salt may be left in the bottom of the Vessel yet the water separated by decoction as well as distillation is yet found salt and not fit for men to drink which seemeth wonderful unto those that are ignorant of the cause Yet Chymistry that is true Philosophy hath taught the reason for by the benefit of this we know that there is a twofold salt in Bodies or two kinds of salt which although they agree in tast yet they much differ in other qualities one of these Artists term fixed the other volatile salt The fixed salt by reason of its gravity is not elevated in distillation but remaineth in the bottom of the Vessel but the volatile salt is full of spirit and indeed is nothing else but a most subtile spirit that is elevated by a very light fire and therefore in the distillation ascendeth with the fresh water and is more firmly united by reason of the subtilty of the Attoms neither is this volatile salt found only with fixed salt in Sea-water but almost in all bodies as Chymistry proveth by experience but in some in a greater and in othersome in a lesser quantity in a greater quantity in sharp tasted Herbs in a lesser in oily Herbs Therefore difficulty consisteth in the separation of this salt spirit or volatile salt from the water But why the pluvial water in the midst of the Sea is no less fresh than on the Land seeing that yet it is generated by abstraction of the exhalations of the Ocean caused by the fervour of the Sun or from some subterraneous fire which evaporation doth little differ from distillation The cause seemeth to be Fourfold 1. A slow operation by which the tenuous part is only elevated from the Ocean which although it containeth a saline volatile spirit yet it hath it in less quantity than if that this exhalation were caused by a more forcible heat 2. The long way that this vapour passeth through before that it arriveth unto that Region of the Air where it is condensated into rain in passage it is possible that the saline spirit is by degrees separated from the watery particles 3. The admixture of other watery particles existing in the air 4. A Refrigeration Coition and condensation of the vapour for these exhalations exhaled from the Ocean by degrees are more and more refrigerated and being conjoyned with other obvious and admixed vapours they condense into a more thick vapour or cloud in this Refrigeration and condensation or coition of the saline spirit with the fiery particles they fly into the more exalted part of the Air. Now why the same is not performed in distillation where the vapours exalted are also condensed the cause is 1. That by reason of the small passage the saline spirit is as yet over straitly conjoyned to the watery particles 2. That the vapour restrained in the vessel admitteth not a free passage to the evolant spirit Proposition XII sea-Sea-water is more ponderous than fresh water and the water of one Sea is more heavy than another Sea water more heavy than fresh water The cause is manifest from what hath been said
West to the East the tumour of the water 412 and also of the Air 856 which now incumbs over the part of the Earth E by degrees do move unto other parts more Occidental so that after six hours they incumb over the part of the Earth H and after twelve hours over the part of the Earth G. Whence it cometh to pass that the water and the Air are carried from the Oriental parts of the Earth unto the Occidental parts of the same by a continual flux thus Cartesius The stress of the Demonstration is in this because the Earth E F G H with the water 1234 is moved round and also the Celestial matter of the vortex between B A D C and 6587. The Moon being in B maketh the space B 6 with a certain pressure passing through the Air and water whilst that it passeth through B is expressed towards J H G and whilst that â— passeth through B is expressed towards H G F and so forwards Neither doth the part of the Celestial matter at the Moon having allapsed in B D mount upwards because it is repelled and that all are full of bodies And although it press the Air and water 62 F not only towards the West E 15 but also towards the East 73 G. yet because the parts scituated from 62 F towards 73 G do more and more recede from these Streights but the parts towards E 15 do more and more draw near therefore by these chiefly is that force received But in this explication of this ingenious person these things are required or wanted 1. From that it should follow that the Sea should cease to swell when that the Moon approacheth unto it and that it should swell in the parts which are a quadrant or six hours absent from the Moon viz. The tumour is in E 15 but in F 26 where the Moon is vertical the Altitude is least But this is repugnant to experience for in F 26 the Sea swelleth but in E 15 the tumour is very little How this absurdity may be avoided we shall shew in the following Proposition 2. It is not sufficiently shewed Cartesius hath omitted this why whilst the Celestial matter in the narrow space B 6 presseth the Air C and the water 2 it is not equally moved towards G 37 from both the water and the Air and the Celestial matter is carried with the Earth towards G 37 and therefore the water and the Air is rather carried towards the East than the West And it is a doubt whether it can be avoided by the only subduction of the parts from 6 D B towards G 37. 3. The Moon drawing near to any Sea a more vehement wind is found in that part towards the West from the East than another time but this hapneth not 4. It is more manifest that the Sun maketh that motion of the Air from East to West or that a general wind doth it for we find that in the morning before the rising of the Sun and also with the rising of the Sun in many places for then it is distant a quadrant from the vertex of the place These things deserve consideration in the Cartesian Explication to say nothing of the Hypothesis it self But whether this motion can be referred to a general East-wind is doubted For seeing that that Wind is always under the Torrid Zone it would seem to cause that motion of the Sea to be perpetual For it is evident that with the augmentation of the Wind the motion of the Sea is augmented but that it is a sufficient sign that the motion it self doth depend on the Wind. For the connexion hindreth which this motion hath with the Moon viz. that the Moon approaching to the Sea it causeth that 2 to swell because in the Full and New Moon that motion of the Sea is more vehement from the East to the West which the Demonstration of Cartesius excellently explaineth viz. because the Moon in the New and Full is more near unto the Earth and so the port B 6 is rendred more angust for the transition of the Celestial matter and therefore the pressure is the greater And although when the Moon is at Full that intumescency may be referred unto the greater light of the Moon yet the Moon being in the New this cause ceaseth and therefore it is evident that the Moon is not the cause of this motion but rather that pressure of Cartesius as we shall observe in the following Propositions Proposition X. The second general Motion of the Sea is the flux and reflux of the Sea in which the Sea in the space of twelve hours and about half an hour flaweth unto most Coasts and floweth back again It floweth when that the Moon approacheth unto the supream or lowest Meridian and refloweth when the Moon recedeth from the Meridian towards the West and towards the East The flux and reflux of the Sea is the second general motion Where we must first discover whether the Ocean by this motion be moved unto one certain quarter viz. from the East to the West or from West to East For the shoars of Gulphs and Channels of Rivers in which this flux and reflux is more manifestly found than in the vast Ocean are extended nigh unto or according unto divers quarters some towards the East from the West as the Mediterranean some from the South towards the North as the Arabian Gulph And in every one of these Gulphs and Shoars the water floweth towards the quarter of extension Therefore in divers Gulphs and Shoars this motion of the Sea or Ocean tendeth into divers quarters therefore our first Inquiry must be Whether this motion of the Ocean observeth any certain quarter and whether it be moved elsewhere unto other quarters or whether it observe two quarters viz. the Occidental quarter in the flux and the Oriental in the reflux Or whether one and the same quarter both in the ebbing and flowing viz. the Occidental Unto this may be answered That the last is true viz. that the whole Ocean in the flux is moved from the East to the West but in the reflux it is moved indeed by a general motion again from the East to the West but yet in the flux more quantity of water floweth unto a certain part but in the reflux or to speak more properly the deflux it is not moved into a contrary quarter but unto the same Occidental quarter but yet a lesser quantity of water doth flow in So then we must determine that the flux and reflux of the Sea is not a distinct motion from the general motion of the same which we have explained in the former Proposition by which the Ocean continually moveth from East to West but that it is a certain mode or affection of this general motion and therefore if that this motion be considered in the whole or in the middle of the free Ocean it is not so properly termed a flux or reflux of the Sea but rather a
the point D and so consequently or rather because that the Moon in the mean space doth somewhat proceed forwards from B towards C as running in a Months space through the Circle A B C D part of the Earth that is now in F on the opposite Region of the body of the Moon after six hours and twelve minutes either more or less shall be beyond the point G in that Diameter of the Vortex A B C D which intersecteth that Diameter of the same Vortex in which the Moon shall then be at right Angles and then shall the water be there most high and after six hours with twelve minutes it shall be beyond the point H. in the place where the water shall be very low c. whence it is clearly discovered that the water of the Sea in every twelve hours and twenty four minutes shall flow and re-flow in one and the same place This is the Demonstration of Cartesius in which that is especially ingenious that it aptly sheweth not only how the flux or intumescency is made at the place when that the Moon is moved at its Vertex or Meridian but also when that the Moon beneath the Horizon is moved to the Meridian of Midnight We have said in the end of the Ninth Proposition what any one may seem to require in this Demonstration especially that which seemeth to be admired at that Cartesius should not so much as think that according unto this Demonstration That the least Altitude of water and all kind of Detumescency ought to be when that the Moon cometh to the Meridian as the Moon being in B the least Altitude of water is in 2 and 4 and on the contrary the water increaseth with the departure of the Moon or Earth so that when F shall be in G. that is six hours from the Moon it shall have the greatest Altitude which in truth is contrary to all Experience for with the access of the Moon to the Meridian the water increaseth and with the departure of the same decreaseth But the words of Cartesius as well as the Diagramma assert the contrary But I suppose this absurdity may be removed from the Demonstration and that by this mode so that it may be approved of by Cartesius for let us place the Vortex of the Earth A B C D to be without the Moon and the water 1 2 3 4 to be equally distant from the Center T without any Tumor but yet to be moved round with the Earth and Celestial matter between A B C D and 5 6 7 8. Now let the body of the Moon draw near unto this Vortex for Example into B and therefore the space T B becometh more narrow and the Celestial matter whilst that it endeavoureth to pass through it presseth the Water in 2 towards E. Therefore whilst that the Water is expelled from 2 towards E it is demanded where the greatest tumor of Water will be whether in the place E which is a quarter distant from the place F unto which the Moon is vertical or whether in a place nigh unto F towards E If that you assert the first viz. that the tumor ought to be in E Experience doth then gainsay but that the second is truly so Experience confirmeth and Reason doth induce to believe viz. whilst that the Moon consisteth above the place E the Water is expelled from 2 towards I but the greatest tumor will be in the place near to 2 not in I. For this is manifest by Experience because the Occidental places do later discover the intumescency but reason and the motion of the Water do altogether require the same Laws for if the Water be poured forth into 2 that it may flow towards E the greatest quantity will be in the place E a little less in the place near to that and yet far less in the place nigh to that and least of all in E. So also when that water is driven from 2 towards E its greatest quantity and accumulation shall be in the place near to 2 and so much the lesser by how much the place is more remote from 2 but because the Earth is moved round that E may come unto F then at length shall the greatest tumor be in E and the water shall be forced towards H. Therefore the Diagram of Cartesius with the Demonstration it self ought to be changed that the tumor may be in the place near unto the very 2 that is to that unto which the Moon is vertical What else may be here said we shall handle in our treatise of the consideration of the Cartesian Philosophy Proposition XII In Full and New Moons the general motion of the Sea from the East to the West is more violent also the intumescency of the Sea is found great in most parts but in the quarters the motion is found the least of all and so also in the intumescency In Full and New Moons the motion of the Sea from East to West most violent Experience sufficiently proveth this Proposition for Mariners testifie that the Sea doth foam and swell in New and Full Moons and in the quarters is calm Now it is easily demonstrated according to the Hypothesis of the preceding Propositions for the Moon when it is either Full or New is more near the Earth than at any other time and in the quarters more remote as Astronomers do demonstrate Now when the Moon is more near the Earth that is when that the space B T is less the Celestial matter being hindred more vehemently presseth the water from 2 to 1 because it is more near but on the contrary in the quarters Yet the motion is observed to be more violent in the Full Moons than in the New at least in some places which except you will ascribe to the light of the Moon I see no other cause neither can we otherwise shew why in the Full Moon both Trees and Animals have greater humors than in the New seeing that the Sea is equally augmented in the New Moon Yet that is marvellous that one Twistius a Dutch-man relateth in his description of India concerning the Kingdom of Gazaratt where for many years he dwelt that Cockles Crabs and other shelly Fishes are less fleshy and juicy in the Full Moon than in the New which is contrary to the nature of all Regions Neither is it less admirable that on the shoars near to the mouth of the River Indus in the same Kingdom that the Sea is augmented and swelleth in the New Moons and not far from thence in the Sea of Calicut the increase is in the Full Moon Proposition XIII In the time of the Vernal and Autumnal Equinox or in the Spring and Autumn the intumescency of the Sea is greater than in the other seasons of the year but least in the Solstices In Spring and Autumn the intumescency of the Sea is greatest Cartesius indeed pretendeth to shew a demonstration of this propriety from his Hypothesis but I cannot
which the Moon will be vertical that day viz. one after another See Proposition 13. in Chap. 19. The use of this Problem is great yea very necessary in the Doctrine concerning the flux and reflux of the Sea The mode of performing of the same you shall find in the Nineteenth Chapter and the Thirteenth Proposition For there it is more conveniently explained yet the Explication of that Proposition may be anticipated and demonstrated to the studious in this Chapter Proposition XVI In those places of the Sea to which the Moon is vertical the flux and deflux is greatest except that there be other impediments which we have reckoned up in the XIV Proposition And by how much the parts of the Sea are more remote from the place by so much the flux and deflux is lesser other things being equal For because in that place the pressure is greater and the tumour of the water greater which is more vicine to the Moon pressing and the Celestial matter thence followeth that that the Proposition intimateth the objections concerning some other places in the comparison of which the contrary is found are to be excused by the admixtion of other causes Proposition XVII The quantity of the flux and reflux is unconstant in every place and divers on several daies and by so much the greater or lesser by how much the Moon is more remote or near unto that place The Moon every day changeth her place in the Ecliptick For the Moon every day changeth her place in the Ecliptick and so on other daies is vertical to other places and by consequence is more remote from any place or more near Which being observed we conclude from the preceeding Proposition that there is a divers quantity of the flux and reflux in one and the same place on divers daies whether that the diversity be sensible or insensible Proposition XVIII The greatest intumescency of water in any place and term of the flux ought to be when that the Moon doth occupy the Meridian of the place But in many places it is found to be in another scituation of the Moon For then is the Moon most nigh to any place of the Earth when that it is in the Meridian of that place because that the Hypotenusa of a right angled Triangle is lower than the Cathetus Whence it is inferred by the XVI Proposition that when the Moon is in the Meridian See Proposition 16. there ought to be the greatest intumescency and Altitude of water and immediately a decrease to succeed But when the Moon is in the lowest of the Meridian then the narrowest of the vortex of the Earth opposite to it in the upper Meridian and therefore doth effect the same as if that the body of the Moon were present But here ariseth a great difficulty For there are many places and Coasts of the Earth in which we find that the term of the flux is not when that the Moon cometh to the Meridian as the Philosophers held before this age but sooner or later viz. when that the Moon cometh to a certain quarter not Cardinal and this quarter is not constantly observed but in new and full Moons for the most part the greatest intumescency is and the begining of a detumescency before the Moon cometh to this quarter or vertical Circle So at London the water is at the highest when the Moon cometh to the quarter which is between the South and West or North and East that is to the South West or North East quarter At the Coast of China in the Port of the City Maccau The greatest flux at the Coast of China observed by a Portugal a certain Portugal Mariner observed the time of the greatest intumescency by this mode The Elevation of the Pole is 22 degrees 20 minutes in the Year 1584 on the 19 of September the Moon was at full then the intumescency or Altitude of the highest water was observed in the morning at ½ or ¼ of an hour past 8. therefore then the Moon was removed from the Meridian 3 ¼ hours Whence the quarter or vertical Circle in which the Moon at that moment of time was is found according to the Problem of the 30 Chapter Anno 1585 on the 16 of February in the full Moon the greatest hight of water was observed at half an hour past a eleven a Clock at Noon Certain observations taken by a Dutch Mariner of the flux of the Sea in many places A certain Dutch Mariner on the daies of the new and full Moon noted the hours of divers places for the term or intumescency of the flux from which I have extracted these At the twelfth hour on the daies of the new and full Moon on the Coast of Flanders at Enchusen in Holland at Horn at Embden in East Freezland at the mouth of the Elve at Eider at the Isles of Jutland and at Dover at England At 45 minutes past 12 at Flushing in Zealand half an hour after one a Clock at the Occidental Coast of the Isle of Wight at Calis at the mouth of the River of Thames at the shoar of Zeland in the mouths of Scald in Mosa and at Gored A quarter after two before the mouth of Scald and the mouth of Mosa At three a Clock at Amsterdam Roterdam Dort in Holland at Newcastle in England at Arment in Flanders in the mouth of the River of Burdeaux in the South Coast of Britain Gallocia Gascoyn Biscay Portugal and Spain and on the Western Coast of Ireland even to Hitland A quarter after four in the evening at Roan in France between Mosa and Rochel in the River of Burdeaux in the Bays of the Spanish Portugal and Gallecian Coast in the South Coast of Britany in France Gascoyn and on the Western Coast of Ireland Half an hour past four from the Texel at the South Coast of Ireland A quarter past five in all the Ports of the Southern Coast of Ireland at Plymouth in England and other Southern places of it even to the Coast of Wales At six in the evening and morning before Hamburgh in the Elbe before Bremen the Texel Antwerpe in the Channel between England and Brabant without Sorlis A quarter before seven in the evening between Fawick and Vaelmuya in the Channel even to Bristol before St. Nicholas and Podessembe even to Waymouth and Hartepole At half an hour past seven in the Haven at the Texel at Kilduyna in the middle of the Channel nigh Plymouth and in the Sea even to the Promontory of the Lizard A quarter past eight in the evening nigh the Isle of Wight in the Channel even to Bevesier without the Fly on the Coast of Holland At nine before the mouth of the River Ems in Freezland before the Fly before the Coast of Freezland at the Eastern Coast of the Isle of Wight At half an hour past ten before the mouth of the River Thames on the Coasts of Normandy and Picardy And at a quarter
past eleven a Clock in the River Thames and other places of England A difficult task to explicate the cause of this difference Now it is a most difficult task to explicate the cause of this so notable a difference and that in all places although it be incumbent on the Philosopher or Geographer Yet it is probable that the various windings of the shoars the scituation of the Coasts in respect of the Sea the obstacles of Islands the mutual meetings of the water the distance of the places from the Lunary way various waies especially those that are constant and general the declining of the shoars and other things do very much conduce to this propriety of the flux For example at the Port of London in the Coast of England the water encreaseth until the Moon cometh unto the quarter of the South-West viz. when it declineth from the Ecliptick towards the South for then water begineth to flow back again but not when the Moon cometh to the Meridian Therefore we say that whilst the Moon moveth to the Meridian of London towards Brazile or from Brazile towards London the Sea doth not recede from London but is yet augmented by reason that the Coasts of America unto which the Ocean is moved by the Moon do repel that water towards England and this hapneth therefore because it affordeth not a passage for the water But why when the Moon is declining from the Ecliptick towards the North is the greatest Altitude of the water and the begining of the decrease observed before the Moon cometh to the Meridian viz. in the North-East I answer that this cometh to pass because that the Moon is then far more near to England than when it declineth from the Ecliptick towards the South and therefore then it more swiftly filleth but the cause why then the flux is no longer protracted even until the Moon cometh to the Meridian may be by reason that the Moon forceth the Sea more near the Sea of Mexico and Hudsons Streights where there is found a great intumescency and detumescency On the Coast of China we therefore say that the intumescency doth anticipate the appulse of the Moon at the Meridian by reason that a continnual East wind driveth that Sea towards the West But these allegations I leave to be farther examined by the searchers of nature But for the finding out of the true cause it is altogether necessary that we acquire accurate observations how the flux and reflux of the Sea is made in divers places viz. in what vertical the Moon is in that flux how the quarter is varied in a divers place of the Moon as in the full and new especially in those places where the Moon becometh vertical also in those which directly respect the East West and North. Also that must be diligently observed how the flux is here made in those hours of the day whilst that the Moon being in the North part of her Circle hath not the Sea placed vertically under her but Lands in a long tract viz. from Cambaja and China even to the Occidental Coasts of Africa For because then that it doth not directly press the water it being depended over the Mediterranean places I thence suppose that some variety must happen to this motion Also what then it doth whilst the Moon ruling in the South Hemisphere passeth over the Mediterranean parts of Brazile or Southern America Without these observations we shall hardly arrive at the true cause neither shall we neglect this argument Proposition XIX The Sea floweth to most Coasts in six hours and twelve minutes and refloweth also in so many hours The Sea in few places floweth in more hour and refloweth in less In very few places it floweth in more hours and refloweth in less and on the contrary in very few places it floweth in fewer hours and refloweth in more yet so that the time of the flux and deflux viz. between the two greatest intumescencies together make twelve hours with 24 ⅛ minutes and two such times make 24 hours with about 50 minutes 48 ¾ and therefore on every day the greatest intumescency falleth out later almost by an hour because that the Moon almost an intire hour returneth more slowly to the same Meridian every day We have sufficiently explained the first part of the Proposition in the Demonstration of the Eleventh Proposition although in this demonstration we have taken the Altitude of the Sea the Moon possessing the Meridian but in this Proposition by reason that in the proceeding we have shewed that in many places that Altitude doth happen the Moon being constituted without the Meridian we do not reckon in them the hours from the time in which the Moon possesseth the Meridian but for that time in which the Moon occupieth that vertical place in the which when that the Moon is it is manifest that the greatest intumescency is Yet in these places the period of the increment ot decrement doth not exactly observe these twelve hours witih twenty four minutes or twenty four hours with fifty minutes because that the Moon by reason of its various and mutable distance from the vertex either in more or fewer hours returneth to the same vertical which difference notwithstanding is not great Although therefore in all places the flux and reflux be compleated almost in twelve hours and twenty four minutes when that there are no tempests also in most this time is equally divided between the flux and reflux so that in six hours it floweth and in so many refloweth yet in some places the time of the flux is unequal to the time of the deflux viz. more or less The flux and reflux of the Ocean at the River Garumna in France The Ocean entereth Garumna a River in France in seven hours and resloweth in five So at the Port of Maccoa on the Coast of China the flux is in nine hours and refloweth in three yea in less if that the Eastern winds blow On the contrary at the Coast of Zenega a River of Aethiopia the Sea floweth in four hours and refloweth in eight The causes of these differences are difficult Some refer them to the swift and valid efflux of the Rivers or also to a simple efflux for therefore the Shoar of Garumna discovereth the flux in seven hours because that its strong motion retardeth the flux but yet assisteth the deflux therefore the Sea refloweth in five hours Others have added those hours to the flux by reason that the Sea reflowing from the more Northern place hindreth least the Sea should hinder the egress from Garumna but rather be more forced on it But I suppose therefore to be by reason that Garumna poureth forth it self by a strong Motion from its inlet or mouth into the Ocean for some distance this efflux is prohibited on some part from the Sea and so the water of Garumna is at a stand also for some space before that the Sea by reason of the Moon entreth its
rain and cavity and depression of the place in which such standing Pools are For if that any place be scituated in the midst of elevated places all the rain-water runeth unto it and so causeth a Pool In India are many Pools So in India there are many Pools or standing-waters made by the industry of the Inhabitants whereof some are in compass a mile and some two encompassed with a Stone-wall which are filled in the Pluvial months that in the Summer months they may furnish those with water who live far from Rivers or Fountains After the like mode small Lakes and Pools are made by the exundations of the Sea and Rivers So the River Nilus and Niger exundating when that they have reflowed leave many Pools behind them which either the Natives fortifie or make that thence they may draw water on the other Months of the year For the same reason in Moscovia Finland Lapland in the Spring Summer and Autumn are many Lakes partly by reason of the shores and partly because of the dissolving of the Snows and Ice But although some Lakes be dried up in the Summer and after a long cessation of Rains we may not thence firmly conclude that they had all their waters from those Rains for they may be dried up As for other Lakes without Rivers that are not dried up their generation may be also referred to the Rains viz. if that they have a profound Channel in which so great a quantity of water collected from Rains may be kept as that the heat of the Sun is not of force enough to consume it all before that another Rain falleth but it is more probable that these Lakes have peculiar Rivulets in the bottom from which they receive so much water as is consumed by the exhalation And this cause alone taketh place in those Pools that are found on the tops of Mountains as in the Mountain Bructerus in Cenisius and others Now it is probable that some of these also were generated long since by a great inundation of Waters and thence conserved by Rivers nay without question some of these Lakes that are near the Sea and also salt had their being from some inundation of the Sea through some passage as the Lake Harlem and others in Holland There are also many salt Lakes in Peru. Not many Lakes without Rivers and those not large Neither is there any great number of these Lakes without Rivers some small ones are found in Moscovia and Finland the Lake or Pool Lychnitis in Macedonia the Lake Appollonia in Mysia one in Carniola called Zrinzee a round one in China another called Hilam in Cochinchina one in Zanhaga one at the City of Mexico twelve Leagues in length All these are small except that in China in comparison of great ones The Lake Parima the greatest Lake There is only one great Lake of this kind in the whole Earth and which exceedeth all others to wit that of Parima in America which is about 300 miles in length from East to West and about an hundred in breadth where broadest yet nevertheless it doth not receive nor send forth any Rivers How it had its original is no mean doubt whether long since caused by the inundation of the Ocean or flowing from some subterranean Fountains or Springs Also whether it be conserved by Rains or from the same Springs It seemeth to me probable that it hath Springs at the bottom that supply as much as the heat of the Sun consumeth Proposition IV. To declare the generation and conservation of those Lakes that neither receive nor send forth any Rivers Of the Generation and Conservation of Lakes that neither receive nor send forth Rivers There is an infinite namber of these Lakes seeing that most Rivers flow from Lakes as from Fountains or Springs especially those that arise in Moscovia Finland and Lapland viz. where there is any cavity in the place of a Spring but not so large as to contain a quantity of runing water then it becometh a Lake thence proceeds a River the water gliding to the adjacent places Neither may we doubt but that these Lakes have their generation and conservation from Springs in the bottom whether it be a true Spring or an apparent Spring viz. Water flowing from another place thither through a subterraneous passage which last appeareth more probable in reference to certain Lakes which immediately send forth great Rivers Of such small Lakes there is a great multitude as I have said as Volga from whence is the first original of the River Volga Odoium from whence floweth Tanais Adac the original of one of the branches of the River Tigris Osera in Moscovia the Spring of the River Sosnam which is discharged into Volga and many other small ones we only reckon up the greatest of most note 1. The famous Lake Chiamy not far from India in the latitude of 31 degrees from which run four Rivers of note magnitude and inundation into the Kingdom of Sian Pegu and the like viz. the Rivers Menam Axa Cosmum and Martavam but some Maps have a very small River which runeth into this Lake 2. The Lake Cincuyhay in China which sendeth forth a great River towards the North which joyned with another entreth China 3. The Lake Titicaca in America meridionalis of 80 miles compass it sendeth forth a great River which terminateth in a small Lake neither is it seen any farther and about this Lake are many Cities and Towns 4. In Nicaragua in America is a Lake so called about four miles from the Pacifick Ocean and 100 miles from the Atlantick into which it runeth in a great Channel 5. The Lake Iroquois in Canada the original of the River of St. Lawrence 6. The Lake Annibi in Asia under the latitude of 61 degrees Proposition V. To declare the generation and conservation of those Lakes that receive Rivers and let out none Of Lakes that receive Rivers and letteth our none Now it is manifest that these Lakes are generated and conserved from those Rivers which they receive and that flow into them For when that Rivers having gone from their spring and arrived in their passage at any noted and ample cavity the water is collected in this and maketh a Lake Now if the Earth at the bottom prove porous it sucketh in the water and transmitteth it the to adjacent Earth or that which I suppose to be more frequent if there be a Subterraneous passage or that such an one be caused by the water through this part of the flowing water is carried away so that on that account the Lake doth not flow over Of these kind of Lakes there is but a small number on the Earth 1. In the preceding Proposition we have said that the Lake Nicaragua sendeth forth a River which endeth in a small Lake this Lake therefore shall be one of this number 2. The Lake Asphaltites in Palestine termed also the Dead-Sea receiveth the River Jordan but sendeth
forth none it is seventy miles long and five broad 3. A small one in Asia minor 4. A small one in Macedonia called Janna which receiveth little Rivers 5. The Lake of Geneva 6. A Lake in Persia 7. The Lake Soran in Moscovia which receiveth two small Rivulets 8. The River Ghir in Africa rising in Mount Atlas endeth in a Lake as Leo Africanus writeth and so some Maps do represent it but others bring the River into Nubia Proposition VI. To explain the generation of those Lakes which both receive and send forth Rivers Of Lakes which both receive and send forth Rivers There is a threefold difference of them as we have said in the second Proposition for either they receive a greater quantity of water than they send forth or an equal quantity or a lesser If that they send forth a greater quantity it is manifest that that Lake hath occult springs If less it is a sign that there are secret Aqueducts in the bottom or a spungious Earth but if it be equal we gather that there are neither occult Aqueduct nor hidden springs in the bottom The cause of the generation therefore is partly the same which we shewed in the fourth Proposition viz. the cavity and depression of the place and the quantity of water unto which are adjoyned occult springs and much rain and dissolved Snow and Ice help on the same Those that are generated from the influx of one River they are placed in the middle tract of the Rivers and render the Rivers directly and of these there are a great number So the River Niger maketh four Lakes in its passage The Nile maketh many Lakes in its passage which the Maps do not shew The River Duina pasteth through six or seven at least and you shall see other Rivers in Moscovia and Finland in the great Maps to make sixteen Lakes before that they come to their mouth But it is best to consider those which produce other Rivers than they have received The most famous for magnitude are these The Lake Zaire 1. Zaire a Lake of the procurrent of Africa lying between the thirteenth and sixth degrees of South latitude and therefore in Longitude hath 105 miles in the midst of it lieth an Island besides other small ones of that magnitude that they can bring into the field at least twenty or thirty thousand fighting men This Isle doth in a manner twice cut the Lake so that one part is accounted for a peculiar Lake it is called Zembre from this Lake flow three mighty Rivers Nile Cuama and Zaire but certain small Rivulets do flow into the same which do not only seem sufficient to supply the greatest of the same so that it is probable that it hath certain springs at the bottom although the inundation to be ascribed to be the showers that fall in the pluvial months The Lake Zaflan 2. Zaflan a Lake not far from Zaire between the tenth and sixth degrees of South latitude and therefore about sixty miles in Longitude It sendeth forth a branch into the Nile and receiveth small Rivers The Lake Sachaf 3. The Lake Sachaf not far from Zaire towards the Promontory of Good hope sendeth forth a Rivulet which being augmented with other waters at length maketh the River of the holy Ghost It receiveth small Rivers The Lake Aquilunda 4. The Lake Aquilunda receiveth a branch from the Lake Zaire and sendeth forth many Rivers into Congo The Lake Onega 5. Onega a Lake in Finland between the 60 and 63 degrees of Latitude hath 44 miles in length and 30 in breadth where it is at the broadest It receiveth many small Rivers which proceed from other Lakes and sendeth forth the moderate River Sueri into the Lake Lodoga The Lake Lodoga 6. The Lake Lodoga 30 miles long and 15 broad it receiveth the River Sueri from Onega and many lesser from other places a moderate one from Ilmen a noted Lake in Moscovia It sendeth forth a River into the Baltick Sea The Lake Osera 7. The Lake Osera receiveth the River Kousam and others and sendeth forth Sosnam which runeth into the Volga The Lake Enaraok 8. Enaraok a Lake or Marish in Lapland in length 40 miles in breadth 15 It receiveth the River Avilan and other lesser Rivers and sendeth forth the River Paes into the Lappian Sea The Lake ula 9. Vla a Lake in Moscovia 30 miles long and 15 broad it hath in the midst of it an Island as in the Lake Zaire It receiveth a River that passeth through 10 Lakes and sendeth forth a famous River There are many more in Moscovia Finland and Norway Lakes in China 10. In China are four famous Lakes which receive Rivers and again distribute them into divers parts Lakes in Brasil 11. In Brasil in the same manner as in China are the Lakes Euparia and Puerto de los Reyes in which the Rivers Argenta and Omoranna do meet and pass through Proposition VII Many Lakes contain fresh Water very few salt or Marine Divers Lakes contain fresh-water very few salt Those that have their being from Rains or Rivers as also those that have their own proper springs more remote from the Sea but those that are caused by an inundation of the Sea through a certain passage are salt as also some which have springs of salt-Salt-water in the bottom So the Lake Harlem and others in Holland are salt There is a salt Lake found in the Isle of Madagascar in Peru in Cuba which hath two Leagues in circuitâ— â—scituate not far from the Sea and although it receive certain Rivers of fresh-water and breedeth Fish and Tortoises yet it is salt So the Lake Asphaltites although it receive the fresh-water of Jordan yet it is not sweet but sendeth forth so stinking and violent a vapour that the circumjacent land for the space of half a mile is barren Proposition VIII Whether the Caspian Sea be a Lake Streight or Gulph of the Ocean The Caspian Sea whether a Lake Streight or Gulph Some will have it to be properly termed a Sea but no Sea can properly be termed a Sea except it be a part of the Ocean that is except it doth adhere to the Ocean by some manifest tract but they will have it joyned to the Ocean by some subterraneous passage The Ancients indeed would have it to be joyned with the Indian Ocean others with the Northern but experience sufficiently sheweth both to be deceived Concerning a subterraneous passage the matter is uncertain yet it seemeth to be probable from thence that it receiveth so many Rivers and those noted for great quantities which quantity of water the Channel could not possible contain except that it exonerated the same by subterraneous Caverns and passages into the Ocean But others suppose that quantity of water otherwise to be consumed viz. that it penetrateth not into the Ocean but into the vicine Mountains of which there is a great
greater than that which entereth in for if it be lesser or no greater I think we ought not to question whether that which goeth forth be the same with that which cometh in Other Notes or Signs are in some as the Rhodanus entereth the Lake Lemanus and again goeth forth and yet causeth not that Lake which is discovered besides other tokens from the colour which this River beareth contrary to the Lake neither doth the Rhine cause any Lake but is produced and conserved from waters bubling under the earth yet I do not propose these as undoubted Proposition XVII Most Rivers are by so much the broader by how much they are near to their mouth or removed from their Spring and great is their Latitude in their Mouths or Outlets The Mouths of Rivers broader than at their Springs The cause is 1. Because other Rivers enter into that which exonerateth it self into the Sea and so the quantity of water is augmented 2. Because the Channel is less depressed in the parts nearer the mouth 3. Because that the water is forced back by the wind blowing from the Sea from the mouth to the Fountain which violence is only discovered in the parts near to the mouth not in those remote and near the Fountain 4. The Sea it self when such a wind bloweth entereth the mouth and rendereth it more large and broad by vehement agitation And by so much the outlets are larger and broader in great Rivers by how much they are the fewer Great are the mouths or outlets of the River Maragnon in Brazilia of St. Laurence in Canada of the Zaire in Africa of Rio de la Plate in Brazilia for this River is carried into the Sea by an out-let of 40 miles as some have observed or as others of 20 miles only And I suppose those that write of 40 miles comprehend the other mouths of the River together Those who have been in Congo relate that the mouth of the Zaire is 28 miles and these Rivers sending forth such a large quantity of water overcome and obscure both the salt taste of the water and the motion of the Sea towards the shoar and that unto 10 or 12 miles in the Sea Proposition XVIII The water of Rivers carrieth with it many particles of various Metals Minerals Sands of oyly or fat Bodies Rivers in their course carry various things with them Some Rivers carry gold that is sands mixed with some grains of gold and such are 1. some in Japan 2. In the Islands of Lequeo not far from Japan 3. A Riveret called Arroe in Africa which springeth in Monomotapa from the foot of the Mountains of the Moon in which Mountains there are golden Mines and it floweth into Magnice a River in Soffalae 4. In Guiney where the Negroes separate these grains from the sand and sell it or exchange it with the Europeans for Toyes or slight Commodities 5. In the Riverets about Mexico grains of gold are also gathered up especially after showers of Rain Which must be understood of all these Riverets For except in the times of showers scarcely any or very little is found 6. In Peru. 7. In Sumatra 8. In Cuba 9. In Hispaniola and other adjacent Isles 10. In Guiana a Province in America 11. In the Rivers of Caribana great grains are found after showers 12. Many Riverets and Springs are found in the Regions about the Alpes in Germany especially in the Province of Tirol from the water of which gold and silver is extracted although nothing of grains be conspicuous in them because they carry very small Particles or Atomes The Rhine also carrieth golden clay in many places as also the Abbis In times past the River Tagus was famous for rowling down Sand-gold but at this day no such are found in it neither do I remember that any River in Europe is celebrated for such riches Also in Hassia at this time a small River is reported to be found in the sands of which were grains of gold but I have read no Author worthy of credit concerning it No Silver Rivers or Riverets are taken notice of by Writers yet I doubt not but that there as many or more Riverets which carry grains of gold but because they are not so easily discovered from the sand and no great gain can be obtained therefore it hath not yet been observed by any The same is also the cause why we meet with no mention of those Riverets that carry grains of Iron Copper Tin except of very few of which questionless there are a great number the admirable effects of which being discovered men admire and are amazed and vulgar Philosophers fly to an occult quality Let us only cast an eye on that River in upper Germany A strange River in Germany which changeth Iron into Copper as the Vulgar think so that if you hang an Iron shoe in it you will draw it out Copper But the Iron is not changed into Copper as is vulgarly supposed but the grains and particles of Copper and Vitriol that are in this River corrode the Iron by the assistance of the motion of the water and the particles of the Iron being removed those of the Copper succeed in their places This the Modern Physicians that are skilful in Chymistry have learned by another experiment Much less are the Riverets that are impregnated with many particles of kinds of earth and salts observed But we shall explain in the following Chapter the Mineral and Metallick Springs From this admixture of various particles proceedeth the great diversity of waters in Rivers and Wells The water of some if that you use it to boyl Meat maketh it black which is a sign that it is impregnated with Iron neither are Pease so easily softned as when they are boyled in other water which is somewhat more fat Of divers waters the same or like Beer cannot be made Now the Albis is of the number of these fat ones as I may so say The cause of this variety is to be sought from the variety of the Lands through which the River runeth which are either stony gravelly or metallick And experience testifieth that Rivers whose water is fat do run through clayie Lands so all the places that adjoyn to the Albis are fruitful Proposition XIX The waters of most Rivers differ in colour gravity and other qualities The waters of most Rivers are of different qualities For some waters are black some inclining to black some inclining to red some to white And this diversity of them is chiefly noted when that two Rivers do meet for we may discover for many miles those waters where now they exist in the same part of the Channel From whence also 't is manifest that they differ in gravity when that one rather sinketh to the bottom of the Channel than the other although this is made more manifest by the examination by weight The water of the Ganges is accounted the most wholsome and the most light and
participations of Minerals are to be applied to Vitriol Sulphureous and Mercurial waters and the like and more especially to these to wit to Salt Vitriolate and Sulphureous because in these Nature it self doth exhibit this fourfold variety I doubt whether that Corporeal waters of a mixed subtilty do exist Spirituous Metallick waters are very rare but Sulphureous and Salt waters are frequent But the Corporeal and Spirituous because these sorts of Metals are both found in many places of the Earth and also in a greater quantity and easily suffer their particles to be gnawed off they send out also frequently a fume and vapour We will explain by one Example this fourfold variety of participation and that in Gold 1. In the preceding Chapter and the sixteenth Proposition we have enumerated those Riverets which carry grains of Gold and with this Treasury make glad the Natives such are many in the Earldom of Tirol and the places adjacent and we have said that the Rhine it self Albis Danube and most great Rivers in some places carry grains of Gold as also of other Metals and Minerals by reason that they receive Golden or Gold-bearing Riverets The Rhine carrieth grains of Gold commixed with Clay and Sand in many places but especially at these 1. Near Curia in Rhetia 2. At Meinfield 3. At Eglinsan 4. At. Secningham 5. At the Town Augst not far from Basil 6. At Norinburgh 7. At Wormes 8. At Seltz 9. At Mentz 10. At Bacherack 11. At Bononia and the like The Reader may see those Gold-bearing Riverets which the Rhine receiveth in Thurnhuserus as also those that the Danube and Albis do receive In the water of this viz. the Albis are found grains of Gold 1. At Leutmeritz in Bohemia 2. At Puru 3. At Dresda in Misnia 4. At Torga 5. At Magdeburgh 6. At the Tower of Lunenburgh fifteen miles from Hamburgh Concerning the Gold-bearing Riverets consult the forecited Book of Thurnhuserus where also you may see those that carry other Mettals and Minerals These Waters are therefore the Corporeal Golden-waters of the first mode viz. those that carry grains of Gold which less properly are termed Mineral or Golden because the Golden-grains are not permixed with the water but are carried down by the rapid Current of the water and the waters themselves are simple or uncompounded 2. Golden Corporeal-waters of a subtile commixtion to wit the Atoms of whose waters are mixed with the Atoms of the Gold as we have said of the Aqua Regia of the Chymists which dissolveth the Gold and uniteth it to it self by Atoms And now because there may be like waters which whether they be carried through Golden-lands or Mines may gnaw off and dissolve some Golden-Atoms of it with Earthly ones such Golden-waters many Riverets seem to be which Thurnhuserus writeth to participate of Gold and reckoneth them up in the description of the Danube Rhine and other great Rivers 3. The Golden Spirituous-waters are very few and some of those are they peradventure which Thurnhuserus enumerateth Now such waters are less noted or sensible because Golden-Earth and Mines are very rare and that in a small quantity Moreover where the Mines are a quantity of other Minerals are also together with the Gold whence the water receiveth many more Spirits Yet some Riverets in the high Alpes of Bohemia are said to participate of these Golden-Spirits also in Silesia and the Mountain that they call Fitchtelberg The Pepper-Baths in the Bishoprick of Curia are believed to be impregnated with such a Spirit but by reason of the admixture of other Minerals in greater quantity the waters receive a less sensible quality from it 4. Golden-waters which carry both Atoms of Gold and Spirit are some of the Riverets mentioned by Thurnhuserus We will add the Example of Salt-waters Example of Salt-waters 1. Salt Corporeal-waters viz. which carry the more gross particles of Salt and not accurately mixed they are many and sufficiently known to any person as certain Springs of which Salt is made Hitherto appertaineth the Sea-water if that it be made more gross by the heat of the fire 2. Salt Corporeal subtile-waters which contain the Salt reduced into little particles they are those which when they are most Salt yet withal they are very pellucid and subtile as many salt Springs and tenuous Sea-water although that there be great difference in this subtile commixtion Hitherto appertaineth the Vrin of all Animals 3. Salt Spirituous-waters which contain not the particles of Salt but the spirit of Salt they are such that if you should boyl many Vessels of them yet notwithstanding you should receive no Salt Not a few of these are in Germany and elsewhere but they are rarely found simple 4. Salt Corporeal and Spirituous-waters which have particles of Salt and Spirit Almost all the Corporeal have also some portion of Saline spirit but most of them very little So near the City Saltzinga not far from the Rhine the Fountains are salt the water of which though more salt than other waters yet it affordeth less Salt because its sharp and salt sapor is sharpned by a spirit or volatile Salt that flyeth away in the boyling Hence it is manifest how this fourfold difference of participation is to be applied unto every sort of Mineral waters viz. Vitriolate-waters Alom-waters Lead-waters and the like Proposition V. To reckon up the noted differences of Mineral Waters The noted differences of Mineral Waters In the foregoing Propositions we have explained the true kinds and differences of Mineral waters taken from the very essence of them viz. from the particles of the Minerals which they carry or by which they are impregnated but those differences because they do not so strike the senses and moreover by reason of the various mixture of Minerals communicate various properties to the water wherefore they are less vulgarly known for the denomination of all Bodies ariseth from manifest qualities on the Sense as also doth the celebrity of waters amongst men The explication and cause of which apert qualities and properties must be sought from the inmost composition of things Therefore the noted and famous differences or species of Liquors flowing from the Earth and also known to the Vulgar sort of men are these ten to wit 1. Sowr-waters 2. Bitter 3. Hot 4. very Cold 5. Oily and Fat 6. Poysonous 7. Coloured 8. Ebullient 9. Water that converts less hard into harder or after any other mode changing any Bodies cast in or stained with them 10. Salt-waters And in the 11th place we may add those which are endowed with any other wonderful property Unto these Classes those that are studious in these things may reduce all Waters which are found described in Authors We shall only in brief shew their generation and differences and alledge some Examples Proposition VI. To explain the cause or generation difference or kinds of Acid or Sowr Waters Of Sowr Waters Great is the celebrity of Acid waters or Springs they
water on which drops of oyl do flow In Scotland two miles from Edenborough a Fountain floweth on the whole Superficies of which drops of black oyl do swim the Inhabitants use it to mollifie the skin and to take away scabs So the River Cilicia tearmed Liparis was famous amongst the Ancients in which those that washed themselves were anoynted by the water whether it be so at this day I much doubt So likewise there was a Lake in Aethiopia which anointed those that swam it Also there was a Fountain in India which on a clear day sent forth a great quantity of oyl In Zant and about Dyrrachium and Appallonia as Vitruvius writeth there were Fountains which vomited out abundance of pitch with water There was a Lake in Babylon of great magnitude called Limme Asphaltis it had liquid Bitumen swiming upon it with which the black Semiramis encompassed Babylon with a Wall At this day also at Monasterium in Bavaria is the Fountain Degemsce on the top of which oyl swimmeth and is daily taken off The Acid waters of Schwalback if they be taken in a Vessel and have been settled for some days small drops of oyl swim on the top of them There is a greater quantity in the Fountain tearmed Oelbrum not far from Hagenaw at the Village Lamperscholch Also in the many Bathes are found bituminous particles if so be that they stood quiet for some days as in the Baths of the Kingdom of Naples tearmed the Bath of Petrolei Now the Fountains that send out not an oyl swimming on the water but a meer fat or bituminous liquor are also many Near Gersbachium in the Valley called Lebersthal from an antiquated and exhausted Mine oyl or bitumen floweth with which the Country Swains besmear their Cart-wheels Neither do the Inhabitants know its excellency In the Isle of Sumatra is a Spring from which Naptha like unto oyl floweth others say that it is a kind of Balsom they report Fountains of Amber to be there likewise In Peru near the sea is a bituminous Fountain sending forth a Branch or Riveret into the Sea The Natives use it instead of pitch neither do they use any other matter In Persia not far from Schimachia at or near the high Mountain Barmach in a Valley are about thirty Fountains of Bitumen or Naptha but runing in deep Wells with a great force the Depth is about two Ells wooden steps being made for the conveniency of descent it sendeth forth a Sulphureous and strong Spirit it is of a twofold colour in some red in others white The cause of these bituminous Fountains is a sulphureous and bituminous matter in the bowels of the earth thrust forth by a heat and spirit The cause of the differences is to be sought from the differences of the fat matters themselves as Succinum Amber Oyl of Petrolei Pitch Naptha and the like Proposition X. To explain the generation of bitter water and to reckon up the places of the earth in which they are found Of the generation of bitter waters and the places where they are found Many Fountains and Wells in the Regions of India on the Choromandel have bitter water although that they ebulliate in and flow from Rocks In Pontus a Region of Asia minor a little River tearmed Exampeus at the Town Callipadus is very bitter it rendereth the River Hypanis into which it floweth also very bitter They arise from impure Sulphur Bitumen Nitre Ink Copper as water left a long time in a Copper vessel acquireth a bitter taste The Lake Asphaltites in Palestine which is called Mare Mortuum or the Dead Sea hath a bitter water by reason of the impure Bitumen whence it ought to be referred to the fat waters of the former Proposition It sendeth forth a stinking scent and vapour all things without life sink to the bottom but it suffereth not any Animal to sink neither doth it grow sweet although that it continually swalloweth up the River Jordan It is venomous by reason that it containeth Arsnick Proposition XI Yo explain the cause of very cold Springs and to enumerate the places of the Earth where they are found The cause of cold Springs In the Province of Dauphin in France not far from Vienna is a Fountain of so great cold that the mouths of those that drink it are swelled with it neither can they endure their hands in it it is not diminished for the water that is drawn out of it nor augmented by the water poured into it In Arabia or Aethiopia are most cold Springs although that the heat of the Sun be most excessive there In Stiria not far from Gretz are Fountains so cold at the bottom that none can drink any water runing or drawn from thence In a mile from Calma a Spring sendeth forth water as it were boyling with a great wind when yet it is very cold hence they call it The mad water The cause of the coldness of these Fountains are 1. The admixture of Nitre and Alom also of Mercury Iron and the like 2. The depth of the Spring by reason of the defect of the Solary Beams and of the sulphureous subterraneous heat There are also some Springs which are sometimes cold and sometimes hot In Gatalonia the Lake and Fountain Salsula in the Winter is hot and in the Summer very cold This is common to it with many others I think the cause to be that in the Summer the pores of the Earth are open through which the hot Spirits break forth in the Winter they are closed whence within there are hot Furnaces that heat the waters So some Fountains are more hot in the night than in the day Proposition XII To explain the generation of those waters which seem to change bodies into another kind and to reckon up the places of the Earth where they are found There are some waters which change wood into the hardest stone In Ireland Of the generation of waters which change bodies into another kind c. above the City Armagh in a Pool not very large a stake of wood if it be fixed for some months the part that sticketh in the Mud will be iron the part which is touched with the water is turned into stone and the rest remaineth wood so Giraldus and Maginus relate but Brietius sayeth I know not by what authority that it is a meer fable The waters of Loches in Blois a Province in France turn all things put into it into stone At the City Senon in Burgundia near a Lake a Spring floweth which hardneth into stone Vitruvius saith that in Cappadocia between Mazaca and Tuana is a large Lake which changeth a reed or wood put into it in one day into stone In Bohemia near the Baths of Charles is a Fountain in which wood lying long is changed into stone Other waters are thought to change Iron into Copper which yet really they do not but by reason that waters themselves carry particles and spirit of Copper
many Examples of the Inundations of the Ocean as formerly in Thessaly and not long since in Friezland and Holsatia 3. When by reason of the same causes it penetrateth the firm Land and maketh Islands By this Mode we have said in the former Propositions that it is likely that that Sea had its original which interfloweth between those innumerable Oriental Isles and that which floweth between the Maldivian Isles and India and also between the Gulph of Bengala and Camboja 4. When it by degrees eateth and consumeth the Coasts or Shoars and so in progress of time covereth some parts of the shoar and of the adiacent land So the Baltick Sea invaded the Coasts of Pomerania and destroyed the famous Town or Empory of Vinetam so taking away the Islands from the Coast of Norway it let in it self between these Isles and the Continent So the German Ocean hath possessed the shoar of Holland near the Village of the Catti in a great space of Land so that the Ruins of the Brittish Tower formerly a Fortress or Castle of the Romans now lieth inconspicuous being covered with water far from the shoar in the Sea The Ocean hath taken from the North part of the Island of Ceilan the space of 20 miles so that at this day it is far lesser than it was And there are many more Examples of the like kind Corollary From hence we may collect that those places of the Earth where now the Ocean is in times past were Land and again shall be land to wit if that we do suppose that the earth hath continued so many thousand years and shall yet continue Concerning this Argument you may consult Aristotle in the first Book of his Meteors and the twelfth Chapter and Stevinus in his Geography If that you demand how the Ocean shall occupy the place of Mountains that then the Mountains shall not be covered by the Sea but shall then become either Rocks or Islands other earth being forced unto them that is confirmed by the example of many Islands yea almost of all because that Experience testifieth that almost all Isles have Mountains in the midst as Ceilan Sumatra Java furthermore some are nothing else but Mountains as St. Helena Ascension the Hesperides and the like Seeing therefore that those places of the Ocean in which those Isles lye in Ages to come shall be or already have been land then indeed the Mountains of these Isles shall be Mountains of the Continent Proposition XVIII Whether it is possible that the whole superficies of the Earth should become dry or Land Or that it should be all liquid or covered with water That the most parts should be of an Earthy superficies at one time more than at another or that more should be covered with water Of the whole Superficies of the Earth whether it may become all Land or all Water 1. That sometimes the land should possess a greater part of the superficies of the Earth than at another Also that which is a consequence to the former that water at one time should possess the greater part of the superficies of the Earth more than at another hath been sufficiently shewed in the second Proposition of this Chapter 2. Whether the Water or Ocean can cover the whole Earth so that there shall be no Earth or Island above it and so cause a Universal stood Unto this I answer That a mode may be conceived and explained by which it may naturally be done but yet by reason of the compaction of the Lands and Altitude of the Mountains it is scarcely probable that any such thing will be The mode by which it may be done is the same with that explained in the second Proposition For if that the Ocean continually eateth the land from the shoar and layeth it down in the profoundest parts of its Channel and do this in a perpetual course of time then it shall take away all the Lands of the superficies or extant parts and it self shall cover all the Earth And the Mountains shall either be made Rocks or shall by degrees sink and fall their Foundations being consumed by the vehement force of the water But this may be done more easily if that we will follow their opinion who attribute a greater height to the Ocean than to the Land But we have in the precedent discourse sufficiently confuted that opinion 3. Whether that the Land can so occupy the whole superficies of the Earth so that all the water and the whole Ocean may be contained in the Caverns of the Earth or in the subterraneous passage and covered by the Earth Unto this I answer after the same manner that it is not impossible and that a Mode may be conceived by which it may be done but yet scarcely ever shall be Now there is only one Mode to be conceived viz. that if now there are or may be so many cavities within the depth of the earth within the which the Ocean may be contained for neither hath it been demonstrated by any as hitherto that such cavities are not in the depth of the earth and if they be not but that they may be done 1. by the violence of the earth and 2. by subterraneous winds Proposition XIX Why in the middle of the Ocean no Islands are found and no abundancy of Isles but most at great Continents or great Islands No Isles found in the middle of the Ocean Of the truth of this Proposition we ought not to doubt for experience manifestly proveth it In the midst of the vast Pacifick Ocean between Africa and Brasilia besides the Isle of Sancta Helena and that of the Ascension few are found but about the shoars of the Continent or in the Ocean not far from the Coasts of the greatest Continents all Islands are those few only excepted which I have spoken of this may especially be taken notice of in those numerous ones that we tearm troops of Isles which are all near the Continent The troop of the Isles of the Aegean Sea adjoyneth to Europe and Asia the Hesperides to Africa the Maldivian Isles to India as also all the Indian Isles between Asia and the South Continent only the Flandrian Isles or Azores seem to be situated in the midst of the Ocean between the old World and America although that they are more near to that than to this The cause of this Phenomenon or situation of the Islands without doubt is that they had a Being from the irruption of the Ocean into the Continents by which violence the Lands of the Continents were separated but because the Altitude of the Ocean was not so great that it could cover all the Lands intercepted thence here and there between the Continents and at the Continents troops of Islands did arise also it is likely that some of them were generated by another mode viz. because the Ocean cannot carry the Lands separated and cut off any long space with it but suffereth them by degrees to subside
either more thick or subtle than the former they are refracted where they have entered at this other Medium or deflect from a strait direct course to the sides The Explication is easie from a Vulgar Experiment Let any Vessel be taken and let a ball of Gold or Copper or Gold money be affixed to the bottom then depart back from the Vessel by reason of the obstacle of the sides of the Vessel you can no longer see the Money at the bottom Then pour water into the Vessel which being done you shall see again in the former distance the Money at the bottom From hence it followeth that seeing no Ray could directly come from the Money to the eye by reason of the interposition of the sides of the Vessel and yet afterwards the water being infused the Rays arrived at the eye It followeth I say from hence that the Rays proceeding from the Money where they enter into the Air from the water do deflect or are refracted from the direct way and being so refracted they arrive at the eye It is called refraction by reason that for this cause an Oar being partly in the water doth appear refracted or broken See Scheme So let the Center of the Earth be T L the eye in the superficies let d r f p be the superficies of the Atmosphere or Air. Therefore no ray can directly arrive at the eye L because it is beneath L f g for other inferiour rays would fall in on the tumor of the Earth L o. Wherefore no Star can appear in a direct ray until it come to the Horizontal line L f g And the Stars appear before viz. whilst that they are yet beneath L g for Example in S and yet from S to the eye L no ray can directly come because that it should first fall on L o. Therefore of necessity the ray which cometh from the Star S to the eye L is not a direct but a refracted ray viz. L f which refracted ray is propogated from the incident ray S f to wit S f falling from the Aether on the more thick Medium viz. the Atmosphere in f is refracted and becometh f L when that it was direct in n And so the Star appeareth before that it could truly appear by a direct ray that is before that it arriveth at the Horizontal line L f g. So a Star being in S is not seen by the direct ray S L but by the refract r L whose incident ray is s r and direct r m and therefore the Star S appeareth higher by reason of refraction than it is and in another place it appeareth high in the Arch x g or in the Angle r l g as if it were in x when indeed it is in s For this is the nature of refractions that the rays falling from a more rarified medium on a more thick as from the Aether upon the Air they become refracted or decline towards the perpendicular drawn through the point of incidency or falling into the superficies of the incidency or medium For Example the ray S f falleth in from the Aether on the Air f is the point of the incidency T f the perpendicular drawn through f to the superficies d r f p therefore the ray S f n shall be refracted f T that of f n may be made f L. So of r m is made r L but the contrary is when that the rays proceed from the water to the Air for then they more recede from the perpendicular line drawn Lastly this also is the nature of refractions that the rays falling in perpendicularly on the superficies of another medium are not refracted but only those that fall obliquely and not perpendicularly and by so much they are the more refracted by how much they fall in the less perpendicularly or by how much the more they depart from the perpendicular So the rays S T f T H d T are not refracted because that they are perpendicular on the superficies d r f p but the rays S f S r are refracted because that they fall obliquely and indeed S f more than S r. From whence it followeth which Experience also testifieth that by how much the Stars are more near the Horizon by so much the more they refract their rays by how much the higher by so much the less And Astronomers have observed that the refraction is insensible where the Star hath attained the altitude of 20 degrees not that there is no refraction but that it is very small And for many Examples the skilful in the Opticks and later Mathematicians have derived the Rule of refraction of all Rays falling in obliquely viz. that in every medium there is one constant account between the sign of the Angle falling in and the sign of the Angle refracted to wit the Angle n f T is termed the Angle of incidency L f T the Angle refracted n f L the Angle of refraction and so in the refraction of the ray s r m. Therefore as the sign of the Angle T f n is to the sign of the Angle T f L the same is the reason of the sign of the Angle T r m to the sign of the Angle T r L. Thence it followeth that if from observation we have the quantity of refraction to the elevation of one Ray we may thence know the quantity of the refraction of all others howsoever elevated Proposition XXII The Atmosphere or Air causeth the Sun or the rest of the Stars to be seen before that they arise in the Horizon also to appear for some small space of time after that they have set also that they appear higher than they are and in another place of the Heavens as long as that they are no higher than 20 degrees The Air causeth the Sun and Stars to be seen before they arise in the Horizon We have sufficiently explained the Cause in the precedent Proposition only we shall add some Experiences or Natural Phaenomenons When that the Dutch wintered in Nova Zembla the Sun appeared to them sooner by sixteen days than it was in the Horizon that is when that it was as yet depressed beneath the Horizon about four degrees and that in a serene Air. And famous Astronomers have found it out with Tycho Brahe that in our places the Morning-sky or Air being serene we may behold the Sun elevated above the Horizon 34 minutes when that as yet he is wholy under the Horizon yet so that his limbus or skirt doth enlighten the Horizon And the Sun seemeth to arise when that as yet he is depressed about 34 minutes beneath the Horizon to wit the Air of the place where we are being serene So the Spica Virginis a bright Star seemeth to rise to us when that yet he is depressed 32 minutes beneath the Horizon which is thence collected because is seemeth to arise when the Cauda Leonis is 34 degrees 30 minutes high and in the same quarter in which this Star of the
is said to be like unto it then after a while the Cloud augmenteth and extendeth it self over the whole plain of the Mountain Then on a sudden an Ecnephias breaketh forth from the top of the Mountain with so great violence that it over-setteth and sendeth to the bottom Ships that are unprovided and not well strengthned but Sea-men being now more cautious when that they once discover that Bulls or Oxes-eye presently depart from the Shoar as far as they can and then furl their Sails and use other Artifices to preserve their Ships neither doth this Prognostick ever fail therefore they fly this deadly Banquet After the same mode an Ecnephias rageth at Terra de Nata the Bulls-eye fore-runing it by which many Ships have been cast away And so it is also in that whole tract between that and and the Promontory of Good-hope In Dauphin in France not far from Vienna is a high Mountain on the top of which is a standing-Pool from whence all Tempests seem to arise in these places on the top of it is procreated a Cloudy exhalation which foresheweth immediately Thunder or Storms to succeed In the Sea between America and Africa and near the Aequator such Ecnephiae and Travados are frequent especially in those Months in which no Winds blow constantly or if they do it is very seldom viz. throughout the whole year especially in April May and June in other Months it is more rare and they are very observable on the Coasts of Guinea The Portugals as I have said call them Travados which word also the Dutch keep but the Inhabitants of Guinea call them Agremonte They often happen viz. three or four times in a day by and by they cease for they continue for the most part above an hour and a half but the first shock is very violent They break out of black and dusty Clouds the Sky being clear at hand By their assistance Sea-men oftentimes pass the Aequator because that other continual Winds are often wanting there especially in those three Months neither do they hinder Ships to sail except at the first onset But in the Sea that is near to that part of Africa in which the Kingdom of Loango is scituated there is a frequent Ecnephias in January February March and April so on the Promontory of Africa called by the Ancients Aromata and now Guardafu not far from the Mouth of the Red Sea in May every year the North-wind rageth and a most violent Ecnephias For you must know that as some Anniversary winds are less violent so also Tempests and Ecnephiae are Anniversary in some places In such an Ecnephias not far from that place the Portugal Admiral Sodrens was lost Anno 1505 who being forewarned by the Africans would not follow good Advice But in the Mouth of this Arabian Sea as also in Arabia and Aethiopia a peculiar and wonderful Ecnephias doth somewhat happen viz. a thick and black Cloud mixed with Nubicular flames like to a burning Furnace dismal to behold cloudeth the day in darkness of an instant a Storm breaketh forth the rage or which is by and by pacified but it casteth forth red Sand in great abundance on the Land and Sea so that the Arabians say that it hath often happened that such Storms of Sand have overwhelmed the Annual Company of Merchants and Travellers with their Camels they term them Carawanen Caravans or Cassila viz. every year once or twice Merchants being met together from divers parts of Asia in Syria go from Aleppo into Arabia about six thousand persons by reason that the wonted Robberies of the Arabians and the difficulty of the way cause them to fear to Travel alone which also they do from India to China and Tartary and thence they say that the Mumia of the Arabians and Aegyptians hath its original Viz. those Bodies covered with the drifts of Sand are-dried up by the great heat of the Sun Now this Ecnephias ariseth from the Northern quarter into which the Red-Sea is extended and therefore it is probable that seeing so great a quantity of this Sand is sound on the shoar of this Sea that it is raised aloft by the Wind and that thence that Red colour is seen in the Clouds and thence also the Sand is ejected from the Clouds That such an Ecnephias ariseth in Lybia by reason of the great quantity of Sand is not improbable and was in some measure known to the Ancients who therefore writ That the access to the famous Temple of Jupiter Ammon in Lybia was difficult neither were they altogether ignorant of the generation of Mumia Twistius a Dutch-man that lived a long time in India saith that in the Kingdom of Guzurat Clouds of Sand or an huge quantity of Dust that are elevated by the heat of the Sun do oftentimes overwhelm the Travellers Now we must speak of the Causes of this Tempestuous wind whence the Ecnephias proceedeth It is evident that it breaketh forth of a Cloud Now there are two Modes by which such a Wind may seem to be generated from a Cloud 1. If that a Cloud tending downwards by its gravity striketh the Air with a great force as we discover by Experience if that stretched forth Sails fall the Air is moved with an impetus And thence it cometh to pass that by how much the Cloud or Bulls-eye appeareth less by so much the Storm is the greater that followeth viz. because that the Cloud is more high and therefore appeareth small and descending down from a higher place it more vehemently striketh the Air the other is the motion of the generation if that the Wind included in the Cloud breaketh forth suddenly or by reason of some fire or Sulphureous matter the way being rendred strait and other outlets being restrained the Vapours strike as from a Vessel of a narrow mouth containing water if that it be heaped the wind breaketh forth but the first cause seemeth more probable Proposition XI An Exhydrias is a Wind breaking from a Cloud with great abundance of water A Wind called an Exhydrias It is little different from an Ecnephias but that the Cloud from whence it seemeth to break is now condensed into water and so long upheld by other circumstantial Clouds and peradventure forced into one by the winds until by its ponderosity it rusheth downwards and strikes the Air whence a great Wind proceedeth But these Exhydrias are very rare yet the Ecnephias hath for the most part Rains Showers or thick Clouds accompanying him and therefore only differeth from the Exhydrias according to the more or the less For a Nimbus is nothing else but a Wind with a violent Rain and therefore is more general than an Ecnephias but an Exhydrias oftentimes falleth perpendicularly from the top Proposition XII A Typhon is a violent Wind passing swiftly through all the quarters about a place and for the most part rushing from the top A VVind called a Typhon The Saracens call it Olifant the
testifyeth contrariwise in the months of October November and December it should be Winter because that the Sun being about the beginning and Tropick of Capricorn is most remote from the Vertex of those places Here therefore the time of the Terrestrial season do much differ from the Celestial seasons The cause therefore of these Rains Storms and Thunders at that time in those places when the Sun is so near is not easy to be explicated But it seems to be that the Sun in the day time forceth up many Vapours from the Sea and Sulphureous exhalations from the Land of Guiny which vapours being condensed by the cool of the Night cause the Rains especially when no continual wind bloweth in these places which may discuss the Vapours But for the most part here is a calm some Storms excepted And these months of Rain which they attribute to Winter are not cold but hot because no wind bloweth and the Sun is Vertical yea the heat is Suffocative which is the cause of shortness of respiration to the Inhabitants And although the Fields be Barren of Grain in these Watery months yet the Trees and Bushes are in their Verdure all the year and bear Fruit. The Day is here equal to the Night almost throughout the whole year the Sun in the East rising at six in the Morning and sets in the West at six in the Evening but the Easterly or Westerly Sun is seldom conspicuous there because for the most part he ariseth involved with Clouds for half an hour and half an hour before he setteth he is again inveloped with Clouds That also deserveth consideration why in the Months of July and August the same Rains and Storms rage not there seeing that the Sun is then as equally nigh to those places as in the months of May and June Moreover why in the Islands of the Hesperides which are not so far removed from Sierra Leon and Guiny the VVinter falleth out in contrary months 3. How the times of the seasons are in the Interiour or Mediterranean part of Africa which is included in the Arch of the Tropick of Cancer the Regions of the Occidental Shore and Guiny or the Land of the Negros concerning which I have found nothing as yet noted but that all those places are almost Steril except those adjacent to the River Niger for that River every year in the months of June July and August overfloweth and communicateth much fertility to those Lands and moreover formeth many Lakes The other places confining on Lybia are infested with violent heat being for the most part Sandy The Watery Months do not seem to bear sway here after the same mode as in Guiny 4. Now follow the Regions of the Coast of the Tongue of Africa which is stretched from the North towards the South and regardeth the West The Regions are Manicongo Angola and the like from the second degree of Nothern Latitude even to the Tropick South of Capricorn beyond the Aequator Now the Kingdom of Congo beginneth from the second degree of South Latitude The Winter in these places is like the constitution of the Vernal season in the Territory of Rome in Italy the heat temperate so that they alter their Garments in no time of the year Neither are the tops of the adjacent Mountains infested with cold Here almost with our Spring the Watery Winter beginneth and continueth April May June July August and good part of September At that time the Summer beginneth which possesseth the other Months even to the 10 of March even in this Summer they have no rains or at least very little and seldom have a continual serenity But in the Watery Months the Sun is scarce to be seen on any day perpetual Clouds and rain so obstructing the Air also frequent Travados or Storms It doth not rain whole days but for the most part hours before and two hours after noon great drops fall which are soon received by the droughty Earth Therefore although the Inhabitants divide the year only into two parts it may be distributed into four our common people also do usually divide the year into Summer and Winter because the Spring is comprised in the Summer and the Autumn in the Winter These times of the Terrestrial seasons in these places almost agree with the Celestial course for from the 25 of March April May June July August to the 25 of September the Sun departs from those places to the Tropick of Cancer where he is most remote from them the 21 of June and the rest of the time he approacheth again to them so that on the 30 of September he becometh vertical to them and goeth to a moderate distance towards the Tropick of Capricorn and returneth from thence in the months of October November December January and February so that in March he again becometh vertical therefore in those Months they have a Summer by reason of the vicinity of the Sun whose effects are not here hindred by a Terestrial cause And then again in the Months from the 10th of March to the 10th of September they have Winter because then the Sun is more removed from them but the times of the Spring Autumn Summer and Winter which we have assigned do not well agree with the Celestial course and I doubt whether the Summer and VVinter may be distinguished into the Spring and Autumn in those places Therefore here a more easy cause may be rendred why in those Months from the 10 of March to the 10 of September they should have a quotidian Rain and some kind of VVinter viz. because the Sun departs from their vertex towards the place of the greatest distance but this cause is not only sufficient because it is not able of its self to produce such an effect but another must be added The tops of the Mountains which lie not far from these Maritime places towards the east are discerned in those watery Months to be continually covered with Snow The Wind is the North-west Wind. and this is caused by reason of the fixed wind which in these Months there bloweth therefore the Sun elevateth the Vapours very much from the Sea And this fixed Wind forceth them towards the tops of the Mountains where they are condensed and then turn to Rain and from the Rain which falleth from the Mountains springeth the inundation of the Nile and other Rivers of Africa Moreover we must know that in these watery Months the Rivers of Congo overflow the adjacent Fields which causeth great Fertility in them and also disgorgeth great quantities of water into the Sea 5. In the Maritime Region Lowango adjacent to Congo there are also observed to be Rainy Months and other Months of Summer that are serene but that which is to be admired is that they are not the same with those in which we said the Rain doth wax vigorous in the Months of January February March and April when yet it is Summer and a serene Aire in January and
above almost maketh up and moderateth them To wit in the Regions of the Northern Temperate Zone it is Spring and Summer the Sun going from Aries by Cancer to Libra because then he is more near them Then the Sun going from Libra through Capricorn to Aries it is Autumn and Winter But in the Southern Temperate Zone the matter is contrary neither can those other causes altogether disable the force of this first and induce a new course of the seasons and be able to alter the times as in the Torrid Zone 2. Yet those Seasons of divers places vary so that in one place there may be more Heat or Cold or Rain than in another although the places lie in the same Climate but yet they cause not the Winter to be changed into Summer or Summer into Winter A Rocky Marshish and Maritim Land findeth somewhat another degree of heat or cold than Vallies or a Chalk and Maritim Land 3. The places in the Tropicks for the most part in the Summer have an excessive heat others a Pluvial Season so that they almost approach to the nature of the places of the Torrid Zone So in the part of the Kingdom of Guzarat lying without the Tropick at the same time the wet and dry months are observed which in the part lying beyond the Aequator the Summer is changed into a Pluvial Season yet then there is greater heat than the dry part of the year where they have a moderate cold and in truth in the places of the Temperate Zones we judg the Summer and Winter not from the drought and rains but from the heat and cold Now in the Coasts of Persia and Ormus there is so great heat without Rains in the Summer by reason of the vicinity of the Sun rhat both the Men and their Wives ly in Cisterns full of Water The like heat is in Arabia The Regions of Africa on the Mediterranean Sea are called the coast of Barbary Throughout all Barbary the middle of October being past Showers and Cold begin to increase and in December and January the cold is perceived more intense and that only in the morning and withal so remiss that the Fire is not desired February taketh away the greatest part of the cold from the Winter but yet it is so inconstant that sometimes 5 or 6 times in one day the Air changeth In the month of March the North and West Winds blow violently and cause whole trees to be vested with blossoms April giveth form almost to all Fruits so that the entrance of May and the end of April is wont naturally to produce Cherries In the middle of May they gather Figs and in the middle of June in some places are ripe Grapes Of the seasons of the year of Barbary the Figs or Autumn are gathered in August and there is no greater plenty of Figs and Pears than in September There is not so great intemperies of the year in those places but that the three months of the Spring are always temperate The entrance of the Spring that is the Terrestrial not the Celestial is as they reckon on the 15th of February and the end the 18th of May in all which time the Air is most grateful to them If from the 25th of April to the 5 of May they have no Rain they esteem the same as ominous They count their Summer even to the 16th of August at which time they have a very hot and serene Air. Their Autumn from the 17 of August to the 16 of November and they have that for two months to wit August and September yet not great That which is included between the 15 of August and the 15 of September was wont to be termed by the Antients the Furnace of the whole year and that because it produced Figs Pears and that kind of Fruit to maturity From the 15 of November they reckoned their Winter which they extend to the 14 of February At the entrance of this they begin to till their Land which is the plain but the mountainous in the month of October The Africans have a certain perswasion that the year hath 40 very hot days and on the other side so many cold The Opinion of the Arabians days which they say begin from the 12 of December They begin the Aequinoxes on the 16 of March and on the 16 of September Their Solstices on the 16 of June and the 16 of December The end of their Autumn all their Winter and a good part of their Spring is full of violent Winds accompanied with Hail Lightnings and dreadful Thunders neither is there wanting in many places of Barbary an abundance of Snow In Mount Atlas 7 degrees distant from the Tropick of Cancer they divide the year only into two parts for from October even to April they have a continual Winter and from April again to October they have Summer In this there is no day in which the Mountains tops glitter with Snow The seasons of Numidia In Numidia the parts of the year swiftly pass away for in May they reap their Corn in October they gather their Dates but from the middle of September to January a violent Frost continueth October abstaining from Rains all hopes of Sowing is taken from the Husbandman the same hapneth if that April produceth not Pluvial Water Leo Astricanus remembreth many Mountains of Snow in Africa not far from the Tropick of Cancer Of China The North part of China although no more remote from the Aequator than Italy yet it hath a cold more sharp for great Rivers and Lakes are congealed up with Frost the cause of which is not yet sufficiently known except we should refer it to the Snowy Mountains of Tartaria not far remote to the avoyding of which cold they abound with the Skins of Foxes and Scythilian Rats New England New England although it lie in 42 degrees of North Latitude and therefore no more removed from the Aequator than Italy yet in the month of June when Sir Francis Drake was there the Air was so vehement cold that he was compelled to sayl back to the South for the Mountains were then covered with Snow The cause is the Frigid temperature of the Earth being Stony The seasons of Aegypt In Aegypt which is bounded with the Tropick of Cancer the Spring and Temperate Season of the year is observed about January and February The Summer beginneth with March and April and continueth June July and August The Autumn possesseth September and October The Winter hath November and December About the beginning of April they Reap their Corn and presently thresh it After the 20 of May not an Ear of Corn is to be seen in the Fields no Fruits on the trees On the Ides of June the inundation of the Nilus beginneth The seasons in the streights of Magellan In the Streights of Magellan and the adjacent Regions although they be no more distant from the Aequator than our parts
Circle And 180 deg makes 2700 German miles wherefore no places are distant more than 2700 German miles But the condition of an Itinerary distance is otherwise Proposition V. The distance of the Antipodes is 2700 German miles or 180 degrees The distance of the Antipodes The shortest distance amongst the Antipodes is not one but infinite and those all equal although to speak properly they cannot be called the shortest distances but those than which none are shorter The Circular distances amongst the Antipodes are all greater Peripheries no lesser of which between other places there are infinite which are not opposed to the Diameter A Periphery passing through two places also passeth through the Antipodes of these places The distance of any places of the two which belong to the Antipodes taken together make 180 degrees Therefore the distance of one place being known from the other the distance also of that place shall be known from the place of the other of the Antipodes These Five Propositions are of so manifest a truth that any one weighing of them may easily discern and understand them Proposition VI. Any place being given on the Superficies of the Globe to exhibit all those place which may have one and the same distance from that given place but the given distance must not be greater than 2700 German miles Let the given place be brought to the Brazen Meridian let the Pole be Elevated according to to the Latitude of the place let the Quadrant be affixed to the Vertical point Moreover let the given distance be turned into degrees which degrees must he numbred on the Quadrant from the Vertical point Let the term of the Numeration be noted with Chalk then let the Quadrant be brought round on the Superficies of the Globe the noted point will shew all the places of the Earth which have the given distance from the given place Or let the deg of the changed distance be taken on the Aequator by the interval of the Compass and one Foot fixed on the given place let the other be brought round The places through which it passeth are those demanded But if the deg arising from the changed distance are more than 90 that is than a Quadrant let their Complement be taken at 180 and let the place of the Antipodes be brought to the Superiour Semicircle of the Brazen Meridian let the Pole be Elevated for its Latitude and the Quadrant affixed to the Vertical point and let the deg of the Complement be accounted on it and let the term of the Numeration be noted with Chalk If then the Quadrant be turned about all the places demanded which have the given distance from the given place shall have the noted point But if you will do the business with the Compass use the Method of the Chorographical Maps Proposition VII Of the Cause why the Itinerary distance is greater than the true or short and Geographical The reasons why the Itinerary distance is greater than the true short and Geographical 1. The unpassable Woods which lie between some places 2. High Mountains and low Valleys 3. Marishes and Water in general if you mean Land Voyages 4. In Sea Voyages the procurrent Lands and Islands hinder the direct Voyage 5. Peculiar Fluxes of the Sea And 6. The Winds But some may demand whether it be not possible that there may be places whose Itinerary distance is lesser than the most short Geographical To this I answer although to Sense the Figure of the Earth be Spherical yet I have shewed in the first Book that this Figure is not altogether Geometrical but is rendred unequal by many places Elevated and depressed Therefore if we conceive a certain Superficies of the Earth or the distance of the Superficies from the Center for Example the vulgar Semidiamiter of 860 miles in respect of which places are to be taken Elevated or depressed this being supposed I say there may be two places so scituated that the Itinerary distance may be lesser than the shorter Geographical which is removed 860 miles from the Center but the intermedial place must be more depressed Proposition VIII To find out the distance of two places given on the Globe as also in Geographical Maps The finding out the distance of two places given on the Globe Let one of the given places be brought to the Brazen Meridian let the Quadrant be affixed to the Vertex and let it be applyed to the other given place then let the degrees intercepted between the Vertex and this place be numbred let these degrees be turned into miles or another measure in which we would know the distance of those places this shall be that demanded Or let the interval of two places be taken with the Compasses and this being translated to the Aequator let it be considered how many degrees it possesseth in this for these are the distances of the places which we must convert into miles or some other measure But if that the distance be greater than can be taken by the Quadrant or Compasses viz. more than 90 degrees the distance of one place from the Antipodes of the other shall be lesser than 90 degrees Let this be enquired after and taken from 180 degrees the remaining degrees shall be the distance required In Universal Maps as also in Particular of great parts the distance of places cannot be exactly found but in Particular Chorographical Maps a Scale of Leagues or miles is usually added by the assistance of which the distance of places contained in those Maps is known For so if you take the interval of two places and transfer this into the Scale you shall presently know the distance of those places But if the Map be of any greater proportion this Method is defective for no Map can be made by any Method which exhibiteth the true distance of places but such an one may be made which may shew the distance of one place from all the rest as we have said in our Method of making Maps Proposition IX The Latitude and Longitude of two places being given to find their distance The Latitude and Longitude of two places being given to find their distance The solution of this Problem is easy by the Globe and Catholick Planisphere it is difficult by Calculation and Trigonometrical Supputation It is performed on the Globe after this Mode let any Meridian be taken and let the difference of the Longitude of places be numbred from it in the Aequator let the term of the Numeration be brought under the Brazen Meridian and let the Latitude of the other place be reckoned on this let the point of the Globe which is under the term of the Numeration be noted with Chalk also in the first Meridian let the point of Latitude be noted for the other place Then let the interval be taken between the noted points with the Compasses and let it be transferred either into the Aequator or first Meridian so we shall know
top of the approaching Mast of the Ship or Tower may be seen to find out the Altitude of the Tower or Mast of the Ship In the Diagram of the former Proposition in the Triangle N O T from the given N T T O the Arch N P is found which being substracted from the Known Arch P F from the given distance turned into minutes the Arch F N or the Angle N T S is left And in the Triangle N T S the right Angle N T is given and N is the right Angle therefore the Hypotenusa T S shall be found from which if T F be taken F S is left the demanded Altitude of the Tower or Mast of the Ship or of any Mountain Proposition VII The refraction of Rays in the Air augmenteth the apparent Semidiameter of the sensible Horizon Of refraction of Rays in the Air. For there is a divers refraction of the Air in divers places but the thicker by how much it is nearer the Earth Therefore although a Ray cannot come by a direct way to the Eye O from the point scituated beyond N for Example F yet his Ray may be so broken in the Air that the refract may be N O or the Tangent of the Earth CHAP. XXXV Of the three parts of the Nautick Art and in special of the first part viz. the making or building of Ships Proposition I. That is termed the Nautical Art or Science which teacheth how a Ship may most safely with the assistance of the winds be sailed from one place to another through the Sea By the Winds Ships are carried from one place to another in the Seas BEcause in this discipline the places of the Earth are compared amongst themselves or mutually to themselves and their respective scituation is examined therefore deservedly it is referred to the respective part of Geography Now I suppose that three parts may conveniently be constituted of this most Noble Art so much useful to human Society 1. The Art of building of Ships which also considereth the motion of the Ship in the water or else presupposeth it as known 2. Concerning the lading of Ships 3. The Direction Gubernation or Sailing of a Ship which is termed the Art of the Master or Pilot and in general the Art of Navigation by way of Excellency unto which also the definition of the Nautick Art is most of all agreeable And this part with greater right doth appertain unto Geography than the two former which are more truly referred to the Staticks and Mechanicks now the Art of Sailing doth wholly depend on Geography Proposition II. In the Fabricks of Ships these things following must be observed Things to be noted in the Fabricks of hips 1. That the matter or wood be taken which may endure very long in the water of which Vitruvius and other Authors are to be consulted Hither also belongeth how the Woods are to be prepared and their density to be augmented the unuseful moisture to be consumed with Fire Pitched and defended from corruption This Doctrine must be taken from Philosophy 2. That such a Figure or Shape be given to a Ship that is most apt for a quick motion and may be moved by a small power 3. In this Fabrick and in reference to the Figure this must be observed that a Ship may with ease be defended against storms and tempests but of this I shall treat in the Second Part where I shall speak of the lading of Ships The Magnitude of Ships 4. The Magnitude of Ships must be considered where there is a great comparison between the Ancient and Moderns Some suppose that the Ship of Alexandria made by Archimedes by the Command of Hiero King of Sicily and presented to Ptolomy King of Aegypt was of 12000 tuns The Ship of Philopater is delivered by Calixenus to have been in length 280 Cubits in breadth 38 and in highth 48 Cubits The greatest Ships at this day are those of the Spaniards or Portugals they call them Caracasts But of all Nations in Christendom the English may best brag of their gallant Ships for the service of War 5. There belongeth to the building of Ships the knowledge of every part as the Keil the Rudder Ribs Head Stern Masts Yards Cables and Anchors c. of which not only the matter figure and coherency but also the Weight and Magnitude are to be explained 6. To the Fabrick of Ships belongeth the skill how to prevent a breach leak or other defects of Ships Thus much in brief of the First Part of the Nautick Art of building of Ships CHAP. XXXVI Of the Lading of Ships or the Second Part of the Nautick Art Proposition I. The burden to lade Ships withall is expressed by Lasts and Tuns Of the Lading of Ships THe Tun of a Ship is supposed to be 2000 pound weight the Lasts twelve Tuns Proposition II. The body or matter which is higher than water is not mergent altogether in the water but some part of it is above but if it be of a greater weight than water it will sink to the bottom if of the same weight it keepeth the given place in the water Hitherto belongeth the various knowledge of the weights of bodies as of Lead Gold Iron Wheat Sand Oyl Wine the gravity of all which must be compared with water Corollary From hence it is manifest that the weight of the matter to lade the Ship with taken with the burden of the Ship ought to be lesser than the burden or gravity of the water whose moles is equal to the solidity or capacity of the whole Ship Proposition III. By how much the Figure of the Ship cometh to an Ordinate that is to a Cubick equality of Longitude Latitude and Thickness by so much the more it can sustain the greater burden in the water The demonstration must be sought from the Staticks Proposition IV. In the Lading of Ships respect must be had to two things first that there is not imposed so great a burden that its weight taken may be equal with the weight of the Ship or greater than the Moles of the water which is equal to the solidity of the Ship but that it be lesser though not much But if the matter to lade the Ship be so light the burden must be augmented with Ballast Secondly the depth of the water must be considered through which the Ship is to sail Ballasts required in a Ship For although the gravity of the Water admitteth of this or that weight of the Ship or Lading when this is lesser than the equal gravity of the Ship is to the moles of the Water yet if the Water hath lesser profundity than the part of the Ship beneath the Superficies of the Water the bottom will not grant a motion to the Ship but detain it This is the reason that Spanish Ships carry greater burden than Dutch Spanish Ships carry greater burden than the Dutch because they have the Sea deeper on
the Shore and in the Harbours as also greater Ships come to Zeland than to Holland Proposition V. If a Ship be so burdened that its weight or gravity be almost equal to the weight or gravity of the Sea water equal to the capacity of the Ship yet it sinketh not in the Sea but when it shall be brought into any Rivers it sinketh to the bottom The reason is because the Water of Rivers is lighter than the Water of the Sea Therefore if the weight of the laden Ship be almost equal to the gravity of the Marine Water therefore it shall be greater than the gravity of River Water and so the Ship shall be sunk in the River or carried to the bottom Many Ships for this reason have perished which have been over laden by unskilful Mariners or not unburdened in the Mouths of the Rivers Now how much this gravity should be is known from the proportion of the Sea Water to River Water Proposition VI. Any body swiming on the water hath that weight that the watery Moles hath equal to the demergent part of this body Corollary The part of the Ship being given which is under Water the weight of the whole burdened Ship may be found For the gravity of the Water is known or is easy to be found For Example one Cubick foot of Water is 70 li. and therefore if the part of the Ship under Water be 2000 Cubick foot therefore the gravity of the Watery Moles which is equal to the part of the Ship under Water shall be 140000 li. So much also shall be the weight of the Ship laded Proposition VII A Ship is most commonly accounted commodiously to carry that quantity of burden whose gravity is equal to the gravity of half the Moles of water which the Ship can contain For Example if the Ship can carry 500000 Tun of Water whereof every one is accounted at 2000 li. weight that is if it contain the Water of 1000000000 li. You may conveniently lade it with the burden of 250000 Tuns 1000000000. In this sense you must understand it when they say that Ships are so many Tuns or carry so many Lasts The Spanish Carracts carry 1200 Lasts the greatest Holland Indian Ship 800 Lasts Proposition VIII By how much the Weight of the Ship laded is greater by so much the less it is tossed with storms and tempests A laded Ship is not so subject to be tossed in Tempests as when not laden Ships of 2000 Tuns are not in danger of those Tempests which are vexatious to Ships of 300 or 500 Tuns Much more might be said but this may suffice for Elements CHAP. XXXVII Of the third and chief Part of the Nautick Aâ—t viz. the Art of Guiding or Navigating of a Ship and its subdivision of the Four Parts Proposition I. That is termed the Art of Guiding or Navigating of a Ship which teacheth unto what quarters a Ship is to be Guided in any scituation of it in the Sea that it may come to the purposed place without danger I Make Four Parts of it Of the Guiding or Steering of Ships 1. Special Geography that is the knowledge of a space intercepted between two places and the properties of the same 2. The knowledge of the quarters in every place 3. The cognition of the Line by which the Ship is to be brought from one place to the other for there are between every two places infinite intercepted Lines this part is termed Histriodromice 4. The knowledge of the scituation of every place unto which by Sailing we arrive or how these places are scituated unto that place unto which the Ship is to be directed This is the chief part of the Art of Sailing Proposition II. The cognition of the intermedial space comprehendeth these things Things observed from Special Geography and Nautical Maps 1. The scituations of the places the procurrences of Angles the bending of the Shores the aspect of Promontories Mountains Bays the depths of Waters the sight of Islands and Coasts of Lands All which are known from Special Geography and Nautical Maps but most easily and with greatest certainty from observation and frequent Navigation through any tract of Land which is the only Cause that some Mariners are more fit to guide a Ship to such place and others to another 2. The knowledge of the General and Special Winds and those that are peculiar unto any place which is exceeding necessary in Navigations which are undertaken in the Torrid Zone and adjacent places For here a general Wind and in many places Anniversary Winds which we have shewed to be called Moussons Motions in our XX. Chapter do rule which either promote or hinder Navigation For the Indian Sea is Sailed by these Anniversary Winds Of these and also of storms and tempests we have spoken in the XX. Chapter See Chap. 20. 3. The Condition of the Motion of the Seas in every tract also the quarter of it into which quarter the Sea and Waves are born for they carry the Ship with them The diversity of those Motions in many places we have shewed in the XVII Chap. See Chap. 17. First of all there is required a knowledge of the Ship and reflux of the Sea and the time or hour of the increase and decrease at every day the supputation of which is termed the reckoning of the Tides for except a Master know this the Ship is often much hazarded when it is near Shores or Sands whereof most in the greatest increase of the Water do not hinder the passage of the Ship but most do in the decrease So with a flux the Navigation is more facile to the Shore and to the inlets of Rivers and the contrary is discovered in the reflux Of the supputation of this time we have spoken a little in the Proposition of the XVII Chapter CHAP. XXXVIII Of the knowledge of places viz. the North South East and West and the intermedial quarters Proposition I. In every place to know the Plagas viz. the North South East and West and the intermedial quarters The quarters very neccessary in Navigation THe knowledge of this is the most necessary of all the Problems of the whole Art of Navigation seeing that a Ship must be guided unto some quarter which if unknown there can be no direction and the very defect of this knowledge alone hindred the Navigation of the Ancients and in this is the chief difference between the Ancient and Modern Navigation For the Ancients had not a Method by which at any time in the large Ocean they might know where was the North where the South and the other quarters Therefore they could not nor durst they commit themselves to the vast Ocean but only coasted the Shores so that they might know the quarters from other signs The Ancients had a double Method of finding out the quarters The Ancients had a double Method which serveth also to the Modern Navigation of finding out the quarters
quarter by North-west West and a quarter by South west North-west and a quarter by West South-west and a quarter by West The Measures in which are to be considered that the least part that can be described upon the Terrestrial Globe is a Point many Points described and continued right the one to the other make a Line twelve Lines continued together are esteemed to make an Inch or Thumbs breadth twelve Inches make a Foot two Foot and half make a common Pace and two common Paces a Geometrical Pace one hundred twenty five Geometrical Paces make a Stade or certain measure of ground eight Stades or one thousand Geometrical Paces is one thousand Roman Paces or the Italian Mile one thousand fifty six Geometrical Paces make an English Mile one thousand two hundred sixty seven Paces make a Scotish Mile two thousand four hundred or 2500 Geometrical Paces make a Spanish League four thousand Geometrical Paces make a Dutch League or Miles five thousand Geometrical Paces make a Swedish League or Miles six thousand Geometrical Paces make an Hungarian League or Miles 24 or 25 French Leagues or 60000 Geometrical Paces make a degree of Latitude on the Aequator three hundred and sixty degrees of Longitude on the Aequator make the great circle of the Terrestrial Globe the great circle of the Terr Globe multiplyed by his Diameter make the Superficies of the Terrestrial Globe Geographical and Hydrographical TABLES The Terrestrial Globe hath all its Surface in LAND which discovereth it self in Two Continents whereof Ours or the most Ancient and Superiour containeth three great parts to wit Europe where are the Kingdoms or parts of Turkey in Asia Arabia Persia India China Tartaria Asia where are the Kingdoms or Countreys of Italy Turkey in Europe France Germany Low Countreys Poland Scandinavia Russia or Moscovia Africa where are the Kingdoms or Countreys of Rarbary Biledulgerid Egypt Sara or Desart of Saara the Land of the Negroes Guinee Nubia the Emperour of the Abyssines Zanguebar Congo Monomotapa Caffreria Spain The other or New and Inferiour is called AMERICA America Septentrionalis where are the Kingdoms of Canada or New France New Mexico New Spain America Meridionalis where are the Kingdoms of Peru Brazil Paragua Many Isles of which the most famous are About our Continent and part of Europe as those in the Mediterranean Sea the Western Ocean called the British Isles part of Asia as those of Japon the Philippins the Moluccoes Sonde Ceylan and the Maldives c. part of Africa as those of Madagascar or St. Lawrence St. Thomas Cape Verd the Canaries c. Between the one and the other Continent as the Azores About the other Continent and towards America Septentrionalis as those of Terra Neuves California the Antilles towards America Meridionalis the Magellanick Isles And in some Lands and Isles the most part unknown towards the one and the other Pole among the which are Groenland Izland c. Terra Australis Nova Guiney c. WATER which is found in SEA and which may be called Ocean about our Continent Oriental or Indian where are the Seas of China India Arabia Southern or Aethiopian where are the Seas of Barbaria or of Zangucbar Cafreria Congo Western or Atlantick where are the Seas of Guinee Cape Verd the Canaries Spain France Great Britany Northern or Frozen where are the Seas of Denmark Moscovy Tartaria Sea about the other Continents North-Sea or Seas of Canada or New France Mexico or New Spain Brazil Magellanick-Sea or Seas of Paraguay Magellanick Pacifick-Sea or Seas of Peru New Mexico Gulphs or Seas between the Lands of our Continent the Baltick Sea the Mediterranean Sea between the Lands of the other Continent the Gulph of Mexico the Gulph of Hudson Lakes or Seas in the midst of our Continent the Caspian Sea in the midst of the other Continent the Lake or Sea of Parime Streights to wit between the one and the other Contin of Anian between the other Contin and the J. M. of Magellan between Europe and Africa of Gibraltar RIVERS of which the most famous are In our Continent as In Europe the Tage the Loire the Rhine the Elbe the Danube the Boristene the Don or Tanais the Volga In Asia the Tigre and the Euphrates the Indus the Ganges the Quiam or Jamsuquiam the Oby In Africa the Nile the Niger In America Septentrional as the River Canada or St. Lawrence Meridional as the River Paria or Orinoque the River Amazones the River of Plates The Water in the surface of the Terrestrial Globe is for the most part in Seas and which may be called Ocean and about our Continent to wit the Indian or Eastern where are the Sea of China Indian Sea Arabian Sea Aethiopian or Southern wherein are the Sea of Barbary or of Zanguebar Sea of Caffreria Sea of Congo Western or Atlantick where are the Sea of Guinee Sea of Cape Verd Sea of the Canaries or Gulph of Yeguas Sea of Spain Sea of France Sea of Great Britain Northern Frozen or Scythick where are the Sea of Denmark or Mourmanskoi-More Sea of Moscovy or Petzorke-More Sea of Tartrria or Niaren-More Sea and about the other Continent to wit the North or Sea of Canada or New France Sea of Mexico or New Spain Sea of Brazil or North-Sea Magellanick or Sea of Paraguay Magellanick Sea Sea of Chili South or Pacifick or Sea of Peru or South-Sea Sea of California or New Mexico Between the one and the other Continent and towards the Artick Pole are the Archipelague of St. Lazare the Sea of Groenland Gulphs among which there where the Ocean washeth them and About our Continent are these Gulphs and Seas as the Gulph of Nanquin Gulph of Cochinchina Gulph of Sian or Cambogue Gulph of Bengala Gulph of Ormus and Balsora Gulph of the Red-Sea or Sea of Mecca Gulph of Aethiopia or St. Thomas Sea of Guascagne White-Sea or Bella-more there where the Mediterranean Sea entreth and within our Continent are these Gulphs and Seas as the Gulph of Lyon Gulph of Venice Archipelague or White-Sea Sea of Marmora Black Sea or Sea of Majeure Levant Sea there where the Baltick Sea entreth and within our Continent are these Gulphs and Seas as the Gulph of Bolnia Gulph of Findland Gulph of Rhiga Gulph of Dantzick Gulph of Lubeck there where the Sea washeth them and About the other Continent are the Gulph of Hudson Gulph of St. Lawrence Gulph of Mexico Gulph of Hondutas Gulph of Panama Streights among which there where the Ocean and the See washeth and About the other Continent are these Streights Seas c. as the Streight of Anian Sea of Vermejo Streight of Magellan Channel of Bahama Streight of Hudson Streight of Davis About our Continent are the Streight of Nassau or Vaygatz Pasâ— or Streight of Calaâ—is Streight of Bebelmandeâ— Streight of Mocandan Streight of Manar Streight of Malacca Streight of Sonde there where the Baltick Sea is and In our Continent are the Streight of
inclining to cold than heat yet by reason of the famous Cities of Constantinople Adrianople and others here seated renders it the chief and best inhabited of all Greece It s chief places are Adrianople so called by the Emperour Hadrian who repaired it it was added to the Kingdom of the Turks by Bajazet Anno 1362 and continued the Seat of their Kings till Mahomet the Great took Constantinople from Constantine Palaeologus the last of the Eastern Emperours about 90 years after Blunt in his Voyage to the Levant in his description of this City saith That it is seated on three low Hills of which that in the midst is the largest and fairest on the top of which is a stately and magnificent Mosque and in the Churchyard are about 30 or 40 Cocks under a stately Fountain for People to wash before Divine Service as also at the bottom of this Building on the North and South sides are 20 Conduits with Cocks and on the East side are the Priests Lodgings and Gardens and round the Church-yard are Baths Cloysters and a Colledge for the Priests with other useful Offices all covered with Lead In this City are several Besestines or Exchanges some of good account as likewise many fair Hanes To this City are four stately and lofty Bridges of Freestone which make a pleasant shew and is a fair large and well composed City 2. Gallipoli seated near the Hellespont but within the Sea of Marinora This was the first City that the Turks possessed in Europe it being surprized by Solyman Son to Orchanes in Anno 1358. Here the Beglerbegh of the Sea hath his residence A little below Gallipoli is the streightest passage of the Hellespont a place formerly famous for Xerxes his Bridge but especially for the two Castles of Sesto on the European side and Abydo opposite to it on the Asian shoar of note for the Loves of Hero and Leander which Castles are now called the Dardanelli and command the passage and are the security or Bulwark of Constantinople on this as those on the Thracian Bosphorus are on the other 3. Caridia seated on the Thracian Chersonese opposite to the Isle of Lemnos as also to Troas in Asia and therefore now called St. George's Arm. 4. Abdera the Birth-place of Democritus who spent his time in Laughing 5. Pera a Town of the Genoueses opposite to Constantinople 6. Galata also opposite to Constantinople from which it is parted by a River wherein is found a good Harbour for Shipping and here all the Western Christians as English French Dutch and Venetian Merchants have their common residence intermixed with Jews Grecians Armenians and some few Turks And lastly Constantinople the now Metropolitan City of all Greece the Seat of the Grand Signior and formerly of the Emperours of the East first built by Pausanias a LÃ cedemonian Captain about 660 years before the Birth of Christ It is a City very commodiously seated for an Universal Empire overlooking Europe and Asia commanding the Euxine or Black Sea the Hellespont and Sea of Marinara or Propontis on the upper part of which and near the Thracian Bosphorus it is seated where it hath a Haven so deep and capacious that the Turks for its excellency call it the Port of the World so that for strength plenty and commodity no place can compare to it This City is in form Triangular its Walls are composed of Stone and Brick equally intermixed to which it hath 24 Gates for entrance whereof 5 regard the Land and 19 the Water being about 16 miles in compass and supposed with Pera and Galata adjoyning to it and Scutari on the Asian side to contain about 700000 living Souls good part of which are Christians and Jews and it would be far more populous were it not for the Plague which like a Tertian Ague here reigneth every third year and sometimes oftner This City is adorned with many magnificent Buildings both publick and private as also with curious Statues and other such like Ornaments which were brought out of Rome and other parts There is no City in the World makes so stately a shew if beheld from the Sea or adjoyning Mountains as this doth whose lofty and beautiful Cypress Trees are so intermixed with the Buildings that it seemeth to represent a City in a Wood whose seven aspiring Heads for on so many Hills it is seated are most of them crowned with magnificent Mosques all of white Marble in form round and coupled above being finished at the top with guilded Spires some having two some four and some six adjoyning Turrets of a great height and very slender so that there is no City in the World hath a more promising Object and being entred so much deceiveth the expectation having many vacant places several rows of Buildings consisting only of Shops the Houses not fair lofty nor uniform the Streets exceeding narrow and ill contrived yet here are many stately Houses where the Great persons reside also many Canns for Merchants and abundance of Mosques amongst which that of Sancta Sophia is the chief once a Christian Temple To every one of the principal Mosques doth belong publick Bagâ—io's Hospitals with Lodgings Santons and Ecclesiastical Persons which are endowed with competent Revenues the inferiour Mosques for the most part are built square many of them Pent-houses with oper Galleries where on extraordinary times they pray The number of Mosques of all sorts including Scutara Para Galata and the Buildings that border the Bosphorus are said to be about 8000. This Temple of St. Sophia is almost every Friday which is their Sabbath visited by the Grand Signior by reason of its being so near his Seraglia which is divided from the rest of the City by a lofty Wall containing in circuit about three miles wherein are stately Groves of Cypresses intermixed with delightful Gardens artificial Fountains variety of Fruits and curious Plains The Buildings are low but rich and stately with several fair Courts one within another and to the South-side doth joyn the Grand Signiors Palace in which are also several large Courts and stately Structures On the left hand of one of the Courts the Divano is kept where the Bassa's of the Port administer Justice out of the second Court is a passage into a third into which Christians are not permitted entrance but upon great favour on the North-side stands the Grand Signiors Cabinet in form of a stately Summer-house having a private passage from his Seraglio and from this place he takes Barge to delight himself on the Water Not far from the Palace is a spacious place encompassed with Houses called the Hippodrom by the Ancients and by the Turks Almidan where every Friday the Spachies of the Court play at Giocho di Canni that is they are mounted on Horses and ride after one another throwing Darts at each other which they endeavour to avoid by their hasty turning The Black Sea is distant from Constantinople about 15 miles it is much troubled with
for Woolen-Cloth In this City there hath been observed to be 777 Brewers 40 Bakers one Lawyer and one Physitian the reason of this great disproportion as one wittily observed was that a Cup of Nimis is the best Vomiting potion and their Controversies were sooner composed over a Pot of Drink than by order of Law 3. Stoad commodiously seated for Traffick on the Elve about five miles distance from Hambourg once a place of a better Trade than now it is These Cities are called Free from their great Prerogatives in coyning Money and ruling by their own Laws and Imperial as knowing no Lord or Protector but the Emperour to whom they pay two Thirds of such Contributions as are assessed in the Assemblies Germany is a spacious Country and very populous the People are of a strong Constitution and good Complexion are very ingenious and stout much given to drink but of a generous disposition the Poorer sort great Pains-takers and the Nobles which are many for the Title of the Father descends to all their Children are either good Scholars or stout Souldiers so that a Son of a Duke is a Duke a thing which the Italians hold so vain and foolish that in derision they say That the Dukes and Earls of Germany the Dons of Spain the Nobility of Hungaria the Bishops of Italy the Lairds of Scotland the Monsieurs of France and the younger Brethren of England make a poor Company There are so many inferiour yet free Princes in this Country that in a days Journey a Traveller may meet with many Laws and as many sorts of Coin every Prince making use of his own Laws and Coins whose Laws the Emperours are sworn to keep which made one say that the Emperour is King of Kings the King of Spain King of Men and the King of France King of Asses as bearing his heavy Taxes The fertility and Commoditles of Germany The Country is generally fertil and temperate being scituate under the Temperate Zone Here are many Mines of Silver and other Inferiour Mettals it hath store of Corn and Wine which they transport to forreign Countries as likewise Linnen Laces Woollen and divers Manufactures also Quicksilver Alom Arms of all sorts and other Iron-works and its Ponds Lakes and Rivers are well stored with Fish It s chief Rivers The chief Rivers of Germany are the Rhine the Weser the Elbe and the Oder for the Danube having but a small course in this Country shall be elsewhere spoken of The Commodities and Trade of Belgium That part which we call BELGIVM or the Low Countries is of a large extent seated in the North Temperate Zone under the 8 and 9th Climates the longest day being 17 hours the Air by reason of the industry of the Inhabitants in draining the Marishes and turning the standing-standing-Waters into running-Streams is now very healthful as being purged from those gross Vapours which did thence arise the Country lieth exceeding low and therefore subject to Inundations The Commodities that these Countries yield are Linnens Yarn Thread Sayes Silks Velvets Tapestries Pictures Prints Blades Sope Butter Cheese Fish Pots Bottles Ropes Cables Armour several Manufactures c. besides the Commodities of India Persia China Turkey and other parts which are here had in great plenty by reason of the vast Trade they drive in all parts The Estates of the Crown of POLAND are POLAND under the name of which is comprized The Kingdom of POLAND as it is divided into the Higher or Little POLAND where are the Palatinates of Cracou with its Castlewicks of Cracou Vounicz Sandecz Biecz Sandomirie with its Castlewicks of Sandomitz Vislicz Radom Zawichost Zaroâ—w Malogocz Czeschow Lublin with its Castle Lublin Lower or Great POLAND where are the Palatinates of Posna where are the Castlewicks of Posna Meseritz Ragozno Sremck Brzesti Crimn Sandock Kalisch with its Castlewicks of Kalisch Kamin Gnesna Landa Nackel Biechow Sirad with its Castlewicks of Sirad Wielâ—n Rozpirz Lencini with its Castlewicks of Lencici Bressini Inowlocz Dobrzin with its Castlewicks of Dobizin Rippin Stouck Ploczk with its Castlewicks of Ploczk Rasuntz Sceps Rava with its Castlewicks of Rava Sochaczow Gostiny Cowal Divers Dutchies with their Castlewicks to wit RUSSIA NOIRE which is esteemed in the Higher Poland where are the Palatinates of Leowenborg or Leopolis with its Castlewicks of Leowenborg Halicz Drzemist Zamoscie Belz with its Castlewicks of Beln Chelm CUJAVIA which is esteemed in the Lower Poland where are the Palatinates of Brzesti with its Castlewicks of Brzesti Krusnick Cowal Uladislau with its Castlewicks of Uladislau Bidgost MAZOVIA also esteemed in the Lower Poland where are the Palatinates of Czersk with its Castlewicks of Warzaw Liw Czersk Wissegrod Zakrotzim Ciechanow Wilna PRUSSIA or PRUSSE as it is divided in POLAQUIE PRUSSIA ROYALE where are the Palatinates of Dantzick with its Castlewicks of Dantzick Elbing with its Castlewicks of Elbing Marienburg with its Castlewicks of Marienburg Culm with its Castlewicks of Culm PRUSSIA DUCALE with its Palatinate and Castlewick of Koningsberg with its Palatinate of Bielsk with its Castlewick of Bielsk And divers other Estates Dutchies c. united or subject to the Crown of POLAND viz. Dutchy of LITHUANIA under the name of which are comprised LITHUANIA where are the Palatinates of Wilna with its Castlewicks of Wilna Osmiana Wilkomirs Braslaw with its Castlewicks Braslaw Misdzial Troki with its Castlewicks Troki Kowno Grodno Lida Minsk with its Castlewicks of Minsk Borissow Robaczow Rzeczica Mary Minsk with its Castlewicks of Mscislnw Mohilow Orssa Novogrodeck with its Castlewicks of Novogrodeck Slonim Woskowiska Polosczk with its Castlew of Polosczk Vitepsk with its Castlew of Vitepsk POLESIE where is Breâ—siici with its Castlew of Bressici SAMOGITIE with its Palatinate and Castlewick of Rosienie Dutchy of VOLHYNIE as it is divided in the Higher VOLHYNIE with its Palarinate of Lusuc with its Castlewicks of Lusuc Wolodomiers Krzemienec Lower VOLHYNIE with its Palatinate of Kiovia with its Castlewicks of Kiovia Owrucze Zitomirz PODOLIE with its Palat. of the Higher PODOLIE as Kamieniec with its Castlew of Kamieniec Lower PODOLIE as Braclaw with its Castlewick of Braclaw Part of MOSCOVIA where are The Dutchies of Smolensko with its Castlew of Smolensko Novogrodeck with its Cast of Novogrodeck POLAND Poland and its parts THE Estates of the Crown of Poland ought to be considered in two sorts the one called the Estates of POLAND and the other of LITHVANIA these two having heretofore had their Kings and Dukes apart and not having been united till within about 270 years The Estates of Poland shall be Poland which we will divide into the Higher and Lower or Lesser and Greater and into the Dutchies of Russia Noire Cajavia Mazovia and Prussia The Estates of Lithuania may be divided into Lithuania Volhinia Podolia c. all Dutchies but Lithuania much the greater wherefore he who possesseth them is entituled the Great Duke of Lithuania It s extent All these Estates of Poland and Lithuania taken
together extend from about the 48th degree of Latitude unto the 57th which are about 225 French Leagues and from the 38th of Longitude unto the 61 and have near as much Continent again as France They are bounded on the East for the most part by Moscovy Bounds and part of the Petit Tartars on the South the Mountains oâ— Caprack and the River Neister divide them from Hungaria Transilvania and Moldavia on the West by Germany and toucht in part on the Balticâ— Sea and on the North they are bounded part by Livonia and Moscovy Ancient Inhabitants The Ancient name of Poland was Sauromatia from its Inhabitants the Sauromatae afterwards by Lechius the first Duke hereof in Anno 550 it was called Poland which signifies a plain Country as generally it is It was made a Kingdom by the Emperour Otho the Third Anno 1000 Boleslaus being Duke and hath ever had its Dukes and Kings elected by the States who by reason of their vicinity to the Turks generally chuse a Warriour Fertility Commodities c. The Country is plain well clothed with Firs and other Timber-Trees the Air is so cold that they have neither Wine nor Grapes instead of which having store of Barly they make use of the Old drink of England viz. Ale The Country is well furnished with Grains and Fruits but they are but lean their chief Commodities are rich Furs Horses Hony Wax Bow-staves Buff-hides Ambergreese Flax Linnen-cloth Masts Cordage Boards Wainscot Timber Rozin Tar and Pith of both kinds Match Iron Stock-fish Salt digged out of the Earth Pot-ashes Rye in great plenty for which it hath made Dantzick famous It is well furnished with Flesh Fowl and Fish and to waâ—ds the Carpatian Mountains of Hungaria are found Mines of Gold and Silver as also Iron and Brimstone To the R t Worship Full Sr Robert Clayton of the Citty of London Kt and Alderman and Lord Mayr thee of Anno 1680 This Mapp is D D by R B P of the ESTATES of the CROWNE of POLAND where are the KINGDOM of POLAND withits Palatinates the DUTCHES of RUSSIA-NOIRE CUJAVIA MOZOVIA PRUSSIA â—IA VOLHYNIA PODOLIA c Designed by Monsieur Sanson Geographer to the French King The Revenue of the King The Revenue of the King is not great for so large a Country and that which is he receiveth from them quarterly the Kingdom being divided into four Parts every one of which keepeth the King and Court a quarter which Revenue is not certain but more or less according to his occasions by War Marriage of his Daughters or the like Poland with its parts and chief places The Kingdom is divided throughout into Palatinates and Castlewicks Poland taken particularly is divided into the Higher and Lower in the Higher are the Palatinates of Cracou Sandomirz and Lublin Places of most note in these parts are 1. Cracou or Cracovia seated in a Plain and on the Banks of the Vistula dignified with the residence of the King It is in form round the Houses fair and lofty and built of Freestone in the midst of the City is a large Quadrangle Market-house where is seated the Cathedral Church and the Senate-house for the Citizens about which are several Shops for Merchants The City is encompassed with two strong Stone Walls and a dry Ditch on the East-side of the City is the Kings Castle being fair well built and pleasantly seated on a Hill as also the Kings and Queens Lodgings on the West is a Chappel where the Kings are interr'd and on the North-side Lodgings for Entertainment and Feasting the South-side being without Buildings but as to matters of Trade this City is of small account Also Sandomirz and Lublin both chief Cities of their Palatinates are in the higher Polonia or Poland Lower Poland In the Lower Poland are the Palatinates of Posna Kalisch Sirad Lencinâ— Dobrzin Ploczk and Rava whose chief Cities or places bear the same name and are the residence of their Palatines Besides which there are several other Towns of good note which are taken notice of in the Geographical Table of the Kingdom and in chief Posna and Gnesna dignified with the See of an Archbishop who during the Interregnum of the King holdeth the Supream Authority in the Kingdom and summoneth the Diets To Poland doth also belong the Dutchies of Russia Noire Cujavia Mazovia Prussia and Polaquie Russia Noire RVSSIA NOIRE hath for its chief places Loewenberg and Belz both chief of their Palatinates OVJAVIA hath for its principal places Brzesti and Vladislau Cujavia both chief of their Castelwicks Mazovia with its places MAZOVIA hath only one Palatinate viz. Czersk under which is comprised several Cities and Castlewicks the chief of which is Warzaw one of the fairest in the Kingdom it oft-times being the residence of the Kings of Poland a place noted for its excellent Metheglin here made PRVSSIA is considered in two parts Prussia which are called Royale and Ducale Prussia Royale is immediately subject to the Crown of Poland and hath its Palatinates in the Cities of 1. Dantzick seated on the Vistula at its influx into the Baltick Sea and at the foot of a great Mountain which hangs over it it is the fairest best and of the greatest Trade of any in Prussia Through this City runs a River very commodious to the Inhabitants whereon are many Mills for the grinding of Corn which is here found in great plenty as also a Water-Mill for the conveyance of water in Pipes to their Houses and by reason of its great Trade for Corn with England and other parts they have a great many Granaries or Store-houses for the same which is hither brought them from Poland 2. Elbin though but small yet a fair City and indifferently well frequented by the English Merchants 3. Marienburg the Seat of the Masters of the Dutch Knights 4. Culne and 5. Thorn which though it hath no Palatinate is esteemed by many next to Dantzick Prussia Ducale belongs to the Marquess of Brandenbourg who holds it from the Crown of Poland It hath only one Palatinate at Koningsberg seated on an Inlet of the Baltick Sea and washed with the River Pegel it is a fair City a famous Mart and a good University and before its Coast is gathered great quantity of Ambergriece This Ambergriece is the juyce of a Stone growing like Coral on a Rock in the North-Sea continually covered with Water and in the Months of September and December by the violence of the Sea is rent from the Rocks and cast into the Havens of the Neighbouring Countries POLAQVIE is a small Province between the Estates of Poland and Lithuania Polaquie and seems to have belonged to Mozavia Bielsk is the Seat of its Palatinate And hitherto we have treated of the Estates of Poland almost all on the Vistula or the Rivers that fall into it on which are seated the three fairest Cities of these Quarters viz. Cracow towards its Spring
whole Estate of the great Duke of Moscovy is of a larger extent thâ—â— any other in Europe stretching it self 5 or 600 Leagues in length and breadâ—â— reaching from the 48th degree of Latitude unto the 70th or 72 and from the 50th of Longitude unto the 100th and sometimes to the 110th Moscovy hath its Estates bounded on the East by Tartary and beyond the Rivers Volga and Oby on the South by the Caspian or Euxine Seas on the North by the Septentrional or frozen Ocean and on the West by Norway the Estates of Sweden and Poland â—ts Commodities The Commodities that this Empire yieldeth are rich Furrs of divers sorts Pot-ashes Hemp Flax Honey Wax Cables Yarn and other Cordage Feathers ' Linnen Cloth both course and fine Train-oyle Rozin Pitch Caviare Tallow Iron Salt Sea-horse Teeth Astracan-hides Tann'd-hides Rawâ—hides dried-Fish great increase of Grains with many other good Commoâ—dities here are great store of Cattle Elkes Stags Bears Wolves Venison Tigres Linxes Hares c. great plenty of Fowl and Fish common with us in England and the Earth affordeth them plenty of Fruits Roots and Herbs The Air is exceeding sharp and piercing in the Winter and subject to exâ—cessive great Frosts but what with their warm clothing with Furrs and their Stoves in their Houses they endure it well enough and as their Winteâ— is thus cold their Summer is as hot and troublesome the Sun being as it werâ— above their Horizon To the R. t honble S. r Edu Dering of Surrenden Dering in Kent Bart one of the Lords Comissioner of his Ma y Treasury This Mapp is most humbly Dedicated by Richard Brome 〈◊〉 â—APP OF THE ESTATES OF THE GREAT DUKE OF RUSSIA BLANCH OR MOSCOVIA Designed by Mouncr. â—â—â—â—â—n Geographer to the French King This Country according to some is called the Mother of Rivers Rivers amongst which the Volga the Don or Tana and the Dovine or Dwine are the most famous and especially the Volga which is the greatest and noblest in all Europe both for its course and the force of its Water running 7 or 800 Leagues and receives abundance of other Rivers Moscovy ill inhabited Moscovy for the most part is ill Inhabited and especially towards the North and East these quarters being cold full of Forests and some of their People Idolaters that which is towards Sweden and Poland is more frequented more civiliz'd and its Cities and Towns better built that which lieth towards the South and in all likelyhood should be the best is partly Mahometan and often infected by the Petit Tartars But a word or two of its People about Mosco which by reason of its being the residence of the Great Duke are supposed to be the most civiliz'd and ingenious It s People The People are naturally ingenious enough yet they addict themselves neither to Arts or Sciences but chiefly to Traffick and Husbandry in which they are very subtle they are observed to be great Liars perfidious treacherous distrustful crafty revengeful quarrelsom proud much addicted to Women and strong Drink but Tobacco is forbidden amongst them Their Houses are but mean and as ill furnished contenting themselves to lie on Matts or Straw instead of Beds they are gross feeders yet have wherewithal to feed deliciously Their habit which they seldom or never change is much the same with the ancient Greeks wearing long Robes of Cloth Sattin Silk Their Habit. Cloth of Gold or Silver which is beset with Pearls according to the quality of the person by which together with their attendance they are known and under these Robes they wear close Goats and Drawers begirting themselves with Swashes on their feet they wear Buskins and on their heads Caps instead of Hats adorned with Pearl and precious Stones which in their Salutations they move not only bow their bodies They are for the most part fat and corpulent esteeming great Bellies and long and great Beards for a comliness the Women though indifferent handsom yet make use of Paint In the performance of their Nuptial Rites they use many Ceremonies which are largely treated of by Adam Olearius in his Book entituled the Ambassadours Travels into Moscovy and Persin whose description I shall make use of wherein he saith That young Men and Maids being debarr'd the Society of each other Maidens not being allowed the freedom of the Street or society with Men Their Ceremonies in Marriage it happens that no Marriages are made but by the consent of the Parents and the bargain being agreed on by them the Wedding-day is appointed the Night before which the young Man makes his never yet seen Bride a Present according to their Qualities He saith further that there are two Women appointed by them who are to take order for the making the Nuptial Bed c. which is made upon about 40 sheaves of Rye which are encompassed with a great many Barrels of Wheat and other Grains All things being made ready the Bridegroom late in the Evening goes to the Brides accompanied with his Friends and Relations together with the Priest who is to marry them riding before them and being received in are brought to a Table where three Dishes of Meat are brought but none eats thereof then after some Ceremonies the Bride is brought in richly clad in a sitting dress for that Solemnity by the said Women who places her by the Bridegroom and to prevent their seeing one another besides the Vaâ—l over the Brides face they are parted by a piece of crimson Tassety which is held by two Youths which done the said Woman ties up her Hair in two knots paints her puts a Crown neatly made and gilded on her head and habits her like a married Woman the other Woman chosen by them paints the Bridegroom and whilst this is doing the Women get up on Benches and sing several Songs then after several ridiculous Ceremonies they go to the Church and before the Priest gives them the Benediction he carries them to the Offering which consists of fryed Meats Fish and Pastry the Benediction is given by holding Images over their heads and the Priest taking the Bridegroom by the right hand and the Bride by the left and asks them three times if they will love one another as Man and Wife ought and whether it be by their consent to which both answer Yes then all the People joyn hands and dance whilst they and the Priest sing the 128 Psalm which ended he puts a Garland of Rue about their heads saying Increase and multiply and then consummating the Marriage saith Whom God hath joyned together let no man separate which being pronounced several Wax-Candles are lighted and the Priest is presented with a Glass of Claret and being pledg'd by the Married couple he throws down the Glass and he and the Bride tread it under their feet saying May they thus fall at our feet and be trodden to pieces who shall endeavour to sow discontent betwixt us Then after
Inlet thereof a very good traded Town and hath a considerable Market for all Provisions especially Fish on Thursdays St. Ivâ—â— St. Ivos or St. Ithes seated on an open Bay so called chiefly frequented by Fishermen for the taking of Pilchards and other Fish which are here plentifully caught It is a Town Corporate governed by a Major a Justice and 12 Aldermen sendeth Burgesses to Parliament and hath 2 Markets weekly viz. on Wednesdays and Saturdays It is observed that Men live here to a very great Age and are stronger hardy and addicted to wrestling pitching the Bar and other boysterous sports more than any other English men By Helford is a great Rock lying upon the ground the top whereof is hollow and filled with water which ebbs and flows as the Sea doth There is a very great Rock in this Shire called Mainamber which rests upon other smaller Rocks which with the push of a finger may be moved but cannot be moved out of its place by all the Art men can use Country of Cumberland described CVMBERLAND a County far engaged Northwards is very Mountainous and much inclined to sterility yet not without many fertil Valleys both for Tillage and Pasturnge It hath an Air very sharp and would be more were it not for the high Hills that break off the Northern and Western Storms In the howels of the Earth are rich Mines of Copper in great plenty also those of Iron Lead Black-lead â—oal and some of Silver and the Sea and large Lakes and Meers plentifully furnish the Inhabitants with Fish and Fowl And besides these Commodities this County produceth several Manufactures amongst which heretofore Fustians and now Linnen-cloth and course Broad-cloths in great plenty The Mountains of most note are Black-koum Hard-knot Wrey-nose Skiddow and Crossfell c. It is well watered with Rivers and hath many Lakes and Meers This Shire of all others in England sheweth the most Roman Antiquities for being in the utmost limits of their possessions it was always secured by their Garrisons and defended by that admirable Wall called the Picts Wall which ran from Sea to Sea about 100 miles and was 8 foot broad and 12 foot high and having at every 1000 paces a Watch-Tower erected in which Souldiers were kept and on this Wall grows the Vulnerary Plant. And being thus in the confines of Scotland it was exceedingly strengthned with Castles having about 25 publick ones besides the Houses of the Nobility and Gentry which were generally built Castle-wise It is severed into 5 Waâ—ds in which are 58 Parish Churches besides divers Chappels of Ease and hath 15 Market Towns Carlisle a City of great antiquity Carlisle and no less pleasantly than commodiously seated at the influx or meeting of several Rivers viz. the Eden Cauda and Petterill which on all parts except the South encompass it and for its further defence it is fortified with a strong and large Castle and Cittadel and fenced about with a strong Wall first built by Egfrid King of Northumberland which was defaced by the Danes and again rebuilt by King Rufus Its Houses are fair and well built is beautified with a Cathedral Church of curious workmanship it enjoyeth several Immunities sendeth Burgesses to Parliament is governed by a Major 12 Aldermen 2 Bailiffs and other sub-Officers It is a place well inhabited and traded unto chiefly for Fustians and its Market which is on Saturdays is very considerable for Corn Wool Provisions and several Country Commodities Cockermouth seated between the Derwent and the Coker Cockermouth which almost encompass it over which are two fair Stone-Bridges and between two Hills upon one of which standeth the Church a fair building and upon the other a spacious and stately Castle It is a well inhabited Borough Town graced with fair Buildings enjoyeth a good Trade especially for course Broad-clothâ— here made hath the election of Parliament men and its Market which is on Mondays is esteemed the best in the County for Corn next to Perith. Here is a Custom at their Fairs holden at Whitsontide and Martlemass for the hiring of Servants to which end all such that want Servants or Services do hither come the like is observed at Perith and most of the Market-Towns in the County Whithaven seated on a Creek of the Sea Whithaven indifferent commodious for Shipping which makes it to be well inhabited and frequented by Tradesmen especially by Fishermen and those that are related to Sea-Affairs who drive a good Trade to Ireland Scotland Chester Bristol and other parts having a Custom-house and several Vessels belonging to the Town whose chief Trade is for Salt and Coals here plentifully digged up It s Market is kept Thursdays Kavenglass a well built Maritim Town couched betwixt the Rivers Irt Ravenglass Esk and Mite with which the Sea doth encompass 3 parts of it and is a good road for Shipping which makes it to be a place of some Trade and hath a Market on Saturdays Keswick seated in a Valley Keswick hemmed in with Hills and the Mountains called Derwent Fells wherein are good Copper-Mines and not far from the Town is dug up Black-Lead or Wadd in great plenty The Town was formerly of greater account than now it is when the Mineral-men had here their Smelting-houses being at present not very considerable It hath a Market on Saturdays chiefly for Meal Flesh Butter and Cheese Perith seated on a Hill called Perith Fell Perith. and near the Rivers Eimont and Lowther a large well built and inhabited Town esteemed the second in the County although neither a Borough nor Town Corporate it is adorned with a fair Church and a large Market-place which every Tuesday is very much resorted unto being considerable for Corn living Cattle divers Commodities and all sorts of Provisions in great plenty Derbyshire described DERBYSHIRE a Midland County but inclined towards the North which makes it to be of a sharp Air especially upon the Peak Mountains The Soil is generally fertil chiefly the South and East parts which for the most part are enclosed and improved yielding good Corn and Grass and hath also store of Coal and Iron-stone The North and West parts are very hilly and stony and not so fertil except in Lead-Oar in which it much abounds yet not without some rich Valleys and on the Hills are bred good though not large Sheep in great abundance For Fuel it is not beholding to Wood having such great plenty of Coal that it supplies the defects of divers neighbouring Counties It is well watered with Rivers viz. the Trent Derwent Dove and Wye which are the chief and are passed over by about 21 Stone-bridges some of which are of considerable note as Burton over the Trent sustained by 35 large Stone-Arches Swarkeston-bridge over the fame River reputed near a mile long but much of it is rather a Causway than a Bridge Monks-bridge over the Dove and St. Marys-bridge at Derby over the
Danes It is at present a place of a large extent numbring 12 Parish Churches besides St. Georges Chapel and for its abundance of Streets which are clean and neatly ordered its populousness and good trade that its Inhabitants drive both by Sea and Land it may be ranged in the number of Cities It is a Town Corporate well Priviledged sends Burgesses to Parliament and is governed by 2 Bailiffs chosen out of 12 Port-men and 24 Common Council also a Recorder Town Clerk and other sub-Officers It is well served with Provisions for besides its Shambles here are weekly 3 Markets viz. on VVednesdays and Fridays for Fish and Butter and on Saturdays for Provisions of all sorts in great plenty And this Town gave birth to Cardinal Wolsey who here began a magnificent Colledge which still bears his name Bury or St. Edmonds-Bury so called from King Edmond the Martyr Bury here interr'd who was shot to death at Hoxon by the Danes for not renouncing the Christian Faith This Town is very pleasantly seated and in an Air so healthful that makes it to be much inhabited and frequented by Gentry It is a Town Corporate governed by an Alderman for its chief Magistrate besides a Recorder and other sub-Officers and sends its Representatives to Parliament It is of a large extent yet consisteth but of two Parish Churches hath well built Houses its Market-hill Fair-sted and Corn-Cross are spacious and handsom but its Streets are ill paved chiefly occasioned by the heavy Carriages which come to its Markets on VVednesdays which are much resorted unto being the chief Market Town in the County for Grain and is also well furnished with fresh Fish Pigeons wild Fowl and most sorts of Provisions This Town was famous for its Abby which for fairness and Prerogatives exceeded all others in England Here is kept the Quarter Sessions for the liberty of St. Edmond and in the Abby-yard stands the Shire-house where the Assizes are ordinarily held for the County New-Market composed of a well built Street Newmarket a great thorough-fare Town full of Inns it consists of two Parish Churches the one in this County and the other in Cambridgeshire but its Market-place and Street is wholly in Suffolk It s Market is on Tuesdays which is well frequented and served with Fish wild Fowl and other Provisions and by reason of the scituation of the Town near the spacious Heath which bears its name so commodious for Horse-races and in a part of the Country so fit for Field-sports it is much resorted unto by his Majesty where he hath his Palace and the Nobility and Gentry Mildenhall Mildenhall seated on a branch of the Owse a large Market Town graced with a fair Church with a tall Steeple and very populous having distant Streets called Rows as Beck-row How-row c. to the Fenward belonging to it as big as some little Towns It hath a well frequented Market especially for Fish and wild Fowl on Fridays Sudbury Sudbury seated on the Stower over which it hath a fair Bridge leading into Essex an ancient good large Town containing 3 Parish Churches and by reason of its trade of Clothing is well frequented It is a Borough Town electing Parliament men and is governed by a Major 7 Aldermen 24 Burgesses and other sub-Officers It s Market which is on Saturdays is well resorted unto Hadleigh Hadleigh a large Town Corporate governed by a Major Aldermen Council c. hath the accommodation of two Markets weekly viz. on Mondays very considerable for all Provisions especially Meat and a smaller on Saturdays It is graced with a sumptuous Church was a place of great Trade in former times for Clothings but at present hath lost much of its trade for Turky-ware as also for Bays and Says Stow-Market Stow-Market seated in the center of the County and between the branches of the Gypp or Orwell a large and beautiful Town graced with a spacious Church on whose Steeple is a lofty Pinacle not easie to be parallel'd It hath a Market on Thursdays which is well served with Provisions and Retail-wares and the grand Trade of the Town is now in Tammeys and other Norwich-Stuffs being the only Town in the County considerable for that employment Woodbridge Woodbridge a large Town watered with several fresh Springs having a pleasant prospect down the Channel chiefly at high-High-water being about 6 miles from the Main a Town of good Traffick by Sea and Land it is well enough built excepting the lowness of the oldest Houses and part of the Streets are well paved it hath a fair Church in which are several Monuments It s Market which is on Wednesdays is of considerable resort and well traded unto for its Commodities viz. Pouldavis Sack-cloth Plank Butter Cheese but chiefly for its Hemp. As to its Sea-trade they have several Vessels both great and small which are imployed by them and have here 4 or 5 Docks for the building of Ships Aldborough Aldborough a Coast Town pleasantly seated in a Dale a large long and plain built Town composed of two or three Streets of low Houses all in a row At a small distance from this Town is Slaughden where they have a commodious Key with Ware-houses or Fish-houses the only employment of the Town being for Fish having great conveniences for drying their North-Sea Fish in which Fishing-trade with a little in the Coal-trade they employ several Vessels but not so many as formerly It is a Town Corporate governed by two Bailiffs 10 Capital Burgesses with 24 Inferiour enjoyeth ancient Priviledges and sends its Representatives to Parliament For their defence Sea-wards they have about 20 great Guns planted It s Market is on Saturdays which is but small Dunwich Dunwich an ancient Town Corporate sending Burgesses to Parliament and is governed by two Bailiffs and other sub-Officers and hath a small Market on Saturdays It is a Town of great antiquity being in the year 640 made an Episcopal See by Felix the Burgundian in the reign of William the Conquerour it contained 236 Burgesses had a Mint and its Inhabitants were rich but through the removal of its Episcopal See and the encroachment of the Sea which hath swallowed up a great part of it and decay of its Shipping and Trade it is rather the Remains of a Town than one Bungay Bungay sufficiently watered by the Waveney which severeth it from Norfolk It is a good large Town containing two Parish Churches one of which is fair and between both in the midst of the Town is to be seen the Ruins of a famous Nunnery It s Market is on Thursdays which is great and well resorted unto especially by those of Norfolk Beckley seated also on the Waveney a very large Town Beckley having a considerable much frequented and well served Market on Saturdays and hath a Passage-trade by Water to Yarmouth the Town is but plain built having several Thatched Houses but graced with a fair
hath a stately Market-house enjoyeth a good Trade chiefly for Mault and is the place where the Assizes and general Sessions for the County are kept It is governed by a Major 12 Brethren 24 Burgesses a Recorder with sub-Officers Amongst its Immunities electeth Parliament men and its Market which is on Saturdays is very great for Corn and Provisions Near unto this Town is Guy-Cliff most pleasantly seated amongst Groves and fresh Streams where Guy of Warwick is said to have built a Chapel and after he had left off his exploits here led an Hermetical life and was here interr'd Stratford Stratford seated on the Avon over which it hath a fair Stone-bridge sustained by 14 Arches It is a good large Town having for Divine worship two Churches is well inhabited enjoyeth a considerable Trade for Mault here made and hath a Market on Thursdays which is very well served with Corn and Provisions Bromicham Bromicham seated very dry on the side of a Hill it is a large and well built Town very populous much resorted unto and enjoyeth a very great trade for Iron and Steel Wares and Tools here made also for Saddles and Bridles which find good vent at London Ireland and other parts and its Market is on Thursdays which is very considerable for living Cattle Corn Mault and Provisions besides the Manufactures of the Town At Newenham-Regis is a Spring whose Water if drunk with Salt loosneth and if with Sugar bindeth the Body and is said to be very Sovereign against Vlcers Imposthumes and the Gout County of Westmoreland described The County of WESTMORELAND so called as lying amongst Moors and high Hills or Fells generally of a barren Soil and very Mountainous but not without many fruitful Valleys both for Tillage and Pasturage and is well watered with fresh Streams Here are several Meers and Lakes as Winder-Meer which is the greatest standing water in England Rydale-water Ester-water Gresmere-water Kent-Meer Vlles-water Brother-water Hawse-water and others This County is divided or severed into two Baronies viz. Kendale Barony which is divided into the Wards of Kendale and Lonsdale and the other Barony called the Barony of Westmoreland is divided into East-Ward and West-Ward and of these in order Kirby-Lonsdale Kirby-Lonsdale or the Church-Town in Lonsdale seated on the Lon over which it hath a large Stone-bridge and in a rich Vale. It is a large and well built Town beautified with a fair Church a well inhabited and frequented Town both to Church and Market esteemed the greatest in the County next to Kendale and its Market on Thursdays is well served with Provisions and traded unto for Cloth Kendale Kendale or Kirby-Kendale a very fair large well-built inhabited and frequented Borough and Market Town which for good Buildings largeness neatness and good Manufactures is the chief in the County It is a place of a considerable Trade the people much addicting themselves to Traffick not only in their old Manufacture of Cotton and course Woollen Cloth but of late in Druggets Serges Hats Worsted-Stockings c. to the much enriching the Town and adjacent parts It is most pleasantly seated in a Valley so called amongst Hills and on the River Can or Kent over which it hath two fair Stone-bridges besides one of Wood which leadeth to the Castle now ruinoâ—â— The Town is built in form of a Cross and is beautified with a fair and large Church sustained by five rows of Pillars with several Apartments near unto which is a Free-School well endowed and to this Church belongeth 12 Chapels of Ease As to the Government of this Town it is committed to the care of a Major 12 Aldermen 20 Common Council-men a Recorder Town Clerk and two Attorneys who attend their Sessions and Courts of Record Here are belonging to this Town 7 Companies viz. Mercers Shear-men Cordwainers Tanners Glovers Taylors and Pewterers each having their Hall or place of meeting and for the accommodation of its Inhabitants hath a very great Market for Corn living Cattle and Provisions on Saturdays Apleby Apleby of note for its scituation and antiquity being for the most part encircled with the River Eden but so slenderly peopled with idle Inhabitants and the Buildings so mean although of late much amended that were it not for the Assizes and Sessions here held it would be little better than a Village It is a very ancient Town Corporate governed by a Major and 12 Aldermen with sub-Officers enjoys large Immunities sends Burgesses to Parliament and is discharged from paying Toll in all places except London and York Here is an Hospital or Alms-house erected and liberally endowed by the Lady Clifford for the relief of 13 decaied Widows who are called the Mother and her 12 Sisters The Market is here kept on Saturdays which is well served with Corn and Provisions Kirby-Stevens Kirby-Stephens beautified with a fair Church seated near the Hills towards Yorkshire It is a good and well known Town which of late is much improved by the trade of making Stockings and hath a good Market on Fridays At Stainmore a great Hill is a Cross said to be erected upon a Peace concluded between William the Conquerour and Malcolme King of the Scots and that by the said Place each Kingdom should know their limits and on this Stone-Cross which is called Ree-Cross that is the Cross of Kings was engraven the Arms of the Kings on the South-side those of England Ree-Cross and on the North those of Scotland County of Wilts WILT-SHIRE an Inland County no less fertil than delightful It s Northern parts hath delectable Hills well clothed with Woods and watered with fresh Streams amongst which is the Isis which soon becometh the chief of the Kingdom It s Southern parts are more even and exceeding fertil in Corn and Grass feeding great flocks of Sheep and are also well watered with the Avon Willy and Alder and the midst of the County is plain and level bearing the name of Salisbury-Plain which is a large tract of ground which feedeth good flocks of Sheep In the midst of this County is a Dike called Wansdike which runneth many miles in length and is a place of some wonder being said to be made for the dividing the Kingdom of the Mercians from that of the West-Saxons this being the place where they fought for the enlargement of their Dominions And here it was that Ina the West-Saxon joyned Battle with Geolred the Mercian whence both of them quitted the Field with equal loss This County is divided into 29 Hundreds in which are seated 304 Parish Churches and hath for the accommodation of the Inhabitants 20 Market Towns Salisbury Salisbury a City of great antiquity being the Seat of the Romans It is commonly called New-Sarum as raised out of the Old which was seated on a great Eminence being designed for Strength and War yet honoured with an Episcopal See and a fair Cathedral This City of New Sarum is
The Gadeni who possessed the Counties of Lothien Merches and Teifidale or Tivedale 2. The Selgovae or Counties Liddisdale Eusedale Eskedale Annadale and Nidthesdale 3. The Novantes or Shires of Galloway Carrickt Kyle Cunningham and Arran 4. The Damnii or Counties of Cludesdale Striveling Lennox Menteith and Fife 5. The Caldedonii or Shires of Stratherne Argile Cantire Lorne Albany or Bruidalbin Perch Athol and Anguis 6. The Vermines or Counties of Mernis and Marr. 7. The Talgali or County of Buquhan 8. The Vacomagi or Counties of Murray and Loquabrea 9. The Cantae or Shires of Ross and Sutherland 10. The Catini or County of Cathanes And 11. the Cornubii or County of Strathnaverne Scotland divided into Sheriffdoms These parts are again according to their Civil Government divided into Sheriffdoms Stewarties and Bailiffwicks viz. the Counties or Sheriffdoms of Edenburgh Lynlythio Selkirk Roxburgh Peblis Berwick Lanarke Renfrew Dunfreis Wighton Aire Bute Argile Tarbet Dunbarton Perch Clackmannan Kinros Fife Kincardin Forfair Aberdene Bamff Elgin Forres Narne Innerness Cromartie Orknay and Shetland The Stewarties of Menieith Stewarties Kircudbrieht Stratherne and Annandale The Bailiwicks of Kile Bailywicks Carrickt and Cunningham It s further division Again Scotland according to the scituation of its Parts Provinces or Counties may be divided into two parts to wit Southwards and on this side the Tay which made the ancient Kingdom of the Picts so called for that they painted their Bodies like the ancient Britains from whom they are said to descend which is the more confirmed for that the Northern Britains converted to the Faith by St. Colombe were called Britain Picts And Eastwards Northwards and beyond the Tay which made the ancient Kingdom of the Scots besides abundance of Isles dispersed in its Northern and Western Seas the chief of which shall be treated of Its Counties The Counties comprehended in the South-part are Lothien Merche Teifidale or Tivedale Eskdale Euskdale Liddesdule Annadale Nydthesdale Galloway Carrickt Kyle Cunningham Cludesdale Lennox Striveling Menteith Fife Stratherne Argile Lorne Cantyre and Arran And these in the North part are Albany or Badalbin Paerch Athol Anguis Mernis Buquihan Marr Muray Loquabrea Ross Sutherland Strathnaverne and Cathanes And of these in order It s name and fertility The County of Lothien in former times by the Picts called Pictland shooteth it self forth from Merche unto the Sea a Country very Hilly and but thinly clothed with Wood but for the fertility of its Earth and the civility of its Inhabitants is deservedly esteemed the flower of all Scotland The chief places are It s chief places Edenburgh or Edenborow of old Castrum Alatum the Metropolis of the Kingdom It s scituation is high in a wholsom Air and rich Soil and by reason of its commodious Haven called Leth-Haven Edenburgh not above a mile distant it is a place of good Trade and well resorted unto by Shipping This City chiefly consisteth of one Street which runneth about a mile in length which receiveth divers petty Streets and Lanes so that its circuit may be about three miles which is strongly begirt with a Wall and at the West-end of the City on the top of a Rock is seated a fair and powerful Castle with many Towers which commands the City and is esteemed in a manner impregnable It belonged once to the English till in Anno 960. the Scots took it from them when oppressed by the Danish Tyranies It is well watered with clear Springs and Fountains is adorned with many fair Edifices as well publick as private the principal amongst which is the Kings Palace a fair Structure and its private Houses are generally fair lofty built of Free-stone and so well inhabited that several Families have their abodes under one Roof It is also dignified with the Courts of Judicature High Courts of Parliament and with an Vniversity And being the Scale of Trade for the Kingdom it will be necessary to give an account of their Coins Weights and Measures As to their Coins Their Coins Weights and Measure note that 13 ½ d. sterling makes a Mark Scotch 6 ¼ d. sterling a Scotch Noble and 20 d. sterling a Scotch Pound Their Weight used in Merchandizes is the Pound of 16 Ounces 100 of which make their Quintal or C which is found to make at London 108 l. Averdupois Their Measures for length is the Ell and is about 4 per Cent. greater than the English Ell. Their Liquid Measures are such as in England but of a double content a Pint being an English Quart and so answerable Their Dry Measures are also the same with those of England but also bigger Athelstanford so called from Athelstane a chief Commander of the English Athelstanford which was there slain with most of his Men about the year 815. Haddington seated in a wide and broad Plain a place of good account Haddington and which the English fortified with a deep and large Ditch and other Fortifications Dunbar scituate on the Sea-shoar once defended by a strong Castle Dunbar which was the Seat of the Earls of Merch a place which hath oft-times been taken by the English and as often retaken by the Scots which was the cause of its demolishment since which it is honoured with the Title of an Earldom North-Barwick seated on Edenbrough-Frith North-Barwick a place in former Ages famous for its House of Religious Virgins Not far from this place and near the Shoar Bass-Island lieth a small Isle called Bass-Island which feemeth to be a high craggy Rock and to be almost cut through by the undermining Sea-waves It hath a Fountain of Water and fresh Pastures and above all is remarkable for the exceeding great abundance of those Geese called Scouts and Soland-Geese which here frequent and breed which as I before noted is very profitable to the Inhabitants in these parts Lyth hath a most commodious Haven being the present Port to Edenburgh Lyth Abercorne seated on the Forth or Frith Abercorne in former time of note for its famous Monastery as at present for giving Title of an Earldom unto the Duke of Hamilton Linquo Linquo or Linlithquo said to be the ancient City of Lindum mentioned by Ptolomy a place once beautified with a House of the Kings and a fair Church County of Merch described MERCH a County so called as being a March it is wholly on the German Ocean was of great note for its Earls thereof and hath for its chief places Coldingham Cadingham called by Bede the City Coldana a place of great antiquity and note for its chaft Nuns for it is said that they together with Ebba their Prioress cut off their own Noses and Lips to render themselves deformed that the Danes might not deflour them but this so exasperated them that they not only burnt their Monastery but them therein Not far from Coldingham is Fast-Castle Fast-Castle and here the Sea
themselves in the Sea which serveth for its Eastern bounds It is interlaced with Hills and Forests and garnished with divers Forts and Castles It s chief places are Dundee Dundee seated on the Mouth of the River Tay a noted and well resorted Town for Trade by reason of its commodious Port for Ships Brechin Brechin scituate on the River South-Eske near its fall into the Sea and dignified by King David the First with an Episcopal See Nigh unto this Town is Red-head a place not unknown to Seamen Montross Montross of old Celurca of some account for being honoured with the Title of an Earldom Arbroth seated near the Sea a Town endowed with large Revenues Arbroth and by King William dedicated to a Religious use in honour of Thomas of Canterbury MERNIS Very fertil or MERNIA a small but plain and fertil Champaâ—â—â— Country which shooteth it self forth on the German Ocean It s chief placâ— are Dunnotyr Dunnotyr defended by a strong Castle seated on an high and inaccessibâ—â— Rock near the Sea Fordon Fordon seated also not far from the Sea BVQVIHAN washed with the Sea whose Waves did here cast up mighty Mass of Amber of an inestimable value it hath good Pastures most to feed Sheep whose Wool is excellent and its Rivers breed store of Salmon which are had at such easie rates that it is scarce worth the trouble of takiâ— them It s chief places are Rotheniay and Stanes Adjoyning to this Country lieth Boena and Bamff a small Sheriffdom alâ— Ajuza a little Territory of no great note MARR Marr. a long and narrow County somewhat inclined to Mountains bâ— well watered with the Done or Dee well stored with Salmons and other Fisâ— Its chief places are Aberdene Aberdene feated on the Sea-shoar at the Mouth of the Done dignified wiâ—â— an Episcopal See hath an Hospital also a Free-Grammar-School and is of no for taking of Salmons Kildrumy and Kildrumy MVRRAY Murray a pleasant and fertil County and the rather as watered wiâ—â— the Spey Findorne and the River and Lake Nessa which reacheth aboâ—â—â— 23 miles in length the water whereof is observed to be so warm that it nevâ— is sound to freez and this Lake is its Northern limits as the Spey is its Easterr all which empty themselves in the Sea where it formeth a Bay Its chiâ—â— places are Innernes Innernes Bean-Castle which Ptolomy thinks to be Banatia and here Anno 1460. a Marble-Vessel artificially engraven full of Roman Coins wâ— found Narden Narden or Narne an hereditary Sheriffdom and here stood within a bâ— land a strong Fortress of a great height which was kept by the Danes agaiâ— the Scots Innernes Innerlothea and Innerlothea in former times two eminent Fortifications Alâ— Elgin and Rothes Elgin Rothes places honoured with the Titles of Earldoms LOQVABREA a County well stored with Rivers and Lakes whicâ— empty themselves into the Sea it hath also good Pastures yet is it very Mouâ—â—tainous and well clothed with Wood and in the bowels of the Earth are Minâ— of Iron Iron-Mines It s chief place is Innerlothey Innerlothey once of good account being well frequented and traded unto but through the Pyracies and Wars of the Danes and Norwegians who razâ— it it hath now scarce any Remain left ROSS It s sertility a large Mountainous and Woody County which reacheth froâ— one Sea to the other hath great plenty of Stags Deer Wild-fowl and Fisâ— Its chief places are Cromarty Cromarty or the Haven of Safety as having so secure and capacious an Haâ—â— bour for Ships Ness-mouth Lovet Ness-mouth and Lovet In this County is the Territory of Ardmanoch Ardmanoch very Mountainous froâ— which the second Sons of the Kings of Scotland bear their Title SVTHERLAND regarding the Sea is well watered with Rivers bâ— sides the large Lough or Lake Shyn almost in the midst of the Country Weâ—â—â— wards of which are great store of Hills from which is dug excellent whiâ—â— Marble very good for curious Works It is a Country more fit for breediâ— of Cattle Dunrobin Dorne than for Tillage and hath for its chief places Dunrobin anâ— Dorno Very cold and barren STRATHNAVERNE a County far engaged Northwards whicâ— with Cathanes have the utmost Northern Coast of all Britain which must oâ— casion it to be of a very cold temperature it is very much inclined to sterility Strabubaster Tounge is Mountainous and but ill inhabited It s chief places are Strabubaster anâ— Tounge A MAPP of the Kingdome of IRELAND by Ric Blome by his Matys Com To the R t honble Ric Boyle Earle of Burlington â—â—ron Cliford of Lansborro in England Earle of Corke Viscount Dungaruen 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 Lord High Treasurer of Ireland c. And to the Rt. honble Roger Boyle Earle of Orrery Baron 〈◊〉 Broghill in Ireland and of his Ma js most honble privy Councell c This Mapp is humbly Dediâ—â—â—â—◠〈◊〉 the R t honble Sr. Rob Kilrâ—â—ray of Terry Bâ—â—on in England Kt. Bart 〈◊〉 of Londonderry Baron of Crallon 〈◊〉 in 〈◊〉 County in 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 c. his estate in Ireland being called Medinshill This Mapp 〈…〉 of 〈…〉 is DD by Ric Bloâ—◠〈◊〉 the R t honble Earle of Arran Viscâ—â—llough Baron Butler of Clougrenan 〈◊〉 of his Maie s most honble privy Councell 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 This Mapp of the Province of 〈◊〉 is humble DD by Ric Blom◠〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 honble 〈◊〉 Baron of 〈…〉 Mai s Army of 〈…〉 his 〈◊〉 most honble 〈…〉 This Mapp of the Provence of 〈…〉 Humbly DD by Ric Blome CATHANES a County washed with the Eastern Ocean where it formeth several Creeks and is well watered with Rivers which afford good store of Fish from which and by the grasing and feeding of Cattle the Inhabitants get the greatest part of their livelyhood It s chief places are Dornock a mean place yet the See of a Bishop Dornock Catnes a Maritim Town dignified with an Earldom Catnes Nigh unto this Town Southwards is Ness-head and Northwards Dunesbe-head both Maritim places and Girnego Girnego Three Mountains In this Tract are three Promontories to wit Vrdehead of old Berubium Dunsby or Dunscanby of old Virvedrum and Howbum of old Orcas There are several Isles dispersed about this Kingdom of Scotland as the Orcades Shetland and Hebrides which may properly be said to belong thereunto but as to the description thereof they shall be treated of amongst the other small Isles belonging in general to great Britain after we have treated of the Kingdom of Ireland IRELAND It s scituation IRELAND environed on all sides by the Sea and next to Great Britain may claim priority of all others in Europe It is a Country generally of a fertil Soil and plentifully stored with Cattle Fowl and Fish Fertility but is Mountainous Woody Waterish and full of unprofitable Loughs or
degree of Latitude which is 72 degrees of Latitude and makes about 1800 of our Leagues In this length and breadth we do not comprehend the Islands which belong to Asia which are as great as rich and possibly as numerous as all the rest of the Universe It s Scituation It s Scituation for the most part is between the Circular Tropick of Cancer and the Circle of the Artick Pole scarce extending it self beyond this but surpassing the other in divers of its Isles which it expands under the Equator so that almost all Asia is scituate in the Temperate Zone what it hath under the Torrid being either Peninsula's or Isles which the Waters and Sea may easily refresh Asia the richest of all the four Parts ASIA being the greatest the best and most temperate part of our Continent it must by consequence be the richest which not only appears in the goodness and excellencies of its Grains Vines Fruits Herbs c. but likewise in its great quantities of Gold Silver Precious Stones Spices Drugs and other Commodities and Rarities which it sends forth and communicates to other parts and particularly to Europe A Generall MAPP of ASIA Designed by MOUNSIE R SANSON Geographer to the FRENCH KING Rendred into English Ilustrated by RIC BLOME By his MAJtis Especial Command LONDON Printed for Ric Blome 1669 To The Rt. Noble Christopher Duke of Albemarle Earle of Torington Baron Monk of Potheridge Beauchamp and Teys Kt. of ye. most noble order of the Garter Lord Leivtenant of Devon-shire Ess ex Captaine of his Matys Guards of Horse one of the Gentlemen of his Bed-Chamber c one of the Lords of his most honble Privy Councell This Mapp is most humbly D.D. by R. B It s Name The Name of ASIA is derived diversly by sundry Authors but whether it took its name from a Virgin-Woman or a Philosopher whether from some City Country or Marish or from whatever it were most certain it is that that Name was first known to the Greeks on that Coast opposite to them towards the East afterwards it was given to that Region which extends to the Euphrates and which is called Asia Minor and was communicated to all the most Oriental Regions of our Continent Its Bounds Its Bounds are towards the North with the Northern frozen or Scythian Ocean to wit that which washes Tartary on the East and South with the Oriental or Indian Ocean the Parts of which are the Seas of China India and Arabia Towards the West Asia is separated from Africa by the Red-Sea from the Streight of Babel-Mandel unto the Isthmus of Suez and from Europe by the Archipelago by the Sea of Marmora and by the Black-Sea drawing a Line cross all these Seas and passing by the Streight of Galipoli or the Dardanelles by the Streight of Constantinople or Chanel of the Black-Sea by the Streight of Caffa or Vospero the Line continuing by the Sea of Zabaque and by the Rivers of Don or Tana of Volga and of Oby where they are joyned the nearest one to another It s division Asia may be divided into firm Land and Islands the firm Land comprehends the Kingdoms of Turkey in Asia Arahia Persia India China and Tartary We will follow this order and then end with the Isles TURKY in ASIA or that which the Grand Signior doth possess in whole or in part in ASIA wherein are several Regions Countries Isies c. may be considered as they lie Westernly and towards EUROPE as ANATOLIA or ASIA MINOR wherein are comprised several Provinces all which are at present by the Grand Signior included under four Beglerbeglies that is Lord Lieutenants to wit those of Anatolia particularly so called Smyrna Ephesus Pergama Troya Burfia Comana Chaloedoine Scutari Sinopi Castele Angouri Sardis Philadelphia Caramania Archalich Side Nigdia Tarsus Satalia Antiochia Tocat Amasia Tocat Trebisonde Caisaria Caraisar Marast Arsingan Sukas Aladuli Vardar Adana Maaraz Manbeg South-westernly as Divers ISLES as they lie in the ARCHIPELAGO MEDITERRANEAN and AEGEAN Seas the chief of which are Cyprus Nicosia Paphos Salamis Amathus Arsinoe Famagusta Rhodes Rhodes Metelin of old Lesbos Metelino Medina Samos Samo Tenedos Tenedos Scarpante Scarpante Lero Lero Negropont Colchis Coos Coos Lero Lero Pathmos Pathmos Scio or Chios Scio Icaria of old Icarus Nicaria Southernly and regarding Arabia and the Mediterranean Sea as SOURIA or SYRIA with its parts of Syria Propria Aleppo Aman Zeugma Antioch Samosat Hemz or Emsa Hierapolis Alexandretetts Phoenicia Tripoli Sayd or Sidon Tyre or Sor Damascus Acre Palestine formerly Judea Canaan or the Holy-Land Jerusalem Samaria Naplouse Gaza Joppa or Jussa Southernly and towards Arabia Deserta as ASSYRIA now DIARBECK with its parts of Chaldea or Babylonia now Yerack Bagded or Babylon Balsera Cousa Orchoe Sipparum Mesopotamia or the particular Diarbeck Orpha Caraemid Merdin Asanchif Carra Sumiscasack Virta Assyria now Arzerum Mosul of old Ninive Schiarazur Easternly and regarding Persia as TURCOMANIA with its parts of Turoomans Erzerum Cars Curdes Schildir Bitlis Georgiens Derbent Tiflis North-Easternly and towards the Caspian Sea as GEORGIA with its parts of Avogasia St. Sophia Mingrelie Phazza Savatopoli Gurgistaâ— Cori Bassachiuch Quiria Zitrach Stranu Chipicha Northernly and towards Moscovy as COMANIA Asof Maurolaco Serent â—VERSâ—â— SECVNDIS To the R t honble Heanage Earle of Winchelseâ— Vis t Maidstone Baron Fitz Herbert of Eastwell Lord of the Royall Mannour of Wye and Lord Leiutenant of Kent and 〈◊〉 This Mapp is humbly D. D by R. B A MAPP of THE ESTATES of the TURKISH EMPIRE in ASIA and EUROPE Designed by Mon sr Sanson Geographer to the French King Turky in Asia UNDER the name of TVRKY in ASIA we understand not all which the Great Turk possesses but only certain Regions which he alone possesses or if there be any Estates intermixed they are inconsiderable And in this Turky we shall find Anatolia which the Ancients called Asia Minor the greater Souria which the Ancients called Syria the Great Turcomania by the Ancients called Armenia the Great then Diarbeck which answers to Mesopotamia and to divers parts of Assyria and the Chaldea or Babylonia of the Ancients ANATOLIA is that great Peninsula which is washed on the North by the Black-Sea Mare Major or Euxine Sea and on the South by that part of the Mediterranean which we call the Levant Sea which extends Westward to the Archipelago or Aegean Sea and thence to the Euphrates which bounds it on the East The Parts of Asia Minor or Anatolia The Ancients divided this Great Asia Minor into many lesser Regions of which the principal are viz. Pontus Bithynia Little Asia Minor into Lycia Galatia Pamphilia Cappadocia Cilicia Caria Ionia Aeolis Lydia Phrygia Major and Minor Paphlagonia Lycaonia Pysidia Armenia Minor Mysia the Isle of Rhodes c. But at present the Turks do in general call this Great Asia Minor Anatolia which signifies Orient That part of Anatolia which is
Sea and near the Bosphorus of Thrace are n = 1. Cyanees The two Islands called CYANEES so near the one to the other that the Ancients would make us believe they joyned n = 2. Lesbos METELIN of old LESBOS famous for the City Meteline which for its greatness and excellency of its Wines gives name to the Island In this place was born Sappho the Inventress of the Sapphick Verse Pittacus one of the Sages of Greece and Arion the Dolphin Harper n = 3. Scio. SCIO or CHIOS distant from the Ionian shoar four Leagues being in compass about 126 miles remarkable for the Church of its Convent of Niomene one of the fairest in the World It affordeth excellent Fruits in great plenty but of most note for its Mastick not found elsewhere it is now under the power of the Grand Signior n = 4. Icaria ICARIA now called Niceria in compass 12 Leagues here Icarus suffered Shipwreck abounding in Corn and Pasturage n = 5. Pathmos PATHMOS in compass about ten Leagues Mountainous but reasonably fruitful especially in Grain Here it was that St. John being banished by Domitian writ his Revelation to the Churches of Asia n = 6. Parmacusa PARMACVSA near Miletum where Caesar was taken by them n = 7. Claros CLAROS or CASAMO about 13 Leagues in compass very Mountainous but hath good Harbours in former times sacred to Apollo abounding in great plenty of Aloes where they are gathered and transported to other Countries n = 8. Lero LERO noted also for Aloes n = 9. Coos COOS seated in the bottom of the Aegean Sea furnished with sweet and pleasant Streams which refresh this Island and makes it very fruitful it is in compass 23 Leagues having its chief place so called fortified with a strong Tower now a Garrison of the Turks This Island is remarkable for being the Birth-place of so many famous men especially Hippocrates the Revivor of Physick when almost decayed unto the ancient practice of Aesculapius unto whom this Island was consecrated having therein a Temple made rich with the Offerings of those that had been sick whose Cures were there Registred and Apelles the famous Painter n = 10. Scarpante Scarpante stored with the best Coral in the World n = 11. Nicosia NICOSIA which was the Seat of the Kings of the Family of Lufigua and the See of an Archbishop and Peopled with 40000 Families n = 12. Farmacusa FARMACVSA scituate on the Sea much stronger than Nicosia n = 13. Bapho BAPHO of old Baphus famous for its Temple dedicated to Venus Mount Olympus now St. Michaels Mount stands in the middle of this Island n = 14. Negroponte NEGRO-PONTE where the Sea ebbs and flows seven times a day which because Aristotle could not unriddle he here drowned himself the chief City is Colchis n = 15. Samos SAMOS about 30 Leagues in compass strongly seated almost on all sides with Rocks having a fair Haven fertil in Fruits especially in Oil and Olives the Island much infected with Pirates This is the only place in the World for Spunges under whose Rocks they grow in the Sea for the getting of which they have People which from their Infancy are bred up with dry Bisket and other extenuating diet to make them lean then taking a Spunge wet in Oil they hold it part in their Mouths and part without and so they dive down into the Sea to get it those that have been used to this trade can abide under water almost an hour together n = 16. Tenedos TENEDOS scituate at the Mouth of the Hellespont opposite to Troy remarkable for the concealing the Grecian Navy which proved the final destruction of Troy n = 17. Rhodes RHODES scituate in the Carpathian or Rhodian Sea being in compass 46 Leagues a place of great strength its Soil fertil its Air temperate plentiful in all things as well for delight as profit full of excellent Pastures adorned with pleasant Trees whose Leaves are alb the year long in their verdure In this Island the Sun is so powerful and constant as it was anciently dedicated to Phoebus This Island as Sandys in his Book of Travels noteth was held Sacred to the Sun to whom they erected that vast Colossus of Brass which may well be accounted one of the Seven Wonders of the World He saith The Colessus this Colossus was in height 70 Cubits every Finger as big as an ordinary Statue and the Thumb too great to be fathomed It was 12 years a making the bigness was such that being erected at the entrance of the Port Ships past between its Legs but in 66 years by an Earthquake it was thrown down and broken in pieces And besides the Mass of Stones contained therein 900 Camels were laden with the Brass which was used about it This City bearing the name of the Island is seated 4 miles from the ancient City famous of old for their Government their expert Navigations and since for the abode of the Knights of St. John of Jerusalem now in the hands of the Turk This City and Island of Rhodes as indeed Tenedos Samos and the rest of the Isles in this Sea are of little or no Trade yet they are found to produce several good Commodities And n = 18. Cyprus CYPRVS which amongst all is the greatest being in circuit about 183 Leagues distant from the Cilician shoar about 20 Leagues it stretcheth it self from East to West in form of a Fleece and thrusting forth a great many Promontories This Island during the Empire of the Persians and Macedonians was accounted for Nine Kingdoms most of them bearing the names of their principal Towns but by Prolomy divided into these 4 Provinces viz. 1. Lapethia 2. Paphia 3. Salamine and 4. Amathusia Provinces in Cyprus Places of most note are 1. Nicosia the Metropolis of the Island being a walled City in form round five miles in compass adorned with stately Buildings resembling some Cities in Florence as well for its beauty and pleasant scituation as for its plentifulness in People 2. Tremitas the Birth-place of Spiridon a famous Bishop of the Primitive times 3. Paphos seated near the Sea built by Paphos Son of Pygmalion King of Phoenicia and Cyprus where stands Pygmalions Statue which as the Poets feign was by the power of Venus turned into a Woman where she had her so much celebrated Temple and where her Votaries of both Sexes in their natural nakedness did perform her Sacrifices 4. Salamis once the Metropolitan City in the Island but now turned to Ruins in which there was a famous Temple consecrated unto Jupiter 5. Aphrodisium so named from Venus where she had another Temple 6. Famagusta though but small yet one of the chiefest in this Island strongly seated 7. Arsinoe famous for the Groves of Jupiter 8. Amathus renowned for the Annual Sacrifices made unto Adonis the darling of Venus where she had another Temple
At present the Turk possesses the greatest part of the Country and keeps still or did not long since Beglerbies at Erzerum Cars Revan Van Schildir Tefflis and Derbent besides which there are many Cities of considerable note some of which the Persians hold 1. It s chief Places Erzerum on the Euphrates near the black Sea on which and not far from Erzerum is Trebisonde which facilitates a great trade between the East West and North for coming from the Indian Ocean by the Gulph of Ormus and so up the Euphrates they may receive passing by what comes from the West to Aleppo and carry it unto Erzerum from whence to Trebisonde by land is not above 25 or 30 Leagues 2. Gars Chars or likewise Chissery is four or five days Journy from Erzerum towards the East on the River Euphrates it hath been taken and retaken divers times by the Turks and Persians The same may be said of Revan Schilder and Van this last is not great but well Walled and with greater Ditches and hath a Castle whose scituation is such as renders it almost inaccessible 3. Tefflis is likewise in some esteem at present but much more formerly under the name of Artaxata which Artaxias Father of Tigranes King of Armenia caused to be builded and fortified at the perswasion of Hannibal 4. Derbent of great antiquity being supposed to have its foundation laid by Alexander the Great who also erected that no less great than strong Castle which is called Kastow adjoyning to the said City which is the greatest and most ordinary passage between Turcomania Persia and other Southern Provinces of Asia to Zuire the Kingdom of Astracan and other more Northern Estates of Europe and Asia It s scituation is upon the utmost Mountains which regard the Taberestan or the Caspian Sea and all is so well fortified that the Turks have took occasion to call the place Demir or Temir Capi or the Port of Iron and the name of Derbent signifies a Streight Port and in all likelyhood these are the Caspiae Portae so famous among the Ancients because that in the black Sea and the Sea of Tabarestan which is about 3 or 400 thousand Paces It is all high Mountainous and hard to be passed and if there be any passages they are infamous for Robberies and Incursions which the Inhabitants of the Countries or the Princes which possess them make This City is a place of great strength being invironed with two strong Walls and fortified with Towers and Iron-gates being accounted the Key or Inlet to Persia now in the hands of the Grand Signior 5. Bitlis and Manuscute belong to the Curdes who have here many and divers Lords better affected to the Persians than the Turks Bitlis is between two Mountains watered with a River which receives many fair Fountains The Houses are built with Stones which is rare in that Country others being of nothing but Wood and Earth The Castle is seated advantagiously but I believe this place is not now in the hands of the Turks and to speak truth we have at present little knowledge of any thing concerning these quarters ARMENIA was much better known and more famous in Ancient time than at present under the name of Turcomania The Bounds of Armenia Its Bounds are very advantagious being quite encompassed with high Mountains large Rivers and washed by divers Seas and seated Northwards of the Caspian Mountains which divides it from Media now called Servan The Mountains of Armenis This Country is well replenished with Mountains Vallies Rivers and Lakes The Mountain Anti-Taurus divides it East and West almost from one extremity to the other whose most Easternly point is called Abus from whence the Euphrates Tigris and Araxes take some of their Streams The Gordian Mountains pour forth the greatest supplies to Tigris and the Pariardes increase most the Streams of Euphrates Araxes and Farza Chief Rivers in Armenia Farza turns his course towards the North and after having passed Colchida and pressed through 100 or 120 Bridges falls into the Euxine Sea Araxes turns towards the East watering the fairest and richest Plains of Armenia and falls into the Caspian Sea between Media and Albania Both the one and the other Euphrates descend towards the West but approaching the Euxine Sea it turns again towards the South and reunites its two Channels into one traverses the Anti-Taurus and Taurus divides Armenia and Mesopotamia from Asia Minor Syria and Arabia descends into Chaldea where it waters the ancient Babylon and loses it self in the Tigris This last descends from Mount Abus and the Georgian Mountains falls into divers Lakes loses it self and rises divers times out of the Earth cuts the Mountain Niphates separates Mesopotamia from Assyria washes Ninive Seleucia Ctesiphon receives all the branches of the Euphrates and discharges it self in the Persian Gulph Lakes of most note in Armenia The greatest Lakes of Armenia are Thospitis Areessa and Lychintes this last is towards the Araxes and the Caspian Sea Areessa is the same that Pliny and Solinus call Arethusa Thospitis according to Ptolomy is another Lake the Tigris likewise crosses after which it loses it self the second time The first hath its Water so as it will take spots out of Cloaths but is not good to drink Kings of eminent note in Armenia Among the Kings of Armenia which made themselves most known to the Romans or Parthians Tigranes Son-in-law to Mithridates King of Pontus hath been the most famous This Tigranes after having been an Hostage in the hands of the Parthians regained his Estates by their means in recompence of which he gave them 70 Valleys on the confines of Media and Assyria but after he knew and had gathered together his Powers he retook all those Vallies beat the Parthians out of them pillaged Assyria as far as Ninive and Arbela subjected to himself a part of Media and afterwards all Mesopotamia Syria Phoenicia and Cilicia But whilst he believed himself above Fortune Mithridates his Father-in-law was divers times defeated and driven from his Realm of Pontus by Lucullus and the Romans and retiring himself into Armenia to his Son-in-law his refusal to abandon or deliver him into the hands of Lucullus drew the Romans into Armenia where Lucullus several times defeated Tigranes took Tigranocerta where was his Regal Diadem and likewise in a great Set-Battel where Tigranes had 150000 Foot and 1000 or 1200 Horse flew 100000 Foot and the greatest part of his Cavalry constraining him to yield to the Romans the Provinces of Cilicia Syria Phoenicia and Mesopotamia and content himself with Armenia only but for the present let us lay aside History The division of Armenia according to Ptolomy Ptolomy divided Armenia into four principal Parts and allotted to the first 7 Regions or Provinces 6 to the second 3 to the third and 4 to the fourth placing in the first part 30 Cities 27 in the second 12 in the third and 18 in
memorable for being the Birth-place of Philip one of Alexanders Successors who was the first of the Romans Emperours which embraced Christianity 3. Medava now Moab according to the Translation of the Septuagint and being so the name may be taken from Moab Son of Lots eldest Daughter from whence the Moabites descended of whom mention is made in the Old Testament 4. Berenice so named from an Aegyptian Queen but better known by the name of Esion-Geber here it was that the Children of Israel did encamp where also those Ships employed by Solomon to Ophir did make their ordinary Harbour 5. Sur one of the chief Cities of the Amalekites giving name to a Wilderness there adjacent remarkable for the great Victory which Saul gave the Amalekites where also the Children of Israel first encamped after their passage through the Red Sea 6. Thara where Korah Dathan and Abiram were punished And 7. Madian seated towards the Red Sea being the City of Jethro whose Daughter Zipporah Moses took to wife Remarkable things here transacted Besides these Cities there are some others yet the Country is for the most part Desart and is the same where the Children of Israel wandred 40 years there where then inhabited the Moabites Amalekites Midianites Idumaeans and others there where are the Mountains of Sinai and Horeb. The Israelites being in these Desarts lay a whole year near this Mountain and during that time Moses received from God the Decalogue dedicated the Tabernacle ordained a High Priest Priests and Levites and established Ecclesiastical and Political Laws There is at present a Monastery of St. Katherine built by Justinian and all sorts of Pilgrims are received by the Caloyers that is Religious Greeks which inhabit there The Burning Bush in which God appeared to Moses was near Mount Horeb. The Rock which Moses struck to have Water was of this Mount and likewise on this Mountain it was that Moses besought God for the Israelites against the Amalekites also Mount Hor bordering on Idumea where Aaron died On the Coast of the Red Sea is the Castle Tor a Borough or Walled Town and a Port very famous where it is believed that the Israelites having passed the Red Sea entred the Desarts this way And it is likewise a great Passage where the Caravans stop at their return from Mecca Arabia the Desart described ARABIA the Desart so called by reason of the vast Sandy Desarts and the uninhabitableness thereof scarce affording either food for Man or Beast so that those which travel this Country are forced to carry with them their Provision and guide themselves to the place design'd by the help of Stars as they do at Sea and are forced to go in great Companies or Caravans for fear of being robbed and rifled by the wild Arabs who here inhabit in Tents which they remove as occasion serveth from place to place either for fresh Pasture or otherwise and yet much travelled by Merchants who Trade into Babylonia Egypt and elsewhere Some Authors have observed in the course of their Trade that the Sandy Desarts are their Seas the wild Arabs their Pirates and their Camels their Ships each Camel carrying 600 or 1000 pound weight It s People The People are much addicted to Theft by which they get their chief living being stout and warlike Men and not Tilling the Earth and planting Fruits Plants or the like their chief food being Venison Milk Fowls and Herbs They go half naked their Wives they hire for what time they please who in way of a Portion bring a Tent and a Spear to their Husbands Both Sexes are much given to Carnal lusts and when Women are delivered of a Child they leave it without troubling themselves with it It s chief Cities There are found in Arabia the Desart two Cities of the name of Anna or Anua one on the Euphrates and the other on the River Astan not far from the Gulph of Balsora this last is least famous the other is the most considerable of the Province seated both on the one and the other Bank of the Euphrates but the greatest part and the richest is on the Arabian side There is in all about 4000 Houses which have been much ruined in the late Wars between the Turks and Persians The City contains divers Isles on one of which is a Castle At Suskanna a Borough upon the great Road between Anua and Aleppo Texera saith That the Women are as fair as Angels if he had likewise said as wise and had spoken truth all Men from the four Corners of the World had been obliged to go to seek them 3. Mexat Ali that is the Oratory of Ali had once 6 or 7000 Houses when the Sect of Ali bore sway in those quarters there remains at present not above 500 Inhabitants 4. Mexat Ocem that is the Oratory of Ocem is not walled nor hath above 4000 Houses Saba now Simiscasac according to the opinion of Guillandin is the place from whence the Three Wise-men departed to go to Bethlem to adore the Saviour of the World This Arabia the Desart according to some hath divers Lords which command it and which for the most part are Vassals or Tributaries to the Great Turk who holds likewise a part But these People being more inclined to the Mahometan Sect of Ali which is that of the Persians than to that of Omaz which is that of the Turks are more affectionate to the Persians than to the Turks and some of these Lords likewise hold of the Persians Others give all Arabia the Desart to one King and will have the City or rather the Court of that Prince to have a wonderful disposition and scituation and that the Prince can make it all a March or Walk when and as often as he pleases which is still by going thither where they may best find food for their Horses and Camels and they say that the place being chosen they dispose the Quarters and Streets after the ordinary manner and at the same time pitch all the Tents that of the Prince in the midst and the others about alwaies in the same fashion that part which is towards the North South East or West never changing And the Quarters and Streets have their Names and their Tents in the same form insomuch that who once knows the order may easily find any which inhabit therein This moving City or rather this Court Errant contains not only the Militia of the Prince which are above 2000 Men but likewise a great number of their Nobility Merchants Artizans and divers Strangers which follow this Court. Arabia the Happy bounded ARABIA the Happy is a great Peninsula which stretcheth it self from the Mountains which divide it from the other two parts of Arabia to the Ocean being 3 4 and in some places 500 Leagues long and broad The Gulph of Balsora and Ormus otherwise the Persian Gulph washes it on the left side the Red Sea or Sea of Mecca otherwise the Arabian
is scituate without the Red Sea at the beginning of the great Ocean and by the industry of the Inhabitants is made an Island fortified with a strong Castle which commands the Road. This City or Island is now become the Magazine for the Commodities of India Persia and Arabia Other Cities in Arabia Above Aden and farther in the main Land are many fair Cities as Laghi Agiaz Almachazane Sanaa and others subject to the Xecque of Mecca Laghi is not far from the Sea Agiaz or Hagias sometime gave its name to these quarters Almachazane is seated on the top of a very high Mountain and of a difficult access it hath a Cistern capable to hold Water to furnish a 100000 Men The Xecque ofttimes keeps Court here Sane or Sanaa stands at the foot of a Mountain and is one of the greatest fairest and strongest of Arabia having many Vineyards Meadows and Gardens within its Circuit Its Houses are well built its Vineyards and Gardens well cultivated its Walls 10 Cubits high and its Ramparts 20 Cubits thick It s Territory is watered with many Fountains produceth excellent Fruits and feeds the best Horses of Arabia Kingdom and City of Fartach its People and Trade Towards the East and almost 150 Leagues from Aden is Fartach a Kingdom and City near the Sea and having a Cape of the same name The Tarquins are valiant and their King defends himself couragiously against the Turks having seen their treatment to his Neighbours of Aden and Zibit The Ports of Dolfar which is the Turks and Pescher are the most renowned of this Coast and send forth the best Frankinsence of Arabia in great quantity Higher on the Coast and farther on the Land are the Cities and Kingdoms or as they call them the Sultanies of Gubel haman Alibmahi Amazirifden and others Other Cities and Kingdoms The rest of the Coast unto Cape de Raz-al-gate is very barren from Cape de Raz-al-gate unto that of Moccandon the Soil is the best of all Arabia and some would here alone confine the name of Hyaman which signifies Happy There are here many fair Cities both on the Sea-coast and higher in the Land one of chief Traffick between the East and Arabia the Happy was formerly called Sohar but this Trade was after transported to Ormus on the Persian side In our time it was restored to the Arabian side to wit at Mascates held by the Portugals Sohar and Mascates are between the Capes of Raz-al-gate and Moccandon and are not above 20 Leagues distant from each other Within the Land are Masfa a City and Kingdom Mirabat Sour or Lyr and others Beyond the Cape Moccandon and advancing towards the Mouths of the Tigris and Euphrates among many other places we have Elcatif or El-Catif a famous Port and which communicates its name to the adjacent Gulph which the ancients called Sinus Bersicus and we at present the Gulph of Balsora and Ormus Near Elcatif is Bahar whose Territory is called Bahareim or Baharem and the Isle and City before Baharem farther in the land is Mascalat a City and Kingdom Jemen likewise a Kingdom and City according to some Lazach or Lassach likewise a Kingdom and City where are of the best Horses of Arabia as at Sanaa Lassach Elcatif and some other are the Turks Elcatif is the ancient Gerra and that part of the Gulph nearest the City called Gerraticus Sinus and the Isle of Barem is the ancient Tylos There yet remains some Cities of which some have their Kings or Sultans others live in Republick which is very rare in Asia The Arabs Bengebres a free People Towards the middle of Arabia are the Arabs Bengebres a free People and which live only of the Prey and Tribute they force from their Neighbours yet possess they 200 or 250 Leagues of Country and are for the most part in the Mountains The Beduins towards Mecca are of the same nature bound about Arabia are a great number of Isles which belong unto it which are dispersed either in the Southern Ocean Red Sea or the Persian Gulph Arabian Isles in the Southern Ocean In the Southern Ocean are found three Isles which bear the name of COCCONATI seven by the name of ZENOBII and two by the name of Insulae AGATHOCLIS and lastly CVRIA and MVRIA where there is found white Tortoises whose Shells are great curiosities In the Red Sea In the Red Sea these Islands 1. CANARAN very hot but fruitful 2. DALAQVA being the largest of all in length 125 miles and not above 12 broad having a City of the same name where they gather Pearls And 3. and lastly the Samaritan Islands In the Persian Gulph In the Persian Gulph these Islands are found BAHAREM the most famous because it hath the Pearl-fishing the best in the Oriental parts This Isle is between Balsora and Ormus about a 100 or 120 Leagues from Balsora and 150 from Ormus It is near the Coast of Arabia and directly opposite to the Coast of Elcatif which is the Turks but the Isle of Baharem which is still the Persians once belonged to the Kingdom of Ormus The Waters here are almost all salt but near Manama the Capital City of the Island there are Springs of Fresh-water at the bottom of the Sea which the Divers go and fetch gathering it into Borracho's or Goats-skins with much cunning and bringing it forth of the Sea do afterwards sell it The Pearls of this Isle are very much esteemed both for their largeness and roundness and this fishing is yearly worth 500000 Ducats besides the value of 100000 and more which is diverted Those of the Isle of GIONFA are of no great value those of the other neighbouring Isles are less except it be at MASCATES 60 Leagues from Ormus They fish here all June July and August if they begin sooner the Pearls are unripe and not hard enough The Air of all Arabia is very healthful but not nor Rains it in some places above twice or thrice in 3 or 4 years but the abundance of the Dew makes their Fruits excellent The People of Arabia their Manners c. The People for the most part are of a mean stature lean swarthy complexioned effeminate voices very swift of foot and expert in the Bow and Dart. They first exercise themselves in Manufactures using all sort of Trade and Traffick far off and some addict themselves to Learning particularly to Philosophy Physick the Mathematicks and to Astrology there have been amongst them many Grammarians Rhetoricians Historians and Interpreters of the Alcoran which is in their Tongue and which hath made the Arabick Language spread itself through all the East at least in the most Southerly parts of Asia and part of Africa but little in Europe Those which range the Country are great Wanderers and greater Thieves they are divided into many Families which know each other and how to distinguish the one from the other Every Family how numerous soever it be hath a
dead within three hours after the life is departed unless it be in the night so that then they let the corps alone untill the morning they wash or bathe the bodies of their dead before they are interred in a great Cestern Ceremonies in their burials which they have for the same purpose near the Church to which place they are carried on a Bier in their Clothes and after they are stript and Washt they put them in clean linnen anoint them and so bear them to the Grave being accompanied with his Friends Relations Servants c. in this order first goeth those of his blood rext his Varlets who go naked to the Waist the rest in troozes who to express their love scratch and burn their Breasts Arms and other parts so that the blood oft issueth forth then follow many youths on whose shoulders are affixed some texts taken out of the Alcoran together with Elegies of the deceased in the next place follow several persons of the best ranck each holding a cord that is affixed to the Hearse and on every side abundance of People bearing in their hands Garlands of Flowers Lawrels and such things as befit the Season then follow some Horse-men half naked who oft times massacre their carcasses and in the last place follow weeping-Women that is such as are hired to weep and howle the better to provoke others to passion and being brought to the Grave the Priest after he hath performed several Ceremonies which he readeth out of the Alcoran the Corps is interred with his head towards Mecca his face towards Heaven and his armes expanded as they say to imbrace their Prophet Mahomet placing two Stones one at the head and the other at the foot of the Grave on which are ingraven in Arabick Characters the persons name quality and time of burial and so take their leave but for a good while cease not to visit the Grave twice a day beseeching Mahomet to succour him against his two bad Angels of whom they have this opinion So soon as the Corps is interred there are two hiddeous Devils assaile him the one they call Muengar which is armed with an Iron Club and the other Quarequar armed with a Hook of Flaming brass and in this horrid posture they view the Carcass and in an insolent manner command him to raise his head to fall prostrate upon his knees and begg his soul which then re-enters the body and gives an account unto them of all the actions of his life and upon examination and confession if it appear that his life was good they vanish away like Spirits and two good Angels come apparelled in white to be a comfort unto him and protect him untill the day of doom not stirring from him but sitting one at his head and the other at his feet But on the contrary if it happen that his life is found bad then these Infernal Imps are his tormentors the one knocking him on the head such blows with his Iron Club as beats him as they say ten yards into the Earth and the other drags him up with his Flaming hook and thus is he knockt down by one and dragged up by the other untill Mahomet sends him a deliverance and this as Sir Tho. Herbert relateth in his book of Travels is their belief which if it be true I doubt they will have many a sound knock and torne place before their delivery To persons of quality they observe more Ceremonies than to those of the ordinary degree making Feasts on the third seventh and fortieth day after the Corps is laid in the Grave at which Feasts they are charitable to the poor in their Almes Deeds The King of Persia his power The King of Persia governs by an absolute power disposing of the lives and estates of his Subjects as best pleaseth him making his Will his Law not any one daring so much as to murmure though his actions are never so much unjust Their Kings come to the Goverment by succession and not by election insomuch that if the King hath no Children which are lawfully begotten as by his Wives for want of such those of his Concubines shall succeed him The Coronation of their Kings Upon the Coronation of their Kings amongst other Ceremonies he is presented with a Crown by one of their chiefest Lords which he takes putting it to his forehead and after kissing it thrice in the name of Mahomet and of Aaly he delivers it to the grand Master of the Kingdom who puts it on his head the People making great shouts and acclamations kissing his feet and presenting him with great presents which done the rest of the day they spend in feasting and other jovialties but in all their Ceremonies there is not so much as an Oath imposed upon him as for his well governing them and keeping and preserving their fundamental Laws and other of their rights as amongst us done but all being left to his sole power as being absolute There are belonging to the Court several Officers as Chancellor Secretary of State Controller Master of the Horse Master of the Ceremonies together with several other Officers Their Courts of Judicature and their Justice as amongst our Courts are found The Administration of Justice is decided by the King but first tried by the secular Judges who examine the same and deliver up their opinion to the King They have several strict and severe punishments which they inflict upon the offenders according to the hainousness of their crimes for some offences they cut off the Ears or Nose sometimes the Feet or Hands for others to be beheaded for some again they are tyed between two boards and so sawed asunder with several other cruel deaths which are too tedious to name In their Military affairs they are very experienced Their Military Affairs their Army consisting only of Horse who have for their Armour Darts and Javelins yet have they some in the nature of our Dragoons which are mounted on Horses who have Muskets for their Arms as for an Army of Foot together with the assistance of great Guns by them is not so much set by as being troublesom and a detarder of them from their speedy and great marches they are very expert in all stratagems of War which gives them a great advantage over their enemies Here doth inhabit a sort of People called Gaurs and are of a much different Religion from the Persians observing divers Ceremonies peculiar to themselves In their Baptism they use no Circumsition instead of which they wash the Child c. At their Nuptials after the Priest hath said some Prayers he takes water washes both their fore-heads and gives the Benediction When they are sick they make Confession to the Priest and bestow their Almes in hopes of Pardon of their Sins They bury not their dead but carry them to certain enclosed places where they fasten them to high Stakes with their faces towards the East They bear a great adoration
having no places worthy of note SORET is seated between the Kingdoms of Tatta on the West Soret of Guzurate on the East It hath for its chief City Janagar the Province is but of little extent but very fruitful rich and well Peopled Cassimere Bankish Kakares Naugracut CASSIMERE or QVERIMVR BANKISH KAKARES and NAVGRACVT are between the River Indus and Ganges all encompassed with the Mountains of Bimber towards the Indus of Naugracut towards the Ganges of Caucasus towards Tartaria of Dalanguer which crosses them and separates the one from the other and they the Forests of these Mountains which yielded so much Wood for the Vessels which Alexander the Great caused to be builded to descend the Indus And these are at present those Forrests which give so much divertisement of chase to the Great Mogoll Sizinaket or Sirinakar though unwalled is the chief City of Cassimere Beishar of Bankish Dankalar and Purhola of Kakares and Naugracut of Naugracut In this last the Temple of the Idol Marta is paved Wanscotted and Seiled with Plates of Gold And in Callamacka there are Fountains very cold and near to Rocks from whence seem to flash out flames of fire The Province of SIBA hath for its chief City Hardware Siba which gives its rise to the River Ganges and Serenegar on the River Mansa The Province of JAMBA gives name to its chief City Jamba The Province of BAKAR lieth on the West of the Ganges Bakar and hath for its chief City Bikaner The Province of SAMBAL takes its name from its chief City so called Sambal This Province is likewise called Doab that is two Waters its scituation being between the Ganges and Semena which together with the three Provinces last mentioned are without or on this side the Ganges reaching almost from its Spring-head unto the River Semena or Gemeni The Province of GOR takes its name from its chief City Gor. and gives its rise to the River Perselis which falls into the Ganges the Province being very Mountainous The Province of KANDVANA hath for its chief City Karakantaka Kanduana This Province and that of Gor which is beyond the Ganges doth end the Estates of the Mogoll towards the North meeting with the Tartars of Turquestan The Province of MEVAT is very barren whose chief City is Narval Mevat which ends it towards the People called Maug and others which we esteem to be in the Peninsula of India which is in the Ganges The Province of VDESSA Udessa is the utmost of the Mogolls Territories towards the East which is also within the Ganges its chief place is Jebanac The Province of PITAN is on the West of Jamba Pitan being very Mountainous whose chief City gives name to the Province The River Randa runs through the City and Province and falls into the Ganges The Province of PATNA is fruitful whose chief City is so called Patna seated on the River Persely but we have a very feeble and incertain knowledge of all these Parts or Kingdoms but those which are towards the South and particularly Guzurate or Cambaya and Bengala are better known Gusurate or Cambaya exceeding rich and fertil The Province of GVSVRATE by the Portuguese called the Kingdom of CAMBAYA hath more than 30 great Trading Cities and is without doubt the noblest greatest richest and most powerful Province of all the Mogolls Country yielding a yearly Revenue of 15 or 20 Millions of Gold and its King hath brought into the Field 150000 Horse and 500000 Foot 1000 Camels c. The Country likewise is esteemed the most fertil of all India producing all sorts of Grains Fruits and living Creatures quantity of Drugs Its Commodities and Trade Spices and precious Stones not having any Mines of Gold or Silver but three Plants which bring it an inestimable quantity as well from the Gulph of Persia and the Red Sea as from all the Coasts of India and China These Plants are Cotton Anniseed and Opium besides which there are varieties of other rich Commodities as Oil Sugar Indico Ambergreece Soap Comfits Medicinal Drugs Paper Wax Hony Butter Salt-Peter Manufactures of Cotton Linnen-Cloth Carpets Cabinets Coffers Cases with a thousand other curiosities which its Inhabitants know how to make and sell being the ablest Merchants of India Its Inhabitants They are likewise of a good Spirit and addicted to Letters serve themselves of all sorts of Arms yet know nothing of Nobility but by abundance of Riches They are all Pagans or Mahometans The Pagans for the most part are Pythagoreans holding the immortality of the Soul Pythagoreans and that it passes from one body to another for which reason they so much honour Beasts that they eat them not but keep Hospitals to receive such as are sick and lame The Cows here are in such esteem with them that a Merchant Banian according to the report of Texera spent 10 or 12 thousand Ducats at a Nuptial marrying his Cow with his Friends Bull. This Kingdom is in part Peninsula between the Gulphs of the Indies and Cambaya and in part on the Main which stretches it self towards Decan It s extent by Sea This Province though of a large extent yet hath above 120 Leagues of Sea-Coast on which it hath several fair and rich Cities and of a good Trade As also great quantities of Inland Towns and Cities the chiefest whereof are viz. Surat Surat seated on the River Tapta which falls into the Sea 12 miles below the City It is a City no less great and rich than populous and famous and enjoyeth as great a Trade as any City in India being much frequented by the English and Dutch where they have their Presidents and Factories and where they have their Houses for the negotiation of their affairs which are spacious and well built This City is built four square its Houses flat after the Persian mode and reasonably beautiful having the benefit of pleasant Gardens It hath several Mosques but none deserves commendation it is defended by a strong Castle and hath a strong Wall on all sides except on that which is seated on the River and for its entrance hath three Gates Its Port is six miles from the City where the Ships are unladen and the Commodities brought to the City by Land The Inhabitants are either Benjans Bramans or Mogolls but there are several other Nations which here reside as Persians Turks Arabians Armenians Jews c. driving a Trade but none comparable to the English or Dutch It s other places of note are 1. Brodra Brodra seated on a sandy Plain upon a small River well fortified with Walls and Forts the Inhabitants being for the most part Dyers Weavers and other workers of Cottons for which it is the chiefest place in the whole Province The Governour of this City hath also under its Jurisdiction about 210 Towns and Villages Baroche 2. Baroche 12 Leagues from Surat and 8
India he places it between the Rivers of Jiama and of Caypoumo or Pegu giving it four Leagues Circuit and making it Metropolis of the Kingdom of Caypoumo which is likewise called Canarana This Country hath Turquesses and Emeralds the fairest of all the East Cassubi is in a Plain bounded with high Hills from whence descend many streams which water the Plain where there are excellent Fruits among the rest Pomegranates the largest and best of India excellent Raisins and Manna which must be gathered before Sun-rise which else dispatches it Their Mountains are filled with savage Beasts where they get the Skins and Furs of Ermines and Sables of divers sorts all very exquisite The people of Transiana are fair and white the Women exceeding beautiful and the Men very proud They have Mines of Gold Silver and Diamonds their King keeps ordinarily 50000 Horse 1000 Elephants and paies his tribute to the King of Pegu in Horses which are very excellent Their Forests have many Wild Beasts among the rest that which gives the Bezoar The Inhabitants of Boldia are esteemed the most honest and civil of all these quarters So that they cannot but be people of Trade and indeed all these Kingdoms have divers Commodities which make them rich Pegu exceeding rich in Gold Silver and Precious Stones The Kingdom of Pegu which hath commanded and had for Subjects or Tributaries almost all these Estates and likewise others towards Sian and Sian it self cannot but be extreamly rich and powerful And truly Gold Silver Pearls and Precious Stones have been as common in the Courts of the Kings of Pegu as if all the Orient had brought all its Riches thither The Floors of Buildings the Moveables and the Vessels with which they served themselves for divertisement were so inriched within and without with Gold and Azure that it is not imaginable if we did not know this to be the Aurea Regio and likewise the Argentea Regio of Ptolomy Yet this must be believed to have been long since but however that it is at present the richest Country of all the Indies And for the same reason one of the best peopled and most powerful It s fertility and Commodities This Country by reason of the overflowing of the River Pegu which runs through the Kingdom makes it become exceeding fruitful and of a fat and rich soyl so that it produceth great abundance of Grains Fruits and other products of the Earth in great plenty Also Beasts Fowl and Fish great store of Civet-Cats from whom they take Civet Lacque which is made by Ants as Bees make Wax with us Gold Silver Precious Stones Drugs Spices Lead Sugar c. This Kingdom hath plenty of good Towns and Cities The City of Pegu the chief of the Kingdom described its Metropolis bearing the name of the Kingdom It is divided into the Old and the New the one and the other together make a Square being encompassed with a strong Wall and a great Ditch well fortified having on each side five Gates besides many Turrets richly beautified It is large strong rich and stately the King and his Nobility and Courtiers takes up the New City which is separated from the Old by a Wall and Ditch well watered in which are kept many Crocodils for the watching the place by night The Wall hath several Gates on all sides for the convenience of the people to pass in and out The Streets are very fair straight and so broad that fifteen men may ride a-breast on both sides The Houses well built having before every door Palm-trees which are set not only to make a pleasant show but also to keep the Passengers from the heat of the Sun which is very great The Palace Royal. The Palace Royal is seated in the midst of the City having its particular Wall Moat and other Fortifications the Palace being very stately and large the greatest part of the Buildings being sustained by Pillars of Jet and all the Stones so shining that those which are without represent the Neighbouring Gardens and Forests and those which are within the Paved Chambers other Rooms and the Ceilings above so well that one seemeth to walk on Gold and Azure Nor doth this his stately Palace exceed his Magnificence and Pomp without which he is never so much as seen The Old City is inhabited only by Merchants Artificers and Sea-men where there is great store of Ware-houses strongly built of Brick to prevent fire which the City is much subject unto in which the Merchants keep their Goods And for the better encrease of Trade the King doth constitute Eight Brokers whose Offices are to look after and sell the Goods as well of strangers as the Inhabitants giving a very just account thereof For which they are allowed two pence per Cent. The like is observed in the buying of Commodities And these Brokers by their places are obliged to provide Strangers or Merchants with a House and orders certain Maids of the City to go to him that out of them he may make his choice which done he contracts with her friends to pay them a certain sum for the use of her as they can agree which is not great and this Maid serveth him as his Servant by day doing what he commandeth and as his Wife by night And at the expiration of the term agreed upon he leaveth her and she goeth to her Friends without any disgrace at all The People are of a mean stature The People their Habit. nimble and strong great lovers of Women which takes them from warlike affairs in which they are not very expert Their habit is but mean contenting themselves for the most part with a piece of Linnen to cover their nakedness they all black their Teeth because they say Dogs teeth are white They are generally all Pagans Their belief and believe that God hath under him several other Gods that he is the Author of all good which arriveth to mankind But he leaveth all evils which belong to man to the Devil by reason of which they so much adore and fear him lest he should hurt them which God being good they say will not Their Devotion they perform on Mundays their Priests going about with Tin-basons making a noise to waken the People and inviting them to their devotions in which they chiefly exhort them to Morality as to avoid Theft Adultery Murder c. and to love Vertue They have a great esteem for their Priests who live a very solitary and exemplary life They have Five principal Feasts which they observe very strictly ceremoniously and with greast state and pomp Marriage not kept during life They that Marry buy their Wives of their Parents and when he is weary of her he may send her home but must lose the Money he paid for her But if she leave him as she may do then he may receive the Money paid for her SIAN or SIAM Kingdom of Sian its parts THe Kingdom of SIAN
they seldom are seen abroad Their habit They wear their Garments very long with long loose sleeves those of the Northern Provinces make use of Furs and those of the Southern wear Silk but persons of quality are richly habited and adorned with many Pearls and Precious Stones They are great lovers of Women as also of their bellies commonly eating thrice a day their diet being good and cleanly drest and they as neat in eating it making use of Knifes and Forks They are addicted to Arts and Sciences They are very ingenious and much more industrious and Politick then their Neighbours having the use and understanding of Arts and Sciences both liberal and Mechanical as Philosophy Physick Astronomy concerning the Heavens and Stars the Eclipses of the Sun and Moon c. in the which they have abundance of vain fancies Also they are expert in Musick and making of Musical Instruments Navigation Architecture Painting Sculpture making of Clocks casting of Metals in Images Medals or the like these with several other inventions too tedious to name they had the benefit of before us yet are they not in that perfection as they are with us And as for Armes they have their courage so low Not good Souldiers that both the Souldiers and the Commanders submit themselves to the whip when they have been wanting in their duty so that it was said that when the Tartars affaulted them it sufficed them only to have shewed them the whip to have put them to slight as the Scythians their predeceisors once served their slaves who during their long absence had married their Mistresses It is likewise reported that the China Horses could not suffer the weighing of the Tartarian Coursers and the Chinois Cavaliers being of the same humor they were more likely to run than fight Moreover the Chinois are very ceremonious courteous and great complementers for which they have several Printed Books which they teach their children not passing by any one that they know without kind salutations and if they happen to espy any friend which comes out of the Country besides their kind greeting his first question will be to ask him whether he hath dined or supped which if he hath not he will carry him to a Tavern and give him a treatment of Flesh Fowle and Fish and if he hath din'd a collation of Fruits and Conserves They are also very costly in their Feasts and Entertainments as in variety of Meats Fruits Preserves to which may be added other delights as Musick Singing Dancing Plaies and other pastimes And for persons of quality they observe more state some Feasts lasting about 15 or 20 days They have several days which they make great account of in Feastings and merriments but above all others their new years day which is in March where also their Priests are present at their rejoycings adding to the solemnity of the day Sacrifices which they make to their Gods In their Marriages they also very expensive in their Feasts for the Bridegroom receives no other Portion from her friends then what they bestow in their entertainments but on the contrary he gives her a Portion which the gives to her friends in thankfulness for their care in her education Their Religion and belief The Chinois may be held as Pagans and Idolaters not knowing the true Religion but worshipping Idolls they invoke the Devil they hold the immortality of the Soul and after this life it goeth to eternal bliss or torment they also hold a kind of Purgatory and that their friends and relations upon their prayers and supplications may have some ease for which purpose they have a day set apart for the performing of this ceremony They have four orders of Religious men they observe all one fashion but are distinguished by their colour they all shave their beards and heads they make use of Beads and say their Matins c. as the European Monks do Mandelsloe saith that they are much addicted to incantations and charmes not doing any thing of concernment without they have first consulted it by their charmes and if they prove not according to their desire they will raile and abuse their Gods with scurrilous language fling them down beat them whip them and tread upon them but when their choler is asswaged they will cogg with them give them good words and pretend sorrow and if the charme favour them then they offer to them Geese Ducks boiled Rice c. These charms are commonly two small pieces of wood one side being flat and the other being hallow which they fling upon the ground and if it happen that the round side of both or of one is downwards they take it for an ill omen if uppermost for good They believe that all things visible and invisible were created by Heaven who by a Vicegerent governs the Universe another who governs all Sublunary things they also add three principal Ministers one looks to the production of Fruits and the generation of Men and Animals another governs the Air and causeth Rain c. and the other governeth the Waters and Sea Mandelsloe saith also Their funeral Ceremonies that at their Funerals they have several ceremonies as soon as any person is deceased they wash his body put on his best Clothes and set him in a Chair where his Wife Children and other Relations kneeling down about him take their leave of him which done they put him into the Coffin set it upon a Table covering him with a Winding-sheet which reaches to the ground on which they draw the Picture of the deceased where they leave him 15 days during which time in some other Room they set on a Table Wine Fruit and Lights for the Priest who watcheth after which time they carry the Corps to the Burial place his Relations commonly mourning for a year The King governs by his own Will The Government of the Kingdom or Empire of China is wholly at the power of the King either to change take away or augment Laws when and as oft as he pleases yet doth he not execute any rigorous Laws upon them scarce acting or imposing any thing upon his Subjects without the Advice of his Council of State besides this Council of State he appoints others as well for the Administration of Justice as for the oversight of other affaires in the Kingdom but they neither inflict any punishment to Criminals or determine any thing of themselves but make their report to the King who decides the same They are very circumspect how they condemn any person not passing their sentence till the offence is found so clear and evident that the offendor is not able to justifie himself they use fair means first for the finding out of the truth and if that will not do they then inflict several tortures upon them their executions are various and more cruel according to the offence committed some being hanged some they impale some they burn their greatest punishment is inflicted on
they cross out It s other chief places are 1 Xauquin a Maritime City 2 Luicheu also seated on the Sea very commodious for Traffick and opposite to the Isle of Aynan from which it is distant about 5 Leagues 3 Lampaca also seated upon the Sea and 4 Nanhium seated far within Land and among the Mountains which parts this Province from Chiamsi The Isle of Aynan its commodities The Isle of AYNAN is also comprehended under this Province and is the greatest of all the Islands that belong to China It is distant from Amacao on the South 50 or 60 Leagues it is almost as long as broad having 50 Leagues from South to North where it almost joyns upon the Southern Coast of China and on the other side regards Cochinchina It abounds in Grains Fruits Tame and Wild Beasts The Sea hath Pearls Lignum Aquilae and Calamba Their Craw-fish taken out of the Water die and grow hard like a Stone which being reduced to Powder serves for a remedy against many diseases The Earth hath Mines of Gold and Silver for which the Inhabitants care little In the midst of the Island the People are likewise half Savages The chief City is Kincenfen seated on the Sea-shore and regarding the Province of Canton The Province of Quancy and its chief Cities The Province of QVANCY which Purchas calls Guansa enjoys the same temperament with Canton yields the same Commodities and with the same plenty but is not so much frequented by Mexchants nor hath scarce any confluence of Strangers the reason is because its Rivers loose and discharge themselves all in the Province and at the City of Canton which forces them to pass through the hands of those of Canton to utter their Merchandizes and receive those of others In this Province there are Ten large Cities of which Quancy is chief all well built and very populous besides about one hundred small ones The Province of Zunnan and its chief places The Province of ZVNNAN which Purchas calls Vanam is the last on the South Coast where it is washed by the Gulf of Cochinchina and on the West where it touches on the Kingdom of Tunquin and on divers People beyond those Mountains which inclose the West of China The Women have here the liverty to go in publick to buy and sell which those of other parts of China do not It hath Mines which yield a kind of Amber redder and less pure then ours but which hath some particular vertue against Fluxes Besides this it transports few Merchandizes into other places This Province hath likewise good store of small and great Cities the chief of which bears the name of the Province and Hilan seated on a Lake so called which is inform of a Crescent The Province of Chiamsi its Trade chief places The Province of CHIAMSI which Purchas calls Lansay is inclosed with Mountains which have their passages open to the Neighbouring Provinces and particularly on the Coast of Canton On the Mountain of Muilin there is a great concourse for the carriages of Merchandizes which are transported from Canton to Nanquin which is done by mounting the River of Canton unto the foot of the Mountain From whence the carriages being taken out of the Vessels are loaden and born upon Mens backs to the other side of the Mountain where there is found another navigable River which crosses the Province Kiamsi till it falls into the famous Jamchuquiam which leads to Nanquin and the Sea This Province is so peopled that a part of its Inhabitants are constrained to spread themselves through all other Provinces of China to seek their fortune It is in one of the Cities of this Province that they make Porcelain the Water here being fit to give it perfection The Earth is fetched from other places beaten and fashioned at the same time the tincture they most commonly apply is Azure some lay on Vermilion others Yellow In this Province are 12 great Cities besides about sixty small ones its chief City being called Nanciam seated on a Lake as is Quianhanfu and others It s other chief places are 1 Kienchan 2 Linbiang 3 Juencheu 4 Nangam The Province of Huquam and its Commodities The Province of HVQVAM is so abundant in Rice that it is able to furnish a good part of China It is likewise rich in Oyls and Fish The Jamchuquian and many other Rivers and Lakes cross it on all sides and carry its Commodities towards Nanquin and to Quincheu It is very populous containing 15 great Cities and about 100 small ones the chief of which are 1 Chingiang 2 Huchang 3 Suchang 4 Yocheu c. The Povince of Suchuen described The Province of SVCHVEN which Mendoza calls Susuan Purchas Soin is one of the lesser Provinces of the Kingdom it is high scituated and pours down its Rivers into the Neighbouring Provinces Here is found good store of yellow Amber and excellent Rhubarb It s chief Cities are in number 8 together with about 120 lesser ones all which are exceeding populous the chief bearing the name of the Province The Province of Quicheu and its chief places The last of the Provinces I have to treat of is QVICHEV or likewise CVTCHEV according to Purchas It borders on the People Timocoves Gueyes the Kingdom of Ciocangue and the People called Layes Here is that famous Lake Câ—ncui-Hai from whence comes divers Rivers which water China They make here quantity of Arms of all sorts to serve against those People which border upon them which once belonged to China but which now for the most part are Enemies to it This Province is Hilly and unever which makes it not very fertil in Corn Fruits c. but it hath abundance of Quicksilver and also it breeds the best Horses of any Province in all China Cities in this Province are very few there being not above 15 both small and great the chief of which are 1. Quicheo seated on the River Yanchuquianâ— 2. Rueyang 3. Hianchoau 4. Liping 5. Cipan c. All these Provinces or rather all these Kingdoms of China are governed by divers Magistrates which those of Europe call in general Mandarins These are persons that have Patents whom the King or chief Officer of State doth chuse after knowledge of their capacity and honesty the degrees given to Students the general and particular Governments the charges of the Militia the receipt of and management of Revenues the building and repairing of Publick Buildings the Civil and Criminal Justice are in their hands And there are Appeals from one to the other according to the order and nature of Affairs The Council of Estate always resides near the person of the King and hath a general eye over the Kingdom But it shall suffice what we have said of China let us finish by saying That we have described it as it was before the Tartars made an irruption in â—618 These Tartars kept it wholly for some years since which
on the side of a lofty Mountain which regards the Sea now the chief City of this Province Its Streets and Houses are in good order it is adorned with many sumptuous Mosques some Monasteries and Colledges for Students in the Law of Mahomet and many fair Hospitals for the relief of the Poor Its Castle is good and strong seated on the River Guad al Quibir that is Great River 2. Ghegel formerly famous is now only a Borough of 500 ill-built Houses It s Castle is very good its Land hath little Corn store of Hemp Figs and Nuts They hold this place to have been the beginning of the fortune of Barbarossa 3. Labez makes a separate Estate above Bugia and consists only in Mountains of so difficult access that the Kings of Algier and the Turks can scarce force them to pay Tribute The chief Fortress of these Mountains and the residence of their King or Xeque is Calaa The others are 4. Coco de Teleta 5. Tezli at the foot of the Mountain These Mountains have little Corn or Fruit they can raise 5000 Horse 5000 Harquebusiers and 20000 Men armed after their mode all valiant and better defenders of their liberty than those of Couco 6. Necaus 7. Mesila are beyond the Abez but near the same River Necaus is the most pleasant place of all Barbary It hath something of particular in its publick Buildings every House hath its Garden so embellished with Flowers Vines Fruits and Fountains that it seems a Terrestrial Paradise 8. Chollum 9. Gergelum c. Province of Constantina its parts and chief places The Province of CONSTANTINA hath sometime had its Kings This is the New Numidia of the Ancients the most Occidental part of the True Africa and which touches on Mauritania to the West the River Sugefmar making the separation This Province comprehends three quarters of which that of Constantina extends to the Sea and a good way in the Land that of Bona likewise on the Sea but little on land that of Tebessa is farther in the Land touching on Billedulgerid 1. Tebessa formerly Thebeste The City of Tebessa surpasses as they say all other Cities of Barbary in three things In the force of its Walls beauty of its Fountains and great number of its Wall-nut Trees In counter-change its Inhabitants are brutish its Houses ill built and its Air unwholsom 2. Bona of old Hippo Regnis ill inhabited at present The City of Bona. part of its Inhabitants being retired into the Mountains hath been famous to Antiquity for its greatness but much more for its Bishop St. Augustine so famed among the Doctors of the Church It hath suffered great changes under the Romans Vandals Moors and afterwards under Barbarossa 3. Tabarca a City and Isle is of this Government likewise the Hills and Mountains of Bona where are gathered much Fruits of Jujubes Grains and store of Cattle and the Coast hath red white and black Corral which the French near to Bona and the Genouese near to Tabarca go to fish for The Family of the Lomolins in Genoua having a Fortress in the Isle of Tabarca the French a Bastion between Tabarca and the Point of Mascara the one and the other for the security of their Fishing and Commerce 4. Constantina The City of Constantina which the Moors called Cusuntina the Ancients Cirta Julia is a great City not having less than 8000 Houses It s scituation on a Mountain which hath but two Advenues the rest being Precipice makes it strong The River Sufegmar washes the foot of the Mountain its Castle stands to the North Collo and Sucaicada on the Coast are under the Government of Constantina likewise the Mountains which extend themselves to the Mediterranean Sea and to the confines of Bona. The Country about Constantina is fertil its Mountains tilled Collo hath its Inhabitants more civil than those of Constantina those having no trade but with those of Billedulgerid the others with those of Europe The Inhabitants of the Mountains can raise about 40000 Men and maintain themselves almost in liberty both against the Kings of Algier and the Arabs 5. Cirta in the Roman History was the residence of many Kings of Numidia The City of Cirta among others of Massinissa afterward of Syphax who drove Massinissa from his Estates and settled himself at Cirta with his Wife Sophonisba who had been promised to Massinissa This Woman a little after having perswaded Syphax to favour Carthage of which she was against the Romans drew their Arms into his Estate where Scipio defeated and took Syphax Prisoner Massinissa besieged and took Cirta where Sophonisba was who had so many attractions and so much cunning that in the same day she beheld her self Captive and Wife to Massinissa But she killed her self soon after that she might not fall into the Romans hands and be led in Triumph through Rome 6. Stora and 7. Mabra both Maritim Towns The Kingdom of TUNIS The Kingdom of Tunis and its division Into Governments THE Kingdom of TVNIS besides its particular Province hath sometimes extended it self over Constantina and Bugia on one side and over Tripoli and Ezzab on the other At present it hath only its own Province and something in Billedulgerid This Kingdom of Tunis is divided into 4 Maritim Governments and 3 or 4 Inland ones The Maritim are Biserta Goletta Sousa and Africa Begge Vrbs Cayroan and part of Billedulgerid are the third or fourth within Land Altogether extend themselves from the River Guad il Barbar unto that of Capes this separating them from the Kingdom of Tripoli the other from the Province of Constantina The chief Rivers of Tunis The River Guad il Barbar or Hued il Barbar takes its source near Vrbs which it waters with a Channel made on purpose and discharges it self into the Sea near Tabarca In its course it makes so many turnings and windings that it must be passed 25 times in the Road between Bona and Tunis and that with much difficulty and danger there being no Bridges and scarce any Boats to Ferry over The River Capes of old Triton descends from Billedulgerid and waters at first a very Sandy Country leaves Capes on the Right and on the Coast of Tripoli and disburthens it self into the Little Syrtes now the Gulph of Capes Magrada another River hath its Spring likewise in Billedulgerid on the Confines of Zeb which it waters in part washes Tebessa of the Province of Constantina cuts the Kingdom of Tunis into two almost equal parts and disburthens it self in the Sea near Garilmesse between Tunis and Hammamet Its increases are sometimes extraordinary and all of a sudden so that Travellers are often forced to wait some days for a passage The Government or City of Benserta BENSERTA of old Vtica is a City but of an indifferent greatness but strong and peopled with about 6000 Families It looks Eastward on a Gulph so called which is about 16000 Paces long and 8000
little favourable encounters thereabout In the end he happily defeated both Scipio and Juba near to Thapsus now Elmedia and after that defeat Cato despairing slew himself at Vtica now Benserta Scipio saved himself in some Ships but being met by Caesars Fleet passing his Sword through his Body he precipitated himself into the Sea Juba would have retired to Zama where he had left his Wives Children and Treasures but Zama having refused to open him the Gates He and Petrejus retired into a House in the Fields where they killed themselves During this War and almost upon the landing of Caesar hapned near Hammametha a thing incredible which was that 30 Gaul-Horsmen assaulted a Post of 2000 Moorish Horse put them to rout and pursued them into the City For Zama or Zama Regia it is far distant from the position which Ptolomy gives it and from that of Ortelius which we at other times and which all others have since followed This Author places it 500000 Paces from Carthage and 600000 from Adrumetum but it appears both by the Roman History and by the Itinerary Table not to be distant from Carthage above 100 or 120000 Paces and from Adrumetum 100000 Paces or little more The Governments or Cities of Bigge and urbs BEGGE or Beija and VRBS this in the Road from Tebessa to Tunu that in the way from Constantina to Tunis are both seated in fair Plains so fertil in Grains particularly Begge that those of Tunis say that if they had two Begges they would yield as many Corns as there is Sand in the Sea and nigh to Vrbs is Camud Arbes Musti and Marmagen all fair Cities The Government or City of Cayroan CAYROAN of old Thesdrus ought as it seems to be among the Maritim Governments since it holds on the Coast Tobulha Asfachusa and some other places but its principal place being on the main Land its Government is likewise esteemed to be within the Land This City is seated in a Sandy-plain which affords neither Grain Fruit nor scarce any Water but what is preserved in Cisterns it is about 100 miles from Tunis and about 36 from any part of the Sea It was first built by Hucha who was the first that conquered Africk for the Saracens who adorned it with a stately Mosque supported on Pillars of Marble of which two or three are very fair ones and of a prodigious greatness who also placed in it a Colledge of Priests and now in much esteem being the residence of a High Priest of the Law of Mahomet and to this place from all parts of the Country the Corps of their chief Men are brought to be interred who believe that by the Prayers of those Priests they shall find a shorter way to Heaven than if interred at any other place Its Inhabitants are now reduced to about 4 or 500 Families Not far from Cayroan Mountains of Zaghoan and Gueslet are the Mountains of Zaghoan and Gueslet the last not above 12000 Paces distant both the one and the other have divers foot-steps of Roman Buildings But I believe it was from the last that Scipio considered the Battel between Massinissa King of Numidia and Asdrubal chief of the Carthaginians and of this encounter Scipio would sometimes say to his Friends That he was the third who had had the pleasure to see a famous Battel without having run any resigoe to wit Jupiter from the top of Mount Ida and Neptune from some eminence in the Isle of Samothrace who beheld the Battels between the Trojans and Greeks and himself this between Massinissâ— and the Carthaginians The other Cities of this Kingdom of Tunis and towards Billedulgerid are Caffa Hama Techios Neifa and Nafta The Kingdom of TRIPOLI Kingdom of Tripoli THE Kingdom of TRIPOLI takes up the just moiety of the Coast of Barbary from Capes unto Egypt and divides it self into two principal parts or Provinces which bear likewise the Title of Kingdoms to wit Tripoli and Barca Tripoli is between the two Syrtes now the Sands or Banks of Barbary These are Gulphs of different greatness but of the same nature infamous for the Shipwreck of Vessels lost on their Flats or Rocks among which the depth of the Water is very unequal and changes often there being sometimes much sometimes a little and sometimes none at all The Little Syrtes now the Gulph of Capes separates Tripoli from Tunis The Great Syrtes now the Gulph of Sydra divides it from Barca this towards the East the other towards the West and on the South it is bounded with Billidulgerid and on the North with the Mediterranean Sea It s principal Cities are El-Hamma Capes Zoara the two Tripolies Old and New Sarmana Lepeda c. 1. El-Hamma is in the Land It s chief places and people Capes and the rest on the Sea between El-Hamma and Capes is a Lake excellent against Leprosie 2. Capes of Old Tacapa hath good Walls and a good Castle but its Port dangerous and incapable to receive either many or great Vessels it is scituate at the fall of the River Triton into the Lesser Syrtes 3. Zoara of old Pisida between Capes and Tripoli hath its Land so dry that the Inhabitants are forced to water it and yet will scarce produce any thing save Barley and some Fruits among which Lotos with which they make an excellent Metheglin but it lasts good not above 9 or 10 days Flesh is here very scarce they not having wherewith to feed Beasts The Arabs frequent their Markets and serve them with Wools wherewith they make Cloaths and other Manufactures 4. Tripoli the Old of old Sabrata and which the Arab of Nubia calls the Tower of Sabrat hath only some Hamlets and Remnants of fair and stately Edifices 5. The New Tripoli of Old Oea is better maintained Tripoli and the Trade thereof though it hath many Ruins by reason of the divers changes it hath had The disposition of its places Streets and the order of its Buildings is agreeable being adorned with many fair Mosques Colledges Hospitals c. The Inhabitants subsisted only on their Commerce which is of what they got from their Palm-Trees Lotos and Linnen-Cloth which they uttered in Africa Sicily and Malta besides their black and Ethiopian Slaves which they sold till of late they have much enriched themselves by Piracy it being the usual retreat for Pirates who infest these Seas and do much mischief to Christian Merchants on the Coasts of Italy Sicily and elsewhere 6. Lepeda is in some repute as it was in the time of the Arab of Nubia and more under the Romans Farther is the Great Syrtes at the bottom of which is the Isle Sydra which communicates its name to the Gulph and on the Firm Land are the Tombs of Philenes or Arae Philenarum which set the Limits between Africa and Libya and afterwards between the Estates of the Carthaginians and the Cyrenians and in fine of the Eastern Empire against that of the West
on the top thereof grow certain Strings which resemble Hair the great end of the Branches appearing like Hands extended forth and the Dates as Fingers And so much for Egypt LIBYA INTERIOR which doth comprehend ZAHARA or SAARA with its Parts or Provinces of ZANHAGA Tegassa ZUENZIGA Zuenziga Ziz Ghir TARGA Hair Targa LEMPTA Lempta Dighir Agades BERDOA Berdoa BORNO Borno Kaugha Amasen GAOGA Gaoga The Land of NEGROES with its Parts or Kingdoms as they lie On this side the Niger as GUALATA Guadia Angra Arguya GENEHOA Genehoa Walade Ganar Samba-Lamech TOMBUT Tombut Salla Berissa Guegneve AGADES Agades Deghir Mura CANUM Cano Tassana Germa CASSENA Cassena Nebrina Tirca GANGARA Gangara Semegonda Between the Branches and about the Mouth of the Niger as JALOFFES Emboule Lambaya Yagoa Bersola Nabare Besu Catcheo Boyla Codan Julieto GAMBIA CASANGUAS BIAFARES Emboule Lambaya Yagoa Bersola Nabare Besu Catcheo Boyla Codan Julieto Beyond the Niger as MELLI Melli. SOUSOS Beria MANDINGUE Mandinga Tocrur GAGO Gago Dau. GUBER Guber ZEGZEG Zegzeg Channara ZANFARA Zanfara Reghebil GUINY and regarding the Atlantick Ocean with its Parts or Kingdoms of MELEGUETTE with its chief Places as they lie On the Sea as Bugos Timaa Bagga Serbora Masfah Faly Hamaya Samwyn Crou and Growaly Within Land as Bolombere Quinamora GUINY particularly so called or the IVORY or GOLD Coast with its chief places as they lie On the Sea as Tabo Taboe Petoy Wetoe Moure Nassau St. George del Mina Cormantir Berku Pompena Within Land as Laboure Uxoo Quinimburm Acanes Grandes Dauma Aâ—â—â—raus Adios St. Eaurenco Zabandu Buma Roggis Jamo BENIN with its chief Places as they lie On the Sea as Popou Jackeyn Loebo Fosko Borli Bodi and Cesge Within Land as Bâ—din Oâ—verre Aâ—ovon and Curamo ZAHARA That is DESART Zahara its name and description of the Country IN our Africa or Libya Interior we have placed ZAHARA the Country of the NEGROES and GVINY Zahara is an Arab name and signifies Desart and this name is taken from the quality of the Country so the Arabs divide the Land into three sorts Cehel Zahara and Azgar Cehel hath only Sand very small without any Green Zahara hath Gravel and little Stones and but little Green Azgar hath some Marshes some Grass and little Shrubs The Country is generally hot and dry it hath almost no Water except some few Wells and those Salt if there fall great Rains the Land is much better But besides the leanness of the Soil there is sometimes such vast quantities of Grasshoppers that they eat and ruin all that the Earth produceth Through this Country the Caravans pass which adds no small advantage unto it It is so barren and ill inhabited that a Man may travel above a week together without seeing a Tree or scarce any Grass as also without finding any Water and that Water they have is drawn out of Pits which oft-times is covered with Sand and tastes very brackish so that many times Men die for want of it which knowing the defect those Merchants which travel in this Country carry their Water as well as other Provisions on their Camels backs It s People The People are Bereberes and Africans likewise Abexes and Arabs of which the first are seated in the most moist places the others wander after their Flocks Some have their Cheques or Lords almost all follow Mahometism Though the Air be very hot yet it is so healthful that from Barbary the Country of the Negroes and other places Sick people come as to their last remedy It s division and parts described This great Desart is divided into seven principal Parts of which the three Western are Zanhaga Zuenziga and Targa or Hair The four towards the East are Lempta Berdoa Gaoga and Borno Almost every part reaches the full breadth and all together make but the length of this Desart ZANHAGA is most Westward Zanhaga and touches the Ocean with this Desart are comprehended those of Azaoad and Tegazza This last yields Salt like Marble which is taken from a Rock and carried 2 3 4 or 500 Leagues into the Land of the Negroes and serves in some places for Money and for this they buy their Victuals These People use it every moment letting it melt in their Mouths to hinder their Gums from corrupting which often happens either because of the heat which continually reigns or because their food corrupts in less than nothing In the Desart of Azaoad and in the way from Dara to Tombut are to be seen two Tombs the one of a rich Merchant and the other of a Carrier The Merchants Water being all gone and ready to die for want buys of the Carrier who had not overmuch one Glass full for which he gave him 10000 Ducats a poor little for so great a Sum but what would not a man do in necessity yet at the end the Carrier repented his bargain for both the one and the other died for want of Water before they could get out of the Desart Those near the Sea have some Trade with the Portugals with whom they change their Gold of Tibar for divers Wares To the Hono ble the Governour Sub Governour Deputy Governour Court of Assistants of the Hono ble Company of Royall Adventurers of England tradeing into Affrica This Mapp is humbly dedicated by Ric. Blome â—FRICA or LIBIA ULTERIOUR Where are the COUNTRIES of SAARA DESERT â—he COUNTRIE of NEGROES and GUINE With the Circumjacent Countries and Kingdoms Designed by Monsieur Sanson Geographer to the French King and Rendered into English by Richard Blome By the Kings Especiall Command Printed for Richard Blome The Country or Desert of ZVENZIGA Zuenziga under the name of which passes that of Cogdenu and is more troublesom and dangerous than that of Zanbaga as also more destitute of Water and yet it hath many People among others certain Arabs feared by all their Neighbours and particularly by the Negroes whom those Arabs take and sell for Slaves in the Kingdom of Fez But in revenge when they fall into the hands of the Negroes they are cut into so many pieces that the biggest that remains are their two Ears It s chief places are Zuenziga and Ghir The Desart of TARGA or HAIR some esteem this last the name of the Principal Place Targa and the other of the People is not so dry nor troublesom as the two others There are found many Herbs for Pastures the Soil indifferent fruitful and of a temperate Air. They have some Wells whose Water is good In the Morning there falls store of Manna which they find fresh and healthful of which they transport quantity to Agades and other places It s chief places are Targa and Hair LEMPTA is likewise esteemed the name of a People Lempta and its principal place also Digir This Desart is dry and more troublesom than that of Targa and its People haughty brutish and dangerous to them that cross it going from Constantina
the Bell which being fed with Sugar-Canes after the Juyce is drawn out grow fat and become so excellent that their Pullain is accounted for no value to them even for sick people The middle of the Isle is filled with Mountains which are loaden with a great number of Trees which are always covered with Clouds which so moisten the Trees that from them â—alls so much fresh water as makes many little streams which waters all parts of the Island The Portugals have built the City Pavoasan containing about 〈◊〉 or 800 Houses and some Forts to defend the Port They have erected a Bishoprick and do allow of no Religion but the Christian This Town is vell frequented by Portugal Merchants who trade in the Commodities aforesaid The Inhabitants are Negroes and very black PRINCES ISLAND hath a little City and the Inhabitants live conveniently the Isle being fruitful Princes Island yielding Fruits Sugar some Ginger c. Once taken by the Hollanders who for some reasons soon abandoned it The Island of Annobon The Island of ANNOBON yields Sugars Cottons Cattle and excellent Fruits especially large Oranges In this Isle there is a Town of 100 or 120 Houses of Blacks who are governed by some few Portugals The Isle of St. Hellena The Island of St. HELLENA was first discovered by the Portugals upon the 21 of May on which day is celebrated the memory of St. Helena the Mother of Constantine the Great from whom it took its name This Isle is so fertile that it is observed no place in all Europe yields the like plenty for with manuring and cultivating the Earth it produceth excellent Fruits which are here found all the year It hath great store of Barbary Hens Feasants Partridges Pigeons Quails Peacocks with several sorts of small Birds in great plenty it hath also Goats Swine c. Yet this Isle is not inhabited but serves for the English Portugals Spaniards and Hollanders to refresh themselves in going but for the most part in returning from the Indies it being sufficient to furnish Ships with Provision for their Voyage here being Salt to preserve the Meat from stinking and besides the Air is so healthful that they often leave their sick people there who in a short time are restored to perfect health and by the next Ships that put in there are taken in again During which time they find wherewithal to feed them But some years ago the Hollanders ruined all that was good only to spite the Spaniards who afterwards did the same that the English Hollanders c. might have no profit by it This Island is well furnished with good Waters which alone is a great refreshment to Ships Other Isles not inhabited The Islands of FERNAND POO St. MATTHEWS and ASCENSION are also not inhabited and of no great account nor much known which we shall pass by saying only that they have some Fowls Wild Beasts and their Seas yield Fishes NVBIA Nubia and its bounds NVBIA is bounded on the North West and South almost every where with Mountains which separate it from the Desart of Barca and Egypt on the North from Saara and the Negroes on the West and from the Abyssins on the South the rest towards the East is hounded in part by the Nile which separates it from the Isle of Gueguere in part by an Imaginary Line which separates it from divers Provinces of which some belong to the Turks who hold all that is on the Red Sea which they have taken from the Abyssins It s length and breadth It s chief places NVBIA thus taken makes a long square whose length from South-West to North-East is about 400 Leagues and its breadth from South-East to North-West almost every where 200 Leagues The chief Cities of Nubia are Cusa Gualva Dancala Jalac and Sula according to the Arab of Nubia Moreover and in the same Author I find that Tamalma Zaghara Mathan Angimi Nuabia Tagua and some others fall likewise in Nubia and by some Authors Gorham which some would put among the Negroes should be likewise in Nubia because it is on the Nile There where it can have no communication with the Negroes who ought to be upon and about the Niger Likewise Damocla towards the Negroes and Bugia towards Egypt ought to be esteemed in Nubia The City of Gorham Gorham is on the Nile and on the Coast of the Isle Gueguere Sanutus make a Kingdom a Desart and a People of this name and extends them almost alâ— the length of the Isle Gueguere not making any mention of the City of this name nor John Leon of Africa nor the Arab of Nubia nor Vincent Blanck who saith he hath been in these quarters and speaks only of the Desart oâ— Gorham Other Authors make mention of this City and describe it on the Nile Sanutus saith that there are found Emeralds in those Mountains which bound Gorham on the South Except only Gorham the Arab of Nubia observes the distances between all the other Cities which we have taken notice of and saith that Tamalma hath many Inhabitants no Walls makes little account of Mathan and Angimi Moreover he esteems Mathan the Residence of the King of Canem who holds here many Cities makes Zaghara better and saith it hath some Trade Tagua and Nubia more from which last the Region and People took their names John Leon and Sanutus after him esteems Dancala or Dangala the chief of the Kingdom seated on the Nile and that it hath about 10000 Families And he saith its Houses are built with Chalk and covered with Laths or Boards The Inhabitants civil and rich driving a good Trade through all Egypt even to Cairo whither they carry Arms Cloths Civet Sanders and Ivory They have a certain Poyson worth 100 Ducats an Ounce which they sell only to strangers which promise not to use it in the Countrey And also Bugia seated on the Nile a City of some account and Trade as is Jalac Gualva and Cusa also seated on the Nile The Empire of the ABISSINES or the HIGHER AETHIOPIA wherein are comprehended divers Kingdoms Countreys Coasts Isles c. which may be considered as they lye Northernly and towards EGYPT as The Kingdom of NUBIA with its Estates and Cities of Gorham Jalac Mathan Gualva Dancala Cusa Zaghara Bugia Angimi Tamalma Sula Tagua North-Easternly and towards the Red Sea as The Coast of ADEX which comprehendeth the Kingdom of BARNAGASSO Suaquen Ercocco Carna Corberia Barva Zama ISLES of Bahia Suaquem Mire Macruma St. Peitre Easternly and towards the Sea of ZANGUEBAR as The Coast of AJAN which comprehendeth the Kingdom of ADEA Brava Magadoxa Barraboa Quilmanca Kingdom of ADEL Adel Zeila Barbora Meta. ISLE of Zocotora The Coast of ZANGUEBAR with its Estates and Cities of Mongale Chelicia Pate Lamon Angos Mongalo Melinda Mombaze Angos Quiloa Mozambique Darcelum ISLES about the Coast of ZANGUEBAR as Monfia Santus Rochus Zanzibara Penda Southernly Westernly and towards the Kingdom of CONGO
or the LOWER AETHIOPIA where are the Kingdoms or Provinces of TIGREMAHON Chuxumum Saibana ANGOTA Angotina Bugano St. Maria. XOA Xoa FATIGARA Mundinae CANCALA Degibeldara Degibelcora BAGAMEDRI Chilcut Ermita Azuga Baza Machanda GOYAME Chilcut Ermita Azuga Baza Machanda AMBIAN Cemenia Ambiami Amasen Syre DAMBEA Ambadara Chedaflan VANGUE Matagazi Vangue DAMOUT Damute Harode Gaga AMARA Amara Fungi Baraena Burn. AMBIAM Ambiam Therva Azuga Ougne Losa Sesila Agola GEMEN Gemen Dara Jaflan GORGA Gorga Bara Gafat GAVI-GASA Gasabella NAREA Falaccia Gavi Zet GAFATES Cafates Maurama FUNGI Fungi QUARA Quara Nova AGAG Agag Gorava Giarva A MAPP OF THE HIGHER AND LOWER AETHIOPIA COMPREHEND Y E SEVERAL KINGDOMES c IN EACH TO WITT IN THE EMPIRE OF THE ABISSINES THE COAST OF ZANGUEBAR ABEX AND AIAN WITH THE KINGDOMES OF NUBIA AND BIAFARA c IN THE LOWER AETHIOPIA THE KINGDOM OF CONGO Y E EMPIRE OF MONOMOTAâ— AND MONOEMUGY yâ— COAST AND LANDS OF CAFRES AND OF THIS SIDE CAPE NEGRES With the Isles of Madagasoar c by Monsieur Sanson Geograper to the French King To the Rt. Worshipfull Sr. William Glynne of Bissister in Oxfordshire of Hawarden in Flintshire Bart. This Mapp is humbly DD by R.B. THE EMPIRE OF THE ABYSSINGS Or THE Higher Aethiopia Empire of the Abissins its extent length breadth ABYSSIN or the Empire of the ABYSSINS is commonly called the Higher and Great AETHIOPIA because it makes the greatest and better part of the one and the other Aethiopia and is the greatest and most considerable Estate of all Africa under one name It extends it self on this side and beyond the Equinoctial Line from the Mountains of the Moon and the Springs of the Nile even near unto Egypt and from the Kingdoms and Estates of Congo and the Negroes unto the Coasts of Zanguebar Ajan and Habex It s greatest length from South to North is 800 Leagues It s breadth from West to East 4 5 and sometimes 600 and in Circuit about 2500. Its parts Some divide this great Estate into many Kingdoms and Provinces as are set down in the Geopraphical Table of the Higher Aethiopia we shall observe the most known Kingdom of Barnagasso described BARNAGASSO signifies King of the Sea because formerly all this Kingdom or Government held all the Coast of the Red Sea from Egypt unto the Kingdom of Dancala which is 250 Leagues At present the Turks hold this Coast where are Suaquen Mezzua Arquico which we will describe with Zanguebar under the name of the Coast of Habex Barva or Daburova is esteemed the chief of Barnagasso after which some put Canfila Daffila and Emacen others esteem Canfila and Daffila Provinces or Governments and Emacen a City of the Government of Daffila 20 Leagues from Barva 50 from Suaquen Chaxumo is the chief of Tigre a fair City and according to the common opinion the Ordinary Residence of the Queen of Sheba or Saba that came to see Solomon Both the City and Quarter of Sabain not far from Chaxumo seem to retain the name There are every where here abouts found a great many fair Churches Angotine is a City in the Kingdom of Angota and here they use Salt or little pieces of Iron instead of Money Kingdom of Amara described The Kingdom of AMARA is farnous by reason of its Mountain where the Children and nearest of Kinred to the Grand Negus are guarded This Mountain is very high of a great circuit and whose approaches are very difficult being craggy on all sides and easie to defend which made this use be made of it to keep those which may cause any commotion in the Estate The top of the Mountain is formed into a great Plain where there are fair Buildings many Cisterns a rich Monastery c. Some speak wonders of this Mountain and that the Grand Negus being deceased they take thence him who is the trueinterior if he be capable to govern the Estate if not the second or third c. in order Others say that there are no such things as they put here neither Monastery Library Gold Precious Stones c. Kingdom of Bagamedri with its Provinces c. described BAGAMEDRI is subdivided into Provinces like to Tigre hath a greater extent and should be better lying along the Nile The Prince resides often at Dambea which is beyond the Nile as well as Damout Some place the Springs of the Nile in Goyame others in Cafates The one and the other Kingdom being about the Lake of Zaire Goyame where this Lake reduces it self into a River which is the Nile Cafates on one of the principal Rivers of those that fall into the Lake which apparently should be called the Nile Narea is between the Lake of Zaire and Zafflan which are two Lakes from whence descend the principal Rivers which make the Nile The Air fertility commodities c. of the Abissin The Air of Abissin is very temperate considering its situation Tigremaâ—on particularly is esteemed so by reason of the Northerst Winds which reâ—â—esh it All the Country is in Plains except some Mountains which are espeâ—â—ally towards its bounds The Soyl is generally good fruitful in Grains and Pulse of which it hath excellent not known to us they have few Vines as also few Herbs the Grasshoppers much annoying them The Land feeds many tame and wild Beasts and much Fowl among others an infinite number of Turtles Their Rivers have Croâ—odiles and River-Hoâ—ses which they call Gomaras it is a hardy Fish and will assault men in the Water It hath much Metals as Gold Silver Lead Tin and the Mountains so full of Sulphur that they may afford wherewith to make Salt-peter more then any Country in the World Tigremahon hath Mines of Gold Silver Iron Lead Copper and Sulphur Damout hath more Gold then all the rest Bagamedri and Goyame hath likewise Gold The Inhabitants are generally black some more some less they are for the most part of a good stature flat nosed woolly haired of a nimble spirit and very jovial They have scarce any thing of Literature neither do they much desire to attain to any They Coyn neither Gold nor Silver but receive it by weight Some Authors make this Prince so rich that there is scarce any in the World hath so much present Gold in his Coffers Sanutus saith that he once offered to the Kings of Portugal a Million of Drams of Gold and as many men to exterminate the Infidels It s People And Queen Helena writing to Emanuel of Portugal and speaking for her Grand-child David saith that if the King of Portugal would furnish them with 1000 Vessels of War and People fit for the Sea that she would on her part Its Kings very rich and powerful furnish them with all things necessary for the War and give them 200 Millions of Gold and that she had Men Gold and Provisions in suchgreat number and plenty as there were Sands in the Sea or Stars in
the Firmament Zaara King of Aethiopia led against Asa King of Judah 90000 Foot and 10000 Horse which are 100000 Men. Pliny esteems the Isle of Meroes alone have 250000 Men fit to bear Arms and 400000 Artisans At present the Grand Negus is held able to raise a Million of Men and Barnagas alone to furnish 200000 Foot and 20000 Horse The Prince is always in the Field and 5 or 6000 Tents attending on him where are are Churches Hospitals Shops Taverns c. which furnished with all things necessary for himself and his Train There are scarce any Fortresses in the Countrey except where Mountains of themselves make them The Neighbors to this Estate are the Turks who hold all the Coast of Haber on the Red Sea the King of Adel and some others on the Coasts of Ajan and Zanguebar the Monomotapa or the Monoemugi towards the Mountains of the Moon the Congo or some Estates neighboring on Congo and the Negroes towards the West some Kings of Nubia towards the North. Except the Turks the Abissins having no Civil War can easily reduce the greatest part of them to reason or at least hinder them from molesting him ZANGVEBAR Zangâ—â—bar its Coasts or Parts and their Situation UNder the name of ZANGVEBAR I comprehend all the Coasts of the Higher Aethiopia And these Coasts are on the Aethiopian Ocean and the Red Sea or Gulph of Arabia I subdivide them into three parts the Coast of Zanguebar the Coast of Ajan and the Coast of Abex The Coast of Zanguebar extends it self from the Cafres to under the Equator for the space of 5 or 600 Leagues That of Ajan is between the Equator and the Streight of Bab-el-Mandel likewise 600 Leagues The Coast of Abex advances from that Streight to Egypt and hath not above 4000 Leagues The first part was called by the Ancients Barbaria Regio the second Azania Regio and the last Trogloditica Regio The particular Coast of Zanguebar towards the East regards some Isles Zanguebar among which that of Zanguebar which hath communicated its name to the Coast and then those of Penda and Monfia are the best known Maffy makes mention here of the Isle and City of Querimba and Texera of Anisa the one and the other possibly answer to some of those which Sanutas calls St. Rocq and Monfia which he saith are four Islands two great and two small Penda and Zanguebar are the greatest Penda and according to the form Sanutus gives them are each of 100 Leagues circuit Monfia 50 and the others much less All and particularly Zanguebar produceth quantity of Grains as Rice Millet c. quantity of Fruits as Citrons Oranges c. and many Sugar Canes which they know not how to resine nor want they Fountains of fresh Water Aniza and Querimba hath Manna but not so much esteemed as that of other places On the Coast are the Estates or Kingdoms of Mongale on one of the branches of Cuama Angos or Angouche on another Branch or on another River of the same name Mozambique Isle and City on the Coast as likewise Quiloa and Mombaze Melinda is no Isle but on the Coast so are Lamon Pate c. Mongalo and Angos are little considerable their Inhabitants black Mahometans and Pagans they traffick in Gold Ivory Calicoes and Silk The Isle and City of Mozambique is on that Coast of Africa which regards the Isle of Madagascar towards the East Isle and City of Mosambique described and just between the Capes of Good Hope and Guardafuy near 1000 Leagues from the one and the other some account is made of this City and its Fort for the goodness and depth of its Port though small but of a very important retreat for the Vessels of Portugal after they have passed the Cape of Good Hope where oft-times the Heat or the working or motion of the Ship distempers many Men who refresh themselves here there being a very good Hospital and a Magazin always furnished with what ever is needful to finish their Voyage to the East Indies this Port serving them going to the Indies as the Isle oâ— Sancta Helena doth in their return The whole Isle is not above a League and half in circuit It s City is not so beautiful as many have believed it but of a good Trade wealthy and well frequented by the Portugals It s Castle is good since it hath sustained divers Assaults of the Hollanders The Soil is dry hath none or very little Fresh-water but the great number of Fruits as Cocos Oranges Citrons as others common to the Indies and the quantity of Cattle as Oxen Sheep Goats Hogs c. which are found here recompence these Inconveniences Their Figs are long and large being excellent and hâ—althful The Tree sprouts and dies every year it shoots forth but one Branch where many Figs ripen one after another so that they are found to continue almost all the year the Leaves are so great that two will cover a person of a moderate Stature dying it leaves a Root which shoots forth another Fig-Tree the year after Their Swines-flesh is so healthful that Physicians order it for Sick people Their Pullain are good and delicate though their Feathers Flesh Blood and Bones are very black and if boiled in Water as black as Ink. Here they are said to have Sheep whose Tails weigh about 25 pound weight Kingdom of Quiloa its chief places c. QVILOA is 150 Leagues or little more from Mozambique in a strait line and near 250 by Sea It hath two Cites the Old and the new the Old on the main Land the New in an Island divided from it by a small Channel This last is much the fairest its Houses high magnificent and well furnished accompunied with Gardens where they gather excellent Fruits throughout the whole year The Kings of Quiloa once commanded all the Coast into Mozambique and Sofala but this Estate hath received a great change since the coming of the Portugals into these quarters It s People Its Inhabitants are yet rich and have a great traffick for Gold which they bring from the Main Land where there is near as much as on the Coast of Sofala as also Silver Ambergreece Pearls and Musk They are part black part white these coming from Arabia and are Mahometans the others of the Natives are partly Idolaters both the one and the other go clad after the Arab or Turkish manner the richest wearing Cloaths of Gold and Silver Silks fine Calicoâ—s and Scarlet inriching the Guards of their Swords and Daggers with fair Pearls and Precious Stones as the Women do their Ear-Pendants and Bracelets They are very comly of a civil behaviour neat in their Houses and love to go in rich Apparel Here the People are observed to use a strange custom to those of the Female Sex which is not used by any other Nation or People save themselves which is that they sow up the Privy-parts of the Female
also of a barren Soil and its People also barbarous Batta but indifferent well skill'd in Arms and that being forced to it rather to defend themselves than to offend others It s chief places are Batta Agisymba and Gongou PEMBA is held to be the richest and pleasantest Province of all Congo Pemba being very fertil in Grains Fruits c. hath good Water the Air is healthful the Inhabitants since the Portugals sat footing there are become very civil imitating them both in Behaviour and Apparel It s chief City called Banza that is the Court and which the Portagals call St. Salvador It s chief places is the residence of the King seated on an eminence which discovers the Country on all sides This scituation together with its being in the middle of the Estate gives it a great advantage some esteem it to have 10000 Inhabitants others 100000 possibly those understand 10000 Families and those 100000 Souls for the King being powerful and his Court always great there cannot but be multitudes The Isle and City of Loanda on the Coast of Bamba were not long since in the hands of the Portugals now the East India Company of the Vnited Provinces have seized it It s other chief places are Simba Pemba on the River Danda Lemba and Tinda The chief Rivers of Congo The most famous Rivers of this Kingdom are the Zaire the Lelunda the Danda and the Coanza the three last descend from the Lake of Aquilonda the Zaire from the Lake of Zaire from whence descends likewise the Nile the Zaire hath 400 Leagues course is very rapid by reason of the many Cataracts or great falls which it hath from the Mountains at its entrance into the Estates of Congo it enlarges it self much embraces quantity of Islands and at its Mouth hath no less than 8 or 10 Leagues breadth yet presses its Waters 15 or 20 Leagues farther into the Sea and that with so great a violence that its Waters retain their natural sweetness without being corrupted or intermingled with the salt-Salt-waters of the Sea The Rivers Danda and Coanza are Navigable and receive great Ships The Isle of Loandu is near the Mouth of the last It is observed that when the Sea is high the Springs of running-Running-water are fresh and when the Sea falls they become salt The Congolans are naturally very sweet and easie able and strong It s People but dull and idle they will not take the pains to tame Beasts for service nor to employ their fine Stones in Buildings nor make their Birds of Prey for Hawking yet make they curious Cloths Velvets Damasks Brocats c. They have no harmony in their Instruments of Musick but a confused mixture of many cords or strings and many Voices content them their Money is of grey shells taken on the Coast of the Province of Bamba and these Shells especially the Females are much esteemed even in other Kingdoms and almost through all Aethiopia Their Grains Fruits Waters Fowl It s Fertility Sea and River Fish are excellent They have store of Elephants Mines of Silver Iron Chrystal Marble Jaspar Porphyre c. They know not their Histories but by the Reigns of their Kings and without specifying the time for they have no Letters much less Learning and hereupon some would make us believe that Emanuel of Portugal having sent a famous Ambassador into Congo with many Presents among others three fair Books excellently bound and which contained the Cannons the Laws Imperial the Ordinances Civil Right the Infortiate the Rubricks c. and with these Books many Doctors of Law to teach the knowledge of them and when the King of Congo did understand the subject that these fair Books contained and knew the profession of the Doctors he was so surprized that he remained sometime silent but in the end he caused these Books to be burned saying That he feared they would overihrow the very foundation of his Estate and that he contented himself to judge according to reason and need no other Interpreter than Common sense but withal protesting that he would remain a good and intire Friend to Emanuel King of Portugal and so sent back his Doctors The Author of the Essay of the Wonders of Nature applies this story to the King of the Abyssins It is much at one let us return to Congo They say that the Province of Bamba can furnish at a need 400000 strong and Warlike men the other Provinces are no less nor possibly worse peopled than this but less addicted to Arms. This being esteemed the Bulwark of the Kingdom affected to the service of their Prince and so strong that at one blow of a Sword they can strike off an Oxes head or cut a Slave in two Their Elephants are so great that some of their Teeth are found to weigh 200 l. and they make such esteem of their Tails when they are old that sometimes they exchange three Slaves for one Tail They make of them divers Ornaments and Cords for their Instruments of Musick The Kingdom falls only to the Males and in default of Legitimates to Bastards to shun all process all Riches belong to the King who disposes of them to whom he pleases keeping to himself a certain Revenue Christianity hath been introduced about 150 years ago but not without much difficulty in its beginning Estate of Cacongo East of Congo and South of Anziquaines is the Estate of CACONGO and South of Cacongo are the Giaques or Jaggas which the Abyssins call Gallas and others Imbagolas These People are Vagabonds Cruel Men-eaters like to the Anziquaines and Moceveies living only on what they steal from their Neighbours The great Jagge disposes absolutely both of their Idolatry and their War Kingdom of Angola The Kingdom of ANGOLA once Abonda is between Congo on the North Mataman on the South Malemba on the East and the Sea on the West This Kingdom hath 100 Leagues of Coast to wit from the 10th unto the 4th degree of Meridional Latitude and that which continues unto Cape Negro and belongs to divers Lords tributary to it The principal City of the Country is Engaze and likewise Dongo which Modern Authors place at the meeting of many Rivers It is 75 or 80 Leagues from the Sea The Mountains of Cambamba rich in Mines of Silver are in this Country which the Portugals cause to be laboured It s other chief places are Massirgan on the River Coanza Benguela seated on the Sea on the Bay of Thora and Quicongo a Sea-Port Town It s Trade Through the whole Country there is a great traffick for Slaves 20 or 25000 yearly being transported from the Port of Loanda There are such multitudes in this Kingdom that the Grand Soba as they say can in a moment raise 100000 Men and that in Anno 1584 he raised 1200000. In Anno 1585 600000. Yet these last were put to flight by 200 Portugals at the head of 10000 Aethiopians
West and advancing a little towards the South So that St. Anthony and Brava make the two Ends or Points towards the West Bona Vista makes the middle of the half Circle towards the East SANCTA LVCIA St. Nicholas St. NICHOLAS and St. JAGO are the greatest having each 100 or 120000 paces of length 15 20 or 30000 of breadth and 200 or 250000 paces of circuit St. Anthonio and St. Vincent are less by more then half and not of above 100000 paces in circuit the rest which are the least have not above 30 40 or 50000 paces I make no account of seven or eight others whose names have not been given us and which are rather Rocks than Isles St. JAGO is the greatest and the chief of all having a Bishops seat in the City of the same name St. Jago besides which are Ribera Grande with a good Port towards the West Praya towards the East St. Mary towards the North all with their Ports Some place likewise St. Thomas whose Port is dangerous others St. Domingo others St. Michael possibly these fall under some of the others Ribera Grande hath 500 Houses the Air is unhealthful the Land hilly but the Valleys fruitful in Grains Vines Fruits Sugar Canes Millons c. Feeding much Fowl and Cattle and particularly Goats in abundance These Beasts bringing forth young every four Moneths and three of four at a time and the Kids are very fat and delicate Sancta Lucia St. Vincent St. Anthony SANCTA LVCIA is the best peopled after that of St. Jago St. Nicholas St. Vincent and St. Anthony have been esteemed Desert yet they appear to have many Inhabitants though not so many as they could feed The Ships of the Vnited Provinces passing here in 1622. found in that of St Anthony 500 persons Men Women and Children all Aethiopians St. Vincent and St. Nicholas had no less At Mayo these Aethiopians are strong and of good stature but it is to be believed that every where are some Portugals to keep the rest in aw Salt Bona Vista The Isles of SALT of BONA VISTA of MAYO and of St. JAGO yield so great quantity of Salt which is made naturally of the Water which the Sea from time to time leaves that besides what they consume in the Countrey they laded every year more then 100 Ships which is transported into other Countreys and yet there remains six times as much which becomes useless It is reported that the Isle of Mayo could make alone lading for two thousand Sail of Ships yearly and the others not much less The other riches of the Countrey lies in the Skins of their Goats which are in so great quantity through all these Isles that many flocks are seen of 1000 Head The Skins are sent to Brasil Portugal and other places and make excellent Cordovants The Flesh is salted in the Countrey and sold to Ships going and returning from Brasil to the Indies Besides the Salt and Woats which are the principal riches of the Countrey they have many Wild Horses Oxen Apes c. also Cotton whereof they make several Manufactures Also Rice and many sorts of Grains Among their Fowl they have one kind particular to them which they call Flamencos the Feathers of their Bodies are all White and those of their Wings Red as Blood Their Tortoises are not above two or three foot long they come out of the Sea and lay their Eggs in the night covering them with Sand and the heat of the Sun hatches them Fuego Brava In Fuego and Brava they gather Wines which yield little to those of the Canaries The Sargasso Sea Between the Islands of Cape Verde and the main Land inclining towards the Canaries the Sea is called Sargasso because from the 20 to the 24 degree and for the length of 30 40 or 50 Leagues the Sea is covered with an herb like to that which is found in the bottom of Wells and which the Portugals call Sargasso This Herb except that it is more Yellow resembles Sea-Parsley bearing certain Grains or Fruit at the end but of neither taste nor substance Many have been much troubled to know from whence these Weeds come which are distant from the Isles and from the firm Land more then 60 Leagues and in a part of the Sea where there is no bottom found Nevertheless they are so close and in so great quantity that the Water seems rather a Meadow or Green Field then a Sea Ships which fall among these Weeds had need of a good Wind to disingage themselves and I believe it was these which hindred Sataspes from finishing his course about Africa and were the cause of his misfortune This Sataspes Son of Teaspes one of the Achemenides A story of Sataspes having ravished the Daughter of Zopyrus the Son of Magabises was condemned by Xerxes to be crucified His Mother the Sister of Darius caused this punishment to be changed into another to wit he was caused to make the Circumnavigation of Africa which could not be done without great difficulty and hazard He embarked in Egypt passed the Pillars of Hercules entred into the Occidental Ocean and passed far to the South along Africa but knowing that it would yet require much time and pains to end this course he returned into Egypt and thence to the Court where he said he had met with somewhat that hindred his Ship from passing farther Xerxes took him for a liar and made him suffer the death he was before condemned to But to continue The Isles of Cape Verde The Position wherein the Isles of Cape Verde are now found answers much better to the Position of the Fortunate Isles of Ptolomy then that of the Canaries Ptolomy places his Fortunate Isles between the 10 and 16 degree of Latitude the Isles of Cape Verde are between the 13 and 19 the Canaries beyond the 26. The Meridian of the Fortunate Isles of Ptolomy is at 8 degrees of Longitude from the Coast of Africa and towards the West The least Meridian of the Isles of Cape Verde is at 8 degrees of Longitude from the same Coast and towards the same side The least Meridian of the Canaries touches the Coast of Africa Ptolomy confines his Fortunate Isles under one Meridian and extends them from South to North between the tenth to the sixteenth parallel or degrees of Latitude which are five degrees of Latitude The Isles of Cape Verde are not justly under one Meridian but under two or three and extend themselves from the 13 ½ to the 19 which are five degrees of Latitude The Canaries on the contrary are all couched from West to East and almost under the same parallel or degree of Latitude which is the 27 lengthning themselves from the first to the 6 of Longitude These four Reasons are very strong to prove that the Isles of Cape Verde do rather answer to the Fortunate Isles of Ptolomy then the Canaries Their distance in regard of the Aequator is
greatness nor for its fertility neither for Antient renown but by reason it is the residence of the Great Master and Knights of St. John of Jerusalem whom at present we call of Malta where they have settled since they lost Rhodes and because it serves as a powerful Rampire for all Christendom and particularly for Sicily and Naples It s length and breadth The length of the Isle is not above 20 or 25000 paces its breadth 10 or 12000 and its Circuit about 60000 paces which are 20 or 25 Italian miles in length 10 or 12 in breadth and 60 in Circuit The Soil except the Antient City of Malta It s soil and Commodities is almost all stones craggy and dry yet it produces Wheat Barley Cummin and all sorts of Fruits among others Figgs Apricocks Citrons Melons Grapes c. It feeds Horses Asses Mules Hogs Goats Sheep Hares Conies Hens Partridges Quails Faulcons and other Birds of prey And its Beasts Fowl Grains Fruits as likewise their Capers Honey and Cotton of which they make Cotton Cloth and several Manufactures are excellent yet it wants much Corn and Wine for the necessary food of its Inhabitants which are 75 or 80000 souls and among which there are about 15 or 16000 Souldiers besides the Knights so that they are constrained to fetch their provision from Sicily which they have at a certain rate and with priviledge to pay no Custom Its Inhabitants The natural Inhabitants of this Island are said to be miserable churlish and uncivil people of complexion not less tawny then the Moors use the African Language but follow the Religion of the Church of Rome which the Knights are bound to defend Their women are fair who are debarred the society of men and go veiled as not desiring to shew themselves and are guarded after the Italian manner they have here a great many of Curtizans which are tolerated who for the most part are Grecians who sit at their doors playing on Instruments c. to intice men in to them Its Ports Roads and chief places On the Coasts of this Isle and beginning by Malta and turning towards the East South and West c. to make the Circuit the Ports Roads and Harbours which present themselves are Marza or Marza-scala then Marza sirocco where the Turks landed the 19 of May 1565 when they had a design to besiege Malta The Great Master Vignacour hath since caused to be built two Forts which defend the entrance and a third upon that languet or tongue of land which advances into the middle of the Port enough to hinder any for the future from casting Anchor there in quiet continuing towards the Coast which regards the South and far towards the West is nothing but Rocks except it be a little Bay or Golfe of Pietra Negre others call it Pietra Sancta where the 5 of July arrived the first succour in favour of Malta This relief was but of six hundred men who passed from Pietra Sancta to the old City and from thence to the Bourg Il-Borgo which the Turks besieged after having taken the Fort of St. Elmo and this assistance served much to the defence of that place Pietra Sancta regards towards the South The Isle hath oft withstood the fury of the Turks the Rock of Forfolo or Furfura Towards the West are the Golfes or Bayes of Anteofega the Islanders call it Hayntofeca then Muggiaro where the Turks first cast Anchor the 18 of May 1565. Between the West and North is the Bay or Port of Melecca where the great relief arrived the 7 of December following Melecca regards the Island of Goza and in the streight or channel between both are the Isles of Cumin and Cuminat This part of the Isle about Melecca is almost divided from the rest by the Golfe or Port of the Saline Vecchie or old saltpits towards the East and that of Muggiaro towards the West and if the Turks had seized the pass which is between them this assistance had proved vain Next to the Golfe of the old Saline is the Creek and Chapel of St. Paul where according to common tradition he was ship wrackt next is the Creek of new Salines and the Creek of St. George where the Turks dis-imbarked their Ammunitions to serve to assault the Fort St. Elmo And in fine the Ports of Marza Massetto and Marza grande are those where at three several times have been builded and fortified three Cities and divers Forts contiguous to each other It Borgo or the Bourg is 2000 paces in Circuit the Isle of Sengle 1500 each of 1000 or 1200 houses the one and the other so well fortified that they received 70000 Cannot shot and sustained an incredible number of assaults of 60 or 70000 Turks The Arsenal for the Gallyes is yet in the Bourg but there resides there only Malteses and Mariners and in the Isle of Sengle Mariners and Souldiers of Fortune The residence of the Great Master The great Master and the Knights reside at present in the City of Valetta which is now by much the most considerable of these Cities both for its force the advantage of its scituation and the beauty of its publick and private buildings It is built upon Montit Sceberros which forms a Languet of Land all of a Rock and between the Ports of Marza Massetto and Marza grande commanding on all sides and into all parts of the one and the other Port and its ditches to the landward which are cut out of the Rock which are exceeding broad of a very great depth strongly flankt and well fortified The Walls are strong joyn to the Rock and are about 60 foot high and are well provided with Guns c. against any occasion It contains above 2000 houses which are for the most part uniform builded of Free-stone they are commonly two stories high flat at top and with Tarrasses The Market place is spacious from whence several fair Streets do take their rise to every house there is a Cistern to preserve water for their occasions besides these houses there are several stately Structures as the Great Masters Palace which is a gallant Edifice having a Tower which overlooketh the whole Island the Hall or Chamber of Assemblies where they sit in Council is curiously adorned and painted wherein their Fights both by Sea and Land as well at home as abroad are lively represented and this as also the Armory which may on a suddain Arm 20 or 25000 men are in the Great Masters Palace then the Churches of St. Paul and St. John Patron of the Order the one the seat of a Bishop and the other of a Prior are magnificent likewise the seven Alberges of the Knights like so many Palaces where the Commanders of the seven tongues treat the Cavaliers at the expence of the Order The Arsenal near Porto Reale is as well furnished with all sorts of Munition as any in Christendom Also the Hospital of St. Johns towards
Figgs Melons Capers and excellent Grapes c. The manners habit and tongue of the Islanders retain much of the Moors yet they are all Catholicks like to Malta and under the Vice-Roy of Sicily In the midst of the Island and in a Cave is a Pitt which exhales continually an obscure vapour which spreading it self on all sides on the Rock dissolves into water and distills with such abundance that it furnisheth all the Inhabitants have need of not only for their drink and other uses but for their Beasts nor is there any other fresh water in the Isle the Land being dry reddish and so hot that a naked foot can scarce suffer it For the rest the Knights of Malta are alwaies in Arms against the Moors Mahometans and all the Pyrates of the Mediterranean Sea Knights alwaies in Wars and by their expeditions with those few Gallies they have delivered out of their hands a great number of Christian Captives reduced many Mahometans to the Christian Faith maintain their Arms in good reputation and on all occasions which present themselves whether of their own or with other Princes of Christendom they freely employ and venture both their lives and goods in favour of Christians in general and particular But it is time to finish Africa and to say that if we would have believed certain Authors among the Antients this Africa had been represented to us with unsupportable heats unsufferable droughs fierce and cruel Beasts perfidious Men horrible and afrightful Monsters whereas time which daily discovers things unknown to the Antients hath made us see that the greatest heats of Africa have some refreshments that the driest sands have some wells some waters that the vastest solitudes have some green fields some Fruits that the Beasts are not so dangerous but that Men may desend themselves from their fury nor the Men so faithless but that they have Commerce and Society among themselves as also with Strangers that their Dragons Serpents Griffons c. are for the most part imaginary And moreover the generosity of its Lyons the docility of its Camels the Feathers of its Estriches the odour of its Civets the swistness of its Barbes the agility of its wild Asses the greatness of its Elephants the strength of its Eagles the diversity of its Parroquets and the wantonness of its little Monkeys c. recompence the mischief which other Beasts may do And though there are as yet some people fierce and Man-eaters the most part of the others are very ingenious and tractable The Egyptians have long since sufficiently made known their cunning in Sciences Arts and Arms so have the Carthaginians c. and the Antients esteemed the Aethiopians the most innocent and justest men in the world believing the Gods sometimes banqueted with them Besides there are many particulars worthy of observation in Africa what City was ever fairer or more magnificent than THEBES in the higher Egypt Than MEMPHIS in the middle Or A LEXANDRIA in the lower Out of Egypt what City was ever richer more powerful or more proud than CARTHAGE except Rome And at present PEZ is so splendid that there is no City in Europe to be compared with it though many believe it not to compare to CAIRO in Egypt Among the Seven Wonders of the World some place three in Egypt alone the Statue of MEMNON at Thebes the PYRAMIDES near Memphis and the PHARVS of Alexandria Commodities of Africa Not only these beautiful Works and fair Cities not only the infinite quantity of Gold and other Metals Precious stones Grains Fruits Spices Druggs Wines Oyls Sugars Honey Wax Cordovants Amber Ambergreece Elephants-teeth Estriches-feathers Saffron Coral Civet Musk Incense Coffee Capers Olives Ivory Silk Cotton Flax c. of which they make Velvets Silks Damasks c. a thousand several Manufactures which are found there ought to make us account Africa very considerable but its extent which is little less than Asia twice as great as Europe It s position is in the Southern part of our Continent the South is esteemed after the East before either North or West It was the portion of Cham second Son to Noah which may make us judge it the second in greatness and goodness Its first Monarchies have been known before those of Europe some will say before those of Asia Arts Sciences Letters and Laws have been in great reputation here before they passed into Greece or the rest of Europe AMERICA as it is divided into SEPTENTRIONAL which may be divided into CANADIANE where there shall be The ARCTICK LANDS as Island Bellested Groenland Beareford North Wales Sea hor c-p inâ— South Wales Hudsons Bay CANADA or NEW FRANCE whose chief parts and people are those of Estoriland Hope advanced Saguanay Quebec Canada Mont Real Acadie Martengo New England Boston Mary Land Marys town Virginia James town Carolina Charles town The Hurons St. Peter Isle of Bermuda's Southampton Florida St. Hellens MEXICANE with it Audiences Provinces c. of MEXICO with its Provinces and chief places of Mexico Mexico Panuco Panuco Mechoachan Mechoacan Thascala Thascala Guaxaca Antequera Tabasco No. â—en de la victoria Jucatan Merida GUADALAJARA with its Provinces of Gudalajara Guadalajara Xalisco Compostella Chiâ—â—etlan St. Sebastian Culiacan St. Michael Cinaloa St. John Los Zacatecas Zacatecas New Biscay St. John Quivira St. Fee Anian Anian Cibola Cibola California Port de Montere GUATEMALA with its Provinces c. of Guatemala St. Jago de guatemala Vera Pax Vera Pax. Soconusco Gueyet lan Chiapa Cui dad Real Honduras Valladolid Nicaragua Leon. Costarica Cartago Veragua la Conception St. DOMINGO with its Isles the chief of which are Cuba St. Jago Jamaica Sevilla Hispaniola St. Domingo Soana St. Germaine MERIDIONAL which may be divided into PERUVIANE where three shall be TERRA FIRMA with its Provinces c. of Panama Panama Carthagena Carthagena St. Martha St. Martha Rio de la Hacha Rio de la Hacha Venezula Venezula New Andalousia Comana Paria Macureguaâ—a Caribes Taupuramuneâ— Guiana Macurewaray Popayan St. Fee de Antiochia Granada St. Fee de Bogata PERU with its Audiences of Peru Quito De los Quixos Baesa Pasamores Loyola Lima Lima. De la Plata de la Plata Chili Copiopo Magellanick Land St. Phillip BRAZILIENE where there shall be BRAZILE with its Capitaines or Governments of St. Vincent Sanctos Rio Janieto Schastian Spiritu Sancto Spiritu Sancto Porto Seguro Porto Seguto los Isleos Los Isleos Baya de los Sanctos St. Salvador Seregippe Seregippe del Rey. Fernambuco Olinda Tamaraca Tamaraca Parayba Parayba Rio Granda De los tres Reys Siara Siara Maranhan Junipara Para Para. PARAGUAY or RIO de la PLATA with its Provinces c. of Paraguay Paraguay Chaco Chaco De la Plata Aslumption Tucoman St. Jago del Estera Urvaig la Conception Parana St. Ignatious Guayr Ouidad Real A New Mapp of AMERICA SEPTENTRIONALE Designed by MouÌ„sieur Sanson Geographer to the French King and Rendred into English and Illustrated
of Ships in like manner are they found in the Gulph or Bay of St. Laurence Besides the Cod-fish here are other sorts of Fish in great plenty as Thornback Ling Salmons Oysters c. The greatest of these Isles and which commonly takes the name of New-found-land is 4 or 5 Leagues circuit It is scituate betwixt the degrees of 46 and 53 of Northern Latitude and is severed from the Continent of America by an Arm of the Sea and is distant from England about 600 Leagues A Country ill-inhabited towards the East and South the Inhabitants being retired farther within Land but the English have of late settled some Colonies to maintain their Fishing-Trade Its Inhabitants The Natives are of a reasonable good Stature and well proportioned but full-ey'd broad-faced beardless and of an Oker complexion not over ingenious their Houses are very mean and their Apparel and Furniture worse The Country being for the generality reputed fertil if well cultivated and would yield good Grains is enriched by Nature with plenty of Fish Fowl and wild Beasts and is blest with a wholsom Air though the rigour of the Winter season and the excess of Heats in Summer do something detract from its due praise East of New-found-land is a great Bank a thing as remarkable as any in all Canada This Bank is much different from those which are covered with Water when the Sea is high uncovered and dry on an Ebb Saylors must shun such Banks like death This which we now speak of is like a Country overflown always covered with the Sea and having at least 20 30 or 40 Fathom water for the depth is unequal Off from this Bank on all sides the Sea is no less than 200 Fathom deep and yet this Bank is 200 Leagues long 20 25 and sometimes 50 broad It is on this Bank that the New-found-landers that is those Ships that go to fish for Cods of New-found-land do for the most part stop and make their freight About this great Bank and more towards the Main Land than the Ocean there are some others much less but of the same nature It is almost incredible how many Nations and of each how many Sail of Ships go yearly to fish for these Cods with the prodigious quantity they take a Man being able to take 100 of them in the space of an hour The manner of Fishing They fish with Hooks which are no sooner thrown into the Sea but the greedy Fish snapping the Bait is taken by the Hook and drawn on Ship-board they lay him presently on a Plank one cuts off his head another guts it and takes out its biggest bones another salts and barrels it c. Which being thus ordered is hence transported by the English and other European Nations into all parts of Europe as also into the other three parts of the World They Fish only in the day time the Cod as they say not biting in the night nor doth this Fishing last all Seasons but begins a little before Summer and ends with September In Winter the Fish retires to the bottom of the deep Sea where Storms and Tempests have no power Another kind of Fishing Near New-found-land there is another kind of fishing for the same Fish which they call dried Fish as the other green Fish The Ships retire into some Port and every Morning send forth their Shallops one two or three Leagues into the Sea which fail not to have their load by Noon or a little after They bring them to Land lay them on Tables or Planks and order it as the other but after the Fish hath been some days in salt they take it forth exposing it to the Air and Wind lay it again in heaps and return it from time to time to the open Air till it be dry That this Fish may be good it must be dried in a good and temperate Air Mists moisten it and make it rot the Sun hardens it and makes it yellow At the same time they fish for Cods green or dry the Fishers have the pleasure of taking Fowl without going forth of their Vessels They take them with a Line as they do fish baiting the Hook with the Cods Liver these Fowl being so greedy that they come by flocks and fight who shall get the Bait first which soon proves its death and one taken the Hook is no sooner thrown out again but another is catch'd in the like nature But enough of these and of Cod-fishing In the year 1623 Sir George Calvert Knight the Principal Secretary of State and afterwards Lord Baltimore obtained a Patent of part of New-found-land which was erected into the Province of Avalon where he settled a Plantation and erected a stately House and Fort at Ferry-land where he dwelt some time And after his death it fell to his Son the Right Honourable Caecilius late Lord Baltimore also Proprietor of Mary-land CANADA taken particularly is on the Right hand and towards the lower part of the great River The River Canada and its name is communicated both to the River and Neighbouring Country This River is the largest of America Septentrionalis and one of the fairest in the World It is about 200 Fathom deep and at its Mouth 30 Leagues broad It s course according to the report of those of the Country is already known for 4 or 500 Leagues and there is some likelyhood that we may in the end discover that the Lake which seems to be its head-Spring disburthens it self into the Sea by two or three different courses one towards us which is that of Canada another towards the West and above California the third towards the North and into the Christian Sea and that the Mouth of this may shew us the way we have so long sought to go to the East-Indies by the West People with whom the French Trade Their Colonies The People with whom the French trade here are the Canadans the Hurons the Algonquins the Attiquameques Nipisiriniens Montagnets those of Saguenay Acadia c. And to this purpose they have divers Colonies on the great River at Tadousac at Quebeck at Three-Rivers at Sillery at Richelieu at Montreal and without the Bay of Chaleur at Miscou at Port-Royal c. This Trade is only managed by Exchange they give the Skins of Bevers Otters Martles Sea-Wolfes c. for Bread Pease Beans Plumbs Kettles Cauldrons Hatchets Arrow-heads Pinchers Coverlids c. But to instruct them in Christianity many Ecclesiasticks of Religious Orders have had divers disbursements and residences likewise an Hospital and Seminary of Vrsilines The Jesuits have the chief care of these Houses North of Canada is ESTOTTILAND Estottiland or TERRADE LABRADOR near Hudsons Streight it is called sometimes the Land of Cortereal and sometimes new Britany however I esteem it a part of new France the Country is Mountainous Woody full of wild Beasts well furnished with Rivers rich in Metals of a fertil Soil in most places and would produce
ill peopled they fish for Pearls in Mer Vermejo and on the East of the Coasts of California and likewise along and on the Coasts of New Granada or New Mexico Mark de Niza a Franciscan his Relations of this place Mark de Niza a Franciscan made a Voyage into these parts in 1529 and at his return recounted Marvels of what he had seen and understood of People that wore about their Heads pieces of Mother of Pearl of divers Provinces rich in Gold of Cities and Houses well built whose Gates were adorned with Turquoises and other Stones That the chief City of Cibola was greater than Mexico That the Kingdoms of Marata Acu and Tonteac were likewise very rich and powerful Also the description of these parts by Vasque de Cornada The Relation of this Fryar caused Mendoza Vice-Roy of Mexico to send Vasque de Cornada Governour of New Gallicia to search out the truth Who far from finding the Riches he hoped for found only people naked very poor rude and barbarous some Cities he found indifferently well built but sadly furnished assuring us that the Kingdoms of which the Fryar had made so much account of were almost all Imaginary Tonteac being only a Lake about which there were some few Habitations Marata a thing invisible and Acu a beggerly Town in esteem amongst them only gathered some Cotton Possibly the Fryar said more than he had seen that he might incite the Spaniards to send some Colonies hither and have the Means to convert those People And Cornada less because he found not that present profit which he did in his Government however it be this contrariety with those we have observed touching the City of Granada and the Provinces of Quivira and Anian may make us see how dangerous it is to trust those that come from parts so remote and unknown whatever specious or fair Habit they wear or whatever good Tongue they have or whatever protestations they make of Truth The Audience of GUATEMALA THE Audience of GVATEMALA is between the Seas Del Nort and Sud and between divers Isthmus's and Tongues of Land which are found in the most Southernly part of America Septentrionalis Its Provinces are Guatemala Its Provinces Soconusco Chiapa Vera-Pax Honduras Nicaragua Costarica and Veragua The Province of Guatemala with its Cities described GVATEMALA and SOCONVSCO are on the Mer del Sud Chiapa within Land Vera-Pax and Honduras on the Mer del Nort Castaria Nicaragua and Veragua on both Seas Guatemala hath 150 Leagues along the Coast and advanceth within Land 30 or 40 Leagues Here were built the Cities of St. Jago of Guatemala St. Salvador or Curcatlan La Trinidad or Conzonate St. Michael and Xeres de la Frontera or Chuluteca they are all upon or little distant from the Sea Guatemala is more advanced within Land and yet the principal being the Seat of the Bishop and Court of Audience In 1541 this City was almost overwhelmed by a deluge of boyling Water which descending from that Vulcan which is above and near the City threw down and tumbled over all that it met with as Stones Trees and Buildings where it stifled many People and among the rest the Widow of him who had conquered and so ill treated that Province The City was rebuilt farther to the East and may have near 100 Houses about 1000 Inhabitants and its Country about 25000 Indians Tributaries A certain private Person had once a strange phancy came in his head A strange phancy of a private Person in these parts and the event thereof that there was a very rich Mine of Gold in this Vulcan of Guatemala and that he needed but to find some way to put down a Cauldron and draw out what he could wish for as one doth Water out of a Well he undertook the enterprize and caused to be made great Chains of Iron and a great Cauldron so strong that he believed the fire could not damage it he caused a way to be made to carry to the top of the Mountain his Chains Caularon and Machins which were to serve to let down and draw up his Caulâ—ron full of Gold which he believed to coyn at the bottom of the Mountain but he found the Fire so violent that in less than a moment of time he had neither Chains nor Cauldron Which so perplexed him with grief and shame to see his own folly having not only spent all his own Estate but the best part of his Friends so that he would have precipitated himself into the Mountain had he not been hindred but in a short time he died for anger and grief The sertility of this Province withits Commodities and Trade The Country is colder than the scituation may bear and subject to Earthquakes hath excellent Balms liquid Amber Bezoar Salt Grains is full of rich Pastures which are well stooked with Cattle plenty of Cotton Wool excellent Sulphur store of Medâ—â—inal Drugs and abundance of Fruits among others Caâ—ao in such great plenty that it yearly lades many Vessels which are transported to other places The Country is more inclining to Mountains than Plains but well watered with Rivers The People are pusillanimous and fearful Its Inhabitants the Men are expert at the Bow and the Women at the Distaff they are more civil and embrace Christianity more than their neighbouring Countries do and are willing to receive Advice from the Spaniards who are their Masters The Province of Soconusco described SOCONVSCO hath only the little City of Guevetlan on the Coast and nothing of particular or worthy to be noted in it only it hath some Grains feeds some Cattle its Rivers have Fish and its People more barbarous and rude The Province of Chiapa described CHIAPA is not over fertil in Grains nor Fruits but the Country well cloathed with lofty Trees and some of which yield Rozin others precious Gums and others bear Leaves that when they are dried into powder make a Sovereign Plaister for Sores The Country is full of Snakes and other venemous Creatures Places of most note in this Province are 1. Crudad-Real built by the Spaniards scituate in a round Plain at the Foot of a Hill It s chief places and begirt with Mountains resembling an Amphitheater now the residence of a Bishop and governed by City-Magistrates by them called Alcaides 2. Chiapa seated in the fruitfullest Valley of the whole Country 3. St. Bartholomews remarkable for having near it a great Pit or opening of the Earth into which if any one casts a Stone though never so small it makes a noise so great and terrible as a clap of Thunder 4. Casapualca a small Town but famous also for a Well it hath whose Waters are observed to rise and fall according to the flowing and ebbing of the Sea Among the Bishops of Chiapa one was Bartholomew de las Casas of the Order of St. Dominique Some memorable actions of Bartholomew de las Casas Bishop
Port Royal it contains about twenty houses only serving for the conveniency of passage from Port Royal to St. Jago It s other places are Port Morant in the Eastern point Port Morant a very capacious and secure Harbour and hereabout is a Potent Colony of the English seated Old Harbour a good Bay for Ships to ride in Old Harbour Port Negril Port Negril in the extream Western point very commodious and secure to windward in which Men of War do often ply when they look for the Spanish Ships not far from which place was seated the old Town of Melilla founded by Columbus Port Antonio seated on the North Port Antonio a very safe Land lock't Harbour at the mouth of which lyeth a small Isle wholly taken up by the said Earl of Carlisle with divers other good Bays and Harbours along the Coast It s other chief places are Sevilla seated in the North part of the Isle Sevilla once beautified with a Collegiate Church whose Chief bore the title of Abbot amongst whom was Peter Martyr who described the History of the West Indies by Decades Mellilla And Mellilla seated on the North East where Columbus mended his Ships at his return from Veragua This Island was of considerable importance to the Spaniards by reason that all his Plate-Fleet which comes from Carthagina steer directly for St. Domingo in Hispaniola and from thence must pass by one of the ends of this Isle to recover Havana which is the common Rendezvous of this whole Armado before it returns home through the Gulph of Florida nor is there any other way whereby to miss this Island because he cannot in any reasonable time turn it up to the windward of Hispaniola which though with great difficulty it might be performed yet by this means he would lose the security of his said united Fleet which meet at Havana from all the parts of the Bay of Mexico Nombre de Dios and elsewhere accompanying each other home The Isle Boriquem with its chief places described BORIQVEM is little less either in Circuit or Fruitfulness than Jamaica St. Juan del Puerto Rico is the Residence of a Bishop and a Governor It hath an excellent Port which sometimes communicates its name to the Island El Arricibo and Guadianilla or St. Germain are the other Cities all the Isle hath few Ports it is traversed by a Chain of Mountains which cut it from West to East here is sound a white Gum which they use instead of Pitch to caulk their Ships and instead of Tallow to make Candles and for want of other Medicaments for Wounds and Sores besides its Gold Sugars and Gayac it hath many Salt-Marches These four Isles are the greatest and chiefest of the Antilles the rest are numerous and ought to be considered under the names of the Lucays and Caribes The Lucays are North of Cuba and Hispaniola of which Lucayon is the chief the greatest and the most Northernly of all Bahama gives its name to the Channel which is between the Isles and Florida a Channel so rapid that in despite of the Winds it carries Ships from South to North or rather from South-West to North-East Guanahani is the first Land which Columbus discovered near America and named in St. Salvador because he had been in danger to have been cast into the Sea by his own men in the fear they had that they should find no Land The CARIBE ISLES THE CARIBES or CANIBALS ISLANDS are so called from its Native Inhabitants who were Canibals or Men eaters and these are a great Body of Isles forming a Demy-Circle towards America Meridionalis the chief of which are set down in the Geographical Table and which I shall take notice of and first with Barbados BARBADOS the most considerable Colony the English are Masters of amongst all the Caribe Isles Barbados It s scituation is in the North Latitude of 13 degrees 20 minutes and although but of a small Circuit not exceeding eight Leagues in length and 5 in breadth where broadest yet it is a Potent Colony and able on occasion to Arm about 10000 Fighting men It s strength which with the natural strength of the Isle is able to give resistance to the powerfullest Foe It is exceeding fertil bearing Crops all the year long Fertility and the trees always cloathed in their Summer livery but the two seasons for Planting is in May and November but the Sugar Canes are Planted all the year round And here are found to grow in great plenty excellent Fruits as Oranges both sweet and sower Fruits Pomgranates Citrons Lemmons Limes Macows Grapes Juniper Apples Momins Acosous Papayers Monbains Icacos Raysins Cherries Cocos Indian Figgs Plantins Bonauves Guavers Castard Apples prickle Pears and Apples Millons both land and water and Pine Apples the rarest Fruit in the Indies They have great plenty of Fish and Fowl Fish and Cattle common with Jamaica and other places in the Indies and have also a competent stock of English Cattle and Horses but something dear by reason they imploy their Grounds better than to breed upon and most roots herbs and seeds and flowers common with us in England are found to thrive and grow very well The Commodities that this Isle produceth are Sugars Indico Cotton Wool Commodities Ginger Fustick and Logwood but especially Sugar Indico Cotton and Ginger lading yearly therewith 200 sail of Ships both great and small to the great enrichment of the Inhabitants and profit of England This Isle lying so near the Equinoctial Line cannot but be hot yet not so but that travel and labour is sufferable and that occasioned by the cool breezes of wind which riseth with the Sun and bloweth fresher as the Sun mounteth up And the Air is found very moist so that all Iron-tools are much subject to rust This Isle is not over plentifully watered with Rivers or fresh Springs there being but one that may appropriate that name or rather a Lake which runneth not far into the Land notwithstanding which defect the Inhabitants have no want of water for the Land lying low and even there are several Ponds and most houses have Wells or Cisterns which holds the rain water And here is a River called Tuigh-River remarkable for that on the top of the water is gathered an Oyl which is made use of to burn in Lamps Its Trees Amongst the Trees here growing which for the most part are appropriate to the rest of the Caribe Isles those of most note are the Cedar Redwood Mastick Locust the Iron wood tree also the Cassia Fistula Coloquintida Tamarind Cassavie of which is made their Bread the Poyson tree and the Physick Nut also the Calibash the Shell of whose Fruit serveth like Goards to carry liquid things in the Mangrass tree the Roucou of whose Bark is made Ropes as also Flax which being spun is imployed to several uses the Lignum Vitae and the Palmeto Here are several
produce the same Commodities as the rest of the Caribe Isles It is a well Governed Colony of the English and its Inhabitants which are esteemed about 3 or 4000 live a good quiet and contented life and free from want of Food or Rayment for Divine Worship here are three Churches and for its security hath a Fort and a publick Store-house This Isle as the rest of the Caribe's is troubled with Muscheto's Chigos Murigoins and other stinging Flies which are found troublesom to the Inhabitants ANTEGO an Isle about 6 or 7 Leagues in length Antego and as much in breadth in many places it is seated in the Latitude of 16 deg 11 minutes it hath some few Springs of fresh water but hath many Cisterns and Ponds for the preserving of Rain water It is encompassed with Rocks which makes its access difficult and dangerous Here are plenty of wild Fowl and Fish nor is there any want of tame Cattle It is in the Possession of the English but thinly Inhabited not exceeding 8 or 900. St. VINCENT seated in the Latitude of 16 deg about 20 miles in length St. Vincent and 15 in breadth of a fertil soil yielding abundance of Sugar Canes which grow naturally without planting It affords many safe Roads and convenient Bays for Shipping is well watered but the English who are Masters of it have made as yet no great settlement DOMINICA Dominica seated in the Latitude of 15 â—1 deg about 12 Leagues in length and 8 in breadth It is very Mountainous but hath fertil Valleys affording good Tobacco which is the chief Commodity It is a Colony of the English but not considerable MONTSERAT Montserat In the Latitude of 17 deg a small Isle of about 10 miles in length and less in breadth very Mountainous but interlaced with fertil Valleys It is much Inhabited by the Irish who have a Church ANGVILLA Anguilla in the Latitude of 18 deg 21 min. about 10 Leagues in length and 3 in breadth It is a poor beggarly Isle Possessed by about 2 or 300 English but said not worth the keeping BARBADA Barbada in the Lat. 17 ½ degree an Isle of no great extent not exceeding 15 miles in length of a fertil soil yet of no account to the English who are Possessors thereof Sancta Crux SANCTACRVX Inhabited by the French the Isle is woody and mountainous and not well provided with fresh waters and of no considerable note GVADALOVPE Guadaloupe about three Leagues in length possessed by the French of good Anchorage in most parts of the adjoyning Sea and of some note for its fresh water which it furnisheth Ships with in their necessity to finish their Voyages GRENADO Grenado but a small Isle being not above six miles in length in form of a Cressent the two horns being not above a mile asunder it is possessed by the French said to be of a fertil soil and well clothed with Woods and hath a commodious Haven And now I shall be bold to say that Hispaniola Cuba and the Neighbouring Isles answer to the Hesperides of the Antients All agree that the Hesperides were 40 daies sail from the Gorgades and the Gorgades only two from the Coast of Africa The Isles of Cape Verde answer to the Gorgades as we have made appear in Africa From these Isles to those of Hispaniola and Cuba is at present 25 or 30 daies sail which may well be 40 of the Antients and moreover there is no Isles in the Atlantick Ocean beyond these And when the Antients place these Hesperides in one Gulph alone as Capella doth or in more as Solinus doth they seem to mean the Gulph of Mexico which contains many other lesser And if Pliny seems to make account but of two Hesperides and others of many more Pliny understands Hispaniola and Cuba alone in regard of which the rest are little considerable Solinus and Capella intend in general the body of these Islands But let us proceed to America Meridionalis AMERICA MERIDIONALIS The degrees of Latitude and Longitude of America Merionalis AMERICA MERIDIONALIS is the most Southern part or Peninsula of America which extends it self from about the 12 degree on this side of the Aequator unto the 54 beyond it which are 66 degrees of Latitude and from the 291 or 92 where is Porto Viejo unto about the 350 where there is Cape St. Augustin which are 57 or 58 degrees of Longitude It reaches then from South to North 1650 Leagues from West to East little less than 400. Its bounds on the North and East are the Mer del Nort towards the South the Magellanick Sea Its bounds And on the West the Mer del Sud or Pacifick Sea It s form approaches near a Triangle whose sides are almost equal from Porto Viejo to Cape St. Augustin are 1400 Leagues from Cape St. Augustin to Cape Freeward in the middle of the streight of Magellan are 1500 Leagues and from that Cape to Porto Belo 1600. It s scituation is for the most part under the Torrid Zone part under the Antartick temperate Zone of that which is under the Torrid Zone the greatest part is beyond the Aequator the less on this side so that the greatest part of these people have their seasons contrary to ours The Coasts of this Country are all known more or less the Inlands very little America Meridionalis divided into parts AMERICA MERIDIONALIS may be divided into PERUVIANA and BRASILIANA subdividing Peruviana into Terra Firma and Peru and Brasiliana into Brasile and Paraguay the first division is taken by a line which from the mouth of the Amazona goes to seek the utmost part of Chili towards the South and this line divides America Meridionalis into two equal parts the one belonging almost wholly to the Castilians alone and the other for the most part to the Portugals These have their Vice-Roy in St. Salvador a capital City in the Bay of All-Saints and almost in the middle of the Coast of Brazile the other in Lima or Los Reyes that is the Kings at present a capital City and in the middle of the Coast of Peru. A New Mapp of AMERICA MERIDIONALE Designed by Monsieur Sanson Geographer to the French King and Rendred Into English and Illustrated by Richard Blome by his Maiestis Especiall Command London Printed for Ric Blome 〈◊〉 the R t Honâ—â—â— Iames Duâ—â— of Monmouth Auckland Earle of Doncaster Dalkeith Baron of Ashdale Tindale Whichester c. This Mapp is most humbly Dedicated by Ric Blome We may yet divide the Terra Firma into Terra Firma and Guiana Peru into Peru and Chili Brazil into the Coast of Brazil and Main Land of Brazil Paraguay into Paraguay and the Magellanick Lands Of this America Meridionalis Brazil possesses all that is towards the East Terra Firma and Guiana that which is towards the North Paraguay and the Magellanick Lands that which advanceth
great Demi-circle hath no less than 1200 Leagues The Mer del Nort washes it on the North South-East and East Paraguay and Peru bounds the rest towards the South and West Great part of Brazile unknown The high Country is wholly unknown and likewise part of the Coast It hath every where abundance of Barbarous people who make war with and eat one another the divers relations hitherto given us make mention of more than 100 of these peoples The parts best known yet these are few in regard of those yet unknown The most famous and best known are the Margajas Topinambous Ovetacas Paraibas Petiguares Tapouyes Cariges Morpions Tobajares c. The Portugals have only seized on what they found most commodious on the Coast and have from time to time placed divers Governments which they call Capitanies The most antient is that of Tamaraca then of Fernambuco The Governments or Capitanies which the Portugals hold now the most famous of all is that of the Bay of all Saints they count Fourteen in all which following the Coast from the River of Amazones towards Paraguay are Para Maranhan Giara Rio Grande Parayba Tamaraca Pernambuco Seregippe Baya de Todos los santos los Isleos Porto seguro Spiritu sancto Rio Janiero and St. Vincent Chief places in the Capitany of St. Vincent described Each Capitany hath depending on it one or two more Colonies of Portugals In the Capitany of SAINT VINCENT the principal is Santos seated at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea distant from the Main about three Leagues accommodated with a very good Port capable to receive Vessels of 400 Tuns This Town is Inhabited with about two hundred Families of Portugals who have beautified it with a fair Church and two Convents of Friers and since the assault that Sir Thomas Cavendish made upon it in 1591 they have environed it with a wall and well Fortified it with strong Bastions The next is Saint Vincent which hath not above one hundred houses of Portugals but its Port little commodious The third and fourth Cities are Itanchin and Saint Paul beyond the Mountains and Forrest Pernabiacaba which are very difficult to cross the way being cut through the trees the City is seated on the Top of a little hill and neighboured by some Mines of Gold found in the Mountains a Town of about one hundred houses and two hundred Families beautified with a Church two Convents and a Colledge of Jesuits This Capitany wants Salt Wine and Oyl but in recompence they have all sorts of Fruits and many Mines of Silver about St. Paul The Capitany of Rio Janiero with its chief places described and its Commodities The Capitany of RIO JANIERO takes its name from its Rivers so called because it was entred into in the month of January The Portugals have built the City St. Sebastian at the mouth of the Gulph which the River makes falling into the Sea and Fortified it with strong Bulwarks And more to the West they have likewise built the City of Angra de los Reyes and made it a strong Colony This Capitany hath much Brazile-wood Cottons and all Provisions but no Sugar These two Capitanies Rio Janiero and St. Vincent are on this side and beyond or rather under the Tropick of Capricorn The Capitany del Spiritu Sancto with its Cities The Capitany DEL SPIRITV SANCTO hath one of the best soils of all Brazile well stored with Cotton-wool but deficient in Sugars It s River is called Parayba from a name common to three Rivers in Brazile one is beyond St. Vincent the second this and the last waters the Capitany of Parayba that which waters Spiritu Santo is pleasant but rapid The City hath but two hundred and odd Families of Portugals It s principal buildings are a Church dedicated to St. Francis a Colledge of Jesuits and a Monastery of Benedictines Porto Seguro and its Cities PORTO SEGVRO belongs to the Duke of Aveiro and hath three Colonies viz. 1. St. Amaro or St. Omers once of great account for making Sugars where they had five Sugar Engines for the ordering and making it but deserted by the Portugals for fear of the incursions of the Savages 2. Sancta Cruz a Town not very large neither with a commodious Harbour 3. Porto Seguro containing not above two hundred houses but held of some Antiquity It is built on the top of a white cliff which commands the Haven The soil of this Capitany is so fertil in Grains and Fruits It s fertility that it furnisheth its Neighbours It hath likewise Sugar Los Isleos with its chief places LOS ISLEOS belongs to Don Luco Giraldo a Portugal It s chief Town is seated on a small River but neighboured by a great Lake of twelve Leagues circuit from which this River takes its rise and contains not above 150 or 200 Families of Portugals It hath a long time suffered persecution and the Colony almost lost by the Guaymures a race of the most savage and barbarous people of Brazile which being driven out of their own Country fell into this Praefecture which they had utterly ruinated had not as a Jesuite tells us some of the Relicks of St. George been brought hither which seeing the Planters re-took courage and bravely repulsed these Barbarians The River which waters this City turns eight or ten Mills or Sugar-Engines Baya de los Santos described The Capitany del BAYA DE LOS SANTOS took its name from the Bay or Gulph wherein is seated St. Salvador its principal City This Bay having its mouth to the Sea eight or ten Leagues wide and its depth twelve fifteen or twenty fathom every where encloses many Isles of which the most outward to the Sea is Taperico This Bay makes likewise divers openings fifteen or twenty Leagues within Land from whence it receives the Rivers of Pitange Ceresippe Cachera and others each with their little Gulph This Bay is memorable for the rash attempt of Peter Heyns a Dutchman A memorable Exploit of Peter Heyns a Dutchman Admiral of a Fleet of the Vnited Provinces for the West India-Company who in 1627 entred this Bay where there were 26 sail of Spanish Ships four of which were men of War all lying under the Protection of the Castles and Forts who notwithstanding the shots that he received from the Forts Castles and Ships fell amongst them with such boldness that he sunk their Vice-Admiral and took all or most of the rest with a condition only of their lives The City of St. Salvador The City of St. Salvador is fair and beautified with many stately Edifices is in the most Northern part of the Gulph seated on a little Hill and towards the Sea it regards its Ports made in a Demi-circle whose two points or extremities have each their Castle St. Antonio towards the Sea and Tapesipe towards the Bay This City all environed with a wall is great and populous and dignified with
Salt-pits near the Point de Salinas The principal Fortress that the Portugals hold here is De los tres Reyes or the three Kings on the right hand of the River The Coast of Brazile from Cape de Frio until on this side of that of St. Augustine and so to the middle of the head of Potengi stretches from South to North and continually regards the East The rest of this Capitany and that of Siara Maranhan and Para extend from East to West regarding the North and are the nearest to the Equinoctial Line The Coast of these four last Capitanies hath no less extent on the Sea than that of all the others together but are worth much less The Capitany of Siara with its Commodities The Capitany of SIARA is among many Barbarous People and therefore not much frequented yet is of some trade by reason of the Cotton Chrystal Precious Stones and many sorts of Wood which are here found They have likewise many Canes of Sugar which are of no use there being no Sugar Engines in the Country The Capitany of Maranhan with its chief places The Capitany of MARANHAN is an Isle which with some others is found in a Gulph about twenty five Leagues long and broad This Isle hath forty five Leagues Circuit hath twenty seven Villages of which Junaparan is the chief and in each Village four five or 600 men so that the French made account of 10000 men in this Island The fertility of the Country with its Commodities The Air serene temperate and healthful the Waters excellent and which scarce ever corrupt on the Sea The Land as fruitful as any in America yielding Brazile-wood Saffron Cotton Red-dye Lake or Rose colour Balm Tobacco Pepper and sometimes Ambergrease is gathered on its Coast The Land is found proper for Sugar and if it were tilled would produce Grains some say it hath Mines of Jasper and white and red Chrystal which for hardness surpasses the Diamonds of Alenzon It is well watered with fresh Rivers and pleasant Streams well cloathed with Woods in which are store of Fowl The people are strong of body Its Inhabitants and Apparel live in good health commonly dying with age the women being fruitful till eighty years of age both Sexes go naked until they are married and then their apparel is only from the Wast to the Knees which is Manufactures of Cotton or Feather-works in which they are very ingenious The Country or the Isle of the Tapouies The Tapouy Tapere that is the Country of the Tapouies is another Isle East of Maraguon at Full-sea it is an Isle on the Ebb only Sands separate it from the Continent The soll is yet better than that of Maranhan it hath but fifteen Villages the chief bearing the name of the Country they are greater and better peopled than those of Maranhan The Country and City of Comma West of Tapouy Tapere and on the firm Land Comma a City River and Country of the same name is of no small value it s fifteen or sixteen Villages are as well peopled as those of Tapouy Tapere Between Comma and Cayetta which approaches Para are divers people descending from the Toupinambous as those of Maranhan and Comma descend from the Tapouyes The French were likewise divers times possessed of the Isle of Maranhan Ribaut was here in 1594. Ravardiere in 1612. This last chose a most commodious place in the Island and built the Fort of St. Lewis the Portugals drove them out in 1614 and built new Forts St. Jago and Neustra Sennora Among the Rivers that full into the Gulph of Maranhan Miari is the greatest then Taboucourou The Capitany of Para with its Commodities The Capitany of PARA hath a square Fort seated on a Rock raised four or five fadom from the neighbouring ground and well walled except towards the River it hath four or five hundred Portugals who gather in the Country Tobacco Cotton and Sugar This Capitany holds beyond the Mouth of the Amazone Corrupa and Estiero and among the Mouths of that River Cogemine Of a temperate Air. Brazile hath an Air sweet and temperate though under the Torrid Zone the daies and nights being almost equal the freshness of the Sea Rivers and ordinary Dews contributing much to its wholsomness They lie very subject to Storms and Thunders and if it lighten in the evening it is without Thunder if it Thunder without Flashes That which likewise proves the goodness of the Air is that their Serpents Snakes Toads c. are not venemous Serpents Toads c. not venemous here but often serve for food to the Inhabitants yet the soil is more proper for the production of Fruits Pastures and Pulse than the Grains or Vines of Europe They carry them Wine and Flowr Corn being subject to spoil on the Sea The Natives use Rice and Manjoche to make their Bread It s fertility and Commodities They have likewise quantity of Pulse Trees which bear excellent Fruits Herbs Four-footed Beasts Birds and Fish in great abundance many of which are not known to us many sorts of Palm-trees which yield them great Commodities they have some Mines of Gold but more of Silver but the riches of Brazile is drawn from the Sugars and the Brazile-wood which comes from their Araboutan a mighty Tree which bears no Fruit. They have abundance of Parroquetos among their Monkeys they have black ones and of divers colours the most part very pleasant The skin of the Tapiroussou curried becomes so hard that it makes Bucklers not to be pierced by the strongest shot Arrow The Inhabitants of Brazile and what they are addicted unto their Customs c. Their Habit. The Brazilians are of a mean stature gross headed large shouldred of a reddish colour their skins tawny they live commonly to a hundred and fifty years and free from diseases caring for nothing but War and Vengeance They wander most part of their time in Hunting Fishing and Feasting in which Manjoche furnishes them with Bread Cumin-seed with Drink and and the Flesh of Beasts or of their Enemies cut in gobbets and some Fish are their most excellent meats The men are very cruel forgetful of courtesies received and mindful of injuries The Women are very lascivious they are delivered with little or no pain and immediately go about their affairs and not observing the custom of a Months lying in as is used among us They let their hair grow long which ordinarily hangeth over their shoulders both Sexes go naked especially till Married They are esteemed excellent Swimmers and divers being able to stay an hour together under water They paint themselves with divers colours all over the body on which they leave no hair not so much as on their Eye-lids but only a Crown about their Head and fasten a Bone which is well polished and some little Stone which is esteemed amongst them in their upper Lip and Cheeks Others cut their skin in Figures and
fifteen or sixteen Leagues where with a great declension it strikes against some traverses others divides its waters into many Branches re-assembles them and after having been so long in foam and froth disingaged from these Rocks it repasses but in every hour of the day once only is heard at the bottom of the River a certain Lowing which raiseth up the waters but which endures but for a moment and the River retakes its ordinary course which is Navigable above and below the Cataract The province of urvaig with its chief places described The Province of Vrvaig is on the Sea and between Brazile and the Mouth of the Paraguay it takes its name from the River of Vrvaig that is of Snails by reason of the prodigious quantity here found Its habitations are La Conception there where the Vrvaig falls into the Paraguay St. Nicholas on the River Piration St. Francis Xavier up within Land and likewise on the Vrvaig Ibicuit or the Visitation on the Paraguay and almost directly opposite to Buenos Ayres on the other side But there hath been no relation of these Parts since those of 1626 and 1627 which were Printed in 1636 in Antwerp and in 1637 in France If these people have since inclined themselves to Christianity as those Relations say they had begun to do no doubt but they are by this time all or the greatest part Christians The Magellanick Land and Island The Magellanick-Land bounded SOuth of Chili Tucaman and Rio de la Plata lies a great Region and a great many of Isles which we pass under the name of the MAGELLANICKS They make together the last and most Southern part of America Meridionalis washed on the East by the Mer del Nort on the West by the Mer del Sud or the Pacifique-Sea on the South by the Magellanick-Sea which may in general be extended over all the Coasts of these Magellanick-Lands and Islands The Streight of Magellan first discovered by Magellan the Portugal The streight of Magellan only formerly rendred all these Quarters famous because that the People of Europe and particularly the Castilians seeking a passage other then that of the Cape of Good-Hope to go to the Moluccoes and East-Indies Magellan a Portugal Gentleman but in the name and service of the King of Castile for some discontent he had received in the payment of his wages in Portugal was the first that found this Streight at the extremity of America Meridionalis and who passing from Mer del Nort unto that Del Sud between the 21 of October and the 27 or 28 of November in the year 1520 gave means not only to the Castilians to pretend the discovery of the Molucco's by the West against the Portugals who boasted to have first discovered them by the East but likewise shewed a way to make the whole circuit of the Terrestrial Globe which certainly had never before been done The two openings of our Streight as well towards us and the Mer del Nort as on the other side and towards the Mer del Sud are between the 52 and 53 Degrees of Latitude the middle descending unto the 54. And the two Capes of the first opening are that of the Virgins on the right hand and on the Continent and that of St. Severin or of St. Espritt on the left and in the Magellanick Isles or Terra del Fogo The two Capes which end the other opening are Cape Victory on the right hand and Cape Desired on the left The length breadth of this Streight The length of this Streight is near two hundred Leagues Its breadth only two three six ten Leagues and sometimes more incommodious for the most part being subject to Whirl-Pools The Waves of the Mer del Sud predominate for fifty and odd Leagues the rest is beaten on by those of the Mer del Nort and it is observed that so long as the Mer del Sud predominates the Streight is lockt between very high Mountains and Rocks always covered with Snow and which seem to touch on the other which makes the approach difficult on this side and withal the Sea is exceeding deep The bottom of that which is beaten by the Mer del Nort is easily found and the Fields and Valleys according to the Season are very pleasant both on the one and the other side And moreover here the streight much enlarges it self and hath store of commodious Ports and Roads not fast distant from one another where the waters likewise are good and the Wood which is found in the Mountains above the Coast hath something of Cinamon and being put in the fire renders an agreeable Odour So soon as the discovery of this Streight was known in Spain the Castilians had a design to make themselves Masters of it with an intent to hinder all other Nations from passing In 1523 Dom. Gutieres Carvajal Bishop of Plaisance sent in the name of Charles the fifth four Ships to make it more particularly but this Voyage proved very unfortunate for three of the Ships perished in the Streight and the fourth retired with no small hurt to Lima. In 1526 Garsia de Loyosa was likewise here for the same intent which proved also fatal for the Admiral coming out of the Streight was lost as also some at the Molucco's In 1535 one Simon de Alcazova entred it but the mutiny which was among his people was the cause of his loss and ill success Dom. Gutiers Carvajal Bishop of Plaisance sent other three Vessels in 1539 of which the Admiral was lost one returned back and the third passed on Some others there were which went all of which were Castilians some by the Coast of Spain others by the Coast of Peru but none could ever find a way to seize this Streight whereby to hinder a passage to others Sir Francis Drake in this Streight For in 1575 Sir Francis Drake happily passed this Streight came into the Mer del Sud pillaged and burned along the Coast of Chili and Peru quantity of Spanish Vessels and making a very rich booty he returned into England This course of the English very much allarm'd Peru and was the cause that the Vice-Roy sent Dom. Piedro Sarmiento to take full knowledge and make report in Spain of all the Coasts Harbours Anchorages and particularly of places where Forts might be built and Colonies established in this Streight This report made in Spain Dom. Diego de Valdes was sent with twenty three Vessels and twenty five hundred men But this voyage was likewise unhappy for seven or eight Ships with about seven or eight hundred men were lost almost in sight of Spain also some others of his Ships with about three or four hundred men likewise perished during the Voyage and Valdes returned into Spain with seven or eight of his Ships Sarmento with four remaining was at this Streight built Nombre de Jesus at the beginning of the Streight and left there a hundred and fifty men and
pleasantly seated on a River whose Streams commodiously water its Streets which are large and spacious It is beautified with fair Buildings and its Minster or Cathedral is a stately Structure having as many Doors for entrance as Months in the year as many Windows as Weeks and as many Pillars great and small as Days in the year and its Spire proudly sheweth it self from a great distance near unto which is the Bishops Palace then its Town-Hall seated in a spacious Market-place is a fair Building This City amongst its Immunities sends Burgesses to Parliament is a place well inhabited and frequented enjoyeth a good Trade and its Markets which are on Tuesdays and Saturdays are very considerable for Corn and Provisions and for living Cattle on Tuesdays This City is encompassed with open Fields and Plains where at about 6 miles distance is that wonderful piece of work called Stone-Henge composed of great and unwrought Stones some being 28 foot high and 7 broad and so laid thwart one another that it is wonderful to behold And these Stones are said to be thus raised by the Britains as a Monumental Sepulchre of the Vertue and Manhood of Ambrosius Aurelianus who took upon him the Imperial Purple-Robe of Britain in the declension of the Roman Empire succoured his languishing Country and by the aid of that warlike Arthur repressed the furious rage of the Enemy vanquishing powerful Armies and in the end in the last Battel sought on this Plain lost his life Wilton Wilton well watered with the Willey and another River a Town in former time of such great note that it was the chief in the County and was dignified with an Episcopal See had a Monastery and enjoyed great Immunities but at present it is become a small mean Borough Town electing Parliament men is the place where she Knights of the Shire are chosen where the Sheriff keeps his Monthly County-Courts yet hath but a small Market on Fridays Divizes Devizes seated near Blackmere-Forest a Town of greater note and strength in former times than at present being defended by a powerful Castle yet is it a large Town being well inhabited and traded unto for divers Commodities especially for Mault It hath the election of Parliament men and its Market which is on Thursdays is very considerable for Horses Cattle of all sorts Corn Provisions and divers other Country-commodities Chipnam Chipnam seated on the Avon a Borough Town electing Parliament men and hath a noted Market for Corn and Provisions on Saturdays Marlborough Marlborough seated on the Kenet near Savernake-Forest and Aldburn-Chase and in a Chalky Soil a Town of great note in former times where there was a Parliament held and a Law made for the suppressing of all Tumults called the Statute of Marlborough And here was once a strong Castle belonging to John Sirnamed Sans Terre who was after King of England It is at present a good large and well built Borough Town electing Parliament men is governed by a Major and Burgesses and hath a very considerable Market for Corn Mault Provisions Butter and especially Cheese on Saturdays Not far from this place are divers Stones some of a vast bigness pitched up an end Swindon Swindon seated near a rich Vale and on the Summit of a Hill a Town of no largeness but its Houses are generally well built of Stone and hath a considerable Market for fat Cattle on Mondays Malmesbury Malmesbury pleasantly seated on the Banks of the Avon which almost encircleth it over which it hath 6 Bridges It is a Town of great antiquity where Maidulph an Irish-Scot a man of great Holiness and Learning under a Hill in a solitary Grove built a Cell or little Monastery and lived an Hermetical life and where his Successor Adelma built a fair Monastery It as it present a good Borough Town governed by a Major and Aldermen enjoyeth several Immunities sends Burgesses to Parliament and hath a good Market for Corn and Provisions on Saturdays County of Worcester The County of WORCESTER is of a fertil Soil both for Tillage and Pasturage bearing good Crops of Corn and feeding store of Cattle It is inter laced with aspiring Hills well clothed with Wood as the Malvern Bredon Woodbery Aberleg c. and through its Valleys run those many Rivers which so plentifully water the County as the Severn Avon Salwarp c. This Shire hath such great abundance of Fruits that even the Hedgerows and High-ways are beset therewith whose Fruits are free to all Passengers and here Sider and Perry is had in as great plenty as Beer at London Here are many Salt-Pits or Wiches which afford a most excellent high prized Salt for the Gentries Table which for fineness whiteness and hardness imitateth Loaf-Sugar This County is severed into 5 Hundreds in which are seated 152 Parishes and is traded unto by 11 Market Towns Worcester Worcester no less pleasantly than commodiously seated on the Severn over which it hath a fair Stone-Bridge with a Tower upon it It is a City of great antiquity said to be built by the Romans the better to secure themselves from the Britains who were Masters of all beyond the Severn and was held in good repute in the time of the Danes and Saxons and although it hath received so many shocks of ill fortune by Fire and Sword yet is it a place of good largeness numbring 9 Parish Churches besides St. Michaels and its Cathedral a stately Structure in whose Quire are several graceful Tombs This City enjoyeth ample Immunities electeth Parliament men is dignified with the See of a Bishop is governed by a Major Sheriff 6 Aldermen 24 principal Citizens with 48 less called Common-Council-men 2 Chamberlains a Recorder Town Clerk with sub-Officers is graced with good Buildings and well ordered Streets is well inhabited enjoyeth a good Trade especially for Clothings here made in great quantities and its Markets on Wednesdays Fridays and Saturdays are very considerable especially that on Saturdays for living Cattle Corn Flesh Fish and all Provisions which are here had at easie rates Evesholme Evesholme seated on a Hill arising from the River Avon which almost encompasseth it where it hath a Stone-bridge This Town was of note for its Abby founded by Edwin by the helping-hand of King Kenred Son of Wolpher King of the Mercians It is at present a large and well-built Major-Town esteemed the best in the County next to Worcester containing two or three Parishes sends Burgesses to Parliament is well inhabited and frequented enjoyeth a good Trade principally for Stockings and its Market which is on Mondays is very considerable for Corn Cattle Provisions and Stockings This Town gives name to a Vale near adjoyning which for fertility of Soil may deservedly be called the Granary of these parts Droitwich Droitwich seated on the River Salwarp a pretty good Bailiwick-Town but its Market which is on Fridays is but small This Town is of great note
for its Salt-Pits or Wiches having three Fountains that afford great plenty of Water for the making of Salt which is excellent white and good for which here is drove a good Trade Sturbridge Sturbridge seated on a Flat and on the Stower over which it hath a Bridge it is a good and well-built Town hath the accommodation of a good Free-School with a Library and its Market on Fridays is well furnished with Corn Provisions and Swine Kidderminster Kidderminster feated under a Hill and on the Severn where the Stower loseth it self dividing the Town in twain an ancient Bailiwick-Town beautified with a fair Church hath well-built Houses is well inhabited and much traded unto for its Stuffs called Kidderminster-Stuffs and its Market which is on Thursdays is considerable for Corn Gottle Provisions and several Country-commodities Bewdley Bewdley a Bailiwick-Town which sends Burgesses to Parliament pleasantly seated on the Severn and near the Forest of Wire which in former time was a place of great delight and much resorted unto It is a neat and well-built Town enjoyeth a good Trade for Mault Leather and Caps called Bewdley-Caps here made and hath a Market on Saturdays chiefly considerable for Barly YORK-SHIRE County of York describ'd the largest County in England being above 300 miles in compass and although thus spacious for the generality is indifferent fertil yielding good plenty of Cattle Corn Fowl and Fish for if one part is stony sandy and barren other parts make amends and although there are great store of Heaths and Moors which are barren ground yet are they profitable to the Inhabitants for the feeding of Cattle In this County the Romans had several Stations and here were abundance of Abbeys Monasteries and Religious Houses many of which were of great note eminency and wealth The chief Manufactures of this Shire are Stockings Alum Jett Lime Knives Pins c. but above all Cloth in great plenty It is fevered into three distinct parts and called the North-Riding the East-Riding and the West-Riding which said Ridings or Parts are subdivided into 26 Wapontacks or Hundreds viz. the North into Eleven the East into Six and the West into Nine and in all these Wapontacks are numbred 563 Parish Churches besides abundance of Chapels of Ease by reason of the largeness of the Parishes many of the Chapels being as large as Parishes in other parts of England The North-Riding of Yorkshire may not improperly be divided into Richmondshire Cleaveland a fertil part North-Allerton and Blackmore very Mountainous Craggy and Moorish The chief places in this Riding are York City of York which next to London claimeth the Priority of all others in the Kingdom a place of great antiquity and fame having its rise from the Romans who had it in such great esteem that Severus their Emperour had here his Palace and here ended his days and had those Funeral Rites solemnized on his Corps according to their custom And here Fl. Valerius Constantius surnamed Chlorus bid adue to the World and in his room his Son Constantine was here proclaimed Emperour Nor did this City thus flourish only in the time of the Romans but was of great repute in all succeeding Ages and hath in all the revolutions and changes under the Saxons Danes and Normans preserved its ancient lustre and is at present a fair large and beautiful City adorned with many splendid Buildings both publick and private is very populous much resorted unto and well inhabited by Gentry and wealthy Tradesmen and numbreth about 30 Parish Churches and Chapels besides its Cathedral or Minster a most stately Structure dedicated to St. Peter Amongst its publick Buildings of note these may be taken notice of The Bishops-Palace its Chapter-House a curious piece of Architecture the Princes-House called the Mannor and the Courts of Judicature held for the Neighbouring Marches according to that of Ludlow It is a City and County within it self enjoyeth large Immunities sendeth Burgesses to Parliament is governed by a Lord Major 12 Aldermen clad in Scarlet 2 Sheriffs 12 Common Council 8 Chamberlains a Recorder Town Clerk Sword-Bearer and Common Serjeant with other sub-Officers It is a place of great strength being well fortified and enclosed with a strong Wall on which are many Turrets or Watch-houses and hath for entrance 4 Gates and 5 Posterns It s scituation is no less pleasantly than commodiously seated on the Owse which severeth it in two parts but joyned together by a fair Stone-bridge and to conclude its Markets on Thursdays and Staturdays are very considerable and well served with Flesh Fish Fowl c. as are its Shambles on the Week-days with Provisions Malton or New-Malton seated on the Derwent Malton over which it hath a good Stone-bridge It is composed of two Towns the New and the Old Malton and both containing 3 Parish Churches it is a place well inhabited and accommodated with good Inns hath weekly two Markets on Tuesdays and Saturdays which is one of the best in the County for Horses living Cattle Provisions and most Country-commodities especially Vtensils for Husbandry and as a Borough Town which is but meanly built electeth Parliament men Pickering or the Honour of Pickering a pretty good Town Pickering belonging to the Dutchy of Lancaster hath a famous Old Castle now ruinous in which they keep their Courts for the hearing of Causes under 40 s. in the said Honour which includeth several Villages which as it were encompass it so that the adjacent Country is called Pickering-Lith the Forest of Pickering and the Liberty of Pickering It s Market which is on Mondays is well served with Corn and Provisions Scarborough a place of great strength as well by Nature as Art Scarborough being seated on a steep Rock with such craggy Cliffs that it is almost inaccessible and beareth so into the Sea that it is washed on all parts except on the West where it yieldeth access by a strait passage Cliff or Gullet where it hath a strong Wall On the top of this Rock is a very fair green and large Plain containing about 60 Acres of ground and hath a little Well of Fresh-water springing out of the Rock and for its further defence hath a strong Castle now made use of by his Majesty for a Garrison This Town is not very large but well built and inhabited enjoyeth a good Trade having a commodious Key with several Vessels belonging to it which are employed by them and during the Herring-season for the Fishing Trade they being plentifully taken on this Coast This place is of note for its famous Spaw much resorted unto as well by Foreigners as the English It is a Town Corporate electing Parliament men is governed by two Bailiffs and a Common Council and hath two Markets weekly on Thursdays which is of good account and on Saturdays which is but small Not far from this Town is Robinhoods-Bay so called from Robinhood that noted Robber in the Reign of